Apple iPhone_Bluetooth_Headset_Manual_del_usuario Apple sur FNAC.COM

 

 

TELECHARGER LE PDF :

http://manuals.info.apple.com/es_ES/iPhone_Bluetooth_Headset_Manual_del_usuario.pdf

 

 

Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :

Apple-Manuel_de_l'utilisateur_de_Final_Cut_Server

Apple-iMac_G5_de_lutilisateur

Apple-Cinema_Tools_4.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-Personal-LaserWriter300-User-s-Guide

Apple-QuickTake-100-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh

Apple-User-s-Guide-Macintosh-LC-630-DOS-Compatible

Apple-iPhone_iOS3.1_User_Guide

Apple-iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide

Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_F

Liste-documentation-apple

Apple-Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08

Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br

Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info

Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage

Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F

Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide

Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner

Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur

Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide

Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement

Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f

Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok

Manuale Utente PowerBookG4

Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e

Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch

Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug

Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion

Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier

AppleTV_Setup-Guide

Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f

Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive

Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide

Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software

Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1

PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3

Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération

Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7  Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000

Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010

Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS

Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4

Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation

User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software

User Guide Manuel de l’utilisateur Manual del usuarioEnglish 3 Congratulations on your new iPhone Bluetooth® Headset. Follow the instructions to get started. Pair the Headset with iPhone 1 Connect the included iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable to a USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on the keyboard). 2 Connect iPhone and the headset to the cable. The headset pairs with iPhone automatically. Cable The ? rst time you connect the headset, let it charge for about an hour until the status light on the headset turns from amber to green. 3 Remove iPhone and the headset from the cable. To connect the headset to iPhone, press the button on top of the headset. This allows calls to be routed through the headset. In some cases, you may need to reconnect the headset to iPhone. See page 6.4 English Make or Answer a Call 1 Place the headset in either ear with the microphone pointed towards your mouth. Microphone Placing the included foam pad over the speaker may provide a more comfortable ? t. 2 Make a call on iPhone. Press the button on top of the headset to answer an incoming call. Button Status light If you answer an incoming call by tapping the iPhone touchscreen, audio is routed through iPhone instead. 3 When you ? nish, press the button to end the call.English 5 Adjust the Volume m Use the volume buttons on the side of iPhone. WARNING: For important safety information about avoiding hearing loss, see page 14. What Else You Can Do To Do this Decline incoming call Press button for about one second, until you hear a beep. Switch to incoming or on-hold call and put current call on hold Press button. Switch to incoming or on-hold call and end current call Press button for about one second, until you hear a beep. Check whether headset is turned on Press button. If headset is on, status light blinks green and headset beeps. Turn headset on Press and hold button for about three seconds, until you see the status light blink green or hear four rising tones. Turn headset o? Press and hold button for about four seconds, until you see the status light blink amber or hear four falling tones. 6 English Switch from the Headset to iPhone To stop using the headset and hear calls through iPhone instead, you can either: m Turn the headset o? . You can turn it on again at any time to use it with iPhone. m During a call, tap Audio Source on iPhone and choose iPhone or Speaker (for speakerphone). Reconnect the Headset to iPhone You can tell that calls will be routed through the headset if the Bluetooth icon (?) in the iPhone status bar is blue or white (depending on which application you’re using). If the headset gets disconnected from iPhone, two low beeps sound from the headset. You can tell that the headset is disconnected from iPhone if the Bluetooth icon in the status bar is gray or isn’t present. To route calls through the headset: m Press the button to reinitiate a connection. m If that doesn’t work, make sure the headset is turned on, charged, and in range of iPhone (within about 30 feet). m If that doesn’t work, on iPhone make sure Bluetooth is turned on. From the Home screen, choose Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.English 7 m If that doesn’t work, pair the headset with iPhone again. See page 3. If the headset is paired with other Bluetooth devices, you’ll need to reconnect it to iPhone after turning the headset o? or after using it with one of the other devices. Charge the Headset When the headset doesn’t have much charge left, a long beep sounds every ten seconds. To charge the headset: 1 Connect the included iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable to your computer. Or connect it to the Apple USB Power Adapter that comes with iPhone and connect the adapter to a power outlet. 2 Connect the headset to the cable. A fully depleted headset recharges in about an hour and a half. Status light amber = Charging Status light green = Completely charged 3 Remove the headset from the cable. Press the button to connect the headset to iPhone, so that calls are routed through the headset.8 English To see how much charge is left: m Connect the iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable to your computer or an Apple USB Power Adapter plugged into a power outlet. Then connect iPhone and the headset to the cable. The iPhone screen shows the headset’s battery level. The headset contains an internal, non–user-replaceable battery. Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and will eventually wear out. Battery life and number of charge cycles vary by use and settings. For more information, go to www.apple.com/batteries. For more information about disposal of the headset, see page 57. WARNING: For important safety information about charging the headset, see page 13. Use the Headset with Another Phone or Device You can use the headset with some other Bluetooth devices, such as another phone. And you can pair the headset with iPhone manually, if you don’t have the iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable handy.English 9 You can also pair the headset with some Bluetooth enabled computers and talk to friends using an audioenabled instant messaging application like iChat. To set the headset to be discoverable, so the other device can sense it: 1 Turn the headset o? . 2 Press and hold the headset button for about eight seconds, until you hear the startup tones and then ? ve quick high beeps. The headset remains discoverable for about ? ve minutes. The status light blinks green for as long as the headset is discoverable. To pair the headset with another phone or pair it with iPhone manually: 1 On the phone, turn Bluetooth on and set the phone to search for other Bluetooth devices. On iPhone, you do this by choosing Settings > General > Bluetooth and turning Bluetooth on. 2 Set the headset to be discoverable (see above). 3 On the phone, choose iPhone Bluetooth Headset and enter the PIN code 0000. See the instructions that came with your phone for more information about pairing it with Bluetooth devices.10 English To pair the headset with a Bluetooth enabled Mac using Mac OS X version 10.4.9 or later: 1 Open System Preferences and click Bluetooth. 2 If this is the ? rst Bluetooth device you’ve set up, click the Set Up New Device button. Otherwise, click the Add (+) button below the list of your existing devices. 3 Choose Headset. 4 Set the headset to be discoverable. 5 Follow the onscreen instructions. When prompted for a passkey, enter 0000. To use the headset with iChat: 1 Pair the headset with your Mac. 2 In iChat, choose iChat > Preferences and click Audio/ Video. 3 Choose iPhone Bluetooth Headset from the Microphone and Sound Output pop-up menus. 4 Start an audio or video chat. To pair the headset with another computer (such as a Windows PC) or Bluetooth device: Follow the instructions that came with the computer or device. When prompted for a passkey or PIN, enter 0000.English 11 Tips and Troubleshooting If the headset isn’t responding or working correctly, try these steps in order until it starts working. m Make sure the headset is on. Press the button. If the status light doesn’t blink green, press and hold the button for about three seconds, until you see the status light blink green or hear four rising tones. m Make sure iPhone is turned on. m Make sure the headset and iPhone are charged. m During a call, make sure iPhone is set to play sound through the headset. Tap Audio Source and choose iPhone Bluetooth Headset. m Make sure iPhone is paired with the headset. See page 3. m On iPhone, make sure Bluetooth is turned on. From the Home screen, choose Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. m On iPhone, choose Settings and turn Airplane Mode on. Then wait about three seconds and turn it o? again. For more tips and troubleshooting, go to: www.apple.com/support/iphone12 English ± Read all safety information below and operating instructions before using the iPhone Bluetooth Headset to avoid injury. Important Safety Information WARNING: Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in ? re, electric shock, or other injury or damage. Handling the iPhone Bluetooth Headset Do not drop, disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture, shred, microwave, incinerate, paint, or insert foreign objects into the iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Avoiding Water and Wet Locations Do not use the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in rain, or near washbasins or other wet locations. Take care not to spill any food or liquid on the iPhone Bluetooth Headset. In case the iPhone Bluetooth Headset gets wet, turn it o? (press and hold the button for about four seconds, until the status light blinks amber) before cleaning, and allow it to dry thoroughly before turning it on again. Do not attempt to dry the iPhone Bluetooth Headset with an external heat source, such as a microwave oven or hair dryer.English 13 Repairing the iPhone Bluetooth Headset Never attempt to repair or modify the iPhone Bluetooth Headset yourself. The iPhone Bluetooth Headset does not contain any user-serviceable parts. If the iPhone Bluetooth Headset has been submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to a severe fall, do not use it until you take it to an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Charging the iPhone Bluetooth Headset To charge the iPhone Bluetooth Headset, use only the iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable with an Apple USB Power Adapter or a high-power USB port on another device that is compliant with the USB 2.0 or 1.1 standards, or another Apple-branded product or accessory designed to work with the iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Read all safety instructions for any products and accessories before using with the iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Apple is not responsible for the operation of third-party accessories or their compliance with safety and regulatory standards. When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge the iPhone Bluetooth Headset, make sure that the power adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into a power outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter ? rmly into the power outlet. Do not connect or disconnect the Apple USB Power Adapter with wet hands. Do not use any power 14 English adapter other than the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge the iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Avoiding Hearing Loss Permanent hearing loss may occur if the iPhone Bluetooth Headset is used at high volume. You can adapt over time to a higher volume of sound, which may sound normal but can be damaging to your hearing. Set the volume to a safe level before that happens. If you experience ringing in your ears or speech sounds mup ed, reduce the volume or discontinue use of your headset and have your hearing checked. The louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be a? ected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing:  Limit the amount of time you use your headset at high volume.  Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.  Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you. In Case of Skin Irritation Headsets can sometimes lead to ear infections if not properly cleaned. Clean the speaker of your iPhone Bluetooth Headset when necessary using water or an English 15 antiseptic, such as isopropyl alcohol, on a slightly damp, lintfree cloth. If skin irritation develops, discontinue use. If the problem persists, consult a physician. Driving Safely Check and obey the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices like iPhone in the areas where you drive. Be careful and attentive while driving. If you decide to use iPhone while driving, keep in mind the following guidelines: Give full attention to driving and to the road. Using a mobile device while driving may be distracting. If you ? nd it disruptive or distracting while operating any type of vehicle, riding a bicycle, or performing any activity that requires your full attention, pull o? the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions require. Choking Hazards The iPhone Bluetooth Headset is small and may present a choking hazard to small children. Keep from small children. For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag in? ates with great force. Do not store the iPhone Bluetooth Headset or any of its accessories in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area.16 English Radio Frequency Interference Nearly every electronic device is subject to radio frequency interference from external sources if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise con? gured to be compatible. As a result, the iPhone Bluetooth Headset may cause interference with other devices. Follow these instructions to avoid interference problems. Aircraft Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations may prohibit using wireless devices while in the air. Turn the iPhone Bluetooth Headset o? when on an airplane. Vehicles RF signals may a? ect installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. Electronics Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from the iPhone Bluetooth Headset.English 17 Hearing Aids The iPhone Bluetooth Headset may interfere with some hearing aids. If it does, consult the hearing aid manufacturer or your physician for alternatives or remedies. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device or your physician to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Turn the iPhone Bluetooth Headset o? in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Posted Facilities Turn o? the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in any facility where posted notices so require. Blasting Areas To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn o? the iPhone Bluetooth Headset when in a “blasting area” or in areas posted “Turn o? two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions.18 English Important Handling Information NOTICE: Failure to follow these handling instructions could result in damage to the iPhone Bluetooth Headset or other property. Using Connectors and Ports Never force a connector into a port. Check for obstructions on the port. If the connector and port don’t join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. Keeping the iPhone Bluetooth Headset Within Acceptable Temperatures Operate the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in a place where the temperature is always between 0º and 35º C (32º to 95º F). The iPhone Bluetooth Headset battery life might temporarily shorten in low-temperature conditions. Store the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in a place where the temperature is always between -20º and 45º C (-4º to 113º F). Don’t leave the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in your car, because temperatures in parked cars can exceed this range.Français 19 Félicitations pour l’achat de votre nouvelle oreillette Bluetooth® iPhone. Pour commencer à utiliser votre appareil, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec votre iPhone 1 Connectez le câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth inclus à un port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur (pas sur un port du clavier). 2 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble sur l’iPhone et l’oreillette sur l’embout du câble. L’oreillette est alors automatiquement jumelée avec l’iPhone. Câble À la première connexion de l’oreillette, laissez-la se recharger pendant environ une heure jusqu’à ce que son indicateur d’état passe du orange au vert. 3 Débranchez le câble de l’iPhone et de l’oreillette. Pour connecter l’oreillette à l’iPhone, appuyez sur le bouton situé en bout d’oreillette. Ce bouton permet de rediriger les appels vers l’oreillette.20 Français Dans certains cas, il se peut que vous deviez rebrancher l’oreillette sur l’iPhone. Voir page 23. Pour e? ectuer un appel ou répondre à un appel 1 Placez l’oreillette dans une oreille en orientant le microphone vers votre bouche. Microphone Le coussinet en mousse inclus peut être placé sur l’écouteur pour mieux adapter ce dernier à votre oreille. 2 E? ectuez un appel avec l’iPhone. Appuyez sur le bouton situé en bout d’oreillette pour répondre à un appel entrant. Bouton Indicateur d’état Si vous répondez à un appel entrant en touchant l’écran tactile de l’iPhone, le son est dans ce cas acheminé vers l’iPhone. 3 Une fois votre conversation terminée, appuyez sur le bouton pour mettre ? n à l’appel.Français 21 Pour régler le volume m Utilisez les boutons de réglage du volume situés sur le côté de l’iPhone. ATTENTION : pour prendre connaissance des précautions à prendre pour éviter toute perte d’audition, reportez-vous à la page 31. Autres fonctions Pour Procédez ainsi : Refuser un appel entrant Appuyez sur le bouton pendant environ une seconde, jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un bip. Passer à un appel entrant ou en attente et mettre l’appel en cours en attente Appuyez sur le bouton. Passer à un appel entrant ou en attente et mettre ? n à l’appel en cours Appuyez sur le bouton pendant environ une seconde, jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un bip. Véri? er si l’oreillette est activée Appuyez sur le bouton. Si l’oreillette est activée, un voyant d’état vert clignote et l’oreillette émet un bip.22 Français Activer l’oreillette Maintenez le bouton enfoncé pendant environ trois secondes, jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état vert se mette à clignoter ou que vous entendiez quatre tonalités de plus en plus fortes. Désactiver l’oreillette Maintenez le bouton enfoncé pendant environ quatre secondes, jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état orange se mette à clignoter ou que vous entendiez quatre tonalités de plus en plus faibles. Pour passer de l’oreillette à l’iPhone Pour ne plus utiliser l’oreillette et écouter vos appels via l’iPhone, vous avez deux possibilités : m Désactivez l’oreillette. Vous pouvez toujours la réactiver à tout moment de façon à l’utiliser avec l’iPhone. m Durant un appel, appuyez sur Source audio sur l’écran de l’iPhone, puis choisissez iPhone ou Haut-parleur (pour le haut-parleur du téléphone).Français 23 Pour reconnecter l’oreillette à l’iPhone Il est possible de s’assurer que les appels sont acheminés vers l’oreillette en véri? ant si l’icône Bluetooth (?), située dans la barre d’état de l’iPhone, est bleue ou blanche (en fonction de l’application utilisée). L’oreillette émet deux bips graves dès qu’elle est déconnectée de l’iPhone. Il est possible de véri? er si l’oreillette est déconnectée de l’iPhone en véri? ant si l’icône Bluetooth de la barre d’état est grise ou absente. Pour acheminer les appels vers l’oreillette : m Appuyez sur le bouton pour rétablir une connexion. m Si cela ne marche pas, assurez-vous que l’oreillette est activée, rechargée et qu’elle se trouve à portée de l’iPhone (dans un rayon d’environ 9 m). m Si cela ne marche pas, assurez-vous que Bluetooth est activé sur l’iPhone. À partir de l’écran Accueil, choisissez Réglages > Généraux > Bluetooth, puis activez l’option Bluetooth. m Si cela ne marche pas, jumelez à nouveau l’oreillette avec l’iPhone. Voir page 19. Si l’oreillette est jumelée avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth, vous devez dans ce cas la rebrancher, après l’avoir éteinte ou utilisée avec les appareils en question, sur l’iPhone.24 Français Chargement de l’oreillette L’oreillette émet un long bip toutes les 10 secondes pour vous signaler que sa batterie est presque épuisée. Pour recharger l’oreillette : 1 Branchez le câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth inclus sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également le connecter à l’adaptateur secteur USB Apple fourni avec l’iPhone, puis brancher l’adaptateur sur une prise électrique. 2 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble sur l’oreillette. Il faut environ une heure et demie pour recharger une oreillette dont la batterie est complètement épuisée. Voyant d’état orange = en cours de chargement Voyant d’état vert = complètement rechargée 3 Retirez l’oreillette du câble. Appuyez sur le bouton pour connecter l’oreillette à l’iPhone, a? n que les appels soient acheminés vers l’oreillette. Pour véri? er le niveau de charge restant : m Connectez le câble de voyage pour iPhone Bluetooth à votre ordinateur ou à un adaptateur secteur USB Apple branché sur une prise de courant. Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble sur l’iPhone et l’oreillette sur l’embout du câble. L’écran de l’iPhone a? che le niveau de charge de la batterie de l’oreillette.Français 25 L’oreillette contient une batterie interne qui ne peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Les batteries rechargeables ont un nombre de cycles de chargement limité et ? nissent par s’user complètement. La durée de vie et le nombre de cycles de chargement des batteries varient en fonction de leur usage et des réglages utilisés. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/batteries. Pour en savoir plus sur le recyclage de l’oreillette, reportez-vous à la page 57. ATTENTION : pour prendre connaissance des précautions à prendre pour recharger l’oreillette, reportez-vous à la page 30. Utilisation de l’oreillette avec un autre téléphone ou un autre appareil Vous pouvez utiliser l’oreillette avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth tels que d’autres types de téléphones. Vous pouvez aussi jumeler manuellement l’oreillette à votre iPhone si vous ne disposez pas du câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth. L’oreillette peut également être jumelée avec certains ordinateurs équipés de la technologie Bluetooth, a? n de pouvoir converser avec des amis au moyen d’une application de messagerie instantanée dotée de fonctions audio, telle qu’iChat.26 Français Pour régler l’oreillette a? n qu’elle soit détectable par d’autres appareils : 1 Désactivez l’oreillette. 2 Maintenez le bouton de l’oreillette enfoncé pendant environ huit secondes, jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez les tonalités de démarrage suivies d’une succession rapide de cinq bips aigus. L’oreillette demeure détectable pendant environ cinq minutes. Le voyant d’état vert clignote tant que l’oreillette est détectable. Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec un autre téléphone ou pour la jumeler manuellement avec l’iPhone : 1 Sur le téléphone, activez Bluetooth, puis réglez le téléphone a? n qu’il recherche d’autres appareils Bluetooth. Pour ce faire, choisissez Réglages > Généraux > Bluetooth, puis activez Bluetooth. 2 Réglez l’oreillette a? n qu’elle soit détectable (voir ci-dessus). 3 Sur le téléphone, choisissez Oreillette Bluetooth iPhone, puis tapez le code PIN 0000. Consultez les instructions de votre téléphone pour obtenir des informations sur la manière de le jumeler avec des appareils Bluetooth.Français 27 Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec un ordinateur Mac équipé de Bluetooth et fonctionnant sous Mac OS X 10.4.9 ou ultérieur : 1 Ouvrez Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur Bluetooth. 2 Si l’appareil Bluetooth est le premier que vous con? gurez, cliquez sur le bouton « Con? gurer le nouvel appareil ». Dans le cas contraire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter (+) situé sous la liste des appareils déjà con? gurés. 3 Choisissez l’option Casque d’écoute. 4 Réglez l’oreillette a? n qu’elle soit détectable. 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Lorsque vous êtes invité à saisir un code d’accès, tapez 0000. Pour utiliser l’oreillette avec iChat : 1 Jumelez l’oreillette avec votre Mac. 2 Dans iChat, choisissez iChat > Préférences, puis cliquez sur Audio/Vidéo. 3 Choisissez Oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans les menus locaux Microphone et Sortie audio. 4 Commencez une conversation audio ou vidéo. Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec un autre ordinateur (un PC Windows par exemple) ou un autre appareil Bluetooth : Suivez les instructions fournies avec l’ordinateur où l’appareil. Lorsque vous êtes invité à saisir un code d’accès ou un code PIN, tapez 0000.28 Français Astuces et dépannage Si l’oreillette ne répond plus ou ne fonctionne plus correctement, essayez les solutions suivantes dans l’ordre jusqu’à ce qu’elle fonctionne à nouveau. m Assurez-vous que l’oreillette est activée. Appuyez sur le bouton. Si le voyant d’état vert ne clignote pas, maintenez le bouton enfoncé pendant environ trois secondes, jusqu’à ce que le voyant vert clignote ou que vous entendiez quatre tonalités de plus en plus fortes. m Assurez-vous que l’iPhone est allumé. m Assurez-vous que l’oreillette et l’iPhone sont rechargés. m Durant un appel, assurez-vous que l’iPhone est réglé pour di? user le son à travers l’oreillette. Appuyez sur Source audio, puis choisissez Oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. m Assurez-vous que l’iPhone est jumelé avec l’oreillette. Voir page 19. m Sur l’iPhone, assurez-vous que Bluetooth est activé. À partir de l’écran Accueil, choisissez Réglages > Généraux > Bluetooth, puis activez l’option Bluetooth. m Sur l’iPhone, choisissez Réglages, puis activez l’option Mode Avion. Patientez ensuite pendant environ trois secondes, puis désactivez à nouveau ce mode.Français 29 Pour obtenir des astuces et des instructions de dépannage supplémentaires, rendez-vous sur : www.apple.com/fr/support/iphone. ± Pour éviter tout problème, lisez attentivement toutes les informations relatives à la sécurité ainsi que les instructions d’utilisation ci-dessous avant d’utiliser votre oreillette Bluetooth pour iPhone. Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité ATTENTION : tout manquement à ces consignes de sécurité est susceptible de provoquer un incendie, une décharge électrique ou d’autres blessures ou dégâts. Manipulation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone Évitez de laisser tomber, de démonter ou d’ouvrir, d’écraser, de tordre ou de déformer, de percer, de broyer, de mettre au four à micro-ondes, d’incinérer ou de peindre l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone, ni d’y insérer des corps étrangers.30 Français Éviter l’eau et les endroits mouillés N’utilisez jamais l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone sous la pluie, à proximité d’un lavabo ou de tout autre endroit mouillé. Veillez à ne pas renverser d’aliments ou de liquide sur l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. Si l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone est mouillée, désactivez-la (en maintenant le bouton enfoncé pendant environ quatre secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état orange clignote) avant de la nettoyer et attendez qu’elle soit complètement sèche avant de l’activer à nouveau. N’essayez jamais de sécher l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone à l’aide d’une source de chaleur extérieure telle qu’un four à micro-ondes ou un sèche-cheveux. Réparation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone N’essayez jamais de réparer ou de modi? er vous-même l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. L’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone ne contient aucune pièce réparable par un utilisateur. Si l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone a été plongée dans l’eau, a été perforée ou a subi une chute grave, ne l’utilisez pas avant de l’avoir fait réviser par un fournisseur de services agréé Apple. Chargement de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone Pour recharger l’oreillette Bluetooth pour iPhone, utilisez exclusivement le câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth avec un adaptateur secteur USB Apple ou le port USB alimenté d’un appareil conforme aux normes USB 2.0 ou 1.1, ou avec un autre produit ou accessoire Apple conçu pour fonctionner avec l’oreillette Bluetooth pour iPhone.Français 31 Lisez préalablement toutes les instructions de sécurité des produits et accessoires que vous voulez utiliser avec l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. Apple n’est pas responsable du fonctionnement d’accessoires tiers ni de leur conformité aux normes de réglementation et de sécurité. Si vous utilisez un adaptateur secteur USB Apple pour recharger l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone, assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est complètement assemblé avant de le brancher sur une prise électrique. Insérez ensuite fermement l’adaptateur secteur USB Apple dans la prise de courant. Ne branchez ni ne débranchez en aucun cas l’adaptateur secteur Apple USB Power Adapter lorsque vous avez les mains mouillées. N’utilisez pas d’autre adaptateur secteur que l’adaptateur secteur USB Apple pour recharger l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. Prévention de la perte d’acuité auditive L’utilisation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone à des volumes sonores élevés peut entraîner une perte irréversible de l’audition. Vous pouvez vous habituer peu à peu à un volume sonore plus élevé qui peut vous paraître normal mais peut entraîner la détérioration de votre audition. Réglez le volume à un niveau raisonnable, avant que le problème se présente. Si vous entendez vos oreilles « sip er » ou que les sons vous paraissent étou? és, réduisez le volume ou n’utilisez plus votre oreillette et consultez un spécialiste de l’audition. 32 Français Plus le volume d’écoute est élevé, moins il faut de temps pour que votre audition soit endommagée. Voici quelques conseils de spécialistes qui vous permettront de protéger votre audition :  Limitez la durée d’utilisation à des volumes élevés de votre oreillette.  Évitez d’augmenter le volume pour couvrir les bruits environnants.  Baissez le volume si vous ne pouvez plus entendre les personnes qui parlent à côté de vous. En cas d’irritation cutanée L’usage d’une oreillette peut provoquer parfois des infections de l’oreille si le dispositif n’est pas correctement entretenu. Nettoyez régulièrement l’écouteur de votre oreillette Bluetooth pour iPhone, avec de l’eau ou un produit antiseptique, par exemple à l’aide d’un linge non pelucheux humidi? é d’alcool isopropyle. Si l’irritation cutanée se développe, n’utilisez plus le dispositif. Si le problème persiste, consultez un médecin. Consignes de sécurité lors de la conduite Consultez et respectez les lois et réglementations applicables en matière d’utilisation de dispositifs mobiles à l’endroit où vous conduisez. Soyez vigilant et attentif lorsque vous conduisez. Si vous comptez utiliser l’iPhone en conduisant, n’oubliez pas Français 33 de rester bien attentif à votre conduite et au code de la route. L’utilisation d’un dispositif mobile lors de la conduite peut vous distraire de celle-ci. Si vous avez du mal à vous concentrer alors que vous conduisez n’importe quel type de véhicule, que vous utilisez une bicyclette ou que vous réalisez toute activité qui demande votre attention complète, arrêtez-vous sur le bord de la route avant de passer un appel ou de répondre à un appel si les conditions de conduite l’exigent. Risques d’étou? ement L’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone constitue, du fait de sa taille réduite, un risque d’étou? ement pour les jeunes enfants. Ne la laissez pas à la portée des jeunes enfants. Véhicules équipés d’un coussin gon? able de sécurité Les coussins de sécurité se gon? ent brusquement. Ne placez jamais l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone ou l’un de ses accessoires dans la zone située au-dessus de l’airbag ou dans la zone de déploiement de ce dernier. Perturbations radioélectriques Presque tous les appareils électroniques sont sensibles aux perturbations radioélectriques dues à des sources externes s’ils ne sont pas adéquatement blindés, conçus ou con? gurés pour être compatibles. Il se peut, par conséquent, que l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone provoque des interférences avec d’autres 34 Français appareils. Respectez les instructions suivantes pour éviter tout problème d’interférence. Avions Les règlements de la FAA (Federal Aviation Administration) peuvent interdire l’utilisation d’appareils de communication sans ? l à bord des avions. Désactivez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone lorsque vous voyagez en avion. Véhicules Les signaux RF peuvent a? ecter les systèmes électroniques embarqués ou mal protégés des véhicules à moteur. En ce qui concerne votre véhicule, véri? ez avec le constructeur ou son représentant. Appareils électroniques La plupart des appareils électroniques modernes sont blindés contre les signaux RF. Il se peut toutefois que certains d’entre eux ne soient pas blindés contre les signaux RF émis par l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. Appareils auditifs L’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone peut provoquer des interférences avec certains appareils auditifs. Si c’est le cas, consultez le fabricant de votre prothèse ou votre médecin pour trouver d’autres options ou remèdes.Français 35 Autres appareils médicaux Si vous utilisez un autre type d’appareil médical, consultez votre médecin ou le fabricant de l’appareil pour vous assurer que cet appareil est adéquatement blindé contre les signaux RF externes. Dans les établissements de santé, désactivez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone lorsque des a? ches vous invitent à le faire. Certains équipements utilisés dans les hôpitaux ou dans les établissements de santé sont sensibles aux signaux RF externes. Installations sensibles Désactivez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans les installations au sein desquelles des a? ches vous demandent de le faire. Zones de dynamitage Pour éviter toute interférence avec des opérations de dynamitage, désactivez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dès que vous vous trouvez dans une « zone de dynamitage » ou dans des endroits où sont a? chées des pancartes invitant à « Désactiver les émetteurs récepteurs ». Respectez toutes les pancartes et toutes les consignes.36 Français Informations importantes concernant la manipulation de l’appareil AVIS : le non-respect de ces instructions de manipulation risque d’endommager l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone ou d’autres biens. Utilisation des connecteurs et des ports Ne forcez jamais l’insertion d’un connecteur dans un port. Assurez-vous que le port n’est pas bouché. Si vous ne parvenez pas à insérer le connecteur dans le port de manière relativement aisée, c’est qu’ils ne sont probablement pas compatibles. Veillez à ce que le connecteur corresponde au port et à ce qu’il soit correctement positionné par rapport au port.Français 37 Conservation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans des plages de température acceptables N’utilisez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone que dans des endroits où la température est comprise entre 0º et 35º C. Il se peut que l’autonomie de la batterie de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone soit temporairement réduite dans des conditions de faible température. Conservez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans un endroit où la température est toujours comprise entre -20º et 45º C. N’abandonnez pas l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans votre voiture, car les températures à l’intérieur d’une voiture en stationnement peuvent dépasser ces limites.38 Español Enhorabuena por su nuevo auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth® Headset. Para empezar, siga estas instrucciones. Cómo enlazar el auricular manos libres con el iPhone 1 Conecte el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable incluido a un puerto USB 2.0 del ordenador (no del teclado). 2 Conecte el iPhone y el auricular manos libres al cable. El auricular manos libres se enlaza con el iPhone automáticamente. Cable La primera vez que conecte el auricular manos libres, déjelo cargar durante una hora aproximadamente, hasta que su luz de estado pase de ámbar a verde. 3 Desconecte el iPhone y el auricular manos libres del cable. Para conectar el auricular manos libres al iPhone, pulse el botón situado en la parte superior del auricular. De este modo, las llamadas se enviarán al auricular.Español 39 En algunos casos, deberá volver a conectar el auricular manos libres al iPhone. Consulte la página 41. Cómo realizar o responder a una llamada 1 Colóquese el auricular manos libres en cualquiera de las orejas con el micrófono apuntando hacia la boca. Micrófono Si coloca la almohadilla acolchada (incluida) en el altavoz del auricular, conseguirá un ajuste más cómodo. 2 Realice una llamada con el iPhone. Pulse el botón de la parte superior del auricular manos libres para responder a una llamada entrante. Botón Luz de estado Si responde a una llamada entrante pulsando la pantalla táctil del iPhone, el sonido se recibirá a través del iPhone. 3 Cuando termine, pulse el botón para ? nalizar la llamada.40 Español Cómo ajustar el volumen m Utilice los botones de volumen laterales del iPhone. ADVERTENCIA: Para obtener información de seguridad importante sobre cómo evitar pérdidas auditivas, consulte la página 51. ¿Qué más puede hacer? Para Haga esto Rechazar una llamada entrante Pulse el botón durante un segundo aproximadamente, hasta que oiga un sonido. Pasar a la llamada entrante o en espera y poner la llamada actual en espera Pulse el botón. Pasar a la llamada entrante o en espera y terminar la llamada actual Pulse el botón durante un segundo aproximadamente, hasta que oiga un sonido. Comprobar si el auricular manos libres está encendido Pulse el botón. Si el auricular manos libres está encendido, la luz de estado parpadea en verde y el auricular emite un sonido.Español 41 Encender el auricular manos libres Mantenga pulsado el botón durante unos tres segundos hasta que la luz de estado parpadee en verde o escuche cuatro tonos crecientes. Apagar el auricular manos libres Mantenga pulsado el botón durante unos cuatro segundos hasta que la luz de estado parpadee en ámbar o escuche cuatro tonos decrecientes. Cómo pasar del auricular manos libres al iPhone Para dejar de utilizar el auricular manos libres y escuchar las llamadas a través del iPhone, puede hacer lo siguiente: m Apague el auricular manos libres. Puede encenderlo en cualquier momento para volver a utilizarlo con el iPhone. m Durante una llamada, pulse “Fuente de audio” en el iPhone y elija iPhone o Altavoz (para el altavoz del teléfono). Cómo volver a conectar el auricular manos libres al iPhone Puede saber que las llamadas se enviarán al auricular manos libres si el icono de Bluetooth (?) de la barra de estado del iPhone es azul o blanco (según la aplicación que utilice). 42 Español Si el auricular manos libres se desconecta del iPhone, emitirá dos sonidos graves. Puede saber que el auricular está desconectado del iPhone si el icono de Bluetooth de la barra de estado es gris o no aparece. Para enviar las llamadas al auricular manos libres: m Pulse el botón para reiniciar la conexión. m Si no funciona, compruebe que el auricular manos libres esté encendido, cargado y situado en el radio de alcance del iPhone (hasta 10 metros). m Si no funciona, compruebe que el iPhone tenga la tecnología Bluetooth activada. En la pantalla Inicio, seleccione Ajustes > General > Bluetooth y active Bluetooth. m Si no funciona, vuelva a enlazar el auricular manos libres con el iPhone. Para ello, consulte la página 38. Si el auricular manos libres está enlazado con otros dispositivos Bluetooth, deberá volver a conectarlo al iPhone después de haberlo apagado o de haberlo usado con uno de dichos dispositivos.Español 43 Cómo cargar el auricular manos libres Cuando el auricular tenga poca carga, se oirá un sonido largo cada diez segundos. Para cargar el auricular manos libres: 1 Conecte el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable incluido al ordenador, o bien conéctelo al adaptador de corriente USB de Apple que viene con el iPhone y enchufe el adaptador a una toma eléctrica. 2 Conecte el auricular manos libres al cable. Si está completamente descargado, el auricular se recarga en una hora y media aproximadamente. Luz de estado ámbar = Cargando Luz de estado verde = Totalmente cargado 3 Desconecte el auricular manos libres del cable. Pulse el botón para conectar el auricular manos libres al iPhone, de manera que las llamadas se envíen al auricular. Para ver cuánta carga queda: m Conecte el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable al ordenador o a un adaptador de corriente USB de Apple que esté enchufado a una toma de corriente. A continuación, conecte el iPhone y el auricular manos libres al cable. La pantalla del iPhone indica el nivel de batería del auricular.44 Español El auricular manos libres lleva una batería interna que el usuario no debe manipular en ningún caso. Las baterías recargables permiten un número limitado de ciclos de carga y con el tiempo se desgastan completamente. La duración de las baterías y la cantidad de ciclos de carga que pueden admitir varían según el uso y la con? guración. Para más información, visite www.apple.com/es/batteries. Para obtener más información sobre cómo deshacerse del auricular, consulte la página 57. ADVERTENCIA: Para obtener información de seguridad importante sobre cómo cargar el auricular manos libres, consulte la página 50. Cómo utilizar el auricular manos libres con otro teléfono o dispositivo Puede utilizar el auricular manos libres con otros dispositivos Bluetooth, como otros teléfonos, y enlazar el auricular con el iPhone manualmente si no tiene a mano el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable.Español 45 También puede enlazar el auricular manos libres a algunos ordenadores equipados con Bluetooth y hablar con sus amigos utilizando una aplicación de mensajería instantánea que tenga audio, como iChat. Para hacer visible el auricular manos libres de manera que el otro dispositivo pueda detectarlo: 1 Apague el auricular manos libres. 2 Mantenga pulsado el botón del auricular durante unos ocho segundos hasta que oiga los tonos de arranque y, después, cinco sonidos agudos rápidos. El auricular manos libres permanece en modo visible durante cinco minutos aproximadamente. La luz de estado parpadea en verde mientras el auricular está en modo visible. Para enlazar el auricular manos libres con otro teléfono o enlazarlo con el iPhone manualmente: 1 En el teléfono, active Bluetooth y ajuste el teléfono para que busque otros dispositivos Bluetooth. En el iPhone, seleccione Ajustes > General > Bluetooth y active Bluetooth. 2 Ajuste el auricular manos libres en modo visible (véase más arriba). 3 En el teléfono, seleccione “iPhone Bluetooth Headset” e introduzca el código PIN 0000.46 Español Consulte las instrucciones del teléfono para obtener más información sobre cómo enlazarlo con dispositivos Bluetooth. Para enlazar el auricular manos libres con un Mac equipado con Bluetooth y con el sistema Mac OS X 10.4.9 o posterior: 1 Abra Preferencias del Sistema y haga clic en Bluetooth. 2 Si este es el primer dispositivo Bluetooth que ha con? gurado, haga clic en el botón “Con? gurar nuevo dispositivo”. De lo contrario, haga clic en el botón Añadir (+) situado en la parte inferior de la lista de dispositivos existentes. 3 A continuación, seleccione “Auriculares con micrófono”. 4 Ajuste el auricular manos libres en modo visible. 5 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Cuando se le solicite una clave, escriba 0000. Para utilizar el auricular manos libres con iChat: 1 Enlace el auricular manos libres con su Mac. 2 En iChat, seleccione iChat > Preferencias y haga clic en Audio/Vídeo. 3 Seleccione “iPhone Bluetooth Headset” en los menús locales “Micrófono” y “Salida de sonido”. 4 Inicie un chat de audio o vídeo.Español 47 Para enlazar el auricular manos libres con otro ordenador (como un PC con Windows) o con dispositivos Bluetooth: Siga las instrucciones que venían con el ordenador o dispositivo. Cuando se le solicite una clave o PIN, escriba 0000. Consejos y solución de problemas Si el auricular manos libres no responde o no funciona correctamente, siga estos pasos en el orden en que están indicados hasta que vuelva a funcionar. m Compruebe que el auricular manos libres esté encendido. Pulse el botón. Si la luz de estado no parpadea en verde, mantenga pulsado el botón durante unos tres segundos hasta que la luz de estado parpadee en verde o escuche cuatro tonos crecientes. m Compruebe que el iPhone esté encendido. m Compruebe que el auricular manos libres y el iPhone estén cargados. m Durante una llamada, compruebe que el iPhone esté ajustado para reproducir sonido a través del auricular manos libres. Pulse “Fuente de audio” y seleccione “iPhone Bluetooth Headset”. m Compruebe que el iPhone esté enlazado con el auricular manos libres. Consulte la página 38.48 Español m En el iPhone, compruebe que Bluetooth esté activado. En la pantalla Inicio, seleccione Ajustes > General > Bluetooth y active Bluetooth. m En el iPhone, seleccione Ajustes y active el modo Avión. Espere unos tres segundos y desactívelo. Para obtener más consejos e información sobre solución de problemas, visite www.apple.com/es/support/iphone. ± Lea toda la información sobre seguridad que ? gura más abajo y las instrucciones de funcionamiento antes de usar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset para evitar posibles daños. Información importante sobre seguridad ADVERTENCIA: Si no respeta estas instrucciones de seguridad, pueden producirse incendios, descargas eléctricas u otros daños. Manipulación del auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset No deje caer al suelo el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset ni lo desmonte, abra, aplaste, doble, deforme, perfore, desarme, incinere, pinte, ponga en el microondas ni le introduzca objetos extraños.Español 49 Agua y lugares húmedos No utilice el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset bajo la lluvia ni cerca de lugares con agua o humedad. Procure no derramar comida ni líquidos sobre el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Si se moja, apáguelo (mantenga pulsado el botón durante unos cuatro segundos, hasta que la luz de estado parpadee en ámbar) antes de limpiarlo y deje que se seque completamente antes de volver a encenderlo. No intente secar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset mediante una fuente de calor externa, como un horno microondas o un secador de cabello. Reparación del auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset No intente nunca reparar o modi? car el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset por su cuenta. El auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset no contiene piezas que el usuario pueda reparar. Si el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset se sumerge en agua, se perfora o sufre una fuerte caída, no lo utilice hasta que lo haya llevado a un proveedor de servicios Apple autorizado.50 Español Cómo cargar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset Para cargar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset, utilice únicamente el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable con un adaptador de corriente USB de Apple o un puerto USB de alta potencia de otro dispositivo que cumpla los estándares USB 2.0 o 1.1, o bien con otro producto o accesorio de marca Apple que haya sido diseñado para utilizarse con el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Lea todas las instrucciones sobre seguridad de todos los productos y accesorios antes de utilizarlos con el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Apple no es responsable del funcionamiento de accesorios de otros fabricantes ni del cumplimiento de la normativa aplicable y las directrices de seguridad por parte de dichos accesorios. Cuando utilice el adaptador de corriente USB de Apple para cargar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset, compruebe que el adaptador de corriente esté totalmente acoplado antes de conectarlo a una toma eléctrica. A continuación, inserte ? rmemente el adaptador de corriente USB de Apple a la toma eléctrica. No conecte ni desconecte el adaptador de corriente USB de Apple con las manos húmedas. No utilice ningún otro adaptador de corriente que no sea el adaptador de corriente USB de Apple para cargar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset.Español 51 Prevención de la pérdida auditiva Pueden ocurrir pérdidas auditivas permanentes si el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset se utiliza a un volumen elevado. Con el tiempo, puede acostumbrarse a un volumen de sonido más alto, que, aunque puede parecer normal, puede llegar a dañar su capacidad auditiva. Ajuste el volumen a un nivel seguro antes de que esto ocurra. Si oye pitidos o murmullos sordos, reduzca el volumen del sonido o deje de usar el auricular y acuda a que le revisen el oído. Cuanto más alto sea el volumen, menor es el tiempo necesario para que su capacidad auditiva pueda verse afectada. Los especialistas en audición recomiendan lo siguiente para proteger su capacidad auditiva:  Limite el tiempo de utilización del auricular manos libres a un volumen elevado.  No suba el volumen con el ? n de aislarse de ambientes ruidosos.  Si no puede oír a la gente que está hablando cerca de usted, baje el volumen. En caso de irritación de la piel Si los auriculares no se limpian adecuadamente, pueden provocar infecciones de oído. Limpie el altavoz de su auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset cuando sea necesario con un paño que no desprenda pelusas y 52 Español que esté ligeramente humedecido en agua o un producto antiséptico (por ejemplo, alcohol isopropílico). Si la irritación de la piel va a más, deje de utilizarlo. Si el problema persiste, consulte a su médico. Cómo conducir de forma segura Consulte y respete las leyes y normativas sobre el uso de dispositivos móviles como el iPhone en los sitios por donde conduzca. Sea prudente y preste atención cuando conduzca. Si decide usar el iPhone mientras conduce, tenga en cuenta las siguientes recomendaciones: Ponga los cinco sentidos en la conducción y en la carretera. El uso de un dispositivo móvil durante la conducción puede ocasionar distracciones. Si su uso le impide conducir cualquier tipo de vehículo (automóvil o bicicleta) o realizar cualquier actividad con toda la atención necesaria, detenga el vehículo antes de realizar o contestar una llamada. Peligro de atragantamiento El auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset es de pequeño tamaño y puede presentar riesgo de atragantamiento para los niños pequeños. Manténgalo alejado de los niños pequeños.Español 53 Vehículos equipados con airbag Los airbags se in? an con una gran fuerza. No coloque el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset o sus accesorios sobre el airbag o su área de in? uencia. Interferencia con las radiofrecuencias Casi todos los dispositivos electrónicos están sujetos a interferencias por radiofrecuencias procedentes de fuentes externas si no están adecuadamente protegidos, diseñados o con? gurados para evitarlas. Por lo tanto, el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset puede provocar interferencias con otros dispositivos. Siga estas instrucciones para evitar problemas de interferencias. Aviones La normativa de la FAA (Administración Federal de Aviación) puede prohibir el uso de dispositivos inalámbricos durante los vuelos. Apague el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset cuando viaje en avión. Vehículos Las señales de radiofrecuencia pueden afectar a los equipos electrónicos instalados o inadecuadamente protegidos de los vehículos de motor. Consulte con el fabricante o representante correspondiente a su vehículo.54 Español Dispositivos electrónicos La mayoría de los equipos electrónicos modernos están protegidos contra las señales de radiofrecuencia. Sin embargo, ciertos equipos electrónicos pueden no estar protegidos contra las señales de radiofrecuencia procedentes del auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Audífonos El auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset puede interferir con algunos audífonos. En ese caso, consulte con el fabricante del audífono o con su médico para buscar alternativas o soluciones. Otros dispositivos médicos Si utiliza cualquier otro dispositivo médico personal, consulte con el fabricante del dispositivo o con su médico para determinar si está adecuadamente protegido contra la energía de radiofrecuencia externa. Apague el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en los centros sanitarios cuando las normativas de dichos centros así lo establezcan. Los hospitales o centros sanitarios pueden utilizar equipos sensibles a la energía de radiofrecuencia externa.Español 55 Avisos públicos Apague el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en cualquier lugar en el que haya avisos públicos que lo exijan. Zonas con riesgo de explosión Para no interferir con operaciones que impliquen el uso de explosivos, apague el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en zonas con riesgo de explosión o en lugares donde se ordene desactivar la transmisión de señales de radio bidireccionales. Respete todos los avisos e instrucciones. Información importante sobre manejo ADVERTENCIA: Si no respeta estas instrucciones de manejo, pueden producirse daños en el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset o en otros bienes de su propiedad. Conectores y puertos No fuerce nunca un conector al enchufarlo en un puerto. Compruebe que nada obstruya el puerto. Si la conexión entre el conector y el puerto no es razonablemente fácil, es probable que no se correspondan. Compruebe que el conector encaja con el puerto y que lo ha colocado en la posición correcta.56 Español Temperaturas de funcionamiento y almacenamiento Utilice el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en lugares donde la temperatura esté siempre entre 0 y 35 ºC. La duración de la batería del auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset puede verse temporalmente reducida en condiciones de bajas temperaturas. Guarde el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en lugares donde la temperatura esté siempre entre -20 y 45 ºC. No deje el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en su vehículo, pues la temperatura puede sobrepasar estos márgenes en el interior de un vehículo aparcado. 57 Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Important: Changes or modi? cations to this product not authorized by Apple could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components. It is important that you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, televisions, and other electronic devices. Disposal and Recycling Information iPhone Bluetooth Headset Disposal and Recycling Your iPhone Bluetooth Headset must be disposed of properly according to local laws and regulations. Because the iPhone Bluetooth Headset contains electronic components and a battery, it must be disposed of separately from household waste. When your iPhone Bluetooth Headset reaches its end of life, contact local authorities to learn about disposal and recycling options, or simply drop it o? at your local Apple retail store or return it to Apple. For more information, go to: www.apple.com/environment/recycling58 Battery Disposal Information Deutschland: Das Gerät enthält Batterien. Diese gehören nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können verbrauchte Batterien beim Handel oder bei den Kommunen unentgeltlich abgeben. Um Kurzschlüsse zu vermeiden, kleben Sie die Pole der Batterien vorsorglich mit einem Klebestreifen ab. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. European Union—Disposal Information: The symbol above means that according to local laws and regulations your product should be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. Some collection points accept products for free. The separate collection and recycling of your product at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. 59 Union Européenne: informations sur l’élimination Ce symbole signi? e que vous devez vous débarasser de votre produit sans le mélanger avec les ordures ménagères, selon les normes et la législation de votre pays. Lorsque ce produit n’est plus utilisable, portez-le dans un centre de traitement des déchets agréé par les autorités locales. Certains centres acceptent les produits gratuitement. Le traitement et le recyclage séparé de votre produit lors de son élimination aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à protéger l’environnement et la santé des êtres humains. Europäische Union – Informationen zur Entsorgung Dieses Symbol weist darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt entsprechend den geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften und getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt werden muss. Geben Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei einer o? ziellen Sammelstelle ab. Bei einigen Sammelstellen können Produkte zur Entsorgung unentgeltlich abgegeben werden. Durch getrenntes Sammeln und Recycling werden die Rohsto? -Reserven geschont, und es ist sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts alle Bestimmungen zum Schutz von Gesundheit und Umwelt eingehalten werden. Unione Europea: informazioni per l’eliminazione Questo simbolo signi? ca che, in base alle leggi e alle norme locali, il prodotto dovrebbe essere eliminato separatamente dai ri? uti casalinghi. Quando il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portarlo nel punto di raccolta stabilito dalle autorità locali. Alcuni punti di raccolta accettano i prodotti gratuitamente. La raccolta separata e il riciclaggio del prodotto al momento dell’eliminazione aiutano a conservare le risorse naturali e assicurano che venga riciclato in maniera tale da salvaguardare la salute umana e l’ambiente.Europeiska unionen – uttjänta produkter Den här symbolen betyder att produkten enligt lokala lagar och bestämmelser inte får kastas tillsammans med hushållsavfallet. När produkten har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation som utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Vissa återvinningsstationer tar kostnadsfritt hand om uttjänta produkter. Genom att låta den uttjänta produkten tas om hand för återvinning hjälper du till att spara naturresurser och skydda hälsa och miljö. Apple and the Environment At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information go to: www.apple.com/environment © 2008 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, iChat, Mac, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple is under license. ZM034-4622-A Printed in XXXX iPhone OS Enterprise Deployment Guide Second Edition, for Version 3.2 or laterK Apple Inc. © 2010 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. This manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Apple. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, the Apple logo, Bonjour, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes, Keychain, Leopard, Mac, Macintosh, the Mac logo, Mac OS, QuickTime, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc. iTunes Store and App Store are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. MobileMe is a service mark of Apple Inc. Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada. 019-1835/2010-04 3 3 Contents Preface 6 iPhone in the Enterprise 6 What’s New for the Enterprise in iPhone OS 3.0 and Later 7 System Requirements 8 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 10 VPN 11 Network Security 11 Certificates and Identities 12 Email Accounts 12 LDAP Servers 12 CalDAV Servers 13 Additional Resources Chapter 1 14 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 15 Activating Devices 16 Preparing Access to Network Services and Enterprise Data 20 Determining Device Passcode Policies 21 Configuring Devices 22 Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration 27 Other Resources Chapter 2 28 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 29 About iPhone Configuration Utility 30 Creating Configuration Profiles 39 Editing Configuration Profiles 40 Installing Provisioning Profiles and Applications 40 Installing Configuration Profiles 43 Removing and Updating Configuration Profiles Chapter 3 44 Manually Configuring Devices 44 VPN Settings 48 Wi-Fi Settings 49 Exchange Settings 54 Installing Identities and Root Certificates 55 Additional Mail Accounts4 Contents 55 Updating and Removing Profiles 55 Other Resources Chapter 4 57 Deploying iTunes 57 Installing iTunes 59 Quickly Activating Devices with iTunes 60 Setting iTunes Restrictions 62 Backing Up a Device with iTunes Chapter 5 63 Deploying Applications 63 Registering for Application Development 64 Signing Applications 64 Creating the Distribution Provisioning Profile 64 Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iTunes 65 Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility 65 Installing Applications Using iTunes 66 Installing Applications Using iPhone Configuration Utility 66 Using Enterprise Applications 66 Disabling an Enterprise Application 66 Other Resources Appendix A 67 Cisco VPN Server Configuration 67 Supported Cisco Platforms 67 Authentication Methods 68 Authentication Groups 68 Certificates 69 IPSec Settings 69 Other Supported Features Appendix B 70 Configuration Profile Format 70 Root Level 71 Payload Content 72 Profile Removal Password Payload 72 Passcode Policy Payload 73 Email Payload 75 Web Clip Payload 75 Restrictions Payload 76 LDAP Payload 76 CalDAV Payload 77 Calendar Subscription Payload 77 SCEP Payload 78 APN Payload 79 Exchange Payload 79 VPN PayloadContents 5 81 Wi-Fi Payload 84 Sample Configuration Profiles Appendix C 88 Sample ScriptsPreface 6 iPhone in the Enterprise Learn how to integrate iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad with your enterprise systems. This guide is for system administrators. It provides information about deploying and supporting iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad in enterprise environments. What’s New for the Enterprise in iPhone OS 3.0 and Later iPhone OS 3.x includes numerous enhancements, including the following items of special interest to enterprise users:  CalDAV calendar wireless syncing is supported.  LDAP server support for contact look-up in mail, address book, and SMS.  Configuration profiles can be encrypted and locked to a device so that their removal requires an administrative password.  iPhone Configuration Utility allows you to add and remove encrypted configuration profiles directly onto devices that are connected to your computer by USB.  Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) is supported for certificate revocation.  On-demand certificate-based VPN connections are now supported.  VPN proxy configuration via a configuration profile and VPN servers is supported.  Microsoft Exchange users can invite others to meetings. Microsoft Exchange 2007 users can also view reply status.  Exchange ActiveSync client certificate-based authentication is supported.  Additional EAS policies are supported, along with EAS protocol 12.1.  Additional device restrictions are available, including the ability to specify the length of time that a device can be left unlocked, disable the camera, and prevent users from taking a screenshot of the device’s display.  Local mail messages and calendar events can be searched. For IMAP, MobileMe, and Exchange 2007, mail that resides on the server can also be searched.  Additional mail folders can be designated for push email delivery.  APN proxy settings can be made specified using a configuration profile.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 7  Web clips can be installed using a configuration profile.  802.1x EAP-SIM is now supported.  Devices can be authenticated and enrolled over-the-air using a Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) server.  iTunes can store device backups in encrypted format.  iPhone Configuration Utility supports profile creation via scripting.  iPhone Configuration Utility 2.2 supports iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch. Mac OS X v10.6 Snow Leopard is required. Windows 7 is also supported. System Requirements Read this section for an overview of the system requirements and the various components available for integrating iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad with your enterprise systems. iPhone and iPod touch iPhone and iPod touch devices you use with your enterprise network must be updated to iPhone OS 3.1.x. iPad iPad must be updated to iPhone OS 3.2.x. iTunes iTunes 9.1 or later is required in order to set up a device. iTunes is also required in order to install software updates for iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad. You also use iTunes to install applications, and sync music, video, notes, or other data with a Mac or PC. To use iTunes, you need a Mac or PC that has a USB 2.0 port and meets the minimum requirements listed on the iTunes website. See www.apple.com/itunes/download/. iPhone Configuration Utility iPhone Configuration Utility lets you create, encrypt, and install configuration profiles, track and install provisioning profiles and authorized applications, and capture device information such as console logs. iPhone Configuration Utility requires one of the following:  Mac OS X v10.5 Snow Leopard  Windows XP Service Pack 3 with .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1  Windows Vista Service Pack 1 with .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1  Windows 7 with .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 iPhone Configuration Utility operates in 32-bit mode on 64-bit versions of Windows.8 Preface iPhone in the Enterprise You can download the .Net Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 installer at: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=ab99342f-5d1a-413d-8319- 81da479ab0d7 The utility allows you to create an Outlook message with a configuration profile as an attachment. Additionally, you can assign users’ names and email addresses from your desktop address book to devices that you’ve connected to the utility. Both of these features require Outlook and are not compatible with Outlook Express. To use these features on Windows XP computers, you may need to install 2007 Microsoft Office System Update: Redistributable Primary Interop Assemblies. This is necessary if Outlook was installed before .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1. The Primary Interop Assemblies installer is available at: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=59daebaa-bed4-4282- a28c-b864d8bfa513 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support the following versions of Microsoft Exchange:  Exchange ActiveSync for Exchange Server (EAS) 2003 Service Pack 2  Exchange ActiveSync for Exchange Server (EAS) 2007 For support of Exchange 2007 policies and features, Service Pack 1 is required. Supported Exchange ActiveSync Policies The following Exchange policies are supported:  Enforce password on device  Minimum password length  Maximum failed password attempts  Require both numbers and letters  Inactivity time in minutes The following Exchange 2007 policies are also supported:  Allow or prohibit simple password  Password expiration  Password history  Policy refresh interval  Minimum number of complex characters in password  Require manual syncing while roaming  Allow camera  Require device encryption For a description of each policy, refer to your Exchange ActiveSync documentation.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 9 The Exchange policy to require device encryption (RequireDeviceEncryption) is supported on iPhone 3GS, on iPod touch (Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) and on iPad. iPhone, iPhone 3G, and other iPod touch models don’t support device encryption and won’t connect to an Exchange Server that requires it. If you enable the policy “Require Both Numbers and Letters” on Exchange 2003, or the policy “Require Alphanumeric Password” on Exchange 2007, the user must enter a device passcode that contains at least one complex character. The value specified by the inactivity time policy (MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock or AEFrequencyValue) is used to set the maximum value that users can select in both Settings > General > Auto-Lock and Settings > General > Passcode Lock > Require Passcode. Remote Wipe You can remotely wipe the contents of an iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad. Wiping removes all data and configuration information from the device. The device is securely erased and restored to original, factory settings. Important: On iPhone and iPhone 3G, wiping overwrites the data on the device, which can take approximately one hour for each 8 GB of device capacity. Connect the device to a power supply before wiping. If the device turns off due to low power, the wiping process resumes when the device is connected to power. On iPhone 3GS and iPad, wiping removes the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) which occurs instantaneously. With Exchange Server 2007, you can initiate a remote wipe using the Exchange Management Console, Outlook Web Access, or the Exchange ActiveSync Mobile Administration Web Tool. With Exchange Server 2003, you can initiate a remote wipe using the Exchange ActiveSync Mobile Administration Web Tool. Users can also wipe a device in their possession by choosing “Erase All Content and Settings” from the Reset menu in General settings. Devices can also be configured to automatically initiate a wipe after several failed passcode attempts. If you recover a device that was wiped because it was lost, use iTunes to restore it using the device’s latest backup. Microsoft Direct Push The Exchange server automatically delivers email, contacts, and calendar events to iPhone and iPad Wi-Fi + 3G if a cellular or Wi-Fi data connection is available. iPod touch and iPad Wi-Fi don’t have a cellular connection, so they receive push notifications only when they’re active and connected to a Wi-Fi network.10 Preface iPhone in the Enterprise Microsoft Exchange Autodiscovery The Autodiscover service of Exchange Server 2007 is supported. When you manually configure a device, Autodiscover uses your email address and password to automatically determine the correct Exchange server information. For information about enabling the Autodiscover service, see http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/ library/cc539114.aspx. Microsoft Exchange Global Address List iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad retrieve contact information from your company’s Exchange server corporate directory. You can access the directory when searching in Contacts, and it’s automatically accessed for completing email addresses as you enter them. Additional Supported Exchange ActiveSync Features In addition to the features and capabilities already described, iPhone OS supports:  Creating calendar invitations. With Microsoft Exchange 2007, you can also view the status of replies to your invitations.  Setting Free, Busy, Tentative, or Out of Office status for your calendar events.  Searching mail messages on the server. Requires Microsoft Exchange 2007.  Exchange ActiveSync client certificate-based authentication. Unsupported Exchange ActiveSync Features Not all Exchange features are supported, including, for example:  Folder management  Opening links in email to documents stored on SharePoint servers  Task synchronization  Setting an “out of office” autoreply message  Flagging messages for follow-up VPN iPhone OS works with VPN servers that support the following protocols and authentication methods:  L2TP/IPSec with user authentication by MS-CHAPV2 Password, RSA SecurID and CryptoCard, and machine authentication by shared secret.  PPTP with user authentication by MS-CHAPV2 Password, RSA SecurID, and CryptoCard.  Cisco IPSec with user authentication by Password, RSA SecurID, or CryptoCard, and machine authentication by shared secret and certificates. See Appendix A for compatible Cisco VPN servers and recommendations about configurations.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 11 Cisco IPSec with certificate-based authentication supports VPN on demand for domains you specify during configuration. See “VPN Settings” on page 35 for details. Network Security iPhone OS supports the following 802.11i wireless networking security standards as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance:  WEP  WPA Personal  WPA Enterprise  WPA2 Personal  WPA2 Enterprise Additionally, iPhone OS supports the following 802.1X authentication methods for WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise networks:  EAP-TLS  EAP -TTLS  EAP-FAST  EAP-SIM  PEAP v0, PEAP v1  LEAP Certificates and Identities iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad can use X.509 certificates with RSA keys. The file extensions .cer, .crt, and .der are recognized. Certificate chain evaluations are performed by Safari, Mail, VPN, and other applications. Use P12 (PKCS #12 standard) files that contain exactly one identity. The file extensions .p12 and .pfx are recognized. When an identity is installed, the user is prompted for the passphrase that protects it. Certificates necessary for establishing the certificate chain to a trusted root certificate can be installed manually or by using configuration profiles. You don’t need to add root certificates that are included on the device by Apple. To view a list of the preinstalled system roots, see the Apple Support article at http://support.apple.com/kb/HT3580. Certificates can be securely installed over the air via SCEP. See “Overview of the Authenticated Enrollment and Configuration Process” on page 22 for more information.12 Preface iPhone in the Enterprise Email Accounts iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support industry-standard IMAP4- and POP3-enabled mail solutions on a range of server platforms including Windows, UNIX, Linux, and Mac OS X. You can also use IMAP to access email from Exchange accounts in addition to the Exchange account you use with direct push. When a user searches their mail, they have the option of continuing the search on the mail server. This works with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 as well as most IMAP-based accounts. The user’s email account information, including Exchange user ID and password, are securely stored on the device. LDAP Servers iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad retrieve contact information from your company’s LDAPv3 server corporate directories.You can access directories when searching in Contacts, and and they are automatically accessed for completing email addresses as you enter them. CalDAV Servers iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad synchronize calendar data with your company’s CalDAV server. Changes to the calendar are periodically updated between the device and server. You can also subscribe to read-only published calendars, such as holiday calendars or those of a colleague’s schedule. Creating and sending new calendar invitations from a device isn’t supported for CalDAV accounts.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 13 Additional Resources In addition to this guide, the following publications and websites provide useful information:  iPhone in Enterprise webpage at www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise/  iPad in Business webpage at: www.apple.com/ipad/business/  Exchange Product Overview at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ bb124558.aspx  Deploying Exchange ActiveSync at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ aa995962.aspx  Exchange 2003 Technical Documentation Library at http://technet.microsoft.com/ en-us/library/bb123872(EXCHG.65).aspx  Managing Exchange ActiveSync Security at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/ library/bb232020(EXCHG.80).aspx  Wi-Fi for Enterprise webpage at www.wi-fi.org/enterprise.php  iPhone VPN Connectivity to Cisco Adaptive Security Appliances (ASA) at www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/security/vpn_client/cisco_vpn_client/iPhone/2.0/ connectivity/guide/iphone.html  iPhone User Guide, available for download at www.apple.com/support/iphone/; view the guide on iPhone, tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark in Safari or go to http://help.apple.com/iphone/  iPhone Guided Tour at www.apple.com/iphone/guidedtour/  iPod touch User Guide, available for download at www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch; view the guide on iPod touch, tap the iPod touch User Guide in Safari or go to http://help.apple.com/ipodtouch/  iPod touch Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipodtouch/guidedtour/  iPad User Guide, available for download at www.apple.com/support/ipad; view the guide on iPad, tap the iPad User Guide in Safari or go to http://help.apple.com/ipad/  iPad Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipad/guided-tour/1 14 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch This chapter provides an overview of how to deploy iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad in your enterprise. iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad are designed to easily integrate with your enterprise systems, including Microsoft Exchange 2003 and 2007, 802.1X-based secure wireless networks, and Cisco IPSec virtual private networks. As with any enterprise solution, good planning and an understanding of your deployment options make deployment easier and more efficient for you and your users. When planning your deployment of iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad, consider the following:  How will your company’s iPhones and iPad (Wi-Fi + 3G models) be activated for wireless cellular service?  Which enterprise network services, applications, and data will your users need to access?  What policies do you want to set on the devices to protect sensitive company data?  Do you want to manually configure devices individually, or use a streamlined process for configuring a large fleet? The specifics of your enterprise environment, IT policies, wireless carrier, and your computing and communication requirements affect how you tailor your deployment strategy.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 15 Activating Devices Each iPhone must be activated with your wireless carrier before it can be used to make and receive calls, send text messages, or connect to the cellular data network. Contact your carrier for voice and data tariffs and activation instructions for consumer and business customers. You or your user need to install a SIM card in the iPhone. After the SIM card is installed, iPhone must be connected to a computer with iTunes to complete the activation process. If the SIM card is already active, iPhone is ready for immediate use; otherwise, iTunes walks you through the process of activating a new line of service. iPad must be connected to a computer with iTunes to activate the device. For iPad Wi-Fi + 3G in the U.S., you sign up and manage (or cancel) an AT&T data plan using iPad. Go to Settings > Cellular Data > View Account. iPad is unlocked, so you can use your preferred carrier. Contact your carrier to set up an account and obtain a compatible micro SIM card. In the U.S., micro SIM cards compatible with AT&T are included with iPad Wi-Fi + 3G. Although there is no cellular service or SIM card for iPod touch and iPad Wi-Fi, they must also be connected to a computer with iTunes for activation. Because iTunes is required in order to complete the activation process, you must decide whether you want to install iTunes on each user’s Mac or PC, or whether you’ll complete activation for each device with your own iTunes installation. After activation, iTunes isn’t required in order to use the device with your enterprise systems, but it’s required for synchronizing music, video, and web browser bookmarks with a computer. It’s also required for downloading and installing software updates for devices and installing your enterprise applications. For more information about activating devices and using iTunes, see Chapter 4.16 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch Preparing Access to Network Services and Enterprise Data iPhone OS 3.x software enables secure push email, push contacts, and push calendar with your existing Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 solution, as well as Global Address Lookup, Remote Wipe, and device passcode policy enforcement. It also allows users to securely connect to company resources via WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise wireless networks using 802.1X wireless authentication and/or via VPN using PPTP, LT2P over IPSec, or Cisco IPSec protocols. If your company doesn’t use Microsoft Exchange, your users can still use iPhone or iPod touch to wirelessly sync email with most standard POP or IMAP-based servers and services. And they can use iTunes to sync calendar events and contacts from Mac OS X iCal and Address Book or Microsoft Outlook on a Windows PC. For wireless access to calendars and directories, CalDAV and LDAP are supported. As you determine which network services you want users to access, refer to the information in the following sections. Microsoft Exchange iPhone communicates directly with your Microsoft Exchange Server via Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (EAS). Exchange ActiveSync maintains a connection between the Exchange Server and iPhone or iPad Wi-Fi + 3G, so that when a new email message or meeting invitation arrives, the device is instantly updated. iPod touch and iPad Wi-Fi don’t have a cellular connection, so they receive push notifications only when they’re active and connected to a Wi-Fi network. If your company currently supports Exchange ActiveSync on Exchange Server 2003 or Exchange Server 2007, you already have the necessary services in place. For Exchange Server 2007, make sure the Client Access Role is installed. For Exchange Server 2003, make sure you’ve enabled Outlook Mobile Access (OMA). If you have an Exchange Server but your company is new to Exchange ActiveSync, review the information in the following sections. Network Configuration  Make sure port 443 is open on the firewall. If your company uses Outlook Web Access, port 443 is most likely already open.  Verify that a server certificate is installed on the front-end Exchange server and turn on basic authentication only, in the Authentication Method properties, to require an SSL connection to the Microsoft Server ActiveSync directory of your IIS.  If you’re using a Microsoft Internet Security and Acceleration (ISA) Server, verify that a server certificate is installed and update the public DNS to properly resolve incoming connections.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 17  Make sure the DNS for your network returns a single, externally-routable address to the Exchange ActiveSync server for both intranet and Internet clients. This is required so the device can use the same IP address for communicating with the server when both types of connections are active.  If you’re using a Microsoft ISA Server, create a web listener as well as an Exchange web client access publishing rule. See Microsoft’s documentation for details.  For all firewalls and network appliances, set the idle session timeout to 30 minutes. For information about heartbeat and timeout intervals, refer to the Microsoft Exchange documentation at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc182270.aspx. Exchange Account Setup  Enable Exchange ActiveSync for specific users or groups using the Active Directory service. These are enabled by default for all mobile devices at the organizational level in Exchange Server 2003 and Exchange Server 2007. For Exchange Server 2007, see Recipient Configuration in the Exchange Management Console.  Configure mobile features, policies, and device security settings using the Exchange System Manager. For Exchange Server 2007, this is done in the Exchange Management Console.  Download and install the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Mobile Administration Web Tool, which is necessary to initiate a remote wipe. For Exchange Server 2007, remote wipe can also be initiated using Outlook Web Access or the Exchange Management Console. WPA/WPA2 Enterprise Wi-Fi Networks Support for WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise ensures that corporate wireless networks are securely accessed on iPhone, iPod touch and iPad. WPA/WPA2 Enterprise uses AES 128-bit encryption, a proven block-based encryption method that provides a high level of assurance that corporate data remains protected. With support for 802.1X authentication, iPhone OS devices can be integrated into a broad range of RADIUS server environments. 802.1X wireless authentication methods are supported, including EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and LEAP. WPA/WPA2 Enterprise Network Configuration  Verify network appliances for compatibility and select an authentication type (EAP type) supported by iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad. Make sure that 802.1X is enabled on the authentication server, and if necessary, install a server certificate and assign network access permissions to users and groups.  Configure wireless access points for 802.1X authentication and enter the corresponding RADIUS server information.  Test your 802.1X deployment with a Mac or a PC to make sure RADIUS authentication is properly configured.18 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch  If you plan to use certificate-based authentication, make sure you have your public key infrastructure configured to support device and user-based certificates with the corresponding key distribution process.  Verify the compatibility of your certificate formats with the device and your authentication server. For information about certificates see “Certificates and Identities” on page 11. Virtual Private Networks Secure access to private networks is supported on iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad using Cisco IPSec, L2TP over IPSec, and PPTP virtual private network protocols. If your organization supports one of these protocols, no additional network configuration or third-party applications are required in order to use your devices with your VPN infrastructure. Cisco IPSec deployments can take advantage of certificate-based authentication via industry-standard X.509 certificates. Additionally, certificate-based authentication allows you to take advantage of VPN On Demand, which provides seamless, secure wireless access to your enterprise network. For two-factor token-based authentication, iPhone OS supports RSA SecurID and CryptoCard. Users enter their PIN and token-generated, one-time password directly on their device when establishing a VPN connection. For compatible Cisco VPN servers and recommendations about configurations, see Appendix A. iPhone, iPod touch and iPad also support shared secret authentication for Cisco IPSec and L2TP/IPSec deployments, and MS-CHAPv2 for basic user name and password authentication. VPN Proxy auto-config (PAC and WPAD) is also supported, which allows you specify proxy server settings for accessing specific URLs. VPN Setup Guidelines  iPhone OS integrates with most existing VPN networks, so minimal configuration is necessary to enable devices to access to your network. The best way to prepare for deployment is to check if your company’s existing VPN protocols and authentication methods are supported by iPhone.  Ensure compatibility with standards by your VPN concentrators. It’s also a good idea to review the authentication path to your RADIUS or authentication server, to make sure standards supported by iPhone OS are enabled within your implementation.  Check with your solutions providers to confirm that your software and equipment are up-to-date with the latest security patches and firmware.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 19  If you want to configure URL-specific proxy settings, place a PAC file on a web server that’s accessible with the basic VPN settings, and ensure that it’s served with a MIME type of application/x-ns-proxy-autoconfig. Alternatively, configure your DNS or DHCP to provide the location of a WPAD file on a server that is similarly accessible. IMAP Email If you don’t use Microsoft Exchange, you can still implement a secure, standards-based email solution using any email server that supports IMAP and is configured to require user authentication and SSL. For example, you can access Lotus Notes/Domino or Novell GroupWise email using this technique. The mail servers can be located within a DMZ subnetwork, behind a corporate firewall, or both. With SSL, iPhone OS supports 128-bit encryption and X.509 certificates issued by the major certificate authorities. It also supports strong authentication methods including industry-standard MD5 Challenge-Response and NTLMv2. IMAP Network Setup Guidelines  For additional security protection, install a digital certificate on the server from a trusted certificate authority (CA). Installing a certificate from a CA is an important step in ensuring that your proxy server is a trusted entity within your corporate infrastructure. See “Credentials Settings” on page 38 for information about installing certificates on iPhone.  To let iPhone OS devices retrieve email from your server, open port 993 in the firewall and make sure that the proxy server is set to IMAP over SSL.  To let devices send email, port 587, 465, or 25 must be open. Port 587 is used first, and is the best choice. LDAP Directories iPhone OS lets you access standards-based LDAP directory servers and provide a global address directory or other information similar to the Global Address List in Microsoft Exchange. When an LDAP account is configured on the device, the device searches for the attribute namingContexts at the server’s root level to identify the default search base. The search scope is set to subtree by default. CalDAV Calendars CalDAV support in iPhone OS provides global calendars and scheduling for organizations that don’t use Microsoft Exchange. iPhone OS works with calendar servers that support the CalDAV standard.20 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch Subscribed Calendars If you want to publish read-only calendars of corporate events, such as holidays or special event schedules, iPhone OS devices can subscribe to calendars and display the information alongside Microsoft Exchange and CalDAV calendars. iPhone OS works with calendar files in the standard iCalendar (.ics) format. An easy way to distribute subscribed calendars to your users is to send the fully qualified URL in SMS or email. When the user taps the link, the device offers to subscribe to the specified calendar. Enterprise Applications To deploy enterprise iPhone OS applications, you install the applications on your devices using iPhone Configuration Utility or iTunes. Once you deploy an application to users’ devices, updating those applications will be easier if each user has iTunes installed on their Mac or PC. Online Certificate Status Protocol When you provide digital certificates for iPhone OS devices, consider issuing them so they’re OCSP-enabled. This allows the device to ask your OCSP server if the certificate has been revoked before using it. Determining Device Passcode Policies Once you decide which network services and data your users will access, you should determine which device passcode policies you want to implement. Requiring passcodes to be set on your devices is recommended for companies whose networks, systems, or applications don’t require a password or an authentication token. If you’re using certificate-based authentication for an 802.1X network or Cisco IPSec VPN, or your enterprise application saves your login credentials, you should require users to set a device passcode with a short timeout period so a lost or stolen device cannot be used without knowing the device passcode. Policies can be set on iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad in either of two ways. If the device is configured to access a Microsoft Exchange account, the Exchange ActiveSync policies are wirelessly pushed to the device. This allows you to enforce and update the policies without any user action. For information about EAS policies, see “Supported Exchange ActiveSync Policies” on page 8. If you don’t use Microsoft Exchange, you can set similar policies on your devices by creating configuration profiles. If you want to change a policy, you must post or send an updated profile to users or install the profile using iPhone Configuration Utility. For information about the device passcode policies, see “Passcode Settings” on page 32.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 21 If you use Microsoft Exchange, you can also supplement your EAS policies by using configuration policies. This can provide access to policies that aren’t available in Microsoft Exchange 2003, for example, or allow you to define policies specifically for iPhone OS devices. Configuring Devices You need to decide how you’ll configure each iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad. This is influenced in part by how many devices you plan on deploying and managing over time. If the number is small, you may find that it’s simpler for you or your users to manually configure each device. This involves using the device to enter the settings for each mail account, Wi-Fi settings, and VPN configuration information. See Chapter 3 for details about manual configuration. If you deploy a large number of devices, or you have a large collection of email settings, network settings, and certificates to install, then you may want to configure the devices by creating and distributing configuration profiles. Configuration profiles quickly load settings and authorization information onto a device. Some VPN and Wi-Fi settings can only be set using a configuration profile, and if you’re not using Microsoft Exchange, you’ll need to use a configuration profile to set device passcode policies. Configuration profiles can be encrypted and signed, which allows you to restrict their use to a specific device, and prevents anyone from changing the settings that a profile contains. You can also mark a profile as being locked to the device, so once installed it cannot be removed without wiping the device of all data, or optionally, with an administrative passcode. Whether or not you’re configuring devices manually or using configuration profiles, you also need to decide if you’ll configure the devices or if you will delegate this task to your users. Which you choose depends on your users’ locations, company policy regarding users’ ability to manage their own IT equipment, and the complexity of the device configuration you intend to deploy. Configuration profiles work well for a large enterprise, for remote employees, or for users that are unable to set up their own devices. If you want users to activate their device themselves or if they need to install or update enterprise applications, iTunes must be installed on each user’s Mac or PC. iTunes is also required for iPhone OS software updates, so keep that in mind if you decide to not distribute iTunes to your users. For information about deploying iTunes, see Chapter 4.22 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration Enrollment is the process of authenticating a device and user so that you can automate the process of distributing certificates. Digital certificates provide many benefits to users. They can be used to authenticate access to key enterprise services, such as Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, WPA2 Enterprise wireless networks, and corporate VPN connections. Certificate-based authentication also permits the use of VPN On Demand for seamless access to corporate networks. In addition to using the over-the-air enrollment capabilities to issue certificates for your company’s public key infrastructure (PKI), you can also deploy device configuration profiles. This ensures that only trusted users are accessing corporate services and that their devices are configured according to your IT policies. And because configuration profiles can be both encrypted and locked, the settings cannot be removed, altered, or shared with others. These capabilities are available to you in the over-the-air process described below, and also by using iPhone Configuration Utility to configure devices while they’re attached to your administrative computer. See Chapter 2 to learn about using iPhone Configuration Utility. Implementing over-the-air enrollment and configuration requires development and integration of authentication, directory, and certificate services. The process can be deployed using standard web services, and once it’s in place, it permits your users to set up their devices in a secure, authenticated fashion. Overview of the Authenticated Enrollment and Configuration Process To implement this process, you need to create your own profile distribution service that accepts HTTP connections, authenticates users, creates mobileconfig profiles, and manages the overall process described in this section. You also need a CA (certificate authority) to issue the device credentials using Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP). For links to PKI, SCEP, and related topics see “Other Resources” on page 27. The following diagram shows the enrollment and configuration process that iPhone supports.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 23 Phase 1 – Begin Enrollment: Enrollment begins with the user using Safari to access the URL of the profile distribution service you’ve created. You can distribute this URL via SMS or email. The enrollment request, represented as step 1 in the diagram, should authenticate the user’s identify. Authentication can be as simple as basic auth, or you can tie into your existing directory services. In step 2, your service sends a configuration profile (.mobileconfig) in response. This response specifies a list of attributes that the device must provide in the next reply and a pre-shared key (challenge) that can carry the identity of the user forward during this process so you can customize the configuration process for each user. The device attributes that the service can request are iPhone OS version, device ID (MAC Address), product type (iPhone 3GS returns iPhone2,1), phone ID (IMEI), and SIM information (ICCID). For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 1 Server Response” on page 84. Profile service Attributes required: UDID, OS version, IMEI Challenge token: AnneJohnson1 URL for response: https://profiles.example.com Phase 1 - Begin Enrollment User: Anne Johnson Enrollment request Device information request sample sample 1 224 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch Phase 2 – Device Authentication: After the user accepts the installation of the profile received in phase 1, the device looks up the requested attributes, adds the challenge response (if provided), signs the response using the device’s built-in identity (Apple-issued certificate), and sends it back to the profile distribution service using HTTP Post. For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 2 Device Response” on page 85. Profile service Attributes: UDID, OS Version, IMEI Challenge token: AnneJohnson1 Phase 2 - Device Authentication Signed response via POST sampleChapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 25 Phase 3 – Certificate Installation: In step 1, the profile distribution service responds with specifications that the device uses to generate a key (RSA 1024) and where to return it for certification using SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol). In step 2, the SCEP request must be handled in automatic mode, using the challenge from the SCEP packet to authenticate the request. In step 3, the CA responds with an encryption certificate for the device. For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 3 Server Response With SCEP Specifications” on page 85. Profile service Certificate issuing service Phase 3 - Device Certificate Installation Challenge Key generation specs URL for response Challenge Certificate Signing Request Public key Device certificate RSA: 1024 Challenge: AnneJohnson1 URL:http://ca.example.com/ getkey.exe sample 1 2 326 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch Phase 4 – Device Configuration: In step 1, the device replies with the list of attributes, signed using the encryption certificate provided by the CA in the previous phase. In step 2, the profile service responds with an encrypted .mobileconfig file that’s automatically installed. The profile service should sign the .mobileconfig file. Its SSL certificate can be used for this purpose, for example. In addition to general settings, this configuration profile should also define enterprise policies that you want to enforce and it should be a locked profile so the user cannot remove it from the device. The configuration profile can contain additional requests for enrollment of identities using SCEP, which are executed as the profile is installed. Similarly, when a certificate installed using SCEP expires or is otherwise invalidated, the device asks the user to update the profile. When the user authorizes the request, the device repeats the above process to obtain a new certificate and profile. For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 4 Device Response” on page 87. Profile service UDID, OS version, IMEI, MAC address Exchange policies, VPN settings, additional SCEP payloads, mail accounts, etc. Phase 4 - Device Configuration A .mobileconfig file encrypted for device and signed by profile service Device attributes signed with device certificate sample sample 1 2Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 27 Other Resources  Digital Certificates PKI for IPSec VPNs at https://cisco.hosted.jivesoftware.com/docs/ DOC-3592  Public key infrastructure at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Public_key_infrastructure  IETF SCEP protocol specification at http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-noursescep-18.txt Additional information and resources for iPhone, iPod touch and iPad in the enterprise are available at www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise/ and www.apple.com/ipad/ business/.2 28 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles Configuration profiles define how iPhone, iPad and iPod touch work with your enterprise systems. Configuration profiles are XML files that contain device security policies and restrictions, VPN configuration information, Wi-Fi settings, email and calendar accounts, and authentication credentials that permit iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad to work with your enterprise systems. You can install configuration profiles on devices connected to a computer via USB using iPhone Configuration Utility, or you can distribute configuration profiles by email or using a webpage. When users open the email attachment or download the profile using Safari on their device, they are prompted to begin the installation process. If you prefer not to create and distribute configuration profiles, you can configure devices manually. See Chapter 3 for information.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 29 About iPhone Configuration Utility iPhone Configuration Utility lets you easily create, encrypt and install configuration profiles, track and install provisioning profiles and authorized applications, and capture device information including console logs. When you run the iPhone Configuration Utility installer, the utility is installed in /Applications/Utilities/ on Mac OS X, or in Programs\iPhone Configuration Utility\ on Windows. When you open iPhone Configuration Utility, a window similar to the one shown below appears. The content of the main section of the window changes as you select items in the sidebar. The sidebar displays the Library, which contains the following categories:  Devices shows a list of iPhone and iPod touch devices that have been connected to your computer.  Applications lists your applications that are available to install on devices attached to your computer. A provisioning profile might be needed for an application to run on a device.  Provisioning Profiles lists profiles that permit the use of the device for iPhone OS development, as authorized by Apple Developer Connection. For information, see Chapter 5. Provisioning profiles also allow devices to run enterprise applications that are not distributed using the iTunes Store.  Configuration Profiles lists the configuration profiles you’ve previously created, and lets you edit the information you entered, or create a new configuration that you can send to a user or install on a connected device.30 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles The sidebar also displays Connected Devices, which shows information about the iPhone OS devices currently connected to your computer’s USB port. Information about a connected device is automatically added to the Devices list, so you can view it again without having to reconnect the device. After a device has been connected, you can also encrypt profiles for use on only that device. When a device is connected, you can use iPhone Configuration Utility to install configuration profiles and applications on the device. See “Installing Configuration Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility” on page 40,“Installing Applications Using iPhone Configuration Utility” on page 66 and “Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility” on page 65 for details. When a device is connected, you can also view console logs and any available crash logs. These are the same device logs that are available for viewing within the Xcode development environment on Mac OS X. Creating Configuration Profiles This document uses the terms configuration profile and payload. A configuration profile is the whole file that configures certain (single or multiple) settings for iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad. A payload is an individual collection of a certain type of settings, such as VPN settings, within the configuration profile. Although you can create a single configuration profile that contains all of the payloads you need for your organization, consider creating one profile for certificates and another one (or more) for other settings so you can update and distribute each type of information separately. This also allows users to retain the certificates they’ve already installed when installing a new profile that contains VPN or account settings. Many of the payloads allow you to specify user names and passwords. If you omit this information, the profile can be used by multiple users, but the user will be asked to enter the missing information when the profile is installed. If you do personalize the profile for each user, and include passwords, you should distribute the profile in encrypted format to protect its contents. For more information see “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 40. To create a new configuration profile, click the New button in the toolbar of iPhone Configuration Utility. You add payloads to the profile using the payloads list. Then, you edit the payloads by entering and selecting options that appear in the editing pane. Required fields are marked with a red arrow. For some settings such as W-Fi, you can click the Add (+) button to add configurations. To remove a configuration, click the Delete (–) button in the editing pane. To edit a payload, select the appropriate item in the payloads list, then click the Configure button, and fill in the information as described below. Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 31 Automating Configuration Profile Creation You can also automate the creation of configuration files using AppleScript on a Mac, or C# Script on Windows. To see the supported methods and their syntax, do the following:  Mac OS X: Use Script Editor to open the AppleScript Dictionary for iPhone Configuration Utility.  Windows: Use Visual Studio to view the method calls provided by iPCUScripting.dll. To execute a script, on Mac, use the AppleScript Tell command. On Windows, pass the script name to iPhone Configuration Utility as a command line parameter. For examples, see Appendix C, “Sample Scripts.” General Settings This is where you provide the name and identifier of this profile, and specify if users are allowed to remove the profile after it is installed. The name you specify appears in the profiles list and is displayed on the device after the configuration profile is installed. The name doesn’t have to be unique, but you should use a descriptive name that identifies the profile. The profile identifier must uniquely identify this profile and must use the format com.companyname.identifier, where identifier describes the profile. (For example, com.mycompany.homeoffice.)32 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles The identifier is important because when a profile is installed, the value is compared with profiles that are already on the device. If the identifier is unique, information in the profile is added to the device. If the identifier matches a profile already installed, information in the profile replaces the settings already on the device, except in the case of Exchange settings. To alter an Exchange account, the profile must first be manually removed so that the data associated with the account can be purged. To prevent a user from deleting a profile installed on a device, choose an option from the Security pop-up menu. The With Authorization option allows you to specify an authorization password that permits the removal of the profile on the device. If you select the Never option, the profile can be updated with a new version, but it cannot be removed. Passcode Settings Use this payload to set device policies if you aren’t using Exchange passcode policies. You can specify whether a passcode is required in order to use the device, as well as specify characteristics of the passcode and how often it must be changed. When the configuration profile is loaded, the user is immediately required to enter a passcode that meets the policies you select or the profile won’t be installed. If you’re using device policies and Exchange passcode policies, the two sets of policies are merged and the strictest of the settings is enforced. For information about supported Exchange ActiveSync policies, see “Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync” on page 8. The following policies are available:  Require passcode on device: Requires users to enter a passcode before using the device. Otherwise, anyone who has the device can access all of its functions and data.  Allow simple value: Permits users to use sequential or repeated characters in their passcodes. For example, this would allow the passcodes “3333” or “DEFG.”  Require alphanumeric value: Requires that the passcode contain at least one letter character.  Minimum passcode length: Specifies the smallest number of characters a passcode can contain.  Minimum number of complex characters: The number of non-alphanumeric characters (such as $, &, and !) that the passcode must contain.  Maximum passcode age (in days): Requires users to change their passcode at the interval you specify.  Auto-Lock (in minutes): If the device isn’t used for this period of time, it automatically locks. Entering the passcode unlocks it.  Passcode history: A new passcode won’t be accepted if it matches a previously used passcode. You can specify how many previous passcodes are remembered for this comparison.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 33  Grace period for device lock: Specifies how soon the device can be unlocked again after use, without re-prompting for the passcode.  Maximum number of failed attempts: Determines how many failed passcode attempts can be made before the device is wiped. If you don’t change this setting, after six failed passcode attempts, the device imposes a time delay before a passcode can be entered again. The time delay increases with each failed attempt. After the eleventh failed attempt, all data and settings are securely erased from the device. The passcode time delays always begin after the sixth attempt, so if you set this value to 6 or lower, no time delays are imposed and the device is erased when the attempt value is exceeded. Restrictions Settings Use this payload to specify which device features the user is allowed to use.  Allow explicit content: When this is turned off, explicit music or video content purchased from the iTunes Store is hidden. Explicit content is marked as such by content providers, such as record labels, when sold through the iTunes Store.  Allow use of Safari: When this option is turned off, the Safari web browser application is disabled and its icon removed from the Home screen. This also prevents users from opening web clips.  Allow use of YouTube: When this option is turned off, the YouTube application is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen.  Allow use of iTunes Music Store: When this option is turned off, the iTunes Music Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users cannot preview, purchase, or download content.  Allow installing apps: When this option is turned off, the App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to install or update their applications.  Allow use of camera: When this option is turned off, the camera is completely disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to take photographs.  Allow screen capture: When this option is turned off, users are unable to save a screenshot of the display.34 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles Wi-Fi Settings Use this payload to set how the device connects to your wireless network. You can add multiple network configurations by clicking the Add (+) button in the editing pane. These settings must be specified, and must match the requirements of your network, in order for the user to initiate a connection.  Service Set Identifier: Enter the SSID of the wireless network to connect to.  Hidden Network: Specifies whether the network is broadcasting its identity.  Security Type: Select an authentication method for the network. The following choices are available for both Personal and Enterprise networks.  None: The network doesn’t use authentication.  WEP: The network uses WEP authentication only.  WPA/WPA 2: The network uses WPA authentication only.  Any: The device uses either WEP or WPA authentication when connecting to the network, but won’t connect to non-authenticated networks.  Password: Enter the password for joining the wireless network. If you leave this blank, the user will be asked to enter it. Enterprise Settings In this section you specify settings for connecting to enterprise networks. These settings appear when you choose an Enterprise setting in the Security Type pop-up menu. In the Protocols tab, you specify which EAP methods to use for authentication and configure the EAP-FAST Protected Access Credential settings. In the Authentication tab, you specify sign-in settings such as user name and authentication protocols. If you’ve installed an identity using the Credentials section, you can choose it using the Identity Certificate pop-up menu. In the Trust tab, you specify which certificates should be regarded as trusted for the purpose of validating the authentication server for the Wi-Fi connection. The Trusted Certificates list displays certificates that have been added using the Credentials tab, and lets you select which certificates should be regarded as trusted. Add the names of the authentication servers to be trusted to the Trusted Server Certificates Names list. You can specify a particular server, such as server.mycompany.com or a partial name such as *.mycompany.com. The Allow Trust Exceptions option lets users decide to trust a server when the chain of trust can’t be established. To avoid these prompts, and to permit connections only to trusted services, turn off this option and embed all necessary certificates in a profile.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 35 VPN Settings Use this payload to enter the VPN settings for connecting to your network. You can add multiple sets of VPN connections by clicking the Add (+) button. For information about supported VPN protocols and authentication methods, see “VPN” on page 10. The options available vary by the protocol and authentication method you select. VPN On Demand For certificate-based IPSec configurations, you can turn on VPN On Demand so that a VPN connection is automatically established when accessing certain domains. The VPN On Demand options are: The action applies to all matching addresses. Addresses are compared using simple string matching, starting from the end and working backwards. The address “.example.org” matches “support.example.org” and “sales.example.org” but doesn’t match “www.private-example.org”. However, if you specify the match domain as “example.com”—notice there is not a period at the start—it matches “www.privateexample.com” and all the others. Note that LDAP connections won’t initiate a VPN connection; if the VPN hasn’t already been established by another application, such as Safari, the LDAP lookup fails. VPN Proxy iPhone supports manual VPN proxy, and automatic proxy configuration using PAC or WPAD. To specify a VPN proxy, select an option from the Proxy Setup pop-up menu. Setting Description Always Initiates a VPN connection for any address that matches the specified domain. Never Does not initiate a VPN connection for addresses that match the specified domain, but if VPN is already active, it may be used. Establish if needed Initiates a VPN connection for addresses that match the specified domain only after a failed DNS look-up has occurred.36 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles For PAC-based auto-proxy configurations, select Automatic from the pop-up menu and then enter the URL of a PAC file. For information about PACS capabilities and the file format, see “Other Resources” on page 55. For Web Proxy Autodiscovery (WPAD) configurations, select Automatic from the pop-up menu. Leave the Proxy Server URL field empty, iPhone will request the WPAD file using DHCP and DNS. For information about WPAD see “Other Resources” on page 55. Email Settings Use this payload to configure POP or IMAP mail accounts for the user. If you’re adding an Exchange account, see Exchange Settings below. Users can modify some of the mail settings you provide in a profile, such as the account name, password, and alternative SMTP servers. If you omit any of this information from the profile, users are asked to enter it when they access the account. You can add multiple mail accounts by clicking the Add (+) button. Exchange Settings Use this payload to enter the user’s settings for your Exchange server. You can create a profile for a specific user by specifying the user name, host name, and email address, or you can provide just the host name—the users are prompted to fill in the other values when they install the profile. If you specify the user name, host name, and SSL setting in the profile, the user can’t change these settings on the device. You can configure only one Exchange account per device. Other email accounts, including any Exchange via IMAP accounts, aren’t affected when you add an Exchange account. Exchange accounts that are added using a profile are deleted when the profile is removed, and can’t be otherwise deleted. By default, Exchange syncs contacts, calendar, and email. The user can change these settings on the device, including how many days worth of data to sync, in Settings > Accounts. If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane. To provide a certificate that identifies the user to the Exchange ActiveSync Server, click the Add (+) button and then select an identity certificate from the Mac OS X Keychain or Windows Certificate Store. After adding a certificate, you can specify the Authentication Credential Name, if necessary for your ActiveSync configuration. You can also embed the certificate’s passphrase in the configuration profile. If you don’t provide the passphrase, the user is asked to enter it when the profile is installed.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 37 LDAP Settings Use this payload to enter settings for connecting to an LDAPv3 directory. You can specify multiple search bases for each directory, and you can configure multiple directory connections by clicking the Add (+) button. If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane. CalDAV Settings Use this payload to provide accounts settings for connecting to a CalDAV-compliant calendar server. These accounts will be added to the device, and as with Exchange accounts, users need to manually enter information you omit from the profile, such as their account password, when the profile is installed. If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane. You can configure multiple accounts by clicking the Add (+) button. Subscribed Calendars Settings Use this payload to add read-only calendar subscriptions to the device’s Calendar application. You can configure multiple subscriptions by clicking the Add (+) button. A list of public calendars you can subscribe to is available at www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars/. If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane. Web Clip Settings Use this payload to add web clips to the Home screen of the user’s device. Web clips provide fast access to favorite web pages. Make sure the URL you enter includes the prefix http:// or https://—this is required for the web clip to function correctly. For example, to add the online version of the iPhone User Guide to the Home screen, specify the web clip URL: http://help.apple.com/iphone/ To add a custom icon, select a graphic file in gif, jpeg, or png format, 59 x 60 pixels in size. The image is automatically scaled and cropped to fit, and converted to png format if necessary.38 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles Credentials Settings Use this payload to add certificates and identities to the device. For information about supported formats, see “Certificates and Identities” on page 11. When installing credentials, also install the intermediate certificates that are necessary to establish a chain to a trusted certificate that’s on the device. To view a list of the preinstalled roots, see the Apple Support article at http://support.apple.com/kb/HT2185. If you’re adding an identify for use with Microsoft Exchange, use the Exchange payload instead. See “Exchange Settings” on page 36. Adding credentials on Mac OS X: 1 Click the Add (+) button. 2 In the file dialog that appears, select a PKCS1 or PKSC12 file, then click Open. If the certificate or identity that you want to install in your Keychain, use Keychain Access to export it in .p12 format. Keychain Access is located in /Applications/Utilities. For help see Keychain Access Help, available in the Help menu when Keychain Access is open. To add multiple credentials to the configuration profile, click the Add (+) button again. Adding credentials on Windows: 1 Click the Add (+) button. 2 Select the credential that you want to install from the Windows Certificate Store. If the credential isn’t available in your personal certificate store, you must add it, and the private key must be marked as exportable, which is one of the steps offered by the certificate import wizard. Note that adding root certificates requires administrative access to the computer, and the certificate must be added to the personal store. If you’re using multiple configuration profiles, make sure certificates aren’t duplicated. You cannot install multiple copies of the same certificate. Instead of installing certificates using a configuration profile, you can let users use Safari to download the certificates directly to their device from a webpage. Or, you can email certificates to users. See “Installing Identities and Root Certificates” on page 54 for more information. You can also use the SCEP Settings, below, to specify how the device obtains certificates over-the-air when the profile is installed.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 39 SCEP Settings The SCEP payload lets you specify settings that allow the device to obtain certificates from a CA using Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP). For more information about how the iPhone obtains certificates wirelessly, see “Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration” on page 22. Advanced Settings The Advanced payload lets you change the device’s Access Point Name (APN) and cell network proxy settings. These settings define how the device connects to the carrier’s network. Change these settings only when specifically directed to do so by a carrier network expert. If these settings are incorrect, the device can’t access data using the cellular network. To undo an inadvertent change to these settings, delete the profile from the device. Apple recommends that you define APN settings in a configuration profile separate from other enterprise settings, because profiles that specify APN information must be signed by your cell service provider. iPhone OS supports APN user names of up to 20 characters, and passwords of up to 32 characters. Editing Configuration Profiles In iPhone Configuration Utility, select a profile in the Configuration Profiles list, and then use the payload list and editing panes to make changes. You can also import a profile by choosing File > Add to Library and then selecting a .mobileconfig file. If the settings panes aren’t visible, choose View > Show Detail. Setting Description URL This is the address of the SCEP server. Name This can be any string that will be understood by the certificate authority, it can be used to distinguish between instances, for example. Subject The representation of a X.500 name represented as an array of OID and value. For example, /C=US/O=Apple Inc./CN=foo/1.2.5.3=bar, which would translate to: [ [ [“C”, “US”] ], [ [“O”, “Apple Inc.”] ], ..., [ [ “1.2.5.3”, “bar” ] ] ] Challenge A pre-shared secret the SCEP server can use to identify the request or user. Key Size and Usage Select a key size, and—using the checkboxes below this field—the acceptable use of the key. Fingerprint If your Certificate Authority uses HTTP, use this field to provide the fingerprint of the CA’s certificate which the device will use to confirm authenticity of the CA’s response. during the enrollment process. You can enter a SHA1 or MD5 fingerprint, or select a certificate to import its signature.40 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles The Identifier field in the General payload is used by the device to determine whether a profile is new, or an update to an existing profile. If you want the updated profile to replace one that users have already installed, don’t change the Identifier. Installing Provisioning Profiles and Applications iPhone Configuration Utility can install applications and distribution provisioning profiles on devices attached to the computer. For details, see Chapter 5, “Deploying Applications,” on page 63. Installing Configuration Profiles After you’ve created a profile, you can connect a device and install the profile using iPhone Configuration Utility. Alternatively, you can distribute the profile to users by email, or by posting it to a website. When users use their device to open an email message or download the profile from the web, they’re prompted to start the installation process. Installing Configuration Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility You can install configuration profiles directly on a device that has been updated to iPhone OS 3.0 or later and is attached to your computer. You can also use iPhone Configuration Utility to remove previously installed profiles. To install a configuration profile: 1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable. After a moment, the device appears in the Devices list in iPhone Configuration Utility. 2 Select the device, and then click the Configuration Profiles tab. 3 Select a configuration profile from the list, and then click Install. 4 On the device, tap Install to install the profile. When you install directly onto a device using USB, the configuration profile is automatically signed and encrypted before being transferred to the device. Distributing Configuration Profiles by Email You can distribute configuration profiles using email. Users install the profile by receiving the message on their device, then tapping the attachment to install it. To email a configuration profile: 1 Click the Share button in the iPhone Configuration Utility toolbar. In the dialog that appears, select a security option: a None: A plain text .mobileconfig file is created. It can be installed on any device. Some content in the file is obfuscated to prevent casual snooping if the file is examined.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 41 b Sign Configuration Profile: The .mobileconfig file is signed and won’t be installed by a device if it’s altered. Some fields are obfuscated to prevent casual snooping if the file is examined. Once installed, the profile can only be updated by a profile that has the same identifier and is signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration Utility. c Sign and Encrypt Profile: Signs the profile so it cannot be altered, and encrypts all of the contents so the profile cannot be examined and can only be installed on a specific device. If the profile contains passwords, this option is recommended. Separate .mobileconfig files will be created for each of the devices you select from the Devices list. If a device does not appear in the list, it either hasn’t been previously connected to the computer so that the encryption key can be obtained, or it hasn’t been upgraded to iPhone OS 3.0 or later. 2 Click Share, and new Mail (Mac OS X) or Outlook (Windows) message opens with the profiles added as uncompressed attachments. The files must be uncompressed for the device to recognize and install the profile. Distributing Configuration Profiles on the Web You can distribute configuration profiles using a website. Users install the profile by downloading it using Safari on their device. To easily distribute the URL to your users, send it via SMS. To export a configuration profile: 1 Click the Export button in the iPhone Configuration Utility toolbar. In the dialog that appears, select a security option: a None: A plain text .mobileconfig file is created. It can be installed on any device. Some content in the file is obfuscated to prevent casual snooping if the file is examined, but you should make sure that when you put the file on your website it’s accessible only by authorized users. b Sign Configuration Profile: The .mobileconfig file is signed and won’t be installed by a device if it’s altered. Once installed, the profile can only be updated by a profile that has the same identifier and is signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration Utility. Some of the information in the profile is obfuscated to prevent casual snooping if the file is examined, but you should make sure that when you put the file on your website, it’s accessible only by authorized users. c Sign and Encrypt Profile: Signs the profile so it cannot be altered, and encrypts all of the contents so the profile cannot be examined and can only be installed on a specific device. Separate .mobileconfig files will be created for each of the devices you select from the Devices list. 2 Click Export, then select a location to save the .mobileconfig files. The files are ready for posting on your website. Don’t compress the .mobileconfig file or change its extension, or the device won’t recognize or install the profile. 42 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles User Installation of Downloaded Configuration Profiles Provide your users with the URL where they can download the profiles onto their devices, or send the profiles to an email account your users can access using the device before it’s set up with your enterprise-specific information. When a user downloads the profile from the web, or opens the attachment using Mail, the device recognizes the .mobileconfig extension as a profile and begins installation when the user taps Install. During installation, the user is asked to enter any necessary information, such as passwords that were not specified in the profile, and other information as required by the settings you specified. The device also retrieves the Exchange ActiveSync policies from the server, and will refresh the policies, if they’ve changed, with every subsequent connection. If the device or Exchange ActiveSync policies enforce a passcode setting, the user must enter a passcode that complies with the policy in order to complete the installation. Additionally, the user is asked to enter any passwords necessary to use certificates included in the profile. If the installation isn’t completed successfully—perhaps because the Exchange server was unreachable or the user cancelled the process—none of the information entered by the user is retained. Users may want to change how many days worth of messages are synced to the device and which mail folders other than the inbox are synced. The defaults are three days and all folders. Users can change these by going to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Exchange account name. Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 43 Removing and Updating Configuration Profiles Configuration profile updates aren’t pushed to users. Distribute the updated profiles to your users for them to install. As long as the profile identifier matches, and if signed, it has been signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration Utility, the new profile replaces the profile on the device. Settings enforced by a configuration profile cannot be changed on the device. To change a setting, you must install an updated profile. If the profile was signed, it can be replaced only by a profile signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration Utility. The identifier in both profiles must match in order for the updated profile to be recognized as a replacement. For more information about the identifier, see “General Settings” on page 31. Important: Removing a configuration profile removes policies and all of the Exchange account’s data stored on the device, as well as VPN settings, certificates, and other information, including mail messages, associated with the profile. If the General Settings payload of the profile specifies that it cannot be removed by the user, the Remove button won’t appear. If the settings allows removal using an authorization password, the user will be asked to enter the password after tapping Remove. For more information about profile security settings, see “General Settings” on page 31.3 44 3 Manually Configuring Devices This chapter describes how to manually configure iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad. If you don’t provide automatic configuration profiles, users can configure their devices manually. Some settings, such as passcode policies, can only be set by using a configuration profile. VPN Settings To change VPN settings, go to Settings > General > Network > VPN. When you configure VPN settings, the device asks you to enter information based on responses it receives from your VPN server. For example, you’ll be asked for an RSA SecurID token if the server requires one. You cannot configure a certificate-based VPN connection unless the appropriate certificates are installed on the device. See “Installing Identities and Root Certificates” on page 54 for more information. VPN On Demand cannot be configured on the device, you set this up using a configuration profile. See “VPN On Demand” on page 35. VPN Proxy Settings For all configurations you can also specify a VPN proxy. To configure a single proxy for all connections, tap Manual and provide the address, port, and authentication if necessary. To provide the device with an auto-proxy configuration file, tap Auto and specify the URL of the PACS file. To specify auto-proxy configuration using WPAD, tap Auto. The device will query DHCP and DNS for the WPAD settings. See Other Resources at the end of this chapter for PACS file samples and resources.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 45 Cisco IPSec Settings When you manually configure the device for Cisco IPSec VPN, a screen similar to the following appears: Use this chart to identify the settings and information you enter: Field Description Description A descriptive title that identifies this group of settings. Server The DNS name or IP address of the VPN server to connect to. Account The user name of the user’s VPN login account. Don’t enter the group name in this field. Password The passphrase of the user’s VPN login account. Leave blank for RSA SecurID and CryptoCard authentication, or if you want the user to enter their password manually with every connection attempt. Use Certificate This will be available only if you’ve installed a .p12 or .pfx identity that contains a certificate provisioned for remote access and the private key for the certificate. When Use Certificate is on, the Group Name and Shared Secret fields are replaced with an Identify field that lets you pick from a list of installed VPN-compatible identities. Group Name The name of the group that the user belongs to as defined on the VPN server. Secret The group’s shared secret. This is the same for every member of the user’s assigned group. It’s not the user’s password and must be specified to initiate a connection.46 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices PPTP Settings When you manually configure the device for PPTP VPN, a screen similar to the following appears: Use this chart to identify the settings and information you enter: Field Description Description A descriptive title that identifies this group of settings. Server The DNS name or IP address of the VPN server to connect to. Account The user name of the user’s VPN login account. RSA SecurID If you’re using an RSA SecurID token, turn on this option, so the Password field is hidden. Password The passphrase of the user’s VPN login account. Encryption Level The default is Auto, which selects the highest encryption level that is available, starting with 128-bit, then 40-bit, then None. Maximum is 128-bit only. None turns off encryption. Send All Traffic The default is On. Sends all network traffic over the VPN link. Turn off to enable split-tunneling, which routes only traffic destined for servers inside the VPN through the server. Other traffic is routed directly to the Internet. Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 47 L2TP Settings When you manually configure the device for L2TP VPN, a screen similar to the following appears: Use this chart to identify the settings and information you enter: Field Description Description A descriptive title that identifies this group of settings. Server The DNS name or IP address of the VPN server to connect to. Account The user name of the user’s VPN login account. Password The password of the user’s VPN login account. Secret The shared secret (pre-shared key) for the L2TP account. This is the same for all LT2P users. Send All Traffic The default is On. Sends all network traffic over the VPN link. Turn off to enable split-tunneling, which routes only traffic destined for servers inside the VPN through the server. Other traffic is routed directly to the Internet. 48 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices Wi-Fi Settings To change Wi-Fi settings, go to Settings > General > Network > Wi-Fi. If the network you’re adding is within range, select it from the list of available networks. Otherwise, tap Other. Make sure that your network infrastructure uses authentication and encryption supported by iPhone and iPod touch. For specifications, see “Network Security” on page 11. For information about installing certificates for authentication, see “Installing Identities and Root Certificates” on page 54.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 49 Exchange Settings You can configure only one Exchange account per device. To add an Exchange account, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, and then tap Add Account. On the Add Account screen, tap Microsoft Exchange. When you manually configure the device for Exchange, use this chart to identify the settings and information you enter: iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support Microsoft’s Autodiscover service, which uses your user name and password to determine the address of the front-end Exchange server. If the server’s address can’t be determined, you’ll be asked to enter it. If your Exchange server listens for connections on a port other than 443, specify the port number in the Server field using the format exchange.example.com:portnumber. Field Description Email The user’s complete email address. Domain The domain of the user’s Exchange account. Username The user name of the user’s Exchange account. Password The password of the user’s Exchange account. Description A descriptive title that identifies this account.50 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices After the Exchange account is successfully configured, the server’s passcode policies are enforced. If the user’s current passcode doesn’t comply with the Exchange ActiveSync policies, the user is prompted to change or set the passcode. The device won’t communicate with the Exchange server until the user sets a compliant passcode. Next, the device offers to immediately sync with the Exchange server. If you choose not to sync at this time, you can turn on calendar and contact syncing later in Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. By default, Exchange ActiveSync pushes new data to your device as it arrives on the server. If you prefer to fetch new data on a schedule or to only pull new data manually, use Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Fetch New Data to change the settings. To change how many days’ worth of mail messages are synced to your device, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, and then select the Exchange account. You can also select which folders, in addition to the inbox, are included in push email delivery. To change the setting for calendar data go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Sync.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 51 LDAP Settings iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad can look up contact information on LDAP directory servers. To add an LDAP server, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Add Account > Other. Then tap Add LDAP Account. Enter the LDAP server address, and user name and password if required, then tap Next. If the server is reachable and supplies default search settings to the device, the settings will be used. 52 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices The following Search Scope settings are supported: You can define multiple sets of search settings for each server. CalDAV Settings iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad work with CalDAV calendar servers that provide group calendars and scheduling. To add a CalDAV server, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Add Account > Other. Then tap Add CalDAV Account. Enter the CalDAV server address, and user name and password if necessary, then tap Next. After the server is contacted, additional fields appear that allow you to set more options. Search Scope setting Description Base Searches the base object only. One Level Searches objects one level below the base object, but not the base object itself. Subtree Searches the base object and the entire tree of all objects descended from it.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 53 Calendar Subscription Settings You can add read-only calendars, such as project schedules or holidays. To add a calendar, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Add Account > Other and then tap Add Subscribed Calendar. Enter the URL for an iCalendar (.ics) file, and the user name and password if necessary, then tap Save. You can also specify whether alarms that are set in the calendar should be removed when the calendar is added to the device. In addition to adding calendar subscriptions manually, you can send users a webcal:// URL (or an http:// link to a .ics file) and, after the user taps the link, the device will offer to add it as a subscribed calendar.54 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices Installing Identities and Root Certificates If you don’t distribute certificates using profiles, your users can install them manually by using the device to download them from a website, or by opening an attachment in an email message. The device recognizes certificates with the following MIME types and file extensions:  application/x-pkcs12, .p12, .pfx  application/x-x509-ca-cert, .cer, .crt, .der See “Certificates and Identities” on page 11 for more information about supported formats and other requirements. When a certificate or identity is downloaded to the device, the Install Profile screen appears. The description indicates the type: identity or certificate authority. To install the certificate, tap Install. If it’s an identity certificate, you’ll be asked to enter the certificate’s password. To view or remove an installed certificate, go to Settings > General > Profile. If you remove a certificate that’s required for accessing an account or network, your device cannot connect to those services.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 55 Additional Mail Accounts You can configure only one Exchange account, but you can add multiple POP and IMAP accounts. This can be used, for example, to access mail on a Lotus Notes or Novell Groupwise mail server. Go to Settings > Accounts > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Add Account > Other. For more about adding an IMAP account, see the iPhone User Guide, iPod touch User Guide, or iPad User Guide. Updating and Removing Profiles For information about how a user updates or removes configuration profiles, see “Removing and Updating Configuration Profiles” on page 43. For information about installing distribution provisioning profiles, see “Deploying Applications” on page 63. Other Resources For information about the format and function of auto-proxy configuration files, used by the VPN proxy settings, see the following:  Proxy auto-config (PAC) at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proxy_auto-config  Web Proxy Autodiscovery Protocol at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wpad  Microsoft TechNet “Using Automatic Configuration, Automatic Proxy, and Automatic Detection” at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd361918.aspx Apple has several video tutorials, viewable in a standard web browser, that show your users how to set up and use the features of iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad:  iPhone Guided Tour at www.apple.com/iphone/guidedtour/  iPod touch Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipodtouch/guidedtour/  iPad Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipad/guided-tours/  iPhone Support webpage at www.apple.com/support/iphone/  iPod touch Support webpage at www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch/  iPad Support webpage at www.apple.com/support/ipad/ There is also a user guide for each device, in PDF, that provides additional tips and usage details:  iPhone User Guide: http://manuals.info.apple.com/en/iPhone_User_Guide.pdf  iPod touch User Guide: http://manuals.info.apple.com/en/iPod_touch_User_Guide.pdf  iPad User Guide: http://manuals.info.apple.com/en/iPad_User_Guide.pdf56 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 4 57 4 Deploying iTunes You use iTunes to sync music and video, install applications, and more. This chapter describes how to deploy iTunes and enterprise applications, and defines the settings and restrictions you can specify. iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad can sync each type of data (music, media, etc) to only one computer at a time. For example, you can sync music with a desktop computer and bookmarks with a portable computer, by setting iTunes sync options appropriately on both computers. See iTunes Help, available in the Help menu when iTunes is open, for more information about sync options. Installing iTunes iTunes uses standard Macintosh and Windows installers. The latest version and a list of system requirements is available for downloading at www.itunes.com. For information about licensing requirements for distributing iTunes, see: http://developer.apple.com/softwarelicensing/agreements/itunes.html Installing iTunes on Windows Computers When you install iTunes on Windows computers, by default you also install the latest version of QuickTime, Bonjour, and Apple Software Update. You can omit these components by passing parameters to the iTunes installer, or by pushing only the components you want to install on your users’ computers.58 Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes Installing on Windows using iTunesSetup.exe If you plan to use the regular iTunes installation process but omit some components, you can pass properties to iTunesSetup.exe using the command line. Silently Installing on Windows To silently install iTunes, extract the individual .msi files from iTunesSetup.exe, then push the files to client computers. To extract .msi files from iTunesSetup.exe: 1 Run iTunesSetup.exe. 2 Open %temp% and find a folder named IXPnnn.TMP, where %temp% is your temporary directory and nnn is a 3-digit random number. On Windows XP, the temporary directory is typically bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\temp\. On Windows Vista, the temporary directory is typically \Users\user\AppData\Local\Temp\. 3 Copy the .msi files from the folder to another location. 4 Quit the installer opened by iTunesSetup.exe. Then use Group Policy Object Editor, in the Microsoft Management Console, to add the .msi files to a Computer Configuration policy. Make sure to add the configuration to the Computer Configuration policy, not the User Configuration policy. Important: iTunes requires QuickTime and Apple Application Support. Apple Application Support must be installed before installing iTunes. Apple Mobile Device Services (AMDS) is necessary to use an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch with iTunes. Before pushing the .msi files, you need to select which localized versions of iTunes you want to install. To do so, open the .msi in the ORCA tool, which is installed by the Windows SDK as Orca.msi, in bin\. Then edit the summary information stream and remove the languages that you don’t want to install. (Locale ID1033 is English.) Alternatively, use the Group Policy Object Editor to change the deployment properties of the .msi files to Ignore Language. Property Meaning NO_AMDS=1 Don’t install Apple Mobile Device Services. This component is required for iTunes to sync and manage mobile devices. NO_ASUW=1 Don’t install Apple Software Update for Windows. This application alerts users to new versions of Apple software. NO_BONJOUR=1 Don’t install Bonjour. Bonjour provides zero-configuration network discovery of printers, shared iTunes libraries, and other services. NO_QUICKTIME=1 Don’t install QuickTime. This component is required to use iTunes. Don’t omit QuickTime unless you’re sure the client computer already has the latest version installed.Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes 59 Installing iTunes on Macintosh Computers Mac computers come with iTunes installed. The latest version of iTunes is available at www.itunes.com. To push iTunes to Mac clients, you can use Workgroup Manager, an administrative tool included with Mac OS X Server. Quickly Activating Devices with iTunes Before a new iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad can be used, it must be activated by connecting it to a computer that is running iTunes. Normally, after activating a device, iTunes offers to sync the device with the computer. To avoid this when you’re setting up a device for someone else, turn on activation-only mode. This causes iTunes to automatically eject a device after it’s activated. The device is then ready to configure, but doesn’t have any media or data. To turn on activation-only mode on Mac OS X: 1 Make sure iTunes isn’t running, and then open Terminal. 2 In Terminal, enter a command:  To turn activation-only mode on: defaults write com.apple.iTunes StoreActivationMode -integer 1  To turn activation-only mode off: defaults delete com.apple.iTunes StoreActivationMode To activate a device, see “Using Activation-only Mode,” below. To turn on activation-only mode on Windows: 1 Make sure iTunes isn’t running, and then open a Command Prompt window. 2 Enter a command:  To turn activation-only mode on: "C:\Program Files\iTunes\iTunes.exe" /setPrefInt StoreActivationMode 1  To turn activation-only mode off: "C:\Program Files\iTunes\iTunes.exe" /setPrefInt StoreActivationMode 0 You can also create a shortcut, or edit the iTunes shortcut you already have, to include these commands so you can quickly toggle activation-only mode. To verify that iTunes is in activation-only mode, choose iTunes > About iTunes and look for the text “Activation-only mode” under the iTunes version and build identifier.60 Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes Using Activation-Only Mode Make sure that you’ve turned on activation-only mode as described above, and then follow these steps. 1 If you’re activating an iPhone, insert an activated SIM card. Use the SIM eject tool, or a straightened paper clip, to eject the SIM tray. See the iPhone User Guide for details. 2 Connect iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad to the computer. The computer must be connected to the Internet to activate the device. iTunes opens, if necessary, and activates the device. A message appears when the device is successfully activated. 3 Disconnect the device. You can immediately connect and activate additional devices. iTunes won’t sync with any device while activation-only mode is on, so don’t forget to turn activation-only mode off if you plan on using iTunes to sync devices. Setting iTunes Restrictions You can restrict your users from using certain iTunes features. This is sometimes referred to as parental controls. The following features can be restricted:  Automatic and user-initiated checking for new versions of iTunes and device software updates  Displaying Genius suggestions while browsing or playing media  Automatically syncing when devices are connected  Downloading album artwork  Using Visualizer plug-ins  Entering a URL of streaming media  Automatically discovering Apple TV systems  Registering new devices with Apple  Subscribing to podcasts  Playing Internet radio  Accessing the iTunes Store  Library sharing with local network computers also running iTunes  Playing iTunes media content that is marked as explicit  Playing movies  Playing TV showsChapter 4 Deploying iTunes 61 Setting iTunes Restrictions for Mac OS X On Mac OS X, you control access by using keys in a plist file. On Mac OS X the key values shown above can be specified for each user by editing ~/Library/Preferences/ com.apple.iTunes.plist using Workgroup Manager, an administrative tool included with Mac OS X Server. For instructions, see the Apple Support article at http://docs.info.apple.com/ article.html?artnum=303099. Setting iTunes Restrictions for Windows On Windows, you control access by setting registry values inside one of the following registry keys: On Windows XP and 32-bit Windows Vista:  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Apple Computer, Inc.\iTunes\[SID]\Parental Controls\  HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Apple Computer, Inc.\iTunes\Parental Controls On 64-bit Windows Vista:  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Wow6432Node\Apple Computer, Inc.\iTunes\[SID]\Parental Controls\  HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Wow6432Node\Apple Computer, Inc.\iTunes\Parental Controls For information about the iTunes registry values, see the Apple Support article at http://support.apple.com/kb/HT2102. For general information about editing the Windows registry, see the Microsoft Help and Support article at http://support.microsoft.com/kb/136393. Updating iTunes and iPhone OS Manually If you turn off automated and user-initiated software update checking in iTunes, you’ll need to distribute software updates to users for manual installation. To update iTunes, see the installation and deployment steps described earlier in this document. It’s the same process you followed for distributing iTunes to your users.62 Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes To update iPhone OS, follow these steps: 1 On a computer that doesn’t have iTunes software updating turned off, use iTunes to download the software update. To do so, select an attached device in iTunes, click the Summary tab, and then click the “Check for Update” button. 2 After downloading, copy the updater file (.ipsw) found in the following location:  On Mac OS X: ~/Library/iTunes/iPhone Software Updates/  On Windows XP: bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\ Apple Computer\iTunes\iPhone Software Updates\ 3 Distribute the .ipsw file to your users, or place it on the network where they can access it. 4 Tell your users to back up their device with iTunes before applying the update. During manual updates, iTunes doesn’t automatically back up the device before installation. To create a new backup, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the device in the iTunes sidebar. Then choose Back Up from the contextual menu that appears. 5 Your users install the update by connecting their device to iTunes, then selecting the Summary tab for their device. Next, they hold down the Option (Mac) or Shift (Windows) key and click the “Check for Update” button. 6 A file selector dialog appears. Users should select the .ipsw file and then click Open to begin the update process. Backing Up a Device with iTunes When iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad is synced with iTunes, device settings are automatically backed up to the computer. Applications purchased from the App Store are copied to the iTunes Library. Applications you’ve developed yourself, and distributed to your users with enterprise distribution profiles, won’t be backed up or transferred to the user’s computer. But the device backup will include any data files your application creates. Device backups can be stored in encrypted format by selecting the Encrypt Backup option for the device in the summary pane of iTunes. Files are encrypted using AES256. The key is stored securely in the iPhone OS keychain. Important: If the device being backed up has any encrypted profiles installed, iTunes requires the user to enable backup encryption.5 63 5 Deploying Applications You can distribute iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad applications to your users. If you want to install iPhone OS applications that you’ve developed, you distribute the application to your users, who install the applications using iTunes. Applications from the online App Store work on iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad without any additional steps. If you develop an application that you want to distribute yourself, it must be digitally signed with a certificate issued by Apple. You must also provide your users with a distribution provisioning profile that allows their device to use the application. The process for deploying your own applications is:  Register for enterprise development with Apple.  Sign your applications using your certificate.  Create an enterprise distribution provisioning profile that authorizes devices to use applications you’ve signed.  Deploy the application and the enterprise distribution provisioning profile to your users’ computers.  Instruct users to install the application and profile using iTunes. See below for more about each of these steps. Registering for Application Development To develop and deploy custom applications for iPhone OS, first register for the iPhone Enterprise Developer Program at http://developer.apple.com/. Once you complete the registration process, you’ll receive instructions for enabling your applications to work on devices.64 Chapter 5 Deploying Applications Signing Applications Applications you distribute to users must be signed with your distribution certificate. For instructions about obtaining and using a certificate, see the iPhone Developer Center at http://developer.apple.com/iphone. Creating the Distribution Provisioning Profile Distribution provisioning profiles let you create applications that your users can use on their device. You create an enterprise distribution provisioning profile for a specific application, or multiple applications, by specifying the AppID that is authorized by the profile. If a user has an application, but doesn’t have a profile that authorizes its use, the user isn’t able to use the application. The designated Team Agent for your enterprise can create distribution provisioning profiles at the Enterprise Program Portal at http://developer.apple.com/iphone. See the website for instructions. Once you create the enterprise distribution provisioning profile, download the .mobileprovision file, and then securely distribute it and your application. Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iTunes The user’s installed copy of iTunes automatically installs provisioning profiles that are located in the following folders defined in this section. If the folders don’t exist, create them using the names shown. Mac OS X  ~/Library/MobileDevice/Provisioning Profiles/  /Library/MobileDevice/Provisioning Profiles/  the path specified by the ProvisioningProfilesPath key in ~/Library/Preferences/ com.apple.itunes Windows XP  bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\username\Application Data\Apple Computer\ MobileDevice\Provisioning Profiles  bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Apple Computer\ MobileDevice\Provisioning Profiles  the path specified in the HKCU or HKLM by the ProvisioningProfilesPath registry key SOFTWARE\Apple Computer, Inc\iTunesChapter 5 Deploying Applications 65 Windows Vista  bootdrive:\Users\username\AppData\Roaming\Apple Computer\MobileDevice\ Provisioning Profiles  bootdrive:\ProgramData\Apple Computer\MobileDevice\Provisioning Profiles  the path specified in the HKCU or HKLM by the ProvisioningProfilesPath registry key SOFTWARE\Apple Computer, Inc\iTunes iTunes automatically installs provisioning profiles found in the locations above onto devices it syncs with. Once installed, the provisioning profiles can be viewed on the device in Settings > General > Profiles. You can also distribute the .mobileprovision file to your users and have them drag it to the iTunes application icon. iTunes will copy the file to the correct location as defined above. Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility You can use iPhone Configuration Utility to install provisioning profiles on connected devices. Follow these steps: 1 In iPhone Configuration Utility, choose File > Add to Library, and then select the provisioning profile that you want to install. The profile is added to iPhone Configuration Utility and can be viewed by selecting the Provisioning Profiles category in the Library. 2 Select a device in the Connected Devices list. 3 Click the Provisioning Profiles tab. 4 Select the provisioning profile in the list, and then click its Install button. Installing Applications Using iTunes Your users use iTunes to install applications on their devices. Securely distribute the application to your users and then have them follow these steps: 1 In iTunes, choose File > Add to Library and select the application (.app) you provided. You can also drag the .app file to the iTunes application icon. 2 Connect a device to the computer, and then select it in the Devices list in iTunes. 3 Click the Applications tab, and then select the application in the list. 4 Click Apply to install the application and all distribution provisioning profiles that are located in the designated folders discussed in “Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iTunes” on page 64.66 Chapter 5 Deploying Applications Installing Applications Using iPhone Configuration Utility You can use iPhone Configuration Utility to install applications on connected devices. Follow these steps: 1 In iPhone Configuration Utility, choose File > Add to Library, and then select the application that you want to install. The application is added to iPhone Configuration Utility and can be viewed by selecting the Applications category in the Library. 2 Select a device in the Connected Devices list. 3 Click the Applications tab. 4 Select the application in the list, and then click its Install button. Using Enterprise Applications When a user runs an application that isn’t signed by Apple, the device looks for a distribution provisioning profile that authorizes its use. If a profile isn’t found, the application won’t open. Disabling an Enterprise Application If you need to disable an in-house application, you can do so by revoking the identity used to sign the distribution provisioning profile. The application will no longer be able to be installed, and if it’s already installed, it will no longer open. Other Resources For more information about creating applications and provisioning profiles, see:  iPhone Developer Center at http://developer.apple.com/iphone/Appendix A Cisco VPN Server Configuration 67 A Cisco VPN Server Configuration Use these guidelines to configure your Cisco VPN server for use with iPhone, iPod touch and iPad. Supported Cisco Platforms iPhone OS supports Cisco ASA 5500 Security Appliances and PIX Firewalls configured with 7.2.x software or later. The latest 8.0.x software release (or later) is recommended. iPhone OS also supports Cisco IOS VPN routers with IOS version 12.4(15)T or later. VPN 3000 Series Concentrators don’t support iPhone VPN capabilities. Authentication Methods iPhone OS supports the following authentication methods:  Pre-shared key IPSec authentication with user authentication via xauth  Client and server certificates for IPSec authentication with optional user authentication via xauth  Hybrid authentication where the server provides a certificate and the client provides a pre-shared key for IPSec authentication; user authentication is required via xauth.  User authentication is provided via xauth and includes the following authentication methods:  User name with password  RSA SecurID  CryptoCard68 Appendix A Cisco VPN Server Configuration Authentication Groups The Cisco Unity protocol uses authentication groups to group users together based on a common set of authentication and other parameters. You should create an authentication group for iPhone OS device users. For pre-shared key and hybrid authentication, the group name must be configured on the device with the group’s shared secret (pre-shared key) as the group password. When using certificate authentication, no shared secret is used and the user’s group is determined based on fields in the certificate. The Cisco server settings can be used to map fields in a certificate to user groups. Certificates When setting up and installing certificates, make sure of the following:  The server identity certificate must contain the server’s DNS name and/or IP address in the subject alternate name (SubjectAltName) field. The device uses this information to verify that the certificate belongs to the server. You can specify the SubjectAltName using wildcard characters for per-segment matching, such as vpn.*.mycompany.com, for more flexibility. The DNS name can be put in the common name field, if no SubjectAltName is specified.  The certificate of the CA that signed the server’s certificate should be installed on the device. If it isn’t a root certificate, install the rest of the trust chain so that the certificate is trusted.  If client certificates are used, make sure that the trusted CA certificate that signed the client’s certificate is installed on the VPN server.  The certificates and certificate authorities must be valid (not expired, for example.).  Sending of certificate chains by the server isn’t supported and should be turned off.  When using certificate-based authentication, make sure that the server is set up to identify the user’s group based on fields in the client certificate. See “Authentication Groups” on page 68.Appendix A Cisco VPN Server Configuration 69 IPSec Settings Use the following IPSec settings:  Mode: Tunnel Mode  IKE Exchange Modes: Aggressive Mode for pre-shared key and hybrid authentication, Main Mode for certificate authentication.  Encryption Algorithms: 3DES, AES-128, AES-256  Authentication Algorithms: HMAC-MD5, HMAC-SHA1  Diffie Hellman Groups: Group 2 is required for pre-shared key and hybrid. authentication. For certificate authentication, use Group 2 with 3DES and AES-128. Use Group 2 or 5 with AES-256.  PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy): For IKE phase 2, if PFS is used the Diffie-Hellman group must be the same as was used for IKE phase 1.  Mode Configuration: Must be enabled.  Dead Peer Detection: Recommended.  Standard NAT Transversal: Supported and can be enabled if desired. (IPSec over TCP isn’t supported).  Load Balancing: Supported and can be enabled if desired.  Re-keying of Phase 1: Not currently supported. Recommend that re-keying times on the server be set to approximately one hour.  ASA Address Mask: Make sure that all device address pool masks are either not set, or are set to 255.255.255.255. For example: asa(config-webvpn)# ip local pool vpn_users 10.0.0.1-10.0.0.254 mask 255.255.255.255. When using the recommended address mask, some routes assumed by the VPN configuration might be ignored. To avoid this, make sure that your routing table contains all necessary routes and verify that the subnet addresses are accessible before deployment. Other Supported Features iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support the following features:  Application Version: The client software version is sent to the server, allowing the server to accept or reject connections based on the device’s software version.  Banner: The banner, if configured on the server, is displayed on the device and the user must accept it or disconnect.  Split Tunnel: Split tunneling is supported.  Split DNS: Split DNS is supported.  Default Domain: Default domain is supported.70 B Appendix B Configuration Profile Format This appendix specifies the format of mobileconfig files for those who want to create their own tools. This document assumes that you’re familiar with the Apple XML DTD and the general property list format. A general description of the Apple plist format is available at www.apple.com/DTDs/PropertyList-1.0.dtd. To get started, use iPhone Configuration Utility to create a skeleton file that you can modify using the information in this appendix. This document uses the terms payload and profile. A profile is the whole file that configures certain (single or multiple) settings on iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad. A payload is an individual component of the profile file. Root Level At the root level, the configuration file is a dictionary with the following key/value pairs: Key Value PayloadVersion Number, mandatory. The version of the whole configuration profile file. This version number designates the format of the whole profile, not the individual payloads. PayloadUUID String, mandatory. This is usually a synthetically generated unique identifier string. The exact content of this string is irrelevant; however, it must be globally unique. On Mac OS X, you can generate UUIDs with /usr/bin/uuidgen. PayloadType String, mandatory. Currently, only “Configuration” is a valid value for this key. PayloadOrganization String, optional. This value describes the issuing organization of the profile, as displayed to the user.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 71 Payload Content The PayloadContent array is an array of dictionaries, where each dictionary describes an individual payload of the profile. Each functional profile has at least one or more entries in this array. Each dictionary in this array has a few common properties, regardless of the payload type. Others are specialized and unique to each payload type. PayloadIdentifier String, mandatory. This value is by convention a dot-delimited string uniquely describing the profile, such as “com.myCorp.iPhone.mailSettings” or “edu.myCollege.students.vpn”. This is the string by which profiles are differentiated—if a profile is installed which matches the identifier of another profile, it overrides it (instead of being added). PayloadDisplayName String, mandatory. This value determines a very short string to be displayed to the user describing the profile, such as “VPN Settings”. It does not have to be unique. PayloadDescription String, optional. This value determines what descriptive, freeform text will be shown to the user on the Detail screen for the entire profile. This string should clearly identify the profile so the user can decide whether to install it. PayloadContent Array, optional. This value is the actual content of the profile. If it is omitted, the whole profile has no functional meaning. PayloadRemovalDisallowed Boolean, optional. Default is No. If set, the user won’t be able to delete the profile. A profile with this set can be updated via USB or web/email only if the profile identifier matches and is signed by the same authority. If a removal password is provided, the profile can be deleted by specifying the password. With signed and encrypted profiles, having this locking bit in plain view is without consequence because the profile can’t be altered and this setting is also shown on the device. Key Value Key Value PayloadVersion Number, mandatory. The version of the individual payload. Each profile can consist of payloads with different version numbers. For instance, the VPN version number can be incremented at a point in the future while the Mail version number would not. PayloadUUID String, mandatory. This is usually a synthetically generated unique identifier string. The exact content of this string is irrelevant; however, it must be globally unique. PayloadType String, mandatory. This key/value pair determines the type of the individual payload within the profile. PayloadOrganization String, optional. This value describes the issuing organization of the profile, as it will be shown to the user. It can be, but doesn’t have to be, the same as the root level PayloadOrganization.72 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format Profile Removal Password Payload The Removal Password payload is designated by the com.apple.profileRemovalPassword value of PayloadType. It’s purpose is to encode the password that allows users to remove a configuration profile from the device. If this payload is present, and has a password value set, the device will ask for the password when the user taps a profile’s Remove button. This payload is encrypted with the rest of the profile. Passcode Policy Payload The Passcode Policy payload is designated by the com.apple.mobiledevice.passwordpolicy PayloadType value. The presence of this payload type prompts device to present the user with an alphanumeric passcode entry mechanism, which allows the entry of arbitrarily long and complex passcodes. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: PayloadIdentifier String, mandatory. This value is by convention a dot-delimited string uniquely describing the payload. It’s usually the root PayloadIdentifier with an appended subidentifier, describing the particular payload. PayloadDisplayName String, mandatory. This value is a very short string displayed to the user which describes the profile, such as “VPN Settings”. It does not have to be unique. PayloadDescription String, optional. This value determines what descriptive, free-form text is displayed on the Detail screen for this particular payload. Key Value Key Value RemovalPassword String, optional. Specifies the removal password for the profile. Key Value allowSimple Boolean, optional. Default YES. Determines whether a simple passcode is allowed. A simple passcode is defined as containing repeated characters, or increasing/decreasing characters (such as 123 or CBA). Setting this value to “NO” is synonymous to setting minComplexChars to “1”. forcePIN Boolean, optional. Default NO. Determines whether the user is forced to set a PIN. Simply setting this value (and not others) forces the user to enter a passcode, without imposing a length or quality. Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 73 Email Payload The email payload is designated by the com.apple.mail.managed PayloadType value. This payload creates an email account on the device. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: maxFailedAttempts Number, optional. Default 11. Allowed range [2...11]. Specifies the number of allowed failed attempts to enter the passcode at the device’s lock screen. Once this number is exceeded, the device is locked and must be connected to its designated iTunes in order to be unlocked. maxInactivity Number, optional. Default Infinity. Specifies the number of minutes for which the device can be idle (without being unlocked by the user) before it’s locked by the system. Once this limit is reached, the device is locked and the passcode must be entered. maxPINAgeInDays Number, optional. Default Infinity. Specifies the number of days for which the passcode can remain unchanged. After this number of days, the user is forced to change the passcode before the device is unlocked. minComplexChars Number, optional. Default 0. Specifies the minimum number of complex characters that a passcode must contain. A “complex” character is a character other than a number or a letter, such as &%$#. minLength Number, optional. Default 0. Specifies the minimum overall length of the passcode. This parameter is independent of the also optional minComplexChars argument. requireAlphanumeric Boolean, optional. Default NO. Specifies whether the user must enter alphabetic characters (“abcd”), or if numbers are sufficient. pinHistory Number, optional. When the user changes the passcode, it has to be unique within the last N entries in the history. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 50. manualFetchingWhenRoaming Boolean, optional. If set, all push operations will be disabled when roaming. The user has to manually fetch new data. maxGracePeriod Number, optional. The maximum grace period, in minutes, to unlock the phone without entering a passcode. Default is 0, that is no grace period, which requires a passcode immediately. Key Value Key Value EmailAccountDescription String, optional. A user-visible description of the email account, shown in the Mail and Settings applications. EmailAccountName String, optional. The full user name for the account. This is the user name in sent messages, etc.74 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format EmailAccountType String, mandatory. Allowed values are EmailTypePOP and EmailTypeIMAP. Defines the protocol to be used for that account. EmailAddress String, mandatory. Designates the full email address for the account. If not present in the payload, the device prompts for this string during profile installation. IncomingMailServerAuthentication String, mandatory. Designates the authentication scheme for incoming mail. Allowed values are EmailAuthPassword and EmailAuthNone. IncomingMailServerHostName String, mandatory. Designates the incoming mail server host name (or IP address). IncomingMailServerPortNumber Number, optional. Designates the incoming mail server port number. If no port number is specified, the default port for a given protocol is used. IncomingMailServerUseSSL Boolean, optional. Default Yes. Designates whether the incoming mail server uses SSL for authentication. IncomingMailServerUsername String, mandatory. Designates the user name for the email account, usually the same as the email address up to the @ character. If not present in the payload, and the account is set up to require authentication for incoming email, the device will prompt for this string during profile installation. IncomingPassword String, optional. Password for the Incoming Mail Server. Use only with encrypted profiles. OutgoingPassword String, optional. Password for the Outgoing Mail Server. Use only with encrypted profiles. OutgoingPasswwordSameAsIncomi ngPassword Boolean, optional. If set, the user will be prompted for the password only once and it will be used for both outgoing and incoming mail. OutgoingMailServerAuthentication String, mandatory. Designates the authentication scheme for outgoing mail. Allowed values are EmailAuthPassword and EmailAuthNone. OutgoingMailServerHostName String, mandatory. Designates the outgoing mail server host name (or IP address). OutgoingMailServerPortNumber Number, optional. Designates the outgoing mail server port number. If no port number is specified, ports 25, 587 and 465 are used, in this order. OutgoingMailServerUseSSL Boolean, optional. Default Yes. Designates whether the outgoing mail server uses SSL for authentication. OutgoingMailServerUsername String, mandatory. Designates the user name for the email account, usually the same as the email address up to the @ character. If not present in the payload, and the account is set up to require authentication for outgoing email, the device prompts for this string during profile installation. Key ValueAppendix B Configuration Profile Format 75 Web Clip Payload The Web Clip payload is designated by the com.apple.webClip.managed PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: Restrictions Payload The Restrictions payload is designated by the com.apple.applicationaccess PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: Key Value URL String, mandatory. The URL that the Web Clip should open when clicked. The URL must begin with HTTP or HTTPS or it won’t work. Label String, mandatory. The name of the Web Clip as displayed on the Home screen. Icon Data, optional. A PNG icon to be shown on the Home screen. Should be 59 x 60 pixels in size. If not specified, a white square will be shown. IsRemovable Boolean, optional. If No, the user cannot remove the Web Clip, but it will be removed if the profile is deleted. Key Value allowAppInstallation Boolean, optional. When false, the App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to install or update their applications. allowCamera Boolean, optional. When false, the camera is completely disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to take photographs. allowExplicitContent Boolean, optional. When false, explicit music or video content purchased from the iTunes Store is hidden. Explicit content is marked as such by content providers, such as record labels, when sold through the iTunes Store. allowScreenShot Boolean, optional. When false, users are unable to save a screenshot of the display. allowYouTube Boolean, optional. When false, the YouTube application is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. allowiTunes Boolean, optional. When false, the iTunes Music Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users cannot preview, purchase, or download content. allowSafari Boolean, optional. When false, the Safari web browser application is disabled and its icon removed from the Home screen. This also prevents users from opening web clips.76 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format LDAP Payload The LDAP payload is designated by the com.apple.ldap.account PayloadType value. There’s a one-to-many relationship from LDAP Account to LDAPSearchSettings. Think of LDAP as a tree. Each SearchSettings object represents a node in the tree to start the search at, and what scope to search for (node, node+1 level of children, node + all levels of children). In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: CalDAV Payload The CalDAV payload is designated by the com.apple.caldav.account PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: Key Value LDAPAccountDescription String, optional. Description of the account. LDAPAccountHostName String, mandatory. The host. LDAPAccountUseSSL Boolean, mandatory. Whether or not to use SSL. LDAPAccountUserName String, optional. The username. LDAPAccountPassword String, optional. Use only with encrypted profiles. LDAPSearchSettings Top level container object. Can have many of these for one account. Should have at least one for the account to be useful. LDAPSearchSettingDescription String, optional. Description of this search setting. LDAPSearchSettingSearchBase String, required. Conceptually, the path to the node to start a search at “ou=people,o=example corp” LDAPSearchSettingScope String, required. Defines what recursion to use in the search. Can be one of the following 3 values: LDAPSearchSettingScopeBase: Just the immediate node pointed to by SearchBase LDAPSearchSettingScopeOneLevel: The node plus its immediate children. LDAPSearchSettingScopeSubtree: The node plus all children, regardless of depth. Key Value CalDAVAccountDescription String, optional. Description of the account. CalDAVHostName String, mandatory. The server address CalDAVUsername String, mandatory. The user’s login name. CalDAVPassword String, optional. The user’s password CalDAVUseSSL Boolean, mandatory. Whether or not to use SSL. CalDAVPort Number, optional. The port on which to connect to the server. CalDAVPrincipalURL String, optional. The base URL to the user’s calendar.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 77 Calendar Subscription Payload The CalSub payload is designated by the com.apple.subscribedcalendar.account PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: SCEP Payload The SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol) payload is designated by the com.apple.encrypted-profile-service PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: Key Value SubCalAccountDescription String, optional. Description of the account. SubCalAccountHostName String, mandatory. The server address. SubCalAccountUsername String, optional. The user’s login name SubCalAccountPassword String, optional. The user’s password. SubCalAccountUseSSL Boolean, mandatory. Whether or not to use SSL. Key Value URL String, mandatory. Name String, optional. any string which is understood by the SCEP server. For example, it could be a domain name like example.org. If a certificate authority has multiple CA certificates this field can be used to distinguish which is required. Subject Array, optional. The representation of a X.500 name represented as an array of OID and value. For example, /C=US/O=Apple Inc./ CN=foo/1.2.5.3=bar, which would translate to: [ [ [“C”, “US”] ], [ [“O”, “Apple Inc.”] ], ..., [ [ “1.2.5.3”, “bar” ] ] ] OIDs can be represented as dotted numbers, with shortcuts for C, L, ST, O, OU, CN (country, locality, state, organization, organizational unit, common name). Challenge String, optional. A pre-shared secret. Keysize Number, optional. The keysize in bits, either 1024 or 2048. Key Type String, optional. Currently always “RSA”. Key Usage Number, optional. A bitmask indicating the use of the key. 1 is signing, 4 is encryption, 5 is both signing and encryption. Some CAs, such as Windows CA, support only encryption or signing, but not both at the same time.78 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format SubjectAltName Dictionary Keys The SCEP payload can specify an optional SubjectAltName dictionary that provides values required by the CA for issuing a certificate. You can specify a single string or an array of strings for each key. The values you specify depend on the CA you’re using, but might include DNS name, URL, or email values. For an example, see “Sample Phase 3 Server Response With SCEP Specifications” on page 85. GetCACaps Dictionary Keys If you add a dictionary with the key GetCACaps, the device uses the strings you provide as the authoritative source of information about the capabilities of your CA. Otherwise, the device queries the CA for GetCACaps and uses the answer it gets in response. If the CA doesn’t respond, the device defaults to GET 3DES and SHA-1 requests. APN Payload The APN (Access Point Name) payload is designated by the com.apple.apn.managed PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: Key Value DefaultsData Dictionary, mandatory. This dictionary contains two key/value pairs. DefaultsDomainName String, mandatory. The only allowed value is com.apple.managedCarrier. apns Array, mandatory. This array contains an arbitrary number of dictionaries, each describing an APN configuration, with the key/value pairs below. apn String, mandatory. This string specifies the Access Point Name. username String, mandatory. This string specifies the user name for this APN. If it’s missing, the device prompts for it during profile installation. password Data, optional. This data represents the password for the user for this APN. For obfuscation purposes, it’s encoded. If it’s missing from the payload, the device prompts for it during profile installation. proxy String, optional. The IP address or URL of the APN proxy. proxyPort Number, optional. The port number of the APN proxy.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 79 Exchange Payload The Exchange payload is designated by the com.apple.eas.account PayloadType value. This payload creates a Microsoft Exchange account on the device. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following: VPN Payload The VPN payload is designated by the com.apple.vpn.managed PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payload types, the VPN payload defines the following keys. There are two possible dictionaries present at the top level, under the keys “PPP” and “IPSec”. The keys inside these two dictionaries are described below, along with the VPNType value under which the keys are used. Key Value EmailAddress String, mandatory. If not present in the payload, the device prompts for this string during profile installation. Specifies the full email address for the account. Host String, mandatory. Specifies the Exchange server host name (or IP address). SSL Boolean, optional. Default YES. Specifies whether the Exchange server uses SSL for authentication. UserName String, mandatory. This string specifies the user name for this Exchange account. If missing, the devices prompts for it during profile installation. Password String, optional. The password of the account. Use only with encrypted profiles. Certificate Optional. For accounts that allow authentication via certificate, a .p12 identity certificate in NSData blob format. CertificateName String, Optional. Specifies the name or description of the certificate. CertificatePassword Optional. The password necessary for the p12 identity certificate. Use only with encrypted profiles. Key Value UserDefinedName String. Description of the VPN connection displayed on the device. OverridePrimary Boolean. Specifies whether to send all traffic through the VPN interface. If true, all network traffic is sent over VPN. VPNType String. Determines the settings available in the payload for this type of VPN connection. It can have three possible values: “L2TP”, “PPTP”, or “IPSec”, representing L2TP, PPTP and Cisco IPSec respectively.80 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format PPP Dictionary Keys The following elements are for VPN payloads of type PPP. IPSec Dictionary Keys The following elements are for VPN payloads of type IPSec. Key Value AuthName String. The VPN account user name. Used for L2TP and PPTP. AuthPassword String, optional. Only visible if TokenCard is false. Used for L2TP and PPTP. TokenCard Boolean. Whether to use a token card such as an RSA SecurID card for connecting. Used for L2TP. CommRemoteAddress String. IP address or host name of VPN server. Used for L2TP and PPTP. AuthEAPPlugins Array. Only present if RSA SecurID is being used, in which case it has one entry, a string with value “EAP-RSA”. Used for L2TP and PPTP. AuthProtocol Array. Only present if RSA SecurID is being used, in which case it has one entry, a string with value “EAP”. Used for L2TP and PPTP. CCPMPPE40Enabled Boolean. See discussion under CCPEnabled. Used for PPTP. CCPMPPE128Enabled Boolean. See discussion under CCPEnabled. Used for PPTP. CCPEnabled Boolean. Enables encryption on the connection. If this key and CCPMPPE40Enabled are true, represents automatic encryption level; if this key and CCPMPPE128Enabled are true, represents maximum encryption level. If no encryption is used, then none of the CCP keys are true. Used for PPTP. Key Value RemoteAddress String. IP address or host name of the VPN server. Used for Cisco IPSec. AuthenticationMethod String. Either “SharedSecret” or “Certificate”. Used for L2TP and Cisco IPSec. XAuthName String. User name for VPN account. Used for Cisco IPSec. XAuthEnabled Integer. 1 if XAUTH is ON, 0 if it’s OFF. Used for Cisco IPSec. LocalIdentifier String. Present only if AuthenticationMethod = SharedSecret. The name of the group to use. If Hybrid Authentication is used, the string must end with “[hybrid]”. Used for Cisco IPSec. LocalIdentifierType String. Present only if AuthenticationMethod = SharedSecret. The value is “KeyID”. Used for L2TP and Cisco IPSec. SharedSecret Data. The shared secret for this VPN account. Only present if AuthenticationMethod = SharedSecret. Used for L2TP and Cisco IPSec.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 81 Wi-Fi Payload The Wi-Fi payload is designated by the com.apple.wifi.managed PayloadType value. This describes version 0 of the PayloadVersion value. In addition to the settings common to all payload types, the payload defines the following keys. For 802.1X enterprise networks, the EAP Client Configuration Dictionary must be provided. PayloadCertificateUUID String. The UUID of the certificate to use for the account credentials. Only present if AuthenticationMethod = Certificate. Used for Cisco IPSec. PromptForVPNPIN Boolean. Whether to prompt for a PIN when connecting. Used for Cisco IPSec. Key Value Key Value SSID_STR String. SSID of the Wi-Fi network to be used. HIDDEN_NETWORK Boolean. Besides SSID, the device uses information such as broadcast type and encryption type to differentiate a network. By default, it’s assumed that all configured networks are open or broadcast. To specify a hidden network, you need to include a boolean for the key “HIDDEN_NETWORK”. EncryptionType String. The possible values for “EncryptionType” are “WEP”, “WPA”, or “Any”. “WPA” corresponds to WPA and WPA2 and applies to both encryption types. Make sure that these values exactly match the capabilities of the network access point. If you’re unsure about the encryption type, or would prefer that it applies to all encryption types, use the value “Any”. Password String, optional. The absence of a password doesn’t prevent the network from being added to the list of known networks. The user is eventually prompted to provide the password when connecting to that network.82 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format EAPClientConfiguration Dictionary In addition to the standard encryption types, it’s possible to specify an enterprise profile for a given network via the “EAPClientConfiguration” key. If present, its value is a dictionary with the following keys. Key Value UserName String, optional. Unless you know the exact user name, this property won’t appear in an imported configuration. Users can enter this information when they authenticate. AcceptEAPTypes Array of integer values. These EAP types are accepted: 13 = TLS 17 = LEAP 21 = TTLS 25 = PEAP 43 = EAP-FAST PayloadCertificateAnchorUUID Array of strings, optional. Identifies the certificates to be trusted for this authentication. Each entry must contain the UUID of a certificate payload. Use this key to prevent the device from asking the user if the listed certificates are trusted. Dynamic trust (the certificate dialogue) is disabled if this property is specified, unless TLSAllowTrustExceptions is also specified with the value true. TLSTrustedServerNames Array of string values, optional. This is the list of server certificate common names that will be accepted. You can use wildcards to specify the name, such as wpa.*.example.com. If a server presents a certificate that isn’t in this list, it won’t be trusted. Used alone or in combination with TLSTrustedCertificates, the property allows someone to carefully craft which certificates to trust for the given network, and avoid dynamically trusted certificates. Dynamic trust (the certificate dialogue) is disabled if this property is specified, unless TLSAllowTrustExceptions is also specified with the value true. TLSAllowTrustExceptions Boolean, optional. Allows/disallows a dynamic trust decision by the user. The dynamic trust is the certificate dialogue that appears when a certificate isn’t trusted. If this is false, the authentication fails if the certificate isn’t already trusted. See PayloadCertificateAnchorUUID and TLSTrustedNames above. The default value of this property is true unless either PayloadCertificateAnchorUUID or TLSTrustedServerNames is supplied, in which case the default value is false.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 83 EAP-Fast Support The EAP-FAST module uses the following properties in the EAPClientConfiguration dictionary. These keys are hierarchical in nature: if EAPFASTUsePAC is false, the other two properties aren’t consulted. Similarly, if EAPFASTProvisionPAC is false, EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously isn’t consulted. If EAPFASTUsePAC is false, authentication proceeds much like PEAP or TTLS: the server proves its identity using a certificate each time. If EAPFASTUsePAC is true, then an existing PAC is used if it’s present. The only way to get a PAC on the device currently is to allow PAC provisioning. So, you need to enable EAPFASTProvisionPAC, and if desired, EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously. EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously has a security weakness: it doesn’t authenticate the server so connections are vulnerable to a man-in-the-middle attack. Certificates As with VPN configurations, it’s possible to associate a certificate identity configuration with a Wi-Fi configuration. This is useful when defining credentials for a secure enterprise network. To associate an identity, specify its payload UUID via the “PayloadCertificateUUID” key. TTLSInnerAuthentication String, optional. This is the inner authentication used by the TTLS module. The default value is “MSCHAPv2”. Possible values are “PAP”, “CHAP”, “MSCHAP”, and “MSCHAPv2”. OuterIdentity String, optional. This key is only relevant to TTLS, PEAP, and EAPFAST. This allows the user to hide his or her identity. The user’s actual name appears only inside the encrypted tunnel. For example, it could be set to “anonymous” or “anon”, or “anon@mycompany.net”. It can increase security because an attacker can’t see the authenticating user’s name in the clear. Key Value Key Value EAPFASTUsePAC Boolean, optional. EAPFASTProvisionPAC Boolean, optional. EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously Boolean, optional. Key Value PayloadCertificateUUID String. UUID of the certificate payload to use for the identity credential.84 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format Sample Configuration Profiles This section includes sample profiles that illustrate the over-the-air enrollment and configuration phases. These are excerpts and your requirements will vary from the examples. For syntax assistance, see the details provided earlier in this appendix. For a description of each phase, see “Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration” on page 22. Sample Phase 1 Server Response PayloadContent URL https://profileserver.example.com/iphone DeviceAttributes UDID IMEI ICCID VERSION PRODUCT Challenge optional challenge or base64-encoded PayloadOrganization Example Inc. PayloadDisplayName Profile Service PayloadVersion 1 PayloadUUID fdb376e5-b5bb-4d8c-829e-e90865f990c9 PayloadIdentifier com.example.mobileconfig.profile-service PayloadDescription Enter device into the Example Inc encrypted profile service PayloadType Profile Service Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 85 Sample Phase 2 Device Response UDID VERSION 7A182 MAC_ADDRESS_EN0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CHALLENGE either: String or: "base64 encoded data" Sample Phase 3 Server Response With SCEP Specifications PayloadVersion 1 PayloadUUID Ignored PayloadType Configuration PayloadIdentifier Ignored PayloadContent PayloadContent URL https://scep.example.com/scep Name EnrollmentCAInstance Subject 86 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format O Example, Inc. CN User Device Cert Challenge ... Keysize 1024 Key Type RSA Key Usage 5 PayloadDescription Provides device encryption identity PayloadUUID fd8a6b9e-0fed-406f-9571-8ec98722b713 PayloadType com.apple.security.scep PayloadDisplayName Encryption Identity PayloadVersion 1 PayloadOrganization Example, Inc. PayloadIdentifier com.example.profileservice.scep Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 87 Sample Phase 4 Device Response UDID VERSION 7A182 MAC_ADDRESS_EN0 00:00:00:00:00:00 88 C Appendix C Sample Scripts This appendix provides sample scripts for iPhone OS deployment tasks. The scripts in this section should be modified to fit your needs and configurations. Sample C# Script for iPhone Configuration Utility This sample script demonstrates creating configuration files using iPhone Configuration Utility for Windows. using System; using Com.Apple.iPCUScripting; public class TestScript : IScript { private IApplication _host; public TestScript() { } public void main(IApplication inHost) { _host = inHost; string msg = string.Format("# of config profiles : {0}", _host.ConfigurationProfiles.Count); Console.WriteLine(msg); IConfigurationProfile profile = _host.AddConfigurationProfile(); profile.Name = "Profile Via Script"; profile.Identifier = "com.example.configviascript"; profile.Organization = "Example Org"; profile.Description = "This is a configuration profile created via the new scripting feature in iPCU"; // passcode IPasscodePayload passcodePayload = profile.AddPasscodePayload(); passcodePayload.PasscodeRequired = true;Appendix C Sample Scripts 89 passcodePayload.AllowSimple = true; // restrictions IRestrictionsPayload restrictionsPayload = profile.AddRestrictionsPayload(); restrictionsPayload.AllowYouTube = false; // wi-fi IWiFiPayload wifiPayload = profile.AddWiFiPayload(); wifiPayload.ServiceSetIdentifier = "Example Wi-Fi"; wifiPayload.EncryptionType = WirelessEncryptionType.WPA; wifiPayload.Password = "password"; wifiPayload = profile.AddWiFiPayload(); profile.RemoveWiFiPayload(wifiPayload); // vpn IVPNPayload vpnPayload = profile.AddVPNPayload(); vpnPayload.ConnectionName = "Example VPN Connection"; vpnPayload = profile.AddVPNPayload(); profile.RemoveVPNPayload(vpnPayload); // email IEmailPayload emailPayload = profile.AddEmailPayload(); emailPayload.AccountDescription = "Email Account 1 Via Scripting"; emailPayload = profile.AddEmailPayload(); emailPayload.AccountDescription = "Email Account 2 Via Scripting"; // exchange IExchangePayload exchangePayload = profile.AddExchangePayload(); exchangePayload.AccountName = "ExchangePayloadAccount"; // ldap ILDAPPayload ldapPayload = profile.AddLDAPPayload(); ldapPayload.Description = "LDAP Account 1 Via Scripting"; ldapPayload = profile.AddLDAPPayload(); ldapPayload.Description = "LDAP Account 2 Via Scripting"; // webclip IWebClipPayload wcPayload = profile.AddWebClipPayload(); wcPayload.Label = "Web Clip 1 Via Scripting"; wcPayload = profile.AddWebClipPayload(); wcPayload.Label = "Web Clip 2 Via Scripting"; } }90 Appendix C Sample Scripts Sample AppleScript for iPhone Configuration Utility This sample script demonstrates creating configuration files using iPhone Configuration Utility for Mac OS X. tell application "iPhone Configuration Utility" log (count of every configuration profile) set theProfile to make new configuration profile with properties {displayed name:"Profile Via Script", profile identifier:"com.example.configviascript", organization:"Example Org.", account description:"This is a configuration profile created via AppleScript"} tell theProfile make new passcode payload with properties {passcode required:true, simple value allowed:true} make new restrictions payload with properties {YouTube allowed:false} make new WiFi payload with properties {service set identifier:"Example Wi-Fi", security type:WPA, password:"password"} set theWiFiPayload to make new WiFi payload delete theWiFiPayload make new VPN payload with properties {connection name:"Example VPN Connection"} set theVPNPayload to make new VPN payload delete theVPNPayload make new email payload with properties {account description:"Email Account 1 Via Scripting"} make new email payload with properties {account description:"Email Account 2 Via Scripting"} make new Exchange ActiveSync payload with properties {account name:"ExchangePayloadAccount"} make new LDAP payload with properties {account description:"LDAP Account 1 Via Scripting"} make new LDAP payload with properties {account description:"LDAP Account 2 Via Scripting"} make new web clip payload with properties {label:"Web Clip Account 1 Via Scripting"} make new web clip payload with properties {label:"Web Clip Account 2 Via Scripting"} end tell end tell iMovie ’08 Premiers contacts Familiarisez vous avec iMovie et révolutionnez la manière dont vous lisez, visualisez, stockez et partagez vos vidéos.2 1 Table des matières Chapitre 1 4 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 5 L’Interface iMovie 5 Une bibliothèque vidéo source unique 6 Exploration et lecture de votre vidéo 6 Création de diaporamas vidéo 6 À propos des formats de fichier vidéo 7 Éléments retenus 8 Avant de commencer 8 Éléments requis Chapitre 2 9 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 9 Étape 1 : importez une séquence dans iMovie 10 Identification du type de votre caméra et importation de séquences vidéo 20 Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo 20 À propos des événements iMovie 22 Affichage de votre vidéo source. 25 Sélection de la vidéo source 26 Marquage de la vidéo comme favorite ou à supprimer 28 Tri (filtrage) de vidéo 29 Étape 3 : améliorez les images vidéo et réglez le volume sonore 29 Rognage d’images vidéo 31 Ajustement du volume des clips 33 Étape 4 : créez un projet iMovie 34 Création d’un projet iMovie 34 Ajout de vidéo à votre projet 36 Ajout de musique de fond à votre projet 38 Suppression des images indésirables dans les clips d’un projet 40 Affichage rapide des modifications 40 Ajout de transitions entre les clips d’un projet 42 Ajout de titres à votre projet 43 Ajout d’effets sonores et de commentaires à votre projet 45 Ajout de photos avec des effets d’animation 47 Étape 5 : partager votre film 48 Publication en vue d’un affichage sur votre iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV 48 Envoi de votre film terminé vers iDVD, iWeb ou d’autres applicationsTable des matières 3 49 Publication directe sur le web 51 Poursuivez votre exploration de iMovie 52 Ressources supplémentaires1 4 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 Voici iMovie ’08, un outil révolutionnaire pour profiter, stocker et partager toutes vos vidéos personnelles. Vous pouvez importer de la vidéo dans iMovie depuis une grande variété de sources et d’appareils pour garder vos mémoires toujours à portée de main. Toutes ces séquences vidéo dont personne ne profite car elles restent dans votre appareil photo numérique ou dans votre caméscope ? Cette boîte pleine de disques et de bandes dans votre armoire ? Ajoutez-les à votre bibliothèque de vidéos pour en profiter à tout moment. Visionnez toutes vos vidéos personnelles sans avoir à déballer votre caméscope ou à le brancher à votre ordinateur ou à votre télévision. Parcourez les événements qui marquent votre vie, un moment après l’autre, année après année, d’une personne à l’autre, depuis un seul et même emplacement. iMovie facilite l’organisation et le classement de vos vidéos, en vous permettant de séparer les meilleures des moins bonnes, et d’accé- der facilement aux parties que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez également créer des séquences rapides et simples, ajouter des titres à la vidéo, des transitions de plan, une musique de fond, et des commentaires vocaux. iMovie vous permet de partager avec vos proches vos vidéos sur le Web, sur votre ordinateur, sur votre iPod, iPhone ou sur Apple TV. Avant de suivre l’initiation qui débute dans le chapitre 2, lisez les sections suivantes pour vous familiariser avec les concepts et les outils de lecture, d’organisation et de manipulation de la vidéo d’iMovie. Même si vous avez utilisé les versions précédentes d’iMovie ou d’autres applications de montage vidéo, vous tirerez profit des idées qui font qu’iMovie ’08 est différent de ce que vous avez rencontré jusqu’à présent.Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 5 L’Interface iMovie La fenêtre principale d’iMovie, ci-dessous, est la console à partir de laquelle vous visualisez, organisez et montez vos vidéos. Elle vous permet d’accéder directement à tous les outils que vous pouvez utiliser pour manipuler vos vidéos. Une bibliothèque vidéo source unique Le fait d’importer toutes vos vidéos dans iMovie, quelle que soit leur source, permet de créer une bibliothèque unique appelée bibliothèque vidéo. Dans cette bibliothèque, sélectionnez simplement le nom d’un événement que vous avez enregistré et visualisez son contenu ; c’est aussi simple que d’ouvrir un livre et d’afficher ses pages. Regrouper toutes les vidéos d’un événement unique—vos dernières vacances, par exemple— même si elles proviennent de sources différentes et sont enregistrées dans des formats vidéos différents. Vous pouvez désormais accéder à toutes les vidéos en un simple clic. Bibliothèque de Projet Enumérez tous les projets iMovie que vous avez créés. Barre d’outils iMovie La plupart des outils et des commandes dont vous avez besoin sont disponibles à cet endroit. Bibliothèque d’événements Enumérez les noms de tous les événements que vous avez enregistrés sur vidéo et assemblés Vidéo source Montre le contenu des événement que vous avez sélectionnés dans la Bibliothèque d’événements. Projet iMovie Assembler vos séquences, vos photos, votre musique et plus encore pour créer des vidéos que vous pouvez partager sur le Web, sur votre iPod, ou sur Apple TV. Visualiseur Votre vidéo est lue ici.6 Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 Exploration et lecture de votre vidéo Il n’a jamais été aussi facile de profiter de votre bibliothèque vidéo. Dès que vous sélectionnez un événement, votre vidéo est affichée sous la forme d’une pellicule cinématographique déroulée, ce qui vous permet de visualiser le contenu de chaque image du film. Lorsque vous positionnez le pointeur sur les images, ces dernières se déplacent. Ce « survol » de la vidéo vous permet de visionner un passage précis de façon instantanée sans avoir à rembobiner la bande, effectuer une avance rapide ou sélectionner et lire des clips particuliers. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur la barre d’espace ou double-cliquez n’importe où dans la vidéo pour commencer la lecture à vitesse normale. Création de diaporamas vidéo iMovie facilite la création de vidéos de meilleure qualité et plus rapides. La méthode la plus simple pour créer une vidéo personnelle de qualité consiste à monter un « diaporama vidéo », c’est-à-dire une succession de clips vidéo très courts et de durée identique, reprenant uniquement les meilleurs extraits des vidéos qui se trouvent dans votre bibliothèque. iMovie permet non seulement de réaliser ce diaporama vidéo pratiquement sans effort, mais aussi d’ajouter une musique de fond afin d’obtenir des vidéos personnelles attrayantes et bien rythmées que vous pourrez montrer fièrement à votre entourage. À propos des formats de fichier vidéo Vous pouvez à présent utiliser une multitude d’appareils vidéo pour filmer dans tous les endroits où vous vous rendez. Le caméscope s’est ouvert à de nouveaux formats pour enregistrer sur mini-DVD, disque dur, ou carte mémoire Flash. Même la plupart des appareils photo numériques peuvent enregistrer des vidéos, ainsi que de nombreux autres appareils portables. De plus, chacun de ces appareils peut enregistrer une vidéo dans des formats de fichier vidéo différents. iMovie travaille avec la génération émergente d’appareils enregistreur vidéo. Vous pouvez importer de la vidéo depuis les sources suivantes dans votre bibliothèque vidéo iMovie : Type d’appareil photo Support d’enregistrement Format de fichier vidéo Caméscopes USB (appareils à accès aléatoire, RAD) Disque dur MPEG-2 et AVCHD DVD (petit DVD de 8 cm) Mémoire Flash (carte mémoire) Caméscopes FireWire Cassette Mini DV DV (standard) et HDV (Vidéo haute définition) Appareil photo iSight Disque dur (sur votre ordinateur) Séquence QuickTimeChapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 7 Outre les sources vidéo indiquées ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi ajouter des données vidéo issues de fichiers de séquence stockés au préalable sur un disque dur (y compris celles qui proviennent de projets créés dans iMovie HD). Remarque : un processeur Intel est indispensable pour prendre en charge la vidéo AVCHD. Pour en savoir plus sur les caméscopes AVCHD, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/ilife/systemrequirements.html. Éléments retenus Pour comprendre la manière d’importer la vidéo dans iMovie, puis de l’organiser, de la trier et de la gérer, suivez l’initiation rapide qui débute au chapitre 2. Vous apprendrez comment :  importer la vidéo dans iMovie ;  organiser votre vidéo en événements ;  classer vos segments par ordre de préférence pour les retrouver facilement ;  classer les segments que vous souhaitez supprimer ;  améliorer le son de vos vidéos ;  rogner l’arrière-plan pour créer un gros plan ;  créer un diaporama vidéo ;  ajouter une photo avec des effets panoramique et de zoom (l’effet Ken Burns) ;  partager votre film une fois qu’il est terminé. Appareils photo numériques Mémoire Flash MPEG-2, MPEG-4, etc. Téléphones portables avec appareil photo (ajoutés automatiquement via iPhoto) Type d’appareil photo Support d’enregistrement Format de fichier vidéo8 Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 Avant de commencer Vous pouvez imprimer ce document avant de commencer ou laisser ce fichier PDF ouvert sur votre bureau pendant que vous travaillez. Bien entendu, vous n’êtes pas obligé de terminer cette initiation en une seule fois. Ignorez les parties qui ne vous inté- ressent pas et concentrez-vous sur celles que vous voulez assimiler immédiatement. Dans plusieurs tâches décrites dans ce guide et dans l’Aide iMovie, vous devrez choisir des commandes de menu dans la barre des menus. Les commandes de menu se pré- sentent de la façon suivante : Choisissez Édition > Copier. Le premier terme après Choisissez correspond au nom d’un menu dans la barre des menus d’iMovie. Le terme suivant est l’élément que vous choisissez dans ce menu. Éléments requis Pour terminer toutes les parties de cette initiation, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants :  Une vidéo numérique d’un des appareils énumérés dans le tableau de la page 6, ou une vidéo présente sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou un disque dur externe connecté à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble FireWire.  Au moins plusieurs gigaoctets (Go) d’espace disponible sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou sur un disque dur externe connecté par un câble FireWire. (L’espace nécessaire dépend du format de fichier vidéo que vous utilisez. Vérifiez les instructions relatives à l’importation de vidéo depuis votre appareil enregistreur pour plus d’informations.) Si aucune vidéo n’est disponible, vous pouvez créer un diaporama à l’aide des photos de votre bibliothèque iPhoto. Expérimentez et amusez-vous tout en vous familiarisant avec iMovie.2 9 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Importez des séquences de vos appareils vidéo les plus récents et ressortez vos vieilles bandes des cartons. Avec iMovie, vous pouvez importer, organiser, monter vos séquences et redonner vie à vos souvenirs. Ce guide d’initiation vous montrera comment importer votre vidéo dans iMovie, réorganiser votre Bibliothèque d’événements et lire et parcourir votre séquence vidéo. Vous aurez également la possibilité de trouver et de repérer vos parties préférées pour accéder à vos moments favoris et vous pourrez repérer les parties que vous voulez supprimer. Vous allez ajuster la durée de votre vidéo en appliquant un Trim et la rogner, créer un diaporama vidéo muni de titres, de transitions, de photos et de musique que vous pourrez ensuite partager avec vos amis sur le web ou lire sur votre iPod ou un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) à l’aide de l’Apple TV. Étape 1 : importez une séquence dans iMovie Pour commencer à travailler sur votre séquence vidéo, vous devez d’abord la transférer dans iMovie. L’importation de séquences vidéo dans iMovie ne les efface pas de votre appareil d’enregistrement. Au cours de cette opération, vous allez ouvrir iMovie et importer une séquence vidéo d’un appareil d’enregistrement ou importer un fichier vidéo déjà stocké sur un disque dur ; vous commencerez ensuite à créer votre vidéothèque.10 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour ouvrir iMovie : m Double-cliquez sur l’icône iMovie dans votre dossier Applications ou cliquez sur l’icône correspondante dans le Dock. Lorsque vous ouvrez iMovie pour la première fois, la fenêtre iMovie ci-dessous s’affiche. Identification du type de votre caméra et importation de séquences vidéo Il existe plusieurs méthodes d’importation de séquences vidéo dans iMovie. Suivez les instructions correspondant à votre situation, puis passez à l’« Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo » à la page 20.  Si vous disposez d’un lecteur DVD, d’un disque dur ou d’un caméscope à mémoire flash, consultez la page 11.  Si votre séquence vidéo se trouve sur une bande d’un caméscope numérique équipé d’une interface FireWire, consultez la page 14.  Si vous avez des séquences vidéo dans votre photothèque iPhoto, consultez la page 16.  Si vous voulez enregistrer une séquence vidéo directement dans iMovie, consultez la page 17.  Si votre séquence vidéo se trouve dans un ancien projet iMovie ou sur un disque dur, consultez la page 18. Affichez la liste de vos projets dans la Bibliothè- que de projets. Importez et montez en utilisant les boutons de la barre d’outils iMovie. Affichez la liste de vos événements dans la Bibliothèque d’événements. Parcourez votre vidéo source. Créez votre projet. Affichez votre séquence vidéo dans ce visualiseur.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 11 Caméscopes DVD, HDD ou à mémoire Flash Ces appareils sont connectés à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble USB. On les appelle « appareils à accès aléatoire » (RAD, Random-Access Devices) parce qu’ils permettent de sélectionner et d’importer des clips vidéo de manière aléatoire, ce qui évite d’avoir à lire la vidéo pour l’importer, comme c’est le cas avec les caméscopes traditionnels qui utilisent des cassettes. Remarque : un processeur Intel est indispensable pour prendre en charge la vidéo AVCHD. Pour en savoir plus sur les caméscopes AVCHD, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/ilife/systemrequirements.html. Pour importer une séquence vidéo à partir d’un appareil à accès aléatoire : 1 Placez l’appareil en mode PC ou ordinateur, puis connectez-le à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble USB. (Pour obtenir des instructions sur cette connexion, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’appareil.) L’illustration ci-dessous montre comment connecter un caméscope à un iMac à l’aide d’un câble USB. Lorsque le caméscope est correctement connecté, la fenêtre Importer s’ouvre et affiche tous les clips présents dans l’appareil. La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre lorsque votre appareil est correctement connecté.12 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). Remarque : si vous utilisez un caméscope avec DVD, le branchement à votre Mac peut entraîner l’ouverture du lecteur DVD. Dans ce cas, il vous suffit de le fermer. 2 Cliquez sur Importer tout pour importer tous les clips. 3 Dans le menu local Enregistrer dans, choisissez le disque dur sur lequel vous voulez enregistrer la séquence vidéo importée. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV) occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 4 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local.  Pour créer un nouvel événement, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »). Si vous souhaitez créer un nouvel événement pour chaque date d’enregistrement de la vidéo, sélectionnez « Créer un nouvel événement pour chaque jour ». 5 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ».Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 13 6 Cliquez sur OK. Selon la durée de votre vidéo, l’importation dans iMovie et la création de vignettes pour chaque clip peut prendre de quelques minutes à plus d’une heure. La barre de progression de la fenêtre Importation indique le clip en cours d’importation et la vitesse à laquelle l’importation se déroule. 7 Une fois la séquence importée, éteignez votre caméscope et déconnectez-le de l’ordinateur. Importation d’une sélection de séquences vidéo à partir d’un appareil à accès aléatoire : Si vous ne souhaitez pas importer toutes les données vidéo qui se trouvent sur votre appareil, vous avez la possibilité de sélectionner et d’importer uniquement les clips vidéo qui vous intéressent. Vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de lecture sous le visualiseur de la fenêtre Importer pour examiner les clips et sélectionner ceux que vous voulez importer. Pour les besoins de ce guide d’initiation, il est préférable d’importer de 10 à 15 minutes de vidéo comme base de travail. Après avoir connecté votre appareil à votre ordinateur (voir ci-dessus), effectuez l’une des actions suivantes. Pour importer la plupart des clips vidéo : 1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel. 2 Désactivez les cases au-dessous des clips que vous ne souhaitez pas importer. 3 Cliquez sur Importer les clips cochés. 4 Ensuite, suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 3 à 6, à la page 12. Pour importer seulement quelques clips vidéo : 1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel. 2 Cliquez sur Tout décocher. 3 Cochez les cases qui se trouvent sous les clips que vous souhaitez importer. 4 Cliquez sur Importer les clips cochés. 5 Ensuite, suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 3 à 6, à la page 12. Une fois que l’importation de la vidéo est terminée, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection qui se trouve près du menu local Caméra, puis éteignez le caméscope et déconnectez-le de l’ordinateur.14 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Caméscopes numériques équipés d’une interface FireWire Si vous avez un caméscope DV ou HDV mini-DV que vous pouvez connecter à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire, vous importerez les séquences vidéo pendant leur lecture sur la bande. Pour importer de la vidéo à partir d’un caméscope avec connexion FireWire : 1 Placez le caméscope en mode VTR (mode d’enregistrement sur bande vidéo que certains caméscopes appellent mode « Lecture » ou « VCR ») et allumez-le s’il ne le fait pas automatiquement. 2 Connectez votre caméscope à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble FireWire. L’illustration ci-dessous montre comment connecter un caméscope à iMac à l’aide d’un câble FireWire. La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre lorsque la caméra est correctement connectée. Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre lorsque votre appareil est correctement connecté.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 15 3 Assurez-vous que le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre est défini sur Automatique. 4 Cliquez sur Importer. 5 Dans le menu local Enregistrement dans, choisissez le disque dur sur lequel vous voulez enregistrer la séquence vidéo importée. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV) occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 6 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local.  Pour créer un nouvel événement, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »). Si vous souhaitez créer un nouvel événement pour chaque date d’enregistrement de la vidéo, sélectionnez « Créer un nouvel événement pour chaque jour ». 7 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ». 8 Cliquez sur OK. La bande de votre caméscope se rembobine automatiquement au début ; la vidéo complète sur la bande est importée, puis la bande se rembobine à nouveau. La bande est lue pendant l’importation. Vous pouvez regarder la vidéo pendant la lecture (le son n’est lu que sur le caméscope) ou laisser votre ordinateur poursuivre l’importation pendant que vous êtes ailleurs. Cela peut prendre plus de temps pour importer la vidéo que pour la regarder. Après l’importation, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour générer les vignettes de chaque clip vidéo.16 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 9 Une fois la séquence importée, vous pouvez éteindre votre caméscope et le déconnecter de l’ordinateur. Vidéo de votre photothèque iPhoto Les séquences vidéo de votre appareil photo ou de votre téléphone que vous chargez dans votre photothèque iPhoto sont automatiquement disponibles lorsque vous ouvrez iMovie. Dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, sélectionnez Vidéos iPhoto, puis l’événement que vous voulez. (Pour en savoir plus sur l’ajout de vidéo à votre photothèque iPhoto, ouvrez l’application iPhoto et consultez l’Aide iPhoto.) Remarque : seuls les formats vidéo compatibles avec iMovie sont affichés dans la Bibliothèque d’événements. Importation d’une sélection de séquences vidéo à partir d’un caméscope FireWire Si vous ne voulez pas importer la totalité du contenu de votre cassette, vous pouvez choisir de n’importer que certaines séquences. Pour ce guide d’initiation, il est préférable d’importer au moins 10 à 15 minutes de vidéo sur laquelle vous pourrez travailler. Après avoir connecté votre caméscope à votre ordinateur (voir ci-dessus), procédez comme suit. Pour importer une sélection de séquences vidéo : 1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel. 2 Servez-vous des commandes de lecture de la fenêtre Importer pour rembobiner, effectuer une avance rapide ou visionner votre bande. Lorsque vous avez fini d’examiner votre bande, rembobinez-la jusqu’à l’endroit à partir duquel vous souhaitez commencer l’importation. 3 Cliquez sur Importer, puis suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 5 à 8, à la page 15. La vidéo est importée à partir de l’endroit où vous l’avez arrêtée. 4 Cliquez sur Stop lorsque vous souhaitez arrêter l’importation. Chaque fois que vous interrompez l’importation, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour créer des vignettes de la vidéo importée. 5 Pour importer une autre vidéo, répétez les étapes 2 à 4 décrites ci-dessus. 6 Lorsque l’importation de la vidéo est terminée, vous pouvez éteindre votre caméscope et le déconnecter de l’ordinateur.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 17 Enregistrement de séquences vidéo directement dans iMovie Si votre Mac est équipé d’une webcam iSight intégrée, ou si vous connectez une iSight, une autre webcam compatible ou un caméscope via un câble FireWire, vous pouvez enregistrer de la vidéo directement dans iMovie pour la retravailler. Pour enregistrer directement dans iMovie : 1 Connectez votre iSight si elle n’est pas intégrée (ou votre autre webcam ou votre caméscope équipé d’une interface FireWire). 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer pour ouvrir la fenêtre Importer. 3 Si plusieurs appareils sont connectés à votre ordinateur, sélectionnez la caméra que vous voulez utiliser dans le menu local Appareil. 4 Cliquez sur Capturer. 5 Dans le menu local Enregistrer dans, choisissez le disque sur lequel vous souhaitez stocker la vidéo enregistrée. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo peut occuper plusieurs gigaoctets : vous devez donc vérifier que l’espace disponible est suffisant sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 6 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo enregistrée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour créer un nouvel événement destiné à la vidéo enregistrée, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »).  Pour ajouter la vidéo enregistrée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local. 7 Lorsque vous êtes prêt à commencer l’enregistrement, cliquez sur OK. iMovie commence l’enregistrement immédiatement. 8 Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, cliquez sur Stop quand vous voulez. Vous pouvez démarrer et arrêter l’enregistrement autant de fois que vous le voulez. Chaque fois que vous arrêtez l’enregistrement, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour générer les vignettes qui représentent les séquences vidéo. Chaque fois que vous recommencez à enregistrer, vous pouvez créer un nouvel événement ou cliquer sur OK pour ajouter la nouvelle vidéo au même événement. 9 Lorsque vous avez fini d’enregistrer, cliquez sur Terminé. Bouton Importer18 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Projets iMovie HD ou autres fichiers de films sur votre disque dur Vous pouvez importer les séquences vidéo brutes que vous avez déjà stockées sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou sur un disque dur externe compatible et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Pour importer de la vidéo à partir d’un disque dur : 1 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer des films et recherchez le projet dans la fenêtre Importer. Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). 2 Sélectionnez le disque dans lequel vous voulez stocker l’enregistrement dans le menu local Enregistrer dans. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo peut occuper plusieurs gigaoctets : vous devez donc vérifier que l’espace disponible est suffisant sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local. 3 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre Bibliothèque d’événements :  Pour créer un nouvel événement destiné à la vidéo importée, saisissez son nom dans le champ Nom de l’événement (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »).  Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez Événement existant, puis sélectionnez le nom de ce dernier dans le menu local. 4 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ».Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 19 5 Choisissez ce que vous souhaitez faire des fichiers originaux :  Pour supprimer les fichiers originaux une fois qu’ils ont été copiés dans iMovie, sélectionnez Déplacer les fichiers.  Pour maintenir l’intégrité des fichiers originaux même s’ils ont déjà été copiés dans iMovie, sélectionnez Copier les fichiers. 6 Cliquez sur Importer. Vous pouvez aussi importer des données vidéo d’un projet créé avec iMovie HD. Lorsque vous importez un projet iMovie HD, seules les données vidéo importées à l’origine dans le projet depuis un caméscope sont importées dans iMovie ; les autres données vidéo qui se trouvent dans le projet parce que vous les y avez fait glisser depuis le Finder ne sont pas importées. Les clips dans le Visualiseur sont ajoutés à la vidéothèque et regroupés en tant qu’événement ; les clips dans la chronologie sont placés dans un nouveau projet iMovie. Toutes les transitions sont remplacées par des fondus enchaî- nés. Aucun titre, aucun effet, aucune musique, aucun effet sonore et aucune photo ne sont importés dans iMovie. Tous les marqueurs de chapitre sont également perdus. Pour importer un ancien projet iMovie : 1 Choisissez Fichier > Importer le projet HD iMovie, puis recherchez ce dernier dans la zone de dialogue Importer. Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue « Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie). Vos projets iMovie se trouvent généralement dans votre dossier Séquences. 2 Sélectionnez le disque dans lequel vous voulez stocker le projet dans le menu local Enregistrer dans. Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV) occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local.20 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 3 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local. La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ». 4 Cliquez sur Importer. Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo Une fois que vous avez importé votre séquence, elle est prête à l’emploi. La vidéo est classée par événement dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, où vous pouvez immédiatement la visualiser, la parcourir, la rechercher ou l’améliorer. À propos des événements iMovie Lorsque vous importez une séquence vidéo dans iMovie et que vous lui attribuez un nom d’événement, un nouvel événement apparaît dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, classé sous l’année où il s’est produit. En cliquant sur le triangle d’affichage d’une année dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, vous affichez tous les événements de cette année-là. Si la vidéo d’un même événement s’étale sur plusieurs jours et que vous avez choisi d’établir une séparation lors de l’importation, chacun de ces jours apparaît dans la liste. Si vous choisissez le nom d’un événement existant lorsque vous importez une nouvelle séquence vidéo, vous regroupez les vidéos de plusieurs sources dans un même événement. Vous pouvez également fusionner plusieurs événements (ou jours d’événements) en un même événement, ou scinder un événement en deux. En fusionnant et en scindant des événements ou en déplaçant des clips vidéo d’un événement à l’autre, vous pouvez organiser vos vidéos en catégories et périodes de temps et les passer en revue comme s’il s’agissait de livres rangés sur une étagère. Ainsi, si vous avez importé depuis plusieurs sources différentes des séquences vidéo tournées pendant des vacances sur les îles Galápagos, vous pourriez regrouper toutes ces séquences vidéo, quelle que soit leur source, sous un seul et unique événement intitulé par exemple, « Vacances aux Galápagos », que vous pourrez retrouver facilement sous l’année pendant laquelle vous êtes parti en vacances là-bas. Si vous sélectionnez un événement dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, vous pouvez voir toutes les vidéos qu’il contient. De même, si vous sélectionnez plusieurs événements à la fois, vous voyez toutes les vidéos qu’ils contiennent.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 21 Pour parcourir plusieurs événements : m Maintenez enfoncée la touche Commande (x) et cliquez sur les noms des événements contenant la vidéo que vous voulez parcourir. m Sélectionnez une année dans la Bibliothèque d’événements pour parcourir tous les événements qu’elle contient. Pour fusionner des événements : m Sélectionnez-les dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, puis choisissez Fichier > Fusionner les événements. Pour scinder un événement en deux parties : m Cliquez sur le clip vidéo que vous voulez placer en premier dans le nouvel événement, puis sélectionnez Fichier > « Scinder l’événement avant le plan ». Pour déplacer un segment vidéo (clip) d’un événement vers un autre : m Faites-le glisser et déposez-le (dans la Bibliothèque d’événements) sur le titre de l’événement dans lequel vous voulez le placer. L’événement apparaît dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, sous l’année dans laquelle le clip le plus récent a été tourné. Vous pouvez également trier votre Bibliothèque d’événements en fonction du disque dur sur lequel les vidéos sont stockées. Lorsque vos événements sont triés par disque dur, vous pouvez parcourir tous les événements d’un disque en sélectionnant le nom de ce disque. Pour trier la Bibliothèque d’événements par disque dur : m Cliquez sur le bouton avec une icône de disque dur dans la partie supérieure de la sous-fenêtre Bibliothèque d’événements. Clips vidéo apparaissant comme des « pellicules cinématographiques » Noms d’événements répertoriés dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, séparés par jour Tri des événements par disque dur22 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour découvrir d’autres options relatives à l’organisation de votre Bibliothèque d’évé- nements, consultez la rubrique « Réorganisation d’événements dans la Bibliothèque d’événements » dans l’Aide iMovie. Affichage de votre vidéo source. Sélectionnez le nom d’un événement que vous avez créé dans la Bibliothèque d’événements et examinez les segments vidéo qu’il contient. La vidéo qui se trouve dans vos événements est appelée vidéo source parce qu’elle reste toujours telle que vous l’avez importée et qu’elle n’est pas modifiée par les opérations de montage réalisées dans iMovie. Elle sert de source à la vidéo que vous pouvez utiliser pour créer des films. Vous pouvez voir le contenu d’une vidéo en observant les images espacées dans le temps, comme si vous examiniez une pellicule cinématographique sur une table lumineuse. Chaque pellicule représente un clip vidéo, c’est-à-dire un segment vidéo qui commence au moment où la caméra a commencé à enregistrer et se termine lorsqu’elle a arrêté d’enregistrer. Généralement, chaque événement comporte plusieurs clips, un pour chaque fois où vous avez démarré et arrêté la caméra pendant l’enregistrement de l’événement. Un ensemble de vignettes assemblées forme une pellicule qui représente un clip vidéo. Une vignette représente une image d’un clip. Les images dentelées indiquent que ce clip continue à la ligne suivante ou représente la suite de la ligne précédente. Plusieurs clips, contenant chacun plusieurs vignettesChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 23 Par défaut, iMovie affiche une image par intervalle de 5 secondes de vidéo du clip ; vous pouvez modifier ce réglage pour « dérouler » (développer) ou « enrouler » (contracter) la pellicule selon vos préférences. La durée de chaque clip est affichée à l’extrême gauche lorsque vous passez le pointeur dessus. Pour agrandir ou réduire les pellicules :  Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes vers la droite pour réduire le nombre d’images affichées par clip et raccourcir ainsi la pellicule.  Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes vers la gauche pour augmenter le nombre d’images affichées par clip et agrandir ainsi la pellicule. L’agrandissement et la réduction des pellicules à l’aide de ce curseur ne modifient votre vidéo en aucune manière : ces opérations modifient uniquement l’affichage pendant votre travail. Lecture de votre vidéo Lorsque vous déplacez le pointeur sur les pellicules, vous remarquez que les images des pellicules se déplacent avec la plus grande image dans le visualiseur. L’image dans le visualiseur correspond au moment de la vidéo, ou à l’image, sur laquelle le pointeur se trouve. Le déplacement du pointeur en avant ou en arrière dans la vidéo porte le nom de défilement : il s’agit d’une manière rapide d’avoir une idée de l’apparence de la vidéo. Lorsque vous parcourez votre vidéo, vous entendez également le son qui se lit en avant ou en arrière suivant que vous avancez ou reculez dans la vidéo. Cela est parfois utile pour rechercher un moment particulier dans votre vidéo. D’autres fois, vous voudrez couper le son. Pour couper le son pendant le défilement : m Dans la barre d’outils d’iMovie, cliquez sur le bouton prévu pour couper le son lors du survol de la vidéo ou choisissez Présentation > Écrémage audio et assurez-vous que l’élément n’est pas coché dans le menu. Pour rétablir le son, appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton. Cela affecte uniquement le défilement, mais pas la lecture du son en vitesse normale. Vous pouvez également lire votre vidéo à la vitesse prévue. Cliquez pour couper le son pendant le défilement24 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour lire la vidéo à n’importe quel endroit, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Placez le pointeur à l’emplacement de la pellicule à partir duquel vous voulez démarrer la lecture, puis appuyez sur la barre d’espace. Si le pointeur est placé sur une bordure de sélection jaune, seule la portion sélectionnée de la vidéo est lue. Pour lire au-delà de la portion de vidéo sélectionnée, placez le pointeur à gauche de la sélection avant d’appuyer sur la barre d’espace. m Double-cliquez dans le clip à l’endroit à partir duquel vous voulez démarrer la lecture. m Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip et sélectionnez Affichage > Lecture. Pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo : m Cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie ou appuyez sur la barre d’espace pendant la lecture. Pour lire des événements sélectionnés à partir du début, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip et sélectionnez Affichage > « Lire depuis le début ». m Appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique inverse (\). m Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque d’événements. Pour lire un événement en plein écran : 1 Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Lire en plein écran » qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque d’événements pour lire l’événement depuis le début ou appuyez sur Commande (x) + G pour commencer la lecture à partir de l’endroit où se trouve le pointeur. 2 Pour rembobiner ou avancer rapidement, déplacez le pointeur, puis cliquez sur la pellicule qui apparaît ; faites défiler la pellicule en avant ou en arrière ou appuyez sur les touches fléchées pour vous déplacer image par image. 3 Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur la touche Échap. Pour ne lire que les images vidéo sélectionnées, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique (/). m Sélectionnez Affichage > Lire la sélection. Cliquez pour commencer la lecture Cliquez ici pour commencer la lecture depuis le début.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 25 Sélection de la vidéo source Chaque clip vidéo est composé de plusieurs images vidéo, apparaissant comme des images fixes, comme les différents clichés qui composent les images d’une pellicule photographique. (Le nombre d’images par seconde de vidéo animée dépend du format vidéo que vous utilisez). Généralement, la manipulation de vidéo dans iMovie consiste à sélectionner des plages d’images vidéo, ou plages d’images, qui ne représentent qu’une petite partie du clip vidéo. Dans certains cas, il se peut toutefois que la plage d’images sélectionnée couvre l’ensemble d’un clip vidéo voire plusieurs clips. Par défaut, lorsque vous cliquez sur un clip vidéo source, iMovie sélectionne quatre secondes de vidéo à partir du point où vous avez cliqué. Vous pouvez ainsi survoler rapidement votre vidéo à la recherche des meilleures scènes, puis cliquer simplement dessus pour sélectionner automatiquement des plages d’images de quatre secondes qui vous permettront de monter un film constitué de plans bien rythmés. (Vous pouvez en outre régler le nombre d’images vidéo qu’un simple clic peut sélectionner via la sousfenêtre Préférences d’iMovie. Pour savoir comment procéder, reportez-vous à la section « Réglage de la sélection automatique d’une plage d’images » dans l’Aide iMovie.) Un bord de sélection jaune apparaît autour de la plage d’images lorsque vous la sélectionnez. Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire une sélection de plage d’images, la recentrer ou sélectionner un clip entier ou plusieurs clips à la fois. Pour sélectionner une plage d’images vidéo dans la bibliothèque des vidéos sources, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Cliquez sur un clip pour sélectionner quatre secondes de vidéo à partir du point où vous avez cliqué. m Faites glisser le curseur sur le clip pour sélectionner autant d’images que vous le voulez. Pour ajuster une sélection de plage d’images, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Faites glisser la poignée située à l’une des extrémités du bord de sélection pour agrandir ou réduire la sélection. m Placez le pointeur au-dessus du point de départ ou de fin souhaité et cliquez tout en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Faites glisser les poignées pourredimensionner la sélection. La bordure jaune délimite l’étendue des images sélectionnées dans un clip.26 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Si vous voulez déplacer la sélection dans une autre plage d’images du même clip sans modifier sa taille, vous pouvez la recentrer. Pour recentrer la sélection : m Faites glisser le haut de la bordure de sélection vers n’importe quel emplacement du clip. m Appuyez sur les touches Flèche droite ou Flèche gauche pour déplacer l’ensemble de la sélection vers la gauche ou la droite image par image. Vous pouvez « faire coulisser » la plage de sélection le long du clip pour déplacer la sélection et sélectionner plusieurs plages de même taille, ce qui permet d’assurer la régularité du rythme d’un film lors de sa création. Pour sélectionner un clip vidéo entier dans la vidéothèque source : m Cliquez sur un clip tout en maintenant enfoncée la touche Option. m Cliquez sur un clip tout en maintenant enfoncée la touche Contrôle et choisissez « Sélectionner le clip entier » dans le menu local qui s’affiche. ? Astuce : Si vous cliquez tout en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, vous faites apparaître des menus contextuels qui peuvent vous aider à travailler de manière plus efficace. Ils vous proposent des options pertinentes en fonction de l’endroit où vous cliquez. Pour sélectionner plusieurs clips vidéo : m Si les clips constituent une série de clips contigus, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj et cliquez sur le premier et le dernier des clips de la plage à sélectionner. m Si les clips ne sont pas contigus, maintenez enfoncée la touche Commande (x) et cliquez sur chaque clip à sélectionner ; pour retirer un clip de la sélection, cliquez à nouveau sur ce clip. Lorsque vous avez sélectionné plusieurs clips, vous pouvez les faire glisser dans un autre événement ou dans un projet iMovie. Vous pouvez aussi modifier l’apparence d’un clip vidéo, puis copier-coller les modifications dans d’autres clips. Pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez « ajustements vidéo » dans l’Aide iMovie. Marquage de la vidéo comme favorite ou à supprimer Avec iMovie, vous trouvez instantanément les meilleurs moments. Vous n’avez pas besoin de parcourir des heures de vidéo, en effectuant des retours et avances rapides à la recherche des passages souhaités. Désormais, en passant rapidement sur votre vidéo, vous pouvez marquer les passages que vous pensez être les meilleurs ou les moins bons, facilitant ainsi le filtrage ultérieur de votre vidéo et la recherche des séquences à retravailler ou à supprimer.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 27 Pour organiser plus finement votre vidéo, vous pouvez également repérer une plage d’images avec des mots-clés. Pour en savoir plus sur le repérage des vidéos et la recherche à l’aide de mots-clés, recherchez les termes « balisage avec mots-clés » dans l’Aide iMovie. Dans cette étape, vous devez sélectionner la portion de la vidéo que vous aimez et la marquer comme favorite ; vous devrez également marquer la portion de vidéo que vous n’aimez pas en vue de la supprimer. Vous devez d’abord définir un filtre pour votre vidéo source pour afficher tous les clips : sélectionnez Tous les clips dans le menu local Afficher sous la Bibliothèque d’événements. Survolez ensuite votre vidéo pour localiser les passages particulièrement intéressants. Pour marquer la vidéo comme favorite : m Sélectionnez une plage d’images, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Marquer comme favorite » dans la barre d’outils iMovie. Une barre verte apparaît en haut de la plage d’images. Menu local Afficher Marquer comme favorite Démarquer Refuser Une barre verte indique que la plage est marquée comme favorite.28 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour marquer une vidéo à supprimer : m Sélectionnez une plage, puis cliquez sur le bouton Refuser de la barre d’outils iMovie. Une barre rouge s’affiche au-dessus de la plage d’images. Pour supprimer une marque : m Sélectionnez une plage que vous avez marquée comme favorite ou que vous avez refusée, puis, dans la barre d’outils d’iMovie, cliquez sur le bouton Démarquer. La barre de couleur disparaît. Tri (filtrage) de vidéo Maintenant que vous avez marqué certaines images vidéo, vous pouvez aisément filtrer la bibliothèque source de façon à ne voir que les meilleures ou les pires sélections. Pour filtrer la bibliothèque source vidéo et afficher les clips favoris ou refusés : m Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes dans le menu local Afficher sous la Bibliothèque d’événements.  Favoris uniquement : affiche uniquement la séquence vidéo que vous avez marquée comme favorite.  Favoris et démarqués : affiche toutes les séquences vidéo que vous avez marquées comme favorites ou que vous n’avez pas marquées. (Affichage par défaut.)  Tous les clips : affiche tous les clips de l’événement sélectionné.  Refusés uniquement : affiche uniquement les clips que vous avez marqués pour être supprimés. Si vous choisissez Refusés uniquement, vous pouvez afficher un aperçu des clips refusés avant de les supprimer. Une barre rouge indique que la plage est marquée pour la suppression (refusée).Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 29 Pour supprimer les clips refusés : 1 Choisissez Présentation > Refusés uniquement ou sélectionnez Refusés uniquement dans le menu local Afficher. 2 Cliquez sur « Placer dans la corbeille » dans le coin supérieur droit au-dessus des clips refusés. Si vous voulez récupérer l’espace disque libéré par les vidéos supprimées, vous devez vider la Corbeille de votre ordinateur. Pour récupérer l’espace disque des clips supprimés : m Cliquez sur le bureau pour activer le Finder, puis choisissez Finder > Vider la Corbeille. Affichage Favoris et démarqués Lorsque vous travaillez dans iMovie, vous préférerez peut-être afficher uniquement la vidéo que vous avez marquée comme favorite ou que vous n’avez pas marquée. Pour cela, revenez à l’affichage par défaut. La vidéo refusée disparaît immédiatement de cet affichage. Pour l’afficher à nouveau, sélectionnez Rejeté dans le menu local Afficher. Pour restaurer l’affichage par défaut (Favoris et démarqués), effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : m Appuyez sur Commande (x) + L. m Choisissez Favoris et démarqués dans le menu local Afficher. m Choisissez Présentation > Favoris et démarqués. m Si vous êtes en mode Refusés uniquement, cliquez sur l’option « Masquer les projets rejetés » située dans l’angle supérieur droit du navigateur d’événements. Étape 3 : améliorez les images vidéo et réglez le volume sonore Lorsque vous regardez votre vidéo, vous voudrez peut-être améliorer vos moments préférés. Le volume de votre clip favori est peut-être trop élevé ou trop bas. Dans un autre clip, le sujet principal vous gratifie d’un superbe sourire, mais il est un peu trop éloigné. Ou les couleurs mériteraient peut-être une petite correction. Avec iMovie, vous pouvez facilement améliorer l’apparence et le son de votre vidéo. Rognage d’images vidéo De la même manière que vous découpez une photo, avec iMovie vous pouvez créer un plan rapproché du sujet choisi alors que vous n’en aviez pas auparavant. Si vous travaillez avec un format vidéo standard ou de résolution inférieure, le rognage du clip peut créer du grain. Avec la vidéo haute définition, la qualité d’affichage des clips rognés est quasiment la même que celle des originaux.30 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour rogner un clip : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner, puis sur un clip pour le sélectionner. 2 Dans le visualiseur, cliquez sur Rogner. Un rectangle de découpage vert apparaît autour de l’image dans le visualiseur. 3 Faites glisser le rectangle vert pour le redimensionner et le repositionner afin de souligner la partie de l’image que vous voulez mettre en évidence. Le découpage maximal est de 50 % de la taille de l’image originale. Les proportions du rectangle de rognage restent celles du format 16:9 (écran large) si aucun projet n’est sélectionné (dans le cas contraire, les proportions sont celles du projet sélectionné). 4 Pour afficher l’aperçu de votre travail, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture. 5 Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous avez obtenu le résultat souhaité. Le rognage s’applique à l’ensemble du clip. Une icône Rogner apparaît au début du clip. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher un aperçu de votre travail. Faites glisser le cadre et redimensionnez-le pour définir la taille et l’emplacement du découpage. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour Cliquez sur ce bouton pour rogner. faire pivoter toute l’image. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour restaurer complètement l’image. Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Icône RognerChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 31 Cliquez dessus pour modifier ou supprimer le rognage à tout moment. Vous pouvez restaurer votre vidéo à sa taille d’origine à tout moment en ouvrant l’éditeur de rognage et en cliquant sur Adapter. Ajustement du volume des clips iMovie offre deux manières simples de régler le volume sonore général de vos clips vidéo : réduction du volume maximal ou réglage de tous les volumes du clip pour qu’ils tiennent dans une plage « normalisée ». Vous effectuez ces deux réglages dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio. Modifications non destructives L’expression « modifications non destructives » signifie que vous pouvez annuler toutes les modifications apportées à votre vidéo (ou aux autres données que vous ajoutez à vos projets iMovie) si, par exemple, vous changez d’avis ou vous n’êtes pas satisfait du résultat. Cela est dû au fait qu’iMovie ne modifie jamais les données originales que vous modifiez ; iMovie ne crée pas non plus une copie de l’original. iMovie stocke simplement les modifications que vous apportez et les applique à nouveau chaque fois que vous visionnez la vidéo, sans qu’il soit nécessaire pour vous de les enregistrer. Pour annuler la dernière action : m Sélectionnez Édition > Annuler [Action]. Pour restaurer les données dans leur état d’origine : 1 Sélectionnez le clip, puis cliquez sur le bouton pour ouvrir l’outil utilisé pour modifier l’image ou le son original. 2 Supprimez les modifications qui ne vous plaisent pas. À la fin de chaque rubrique de ce guide d’initiation, vous trouverez des instructions particulières sur la restauration de vos données.32 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour ouvrir la fenêtre Ajustements audio : m Cliquez sur un clip, puis sur le bouton Ajustements audio. Réglage du volume d’un clip Si le son de l’un de vos clips est trop élevé par rapport à celui de tous les autres ou, à l’inverse, si vous trouvez qu’il n’est pas assez fort, il vous suffit d’augmenter ou de baisser le volume du clip en question. Pour régler le volume d’un clip : 1 Avec la fenêtre Ajustements audio ouverte, cliquez sur un clip pour le sélectionner. 2 Faites glisser le curseur Volume jusqu’au niveau souhaité. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé pour fermer la fenêtre Ajustements audio, ou cliquez sur un autre clip pour régler son volume. Cliquez sur l’icône de réglage audio qui apparaît au début du clip pour ouvrir la fenê- tre Ajustements audio et modifier ou supprimer les réglages audio à tout moment. Cliquez sur « Revenir à l’original » dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio pour restaurer le volume d’origine du clip. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour réinitialiser la plage de volume du clip. Faites glisser le curseur pour régler le volume du clip. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour restaurer les volumes aux niveaux d’origine. Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Cochez cette case pour que le son de ce clip soit prioritaire par rapport au son d’autres clips. Faites glisser le curseur pour régler l’atténuation du volume des autres clips audio et vidéo. Sélectionnez Manuel, puis faites glisser les curseurs pour régler le taux de fondu en entrée ou en sortie du volume du clip. Icône Ajustements audioChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 33 Normalisation du volume des clips Si la voix est trop forte dans un clip et trop faible dans un autre, la normalisation du volume vous permet de redéfinir les niveaux de son de sorte qu’ils soient compris dans la plage de volume de votre choix. Pour normaliser les volumes dans divers clips : 1 Avec la fenêtre Ajustements audio ouverte, cliquez sur un clip pour le sélectionner. 2 Cliquez sur Normaliser le volume. Cela règle le volume du clip à son niveau maximal sans distorsion. 3 Sélectionnez un autre clip, puis cliquez à nouveau sur Normaliser le volume. Les volumes des deux clips sont désormais réglés sur la même plage. 4 Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour tous les autres clips de sorte que leur volume se trouve à l’intérieur de la même plage. Vous pouvez annuler la normalisation audio à tout moment en cliquant sur « Supprimer la normalisation » ou « Revenir à l’original » dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio. Étape 4 : créez un projet iMovie Si vous voulez partager des parties de votre vidéothèque avec des amis, les publier sur le web ou les transférer sur votre iPod ou votre Apple TV, vous pouvez créer un film à l’aide de la vidéo source dans votre vidéothèque et y placer vos meilleurs clips comme vous le voulez. Vous pouvez améliorer votre film avec de la musique de fond, des effets sonores, des commentaires et des photos. iMovie intègre également plusieurs styles de titres très pratiques pour ajouter du texte à votre film, ainsi que des styles de transitions pour passer en douceur d’un clip à l’autre. Commencez par créer un projet iMovie dans lequel vous allez ensuite combiner toutes les pièces de ce qui deviendra votre film. Au cours de cette opération, vous allez commencer un projet iMovie, puis ajouter une vidéo provenant de la bibliothèque source, l’organiser en une séquence qui vous plaît et ajouter de la musique de fond pour créer un diaporama vidéo élémentaire. Ensuite, vous allez supprimer les images inutiles de la vidéo, ajouter des titres et des transitions et terminer votre montage en ajoutant des effets sonores.34 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Création d’un projet iMovie Un projet iMovie peut être aussi simple ou complexe que vous le voulez, en fonction de ce que vous voulez ajouter à votre film en plus de la vidéo de base. Les tâches pré- sentées ici sont organisées dans l’ordre idéal pour tous vos projets iMovie. N’oubliez pas que lorsque vous apportez des modifications ou des ajustements à une vidéo dans iMovie, les données d’origine ne sont pas affectées. Vous pouvez à tout moment annuler les ajustements que vous avez apportés à la vidéo et votre vidéo originale demeure intacte, protégée contre les modifications non souhaitées. N’hésitez donc pas à essayer tout ce qui vous passe par la tête et amusez-vous bien. Pour créer un projet iMovie 1 Choisissez Fichier > Nouveau projet. 2 Tapez un nom pour votre projet. 3 Choisissez les proportions souhaitées pour votre film terminé dans le menu local Proportions. Choisissez les proportions en fonction des dimensions de la vidéo et des photos que vous utiliserez dans votre projet.  Standard (4:3) : produit un film pour l’affichage sur un téléviseur standard TV ou sur le web. S’il est affiché sur un téléviseur haute définition, un espace noir apparaît de chaque côté de la vidéo.  iPhone (3:2) : produit un film pour l’affichage sur iPhone.  Écran large (16:9) : produit un film idéal pour l’affichage sur un écran large ou un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV). Si vous affichez votre film sur un téléviseur standard, des bandes noires apparaîtront en haut et en bas de la vidéo. Vous pouvez mélanger diverses tailles et formats vidéo dans un même projet. Si vous utilisez des vidéos et des photos de tailles différentes, sélectionnez les proportions les mieux adaptées aux données. Si cela provoque l’apparition de bandes noires en haut, en bas ou sur les côtés de certains contenus, vous pouvez ajouter ces derniers à votre projet, puis les rogner pour enlever ces bandes noires. (Pour en savoir plus sur le rognage des images, voir « Rognage d’images vidéo » à la page 29). Ajout de vidéo à votre projet Vous pouvez ajouter autant de séquences vidéo que vous le souhaitez dans un projet : sélectionnez-les à partir d’un ou de plusieurs événements, pour les regrouper dans l’ordre que vous voulez. Lorsque vous ajoutez une plage d’images à votre projet, elle apparaît sous la forme d’un clip entier dans votre projet, même s’il ne s’agissait que d’une partie d’un clip vidéo source.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 35 Lorsque vous ajoutez à votre projet des données vidéo d’un événement, iMovie ne déplace pas celles-ci et ne les duplique pas non plus. Il établit simplement une réfé- rence à la vidéo source. C’est pourquoi, si votre vidéo source est stockée sur un disque dur externe, ce dernier doit être connecté à votre ordinateur lorsque vous travaillez sur un projet faisant référence à la vidéo source. Cela implique également que vous pouvez ajouter le même segment vidéo plusieurs fois si vous voulez le dupliquer dans votre projet, ou ajouter la même séquence vidéo à plusieurs projets. Dans chaque cas, la séquence vidéo fonctionnera comme un clip individuel. Pour créer un diaporama vidéo, vos clips doivent avoir la même taille ou pratiquement la même. En effet, des clips de même taille équilibrent le rythme de votre film. iMovie facilite cette opération grâce à la fonctionnalité de sélection automatique dans la vidéo source, qui permet de sélectionner toujours la même quantité de vidéo en un seul clic. Pour ajouter des clips à votre projet : 1 Cliquez sur un clip de la vidéo source pour sélectionner une plage d’images vidéo que vous voulez inclure dans votre projet. Quatre secondes de vidéo sont automatiquement sélectionnées. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton « Ajouter au projet » au milieu de la barre d’outils iMovie pour ajouter de la vidéo à la fin de votre projet ou faites glisser la sélection là où vous voulez la faire apparaître dans votre projet. 3 Continuez à sélectionner des données vidéo et à les ajouter à votre projet. 4 Dans le projet, faites glisser les clips pour les placer dans l’ordre souhaité. Vous pouvez afficher un aperçu de votre projet en le lisant de l’une des manières suivantes : Pour lire un projet sélectionné à partir du début : m Cliquez sur le bouton Lire le projet sous la Bibliothèque de projets ou appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique inverse (\). Pour lire un projet sélectionné à partir de n’importe quel point : m Double-cliquez sur l’image à partir de laquelle vous voulez lancer la lecture ou appuyez sur la barre d’espace. Pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo de votre projet : m Appuyez sur la barre d’espace ou cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie. Bouton « Ajouter au projet »36 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour lire un clip ou une plage d’images sélectionné(e) dans votre projet : m Appuyez sur la touche Barre Antislash (/). Pour lire en plein écran un projet sélectionné : 1 Choisissez l’endroit à partir duquel vous souhaitez commencer la lecture du projet :  Pour commencer la lecture à partir de la position du pointeur, quelle qu’elle soit, appuyez sur Commande (x) + G.  Pour démarrer la lecture au début du projet, sélectionnez n’importe quel clip de ce dernier, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Lire en plein écran » qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque des projets. 2 Déplacez le pointeur et cliquez sur la pellicule qui apparaît, puis faites défiler la vidéo en avant et en arrière. 3 Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur la touche Échap. Lorsque vous travaillez sur votre projet, vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire les pellicules du projet pour afficher plus ou moins d’images de chaque clip. Les pellicules de votre projet et de votre source vidéo ne sont pas nécessairement agrandies de la même manière. Pour agrandir ou réduire les pellicules d’un projet : m Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes directement sous votre projet. Ajout de musique de fond à votre projet Vous pouvez animer un film en ajoutant une bande son musicale. Si vous avez des morceaux musicaux dans votre bibliothèque iTunes, vous pouvez en faire glisser un pour accompagner votre vidéo. Sinon, vous pouvez essayer d’utiliser l’un des jingles de iLife. Pour ajouter une musique de fond à votre projet iMovie : 1 Choisissez Fenêtre > « Musique et effets sonores » ou cliquez sur le bouton « Musique et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils d’iMovie. 2 Dans la sous-fenêtre « Musique et effets sonores », cliquez sur iTunes pour voir toute la musique que contient votre bibliothèque iTunes ou cliquez sur le dossier Effets sonores pour rechercher la musique de fond la plus adaptée à votre film. Cliquez sur un fichier audio pour en obtenir un aperçu sonore. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier musical et faites-le glisser dans l’arrière-plan du projet en veillant à ne pas le faire glisser dans un clip.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 37 Une icône représentant la musique sous forme d’un arrière-plan de couleur verte apparaît derrière les clips vidéo. Cet arrière-plan commence au début du clip et continue pendant toute la durée de la chanson ou de la vidéo, suivant celle qui se termine la première. Si la musique dure plus longtemps que la vidéo, un indicateur apparaît à la fin de la vidéo. La musique se termine automatiquement par une baisse progressive du son à la fin de la vidéo. 4 Si vous souhaitez ajuster le point de début et de fin de la musique de fond, cliquez sur l’arrière-plan de couleur verte, puis choisissez Édition > « Appliquer un Trim à la musique ». Le découpeur musical s’ouvre et affiche uniquement le clip de fond musical Dans le clip audio qui correspond à la musique, on peut voir une forme d’onde ; chaque fois que celle-ci est de couleur rose, cela signifie que la musique est associée à des données vidéo, que vous pouvez voir dans le visualiseur en faisant défiler rapidement le clip audio. La forme d’onde de couleur noire correspond à la partie du clip audio qui s’étend au-delà du début ou de la fin de la vidéo. Si vous ajoutez d’autres clips pour rallonger votre vidéo, la musique de fond couvre alors automatiquement les images vidéo supplémentaires. Musique de fond Indicateur de musique Poignée du point fin de la musique Poignée du point de début de la vidéo38 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 5 Pour définir le point de la musique où la vidéo commence (point de début de la vidéo), faites glisser la première poignée de sélection. Lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée du début de la vidéo, la forme d’onde rose se déplace à l’intérieur du clip audio et le visualiseur lit la vidéo correspondante, en indiquant la nouvelle position du point de début de la vidéo. 6 Pour définir l’endroit de la vidéo où la musique se termine (c’est-à-dire, le point de fin de la musique), faites glisser la seconde poignée de sélection. Lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée du point de fin de la musique, la vidéo correspondante est lue dans le visualiseur pour vous aider à trouver le point de fin qui vous convient. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du découpeur pour obtenir un aperçu de votre travail ; cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous êtes satisfait. Pour découvrir d’autres façons d’arranger et de manipuler le son dans iMovie, y compris en ajoutant et en montant plusieurs clips musicaux de fond ou d’effets sonores, en extrayant des clips audio de votre vidéo et en créant des fondus audio en entrée et en sortie, consultez les rubriques d’Aide iMovie sous « Amélioration de l’audio » (dans la section intitulée « Création d’un projet vidéo »). Pour fermer la sous-fenêtre « Musique et effets sonores » : m Cliquez sur le bouton « Musique et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils iMovie. Pour supprimer la musique de fond : m Cliquez derrière les clips vidéo pour sélectionner la musique, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous venez de créer un simple diaporama vidéo que vous pouvez partager avec votre famille et des amis. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez effectuer d’autres modifications en suivant les instructions des sections ci-dessous. Suppression des images indésirables dans les clips d’un projet Il est facile de supprimer des images superflues aux extrémités d’un clip vidéo dans votre projet iMovie ou de les restaurer dans votre projet à tout moment. Pour effectuer un trim d’un clip vidéo : m Sélectionnez les images que vous voulez conserver et choisissez Édition > Appliquer un Trim à la sélection. Les images jugées indésirables sont supprimées. Si vous changez d’avis, vous pouvez à tout moment restaurer les images éliminées en réajustant la durée du clip (ou la plage d’images) dans votre projet.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 39 Pour ajuster la durée du clip ou la plage d’images : 1 Sélectionnez un clip dans votre projet. 2 Choisissez Édition > Trim ou cliquez sur le bouton de durée du clip situé dans le coin au début du clip (il apparaît lorsque vous placez le pointeur au-dessus du clip et ressemble à une horloge). Le découpeur s’ouvre et affiche uniquement le clip sélectionné. Les poignées de sélection indiquent ses points de début et de fin dans votre projet. 3 Pour ajuster les points de départ et de fin du clip, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Faites glisser les poignées qui se trouvent au début ou à la fin de la sélection.  Maintenez enfoncée la touche Option en appuyant sur la touche Flèche gauche ou Flèche droite pour déplacer le point de départ ou de fin de la sélection image par image. Si le pointeur se trouve à proximité du début de la sélection, c’est le point de départ du clip qui est ajusté, si le pointeur se trouve à proximité de la fin de la sélection, c’est le point de fin du clip qui est ajusté.  Appuyez sur la touche Flèche droite ou Flèche gauche pour déplacer l’ensemble de la plage d’images sélectionnée vers la gauche ou la droite, image par image. 4 Pour obtenir un aperçu des modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du Trimmer, puis, lorsque vous êtes satisfait du résultat, cliquez sur Terminé. Vous pouvez aussi agrandir ou réduire rapidement des clips de votre projet, image par image, sans passer par la fonction Trim. Icône Durée du clip Poignée de fin du clip Poignée de début du clip40 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour ajuster la durée d’un clip image par image : 1 Placez le pointeur à proximité de la fin du clip à ajuster, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Maintenez enfoncée les touches Commande (x) et Option. Lorsque la poignée de sélection orange apparaît à la fin du clip, faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche pour augmenter ou diminuer la durée du clip par incréments d’une image.  Maintenez enfoncée la touche Option en appuyant sur la touche Flèche gauche ou Flèche droite pour augmenter ou diminuer la durée du clip par incréments d’une image. Ajout de transitions entre les clips d’un projet Pour varier et animer votre projet iMovie, vous pouvez insérer des transitions qui évitent le passage brutal d’un clip au suivant dans votre vidéo. Par exemple, vous pouvez fondre les dernières images d’une séquence avec les premières de la séquence suivante ; vous pouvez également créer l’effet qu’une scène repousse la précédente en dehors de l’écran. iMovie intègre plusieurs transitions attractives qui donnent du style à votre projet. Affichage rapide des modifications Une fois que vous avez ajusté la durée d’un clip vidéo ou apporté une autre modification à votre projet, il est parfois utile d’observer les effets de la modification apportée en visionnant quelques secondes de la vidéo pour apporter ensuite d’autres ajustements. iMovie contient des raccourcis clavier facilitant l’affichage des modifications. Pour afficher un bref aperçu de votre modification : m Assurez-vous que votre pointeur se trouve à l’endroit où vous avez apporté la modification, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Appuyez sur la touche Crochet gauche ([) pour lire une seconde de vidéo avant l’endroit où le pointeur se trouve et une seconde après. Si le pointeur se trouve au-dessus de la plage d’images sélectionnée, appuyer sur la touche Crochet gauche ne lit qu’une seconde de vidéo, au début ou à la fin de la sélection, selon l’extrémité de la sélection dont le pointeur est le plus proche.  Appuyez sur la touche Crochet droite (]) pour lire trois secondes de vidéo avant l’endroit où le pointeur se trouve et trois secondes après. Si le pointeur se trouve au-dessus de la plage d’images sélectionnée, appuyer sur la touche Crochet droite ne lit que trois secondes de vidéo, au début ou à la fin de la sélection, selon l’extrémité de la sélection dont le pointeur est le plus proche. Pour d’autres raccourcis clavier permettant de travailler plus efficacement, recherchez « Raccourcis clavier » dans l’Aide iMovie.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 41 Pour ajouter une transition entre deux clips : 1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Transitions ou cliquez sur le bouton Transitions de la barre d’outils iMovie. Dans la sous-fenêtre Transitions, vous pouvez obtenir un aperçu des transitions disponibles en plaçant le pointeur sur chacune d’entre elles. 2 Sélectionnez la transition voulue et faites-la glisser entre deux clips dans votre projet iMovie. Une icône de transition noire apparaît. Pour afficher l’aperçu de la transition dans votre projet : m Double-cliquez n’importe où dans le clip juste en face de la transition pour la lire ou faites-la défiler en faisant glisser le pointeur sur la transition à la vitesse que vous voulez. Si le résultat obtenu ne vous convient pas, vous pouvez à tout moment faire glisser une autre transition dessus pour remplacer l’existante ou la supprimer et ajouter une transition différente. Pour supprimer une transition : m Sélectionnez l’icône de transition de couleur noire, puis appuyez sur la touche Supprimer. Essayez différentes transitions pour voir comment elles apparaissent à différents emplacements de votre projet. Pour fermer la sous-fenêtre Transitions : m Cliquez sur le bouton Transitions de la barre d’outils iMovie. Le temps entre un clip et le suivant est appelé la durée de transition. La durée d’une transition ne peut jamais être supérieure à la moitié de la durée du clip le plus court précédent ou suivant. Par exemple, si vous avez une transition entre une séquence de quatre secondes et une autre de six secondes, sa durée ne peut pas être supérieure à deux secondes. Par défaut, la durée de toutes les transitions de votre projet est définie à une seconde et demie. Vous pouvez modifier la durée des transitions dans la fenêtre des propriétés du projet ou en choisissant Édition > Définir la durée. Pour plus de détails, recherchez « durée des transitions » dans l’Aide iMovie. Vous pouvez également configurer iMovie pour insérer automatiquement la même transition entre tous les clips de votre projet. Pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez « transitions automatiques » dans l’Aide iMovie. Icône de transition42 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Ajout de titres à votre projet Vous pouvez ajouter du texte sur la vidéo à n’importe quel point de votre projet. Par exemple, vous pouvez donner un titre ou un générique à votre film, ou encore utiliser du texte pour identifier une scène ou une personne dans le film. Tous les textes ajoutés sont appelés titres. Pour ajouter un titre à votre vidéo : 1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Titres ou cliquez sur le bouton Titres de la barre d’outils iMovie. 2 Sélectionnez le style de titre que vous voulez et faites-le glisser sur un clip de votre projet iMovie. Lorsque vous passez le titre sur le clip vidéo, une ombre rouge sur le clip indique que le titre sera affiché sur tout le clip, sur le premier tiers ou sur le dernier tiers ; vous pouvez toujours le déplacer et le redimensionner par la suite. Une fois que le titre est en place, il apparaît dans le visualiseur iMovie et une icône de titre bleue apparaît au-dessus du clip vidéo. 3 Dans le visualiseur, sélectionnez le texte de paramètre fictif et tapez le texte voulu. Icône de titre Sélectionnez le texte du paramètre fictif et tapez Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la fenêtre Police et modifier l’apparence du texte. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher un aperçu de votre travail.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 43 4 Pour modifier la couleur, la police ou le style du texte, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les polices dans le visualiseur, puis effectuez vos sélections dans la fenêtre Police. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du visualiseur pour obtenir un aperçu de votre travail ; cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous êtes satisfait. Pour raccourcir ou rallonger un titre : m Passez le pointeur sur une extrémité du titre jusqu’à ce qu’il se transforme en ligne verticale, puis faites glisser l’icône de titre d’un côté ou de l’autre. Pour repositionner le titre : m Faites glisser le titre à l’emplacement où vous voulez qu’il apparaisse dans votre vidéo. Vous pouvez même le placer de façon qu’il chevauche deux clips. Pour modifier un titre déjà créé : m Double-cliquez sur l’icône du titre et apportez vos modifications dans le visualiseur. Pour supprimer un titre : m Sélectionnez l’icône du titre et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Ajout d’effets sonores et de commentaires à votre projet Vous pouvez ajouter un effet sonore ou un enregistrement de commentaire à votre projet et l’ancrer à une image vidéo spécifique afin qu’il démarre et s’arrête aux emplacements voulus. Vous pouvez utiliser un fichier audio de votre bibliothèque iTunes ou un effet sonore disponible dans les dossiers Effets sonores. Vous pouvez enregistrer un commentaire directement sur la vidéo dans iMovie. Pour ajouter un effet sonore : 1 Choisissez Fenêtre > « Musique et effets sonores » ou cliquez sur le bouton « Musique et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils iMovie. 2 Cliquez sur un dossier d’effets sonores pour afficher une liste d’effets ou utilisez le champ de recherche au bas de la sous-fenêtre pour trouver un fichier audio par son nom. Cliquez sur un fichier audio pour en obtenir un aperçu sonore. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier audio et faites-le glisser là où vous voulez commencer sa lecture dans votre projet iMovie. Le pointeur se transforme pour vous permettre de faire glisser les extrémités de l’icône du titre.44 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Une icône de clip audio verte apparaît sous les clips vidéo. 4 Pour repositionner le clip audio sur la vidéo, faites-le glisser là où vous voulez commencer sa lecture dans votre film. 5 Pour le raccourcir, faites glisser la fin du clip vers la gauche. Pour enregistrer un commentaire : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Voix commentaire pour ouvrir la fenêtre Voix hors-champ. 2 Sélectionnez le microphone que vous voulez utiliser dans le menu local Enregistrer depuis. 3 Faites glisser le curseur Volume d’entrée vers la droite ou vers la gauche :  Si vous avez une voix douce, faites glisser le curseur Volume d’entrée vers la droite pour augmenter le volume de l’enregistrement.  Si vous avez une voix forte, faites-le glisser vers la gauche pour le diminuer. 4 Faites glisser le curseur Réduction de bruit au maximum vers la droite pour éliminer les bruits ambiants autant que possible. Si vous voulez conserver un peu de bruit de fond dans votre enregistrement, faites glisser le curseur vers la gauche. 5 Sélectionnez « Amélioration de la voix » si vous voulez adoucir le son de la voix enregistrée. 6 Si vous souhaitez entendre l’audio tout en enregistrant votre voix hors-champ, cochez la case « Lire l’audio du projet lors de l’enregistrement » et branchez des écouteurs afin que l’audio ne passe pas par le micro. Pour couper l’audio alors que vous enregistrez votre voix hors-champ, décochez la case. 7 Lorsque vous êtes prêt à commencer, cliquez sur le point du clip où vous voulez commencer le commentaire. iMovie compte à rebours de trois à un. Icône d’effet sonore Indicateurs de niveau sonore Gauche et DroiteChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 45 8 Commencez à parler lorsque vous y êtes invité. Parlez fort et distinctement dans le microphone de l’ordinateur, en veillant à ce que les indicateurs de niveau Droite et Gauche restent dans le vert. La couleur jaune indique que vous parlez légèrement trop fort ; rouge indique que vous parlez beaucoup trop fort et que votre voix sera déformée (“hachée”) dans l’enregistrement. 9 Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie ou appuyez sur la barre d’espace. Pour raccourcir un commentaire : m Faites glisser la fin de l’icône de commentaire vers la gauche. Il n’est pas possible d’allonger le commentaire au-delà de sa longueur d’origine. Pour déplacer un commentaire dans votre projet : m Faites glisser le clip audio jusqu’à l’image vidéo sur laquelle vous voulez que sa lecture commence. Pour supprimer un commentaire : m Sélectionnez son icône et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Ajout de photos avec des effets d’animation Pour ajouter un peu de variété à vos films, vous pouvez ajouter des photos de votre bibliothèque iPhoto. Les images fixes s’animent lorsque vous vous servez des effets Ken Burns de panoramique et de zoom puisque ceux-ci donnent l’impression que la caméra balaie l’image fixe tout en s’en approchant ou en s’en éloignant. Pour ajouter une photo : 1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Photos ou cliquez sur le bouton Photos de la barre d’outils iMovie. 2 Dans la sous-fenêtre Photos, recherchez celle que vous voulez. Vous pouvez utiliser le champ de recherche au bas de la sous-fenêtre pour trouver une photo par son nom. 3 Faites glisser la photo jusqu’à l’endroit où vous souhaitez la voir apparaître dans votre projet. Par défaut, iMovie définit une durée de 4 secondes pour les photos et applique l’effet Ken Burns. En fonction de la configuration du curseur des vignettes de votre projet, la photo peut se dérouler comme une pellicule. 4 Pour modifier la durée de la photo dans votre projet, cliquez sur le bouton Durée dans le coin inférieur de la photo (il apparaît lorsque vous placez le pointeur presque à la fin du clip) et tapez le nombre de secondes que vous voulez que votre photo reste à l’écran dans votre film. Si l’effet Ken Burns dans votre photo ne vous plaît pas, vous pouvez le modifier ou le supprimer.46 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Pour modifier l’effet Ken Burns : 1 Sélectionnez la photo dans votre projet, puis cliquez sur le bouton Rogner de la barre d’outils d’iMovie. 2 Dans le visualiseur, cliquez sur Ken Burns. Deux rectangles de rognage apparaissent dans le visualiseur. Le rectangle de rognage vert indique l’endroit où commence l’effet Ken Burns et le rectangle de rognage rouge celui où il se termine. Vous pouvez rapidement échanger les positions des rectangles de rognage rouge et vert en cliquant sur le petit bouton orné de deux flèches à l’inté- rieur du rectangle de rognage sélectionné . 3 Faites glisser pour redimensionner et repositionner le rectangle de rognage vert de façon à mettre en surbrillance le début souhaité pour l’effet Ken Burns. 4 Faites-le glisser pour redimensionner et repositionner le rectangle rouge jusqu’à ce qu’il affiche en surbrillance la position finale de l’effet Ken Burns. Les rectangles de rognage conservent toujours les proportions que vous avez choisies pour votre projet. 5 Pour afficher l’aperçu de votre travail, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture. Faites glisser et redimensionnez le rectangle de rognage rouge pour définir la position finale. Cliquez ici pour faire pivoter toute l’image. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour rogner l’image sans effet d’animation. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour rétablir l’image de sorte qu’elle retrouve sa taille complète et soit dénuée d’effets d’animation. Faites glisser et redimensionnez le rectangle de rognage vert pour définir la position de début. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour créer ou modifier l’effet Ken Burns. Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher un aperçu de votre travail. Cliquez pour intervertir la position des points de début et de fin.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 47 6 Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous avez obtenu le résultat souhaité. Une icône Rogner apparaît au début du clip. La même icône de rognage indique que le clip a simplement été rogné, qu’on l’a fait pivoté ou que l’effet Ken Burns lui a été ajouté. Cliquez dessus pour modifier ou supprimer le rognage à tout moment. Ouvrez l’éditeur de rognage et cliquez sur Adapter pour supprimer l’effet Ken Burns et restaurer la taille d’origine de votre vidéo à tout moment. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une image dans iMovie. Pour savoir comment procéder, recherchez les rubriques sur le pivotement des images dans l’Aide iMovie. Étape 5 : partager votre film Avec iMovie, vous pouvez partager votre film de différentes façons : dans un format adapté pour une visualisation sur le web, sur votre ordinateur, sur un iPod, sur iPhone, sur une Apple TV ou sur tout autre appareil. Vous pouvez même publier votre film terminé directement dans votre galerie MobileMe ou sur YouTube. Quelle que soit la manière que vous choisissez pour visualiser votre film, iMovie permet d’exporter facilement le fichier d’un film au format adéquat. Au cours de cette étape, vous allez finaliser votre film dans n’importe laquelle des quatre tailles, chacune étant adaptée à la plupart des utilisations. Icône Rogner Pivotement et rognage des images Les boutons de rotation qui apparaissent lorsque vous rognez des images ou lorsque vous appliquez l’effet Ken Burns permettent de modifier l’orientation de l’image par tranches de 90 degrés. Si votre photo ou votre vidéo a été prise avec la caméra retournée, vous pouvez la redresser. De la même manière, vous pouvez rogner des photos ou des vidéos qui n’ont pas les proportions choisies pour votre projet. Lorsque vous exportez votre film, il prend les dimensions de la vidéo ou de la photo la plus large qu’il contient, ce qui peut entraî- ner l’apparition de bandes noires à gauche et à droite de l’image (« pillar box ») ou en haut et en bas de l’image (« letterbox »). Le rognage de photos ou de vidéos pour s’adapter aux mêmes dimensions évite ce phénomène.48 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Publication en vue d’un affichage sur votre iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV Si vous voulez regarder votre film sur votre iPod, votre iPhone ou votre Apple TV, vous devez d’abord transférer votre film terminé dans iTunes. Pour créer un film prêt à être visualisé sur iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV : 1 Choisissez Partager > iTunes. 2 Sélectionnez la ou les tailles de film souhaitées. Les films de taille moyenne sont préférables pour la lecture sur un iPod ; les films de grande taille sont particulièrement indiqués si vous avez l’intention de les regarder sur un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV). Pour votre iPhone, il est recommandé de créer des films de petite taille et adaptés aux appareils mobiles. Il se peut que certaines options relatives au choix de la taille ne soient pas disponibles. Cela est dû au fait que la taille des données originales du projet n’est pas suffisante pour un rendu dans la ou les tailles en question. Si vos données d’origine ne sont pas en haute définition, iMovie ne produira pas le film en grande taille. Le rendu du projet peut prendre un certain temps, notamment si vous avez choisi de rendre plusieurs tailles à la fois. Une fois rendus, vos films sont affichés dans votre bibliothèque de films iTunes d’où vous pouvez les télécharger sur votre iPod ou votre iPhone, ou les regarder sur votre téléviseur haute définition via Apple TV. Envoi de votre film terminé vers iDVD, iWeb ou d’autres applications Une fois que le montage de votre film est terminé dans iMovie, vous pouvez le publier dans le navigateur multimédia d’où il pourra être utilisé avec d’autres applications Apple. Pour créer un film prêt à être utilisé avec iWeb, iDVD, GarageBand et d’autres applications : 1 Choisissez Partager > Navigateur multimédia. 2 Sélectionnez la ou les tailles souhaitées pour votre film en fonction de l’utilisation que vous comptez en faire. Il se peut que certaines options relatives au choix de la taille ne soient pas disponibles. Cela est dû au fait que la taille des données originales du projet n’est pas suffisante pour un rendu dans la ou les tailles en question. Si vos données d’origine ne sont pas en haute définition, iMovie ne produira pas le film en grande taille. Le rendu du projet peut prendre un certain temps, notamment si vous avez choisi de rendre plusieurs tailles à la fois. Une fois rendus, vos films apparaîtront dans le Navigateur multimédia et vous pourrez les utiliser avec iDVD, iWeb et GarageBand. Lorsque votre projet est finalisé pour le partage, des icônes apparaissent à côté de son nom dans la Bibliothèque de projets pour indiquer les tailles finalisées.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 49 Si vous voulez encore modifier votre projet, iMovie vous avertit qu’il sera différent des versions partagées dans iTunes et dans le Navigateur multimédia. Les icônes de partage disparaissent tant que vous n’avez pas à nouveau finalisé le projet. Si vous finalisez à nouveau le projet, les versions finalisées précédentes sont supprimées. Si vous souhaitez conserver des copies de vos films rendus de façon à pouvoir y accé- der sans utiliser le Navigateur multimédia ni iTunes, reportez-vous aux rubriques de l’Aide d’iMovie qui traitent du partage et de l’exportation. Publication directe sur le web Si vous possédez un compte MobileMe, vous pouvez publier votre film dès qu’il est terminé. Pour publier votre film directement dans votre galerie MobileMe : 1 Sélectionnez votre projet dans la bibliothèque des projets, puis choisissez Partager > Galerie MobileMe 2 Tapez un nom pour votre film dans le champ Titre, puis, si vous le souhaitez, saisissez dans le champ Description une brève description que les spectateurs pourront lire. 3 Sélectionnez une taille pour la publication de façon à optimiser l’affichage pour vos amis ou votre famille qui ont des connexions Internet plus ou moins rapides. 4 Si vous voulez que les gens puissent télécharger des copies de votre film, cochez la case « Autoriser le téléchargement de la séquence ». 5 Si vous voulez limiter l’accès de votre film aux personnes autorisées, cochez la case « Masquer le projet sur la page d’accueil de ma galerie ». 6 Cliquez sur Publier. iMovie télécharge automatiquement votre film vers votre galerie MobileMe. Une fois que le film a été téléchargé dans votre galerie MobileMe, la barre de titre du projet dans iMovie affiche « Publié sur MobileMe ». Des boutons permettant d'accéder à la page web du film sont également affichés et des notifications sont envoyées à vos amis. Indique que le projet est rendu dans n’importe laquelle des quatre tailles Indique que le projet est publié sur le web Indique que le projet a été modifié depuis sa dernière publication sur le web50 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 7 Pour visiter la page web de votre film, cliquez sur Visiter. 8 Pour informer vos amis que vous avez publié ce nouveau film, cliquez sur « Recommander à un ami ». Si vous n’avez pas de compte MobileMe, vous pouvez vous abonner à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/mobileme. Vous pouvez aussi publier votre film sur YouTube. Pour publier votre projet sur YouTube : 1 Sélectionnez votre projet dans la bibliothèque des projets, puis choisissez Partager > YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez votre compte dans le menu local Compte. Si vous n’avez pas de compte YouTube, vous pouvez en ouvrir un en cliquant sur Ajouter et en créant un compte sur le site web YouTube. 3 Tapez un nom pour votre film dans le champ Titre, puis saisissez une brève description que les spectateurs liront dans le champ Description. 4 Tapez des mots-clés dans le champ Étiquettes de façon que les utilisateurs trouvent facilement votre film s’ils le cherchent sur le site YouTube. 5 Sélectionnez une taille de publication. La taille Moyenne est recommandée. 6 Si vous ne voulez pas que votre film soit publiquement disponible, sélectionnez « Rendre ce film privé ». 7 Cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Publier pour accepter les conditions du service offert par YouTube. iMovie télécharge automatiquement votre film sur le site web de YouTube. Lorsque le film est téléchargé sur le site web YouTube, la barre de titre du projet dans iMovie affiche « Publié sur YouTube ». Elle affiche également les boutons qui vous amè- nent à la page web du film et envoie des notifications à vos amis. 8 Pour visiter la page web de votre film, cliquez sur Visiter. 9 Pour informer vos amis que vous avez publié ce nouveau film, cliquez sur « Recommander à un ami ». Lorsque votre projet est publié, une icône s’affiche à côté de son nom dans la Bibliothèque de projets pour indiquer sa publication. Si vous voulez modifier votre projet par la suite, iMovie vous avertit qu’il sera différent de la version publiée ; un signal d’alerte apparaît au-dessus de l’icône de publication tant que vous n’avez pas à nouveau publié le film.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 51 Poursuivez votre exploration de iMovie Félicitations, vous avez terminé votre initiation ! Maintenant que vous vous êtes familiarisé avec les principaux outils et fonctionnalités de iMovie, vous pouvez continuer à importer et à profiter de vos vidéos quand vous le souhaitez, et à créer et à partager d’autres films. Dans l’Aide iMovie, vous trouverez d’autres conseils pour travailler avec des vidéos et du son, ainsi que bien d’autres choses encore, entre autres :  Régler les couleurs et la luminosité, ainsi que d’autres paramètres de qualité des images.  Repérer votre vidéo avec des mots-clés pour retrouver facilement des moments particuliers.  Personnaliser votre espace de travail en fonction de votre style de travail.  Partager votre film avec une multitude de formats et d’appareils iMovie vous permet de créer des films dans de nombreux formats différents pour que vous puissiez le visionner sur pratiquement tout type de support numérique, et notamment :  l’envoyer par courrier électronique ;  le graver sur un DVD à l’aide d’iDVD ;  l’enregistrer sous forme de séquence QuickTime sous divers formats. Pour en savoir plus sur le partage de films, consultez les rubriques traitant du partage des films dans l’Aide iMovie. iMovie offre des outils sophistiqués afin de travailler plus rapidement et plus facilement avec votre vidéo, une fois que vous connaissez les bases. Grâce à ces outils, vous pouvez effectuer la plupart des tâches mentionnées dans ce guide d’initiation, y compris l’amélioration et le repérage de votre vidéo à l’aide de mots-clés. Pour en savoir plus sur les outils sophistiqués, consultez les rubriques traitant de leur utilisation dans l’Aide iMovie.52 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie Ressources supplémentaires Vous pouvez consulter diverses sources pour obtenir de l’aide supplémentaire sur l’utilisation de iMovie :  Aide à l’écran : iMovie est fourni avec un système d’aide intégré. Lorsque l’application iMovie est ouverte, choisissez Aide > Aide iMovie. Lorsque l’Aide s’ouvre, tapez un mot ou une expression dans le champ de recherche situé en haut de la page ou cliquez sur l’une des zones de rubriques pour trouver des informations détaillées sur un sujet en particulier.  Didacticiels multimédias (www.apple.com/fr/ilife/tutorials/imovie/) : ces courtes initiations à la vidéo montrent comment effectuer des tâches courantes dans iMovie. Pour y accéder, choisissez Aide, puis cliquez sur How-To Videos. (Ces initiations vidéo sont disponibles uniquement dans certaines langues.)  Site web d’assistance iMovie (www.apple.com/fr/support/imovie) : consultez ce site pour accéder à des forums de discussion, ainsi qu’à des informations de dépannage et à des mises à jour de logiciels.www.apple.com/ilife/imovie © 2008 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, le logo Apple, Apple TV, FireWire, GarageBand, iDVD, iLife, iMac, iMovie, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iSight, iTunes et QuickTime sont des marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. MobileMe est une marque de service d’Apple Inc. Les autres noms de produit et d’entreprise mentionnés dans le présent document peuvent être des marques appartenant à leur détenteurs respectifs. F019-1282 iPod shuffle Guide des fonctions2 1 Table des matières Chapitre 1 3 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 4 Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod shuffle 4 Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle 5 Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle 7 Recharge de la batterie 8 Voyants d’état Chapitre 2 11 Chargement et lecture de musique 11 À propos d’iTunes 12 Importation de musique dans votre bibliothèque iTunes 15 Organisation de votre musique 16 Chargement de musique sur l’iPod shuffle 19 Lecture de musique Chapitre 3 23 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle 23 Utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe Chapitre 4 24 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle 24 Écouteurs Apple Earphones 25 Le socle pour iPod shuffle 25 L’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter 25 Accessoires disponibles Chapitre 5 26 Astuces et dépannage 30 Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle Chapitre 6 31 Sécurité et manipulation 31 Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité 33 Informations importantes sur la manipulation Chapitre 7 34 En savoir plus, service et assistance1 3 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Apple vous félicite pour l’acquisition de votre iPod shuffle. Lisez ce chapitre pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités de l’iPod shuffle, sur la manière d’utiliser ses commandes et plus encore. Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle, vous devez déposer des morceaux et d’autres fichiers audio sur votre ordinateur puis charger ces fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle. Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle pour :  charger des chansons et les écouter lorsque vous êtes en déplacement ;  écouter des podcasts, des sortes d’émissions de radio téléchargeables sur Internet ;  écouter des livres audio achetés sur l’iTunes Store ou audible.com ;  stocker ou sauvegarder des fichiers et autres données en utilisant l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe.4 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod shuffle Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle Les commandes simples de l’iPod shuffle vous permettent de lire des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts aisément. Port de sortie casque Bouton Précédent/ Retour rapide Bouton Lecture/Pause Bouton Suivant/ Avance rapide Bouton Baisser le volume (-) Bouton d'alimentation Voyant d'état supérieur Bouton Augmenter le volume (+) Bouton de mode aléatoire Voyant d'état inférieur OFF Pour : procédez ainsi : Activer ou désactiver l’iPod shuffle Faites glisser le bouton d’alimentation (la couleur verte indique que l’iPod shuffle est activé). Lancer la lecture d’un morceau (ou autre) Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). Mettre un morceau en pause Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). Régler le volume Appuyez sur les boutons Augmenter le volume (?) ou Baisser le volume (D). Définir l’ordre de lecture des morceaux Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire (vers ¡ pour activer la lecture aléatoire, vers / pour la désactiver et lire dans l’ordre). Passer à la piste suivante Appuyez sur Suivant/Avance rapide (‘). Revenir au début d’une piste Appuyez sur Précédent/Retour rapide (]). Lancer la lecture de la piste précédente Appuyez deux fois sur Précédent/Retour rapide (]). Aller à la première piste Appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’), rapidement. Effectuer une avance ou un retour rapide Maintenez enfoncé Suivant/Avance rapide (‘) ou Précédent/ Retour rapide (]).Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 5 Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur pour y charger des morceaux et d’autres fichiers audio ainsi que pour recharger sa batterie. Déconnectez l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous avez terminé. Connexion de l’iPod shuffle Pour connecter l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur : m Branchez le socle de l’iPod shuffle, inclus, sur un port USB de votre ordinateur puis placez l’iPod shuffle sur le socle. Remarque : branchez le socle sur un port USB à forte alimentation pour recharger la batterie de l’iPod shuffle. Il est recommandé d’utiliser un port USB 2.0. N’utilisez pas le port USB du clavier. La première fois que vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur l’ordinateur, l’Assistant réglages de l’iPod vous aide à configurer l’iPod shuffle et à le synchroniser avec votre bibliothèque iTunes. Désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle (pour ne pas les activer par mégarde) Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant environ trois secondes (jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état soit de couleur orange et clignote trois fois). Répétez l’opération pour activer à nouveau les boutons (le voyant d’état passe alors au vert et clignote trois fois). réinitialiser l’iPod shuffle (si votre iPod shuffle ne répond plus) Retirez l’iPod shuffle du socle. Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez 5 secondes puis rallumez-le. rechercher le numéro de série de l’iPod shuffle Observez l’encoche située sous la pince de l’ iPod shuffleou bien sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes (lorsque l’iPod shuffle est connecté à l’ordinateur) et cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. Pour : procédez ainsi :6 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Important : une fois l’iPod shuffle synchronisé avec la bibliothèque iTunes d’un ordinateur, un message s’affichera chaque fois que vous brancherez l’iPod shuffle sur un autre ordinateur et vous demandera si vous souhaitez le synchroniser avec la bibliothèque de cet ordinateur. Si vous voulez conserver la musique actuellement présente sur l’iPod shuffle, cliquez sur Annuler. Vous pouvez également cliquez sur Transférer les achats, ce qui vous permettra de conserver le contenu de l’iPod shuffle et de copier les morceaux achetés qui y sont présents sur la bibliothèque iTunes du nouvel ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’Aide iTunes. Déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle Il est important de ne pas débrancher l’iPod shuffle de votre ordinateur lorsque des fichiers audio sont en cours de chargement ou lorsque l’iPod shuffle est utilisé en tant que disque externe. Pour savoir si vous pouvez débrancher l’iPod shuffle, observez la partie supérieure de la fenêtre d’iTunes ou le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle. Important : si le message « Ne pas déconnecter » s’affiche dans iTunes ou si le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle est de couleur orange et clignote, vous devez éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher. Dans le cas contraire, vous pourriez endommager les fichiers de l’iPod shuffle. Si vous activez le mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle comme disque (voir la page 23), vous devrez toujours éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher. Pour éjecter l’iPod shuffle : m Dans iTunes, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection (C) situé à côté de l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. Si vous utilisez un Mac : pour éjecter l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez également faire glisser l’icône iPod shuffle du bureau vers la Corbeille. Si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows, vous pouvez aussi éjecter l’iPod shuffle en cliquant sur l’icône « Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité » située dans la zone de notification du PC et en sélectionnant votre iPod shuffle. Pour débrancher l’iPod shuffle : m Retirez l’iPod shuffle du socle.Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 7 Recharge de la batterie L’iPod shuffle dispose d’une batterie interne et rechargeable. Pour obtenir des résultats optimaux, rechargez entièrement la batterie lors de la première utilisation de l’iPod shuffle. Il faut environ deux heures pour recharger une batterie vide jusqu’à 80 % et quatre heures pour la recharger complètement. Si l’iPod shuffle n’a pas été utilisé pendant un moment, il est possible qu’une recharge de sa batterie soit nécessaire. Pour recharger la batterie via votre ordinateur : m Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation à l’aide du socle de l’iPod shuffle, inclus. Votre ordinateur doit être allumé et non pas en mode veille (certains modèles de Macintosh permettent cependant de recharger l’iPod shuffle même en mode veille). Lorsque la batterie est en cours de recharge, le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle est de couleur orange. Une fois la batterie complètement rechargée, le voyant passe au vert. Remarque : si l’iPod shuffle est utilisé en tant que disque dur (voir la page 23) ou si des morceaux ou des réglages sont en cours de chargement sur l’iPod shuffle depuis iTunes, le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote, ce qui vous indique qu’il est nécessaire d’éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher. Si le voyant d’état ne s’allume pas, il est possible que l’iPod shuffle ne soit pas connecté à un port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation. Essayez de le connecter à un autre port USB de votre ordinateur. Remarque : vous pouvez charger de la musique lorsque la batterie est en cours de recharge. Si vous souhaitez recharger l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous n’êtes pas devant votre ordinateur, vous pouvez brancher l’iPod shuffle sur un adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter, disponible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/.8 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Pour recharger la batterie via un adaptateur iPod USB Power Adapter : 1 Connectez l’adaptateur CA à une prise électrique (si nécessaire). 2 Branchez le connecteur USB du socle de l’iPod shuffle sur l’adaptateur secteur. 3 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à une prise de courant en état de fonctionnement. 4 Placez l’iPod shuffle sur le socle. Vous pouvez déconnecter et utiliser l’iPod shuffle avant qu’il ne soit complètement rechargé. Remarque : les batteries rechargeables ont un nombre limité de cycles de recharge. La durée de vie de la batterie et le nombre de cycles de recharge varient en fonction de l’utilisation et des réglages du matériel. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur le site www.apple.com/fr/batteries. Vérification de l’état de la batterie Lorsque vous allumez l’iPod shuffle ou lorsque vous le débranchez de l’ordinateur ou de l’adaptateur secteur, le voyant d’état vous indique quelle est la charge approximative de la batterie. Consultez le tableau de la section suivante. Si l’iPod shuffle est déjà allumé, il est possible de vérifier l’état de la batterie sans interrompre la lecture en cours : pour ce faire, éteignez puis rallumez très rapidement l’iPod shuffle. Voyants d’état L’iPod shuffle est doté de deux voyants d’état : un en haut et un autre en bas. Ils vous permettent de savoir quand un bouton est activé, de connaître l’état de la batterie, de savoir si le mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque est activé ou encore de détecter un éventuel problème. AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter, lisez les consignes de sécurité de la page 32 pour savoir comment vous en servir. Adaptateur CA Adaptateur secteur USB iPod Câble du socle de l'iPod shuffleChapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 9 À l’allumage ou lors du débranchement de l’iPod vert Charge suffisante (entre 30 et 100 %) orange Charge faible (entre 10 et 30 %) rouge Charge très faible (moins de 10 %) inactif Aucune charge vert et deux fois orange en alternance (10 secondes) ERREUR : l’iPod shuffle doit être restauré Lorsque l’iPod est branché orange (en permanence) En cours de recharge vert (en permanence) Entièrement rechargé orange et clignotant (en permanence) Ne le débranchez pas (synchronisation avec iTunes en cours ou mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle comme disque activé) À l’appui sur les boutons vert Lecture (’) vert (1 minute) Pause (’) Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert, puis trois fois orange Boutons désactivés orange, puis trois fois vert Boutons activés vert Augmentation (?) ou baisse (D) du volume trois fois orange Limite de volume fixée par l’utilisateur atteinte. Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert Augmentation (?) ou baisse (D) du volume inactif Volume maximum ou coupé. trois fois orange Limite de volume fixée par l’utilisateur atteinte vert Piste précédente (]) Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert Retour rapide (]) vert Piste suivante (]) Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton : vert Avance rapide (‘) N’importe quel bouton orange Pas d’action en cours (les boutons sont désactivés) vert et orange en alternance (2 secondes) ERREUR : pas de musique chargée sur l’appareil10 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle Lorsque l’iPod shuffle est en cours de lecture rouge et clignotant (en permanence) Batterie presque déchargée2 11 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Grâce à l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez emporter avec vous toute votre musique, où que vous alliez. Lisez ce chapitre pour apprendre à charger de la musique et à l’écouter sur votre iPod shuffle. Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle en important tout d’abord des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts (sortes d’émissions radio) sur votre ordinateur puis en les chargeant sur l’iPod shuffle. Lisez ce qui suit pour en savoir plus sur les étapes de ce processus, notamment sur :  le transfert de musique à partir de votre collection de CD, votre disque dur ou l’iTunes Store (qui fait partie d’iTunes et n’est disponible que dans certains pays) vers l’application iTunes de votre ordinateur ;  l’organisation de votre musique et des autres fichiers audio en liste de lectures ;  le chargement de morceaux, de livres audio et de podcasts sur l’iPod shuffle ;  l’écoute de musique ou de tout autre fichier audio lorsque vous êtes en déplacement. À propos d’iTunes iTunes est l’application que vous devez utiliser pour synchroniser de la musique, des livres audio et des podcasts avec l’iPod shuffle. Elle s’ouvre automatiquement dès que vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. Ce guide vous explique comment utiliser iTunes pour importer des morceaux et d’autres fichiers audio sur votre ordinateur, créer des compilations personnelles de vos morceaux préférés (appelées listes de lecture), les charger sur l’iPod shuffle et définir les réglages de l’iPod shuffle. iTunes possède également bien d’autres fonctionnalités. Pour en savoir plus, ouvrez iTunes puis choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes.12 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Importation de musique dans votre bibliothèque iTunes Pour écouter de la musique sur l’iPod shuffle, il vous faut tout d’abord la transférer depuis la bibliothèque iTunes de votre ordinateur. Il existe trois façons d’importer de la musique dans la bibliothèque iTunes :  En achetant de la musique et des livres audio ou en téléchargeant des podcasts en ligne à partir de l’iTunes Store.  En y important de la musique à partir de CD audio.  En y ajoutant de la musique et des données audio déjà stockées sur votre ordinateur. Achat de musique et téléchargement de podcasts via l’iTunes Store Si vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet, vous pouvez facilement acheter et télé- charger des morceaux, des albums et des livres audio en ligne via l’iTunes Store. Vous pouvez également vous abonner à des podcasts, des sortes d’émissions de radio, et les télécharger. Pour acheter de la musique en ligne via l’iTunes Store, vous devez configurer un compte Apple dans iTunes, rechercher les morceaux voulus, puis les acheter. Si vous disposez déjà d’un compte Apple ou d’un compte America Online (AOL, disponible uniquement dans certains pays), vous pouvez vous en servir pour vous inscrire à l’iTunes Store et acheter des morceaux. Pour entrer dans l’iTunes Store : m Ouvrez iTunes, puis :  Si vous disposez déjà d’un compte iTunes, choisissez Store > Ouvrir une session.  Si vous n’avez pas encore de compte iTunes, choisissez Store > Créer un compte. Suivez alors les instructions à l’écran pour configurer un compte Apple ou bien saisissez les données de votre compte Apple ou AOL existant.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 13 Pour rechercher des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts : Vous pouvez parcourir l’iTunes Store ou y faire une recherche pour trouver un album, un morceau ou un artiste. Ouvrez iTunes puis cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sousfenêtre Source.  Pour parcourir l’iTunes Store, choisissez un genre musical dans le menu local Genre, cliquez sur l’un des morceaux ou l’une des publications ou bien cliquez sur le bouton Explorer dans la fenêtre iTunes Store.  Pour naviguer à la recherche de podcasts, cliquez sur le lien Podcasts situé dans la fenêtre principale de l’iTunes Store.  Pour faire une recherche dans l’iTunes Store, tapez le nom d’un album, d’un morceau, d’un artiste ou d’un compositeur dans le champ Rechercher iTunes Store.  Pour limiter votre recherche, tapez du texte dans la zone Rechercher iTunes Store, appuyez sur la touche Retour ou Entrée de votre clavier, puis cliquez sur les éléments de la barre de recherche. Par exemple, pour limiter la recherche à des titres de morceaux et à des albums, cliquez sur MUSIQUE.  Pour rechercher une combinaison d’éléments, cliquez sur Recherche avancée dans la fenêtre de l’iTunes Store.  Pour revenir à la page principale de l’iTunes Store, cliquez sur le bouton Accueil dans l’angle supérieur gauche de la fenêtre principale de l’iTunes Store. Pour acheter un morceau, un album ou un livre audio : 1 Cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sous-fenêtre Source puis recherchez l’élément que vous souhaitez acheter. Vous pouvez double-cliquer sur un morceau ou un autre élément pour en écouter un extrait et vous assurer que c’est bien celui que vous voulez. 2 Cliquez sur Acheter le morceau, Acheter l’album ou Acheter le livre. L’élément est alors téléchargé sur votre ordinateur et le prix est débité de la carte de crédit indiquée sur votre compte Apple ou AOL. Pour télécharger un podcast ou vous y abonner : 1 Cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Podcasts dans la partie gauche de la page principale de l’iTunes Store. 3 Recherchez le podcast que vous souhaitez télécharger.  Pour télécharger un seul épisode de podcast, cliquez sur le bouton Obtenir l’épisode situé à côté de l’épisode.  Pour vous abonner à un podcast, cliquez sur le bouton S’abonner situé à côté de l’image du podcast. iTunes télécharge l’épisode le plus récent. Les nouveaux épisodes disponibles seront automatiquement téléchargés sur iTunes lorsque vous vous connecterez à Internet.14 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Importation de musique dans iTunes à partir de CD audio Suivez ces instructions pour importer de la musique de vos CD dans iTunes. Pour importer de la musique dans iTunes à partir d’un CD audio : 1 Insérez un CD dans votre ordinateur puis ouvrez iTunes. Si vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet, iTunes obtient le nom des morceaux sur Internet (s’ils sont disponibles) et les affiche dans la fenêtre. Si vous ne disposez pas de connexion à Internet, vous pouvez dans un premier temps importer vos CD puis, ultérieurement, lorsque l’ordinateur est connecté à Internet, choisir Avancé > Obtenir le nom des pistes du CD. iTunes obtiendra alors le nom des pistes des CD importés. Si le nom des pistes du CD n’est pas disponible en ligne, vous pouvez les saisir manuellement. Consultez « Saisie du nom des morceaux et d’autres informations » à la page 14. Une fois les données des morceaux saisies, vous pouvez parcourir les morceaux dans iTunes par titre, artiste, album ou autre critère. 2 Cliquez pour supprimer la coche située en regard des morceaux que vous ne souhaitez pas importer depuis le CD. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer un CD. La zone d’affichage située en haut de la fenêtre iTunes indique le temps nécessaire à l’importation des différents morceaux. Par défaut, iTunes lit les morceaux à mesure qu’ils sont importés. Si vous importez un grand nombre de morceaux, il est possible que vous souhaitiez arrêter la lecture des morceaux afin d’améliorer les performances. 4 Pour éjecter le CD, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection (C). 5 Répétez ces opérations pour tout autre CD contenant des morceaux que vous souhaitez importer. Saisie du nom des morceaux et d’autres informations Il est possible de saisir manuellement les titres et d’autres informations (y compris des commentaires) pour les morceaux et les autres éléments de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Pour saisir manuellement le titre des morceaux et d’autres informations du CD : 1 Sélectionnez la première piste du CD puis sélectionnez Fichier > Obtenir des informations. 2 Cliquez sur Infos. 3 Saisissez les informations concernant le morceau. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant pour saisir les informations concernant la piste suivante.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 15 Ajout de morceaux stockés sur votre ordinateur à la bibliothèque iTunes Si votre ordinateur contient déjà des fichiers audio numériques, tels que les fichiers MP3, vous pouvez facilement les ajouter à votre bibliothèque iTunes. Pour ajouter des morceaux stockés sur votre ordinateur à la bibliothèque iTunes : m Faites glisser le dossier ou l’unité contenant les fichiers audio vers l’en-tête BIBLIOTHÈQUE de la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes (ou choisissez Fichier > Ajouter à la bibliothèque, puis sélectionnez le dossier ou l’unité). Si iTunes prend en charge le format de fichier des morceaux, ceux-ci sont automatiquement ajoutés à la bibliothèque iTunes. Vous pouvez également faire glisser individuellement des fichiers audio dans iTunes. Remarque : avec l’application iTunes pour Windows, vous avez la possibilité de convertir un fichier audio numérique sans protection créé avec Windows Media Player en format de fichier compatible iTunes (AAC ou MP3, par exemple). Cela peut être utile si vous disposez des fichiers de musique encodés au format WMA. Pour en savoir plus, ouvrez iTunes puis choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Organisation de votre musique Grâce à iTunes, vous pouvez organiser à votre guise des morceaux et d’autres éléments dans des listes appelées listes de lecture. Vous pouvez par exemple créer des listes de lecture qui accompagnent votre séance d’exercice physique ou qui correspondent à une humeur particulière. Vous pouvez également créer des listes de lecture intelligentes qui se mettront automatiquement à jour selon les règles que vous aurez choisies. Lorsque vous ajoutez à iTunes des morceaux qui correspondent à ces règles, ils seront automatiquement ajoutés à la liste de lecture intelligente. Vous pouvez créer autant de listes de lecture que vous le souhaitez avec n’importe lequel des morceaux de la bibliothèque iTunes. Le fait d’ajouter un morceau à une liste de lecture ou de l’en supprimer ne le supprime pas de la bibliothèque iTunes. Pour créer une liste de lecture dans iTunes : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter (?) ou bien choisissez Fichier > Nouvelle liste de lecture. 2 Tapez le nom de la liste de lecture. 3 Cliquez sur Musique dans la liste BIBLIOTHÈQUE, puis faites glisser un morceau ou un autre élément vers la liste de lecture. Pour sélectionner plusieurs morceaux, lorsque vous cliquez sur chaque morceau, maintenez la touche Maj ou Commande (x) enfoncée s’il s’agit d’un Mac, ou la touche Maj ou Contrôle s’il s’agit d’un PC sous Windows. Pour créer une liste de lecture intelligente : m Sélectionnez Fichier > « Nouvelle liste de lecture intelligente » puis définissez les règles de votre liste de lecture.16 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Chargement de musique sur l’iPod shuffle Une fois votre musique importée et organisée dans iTunes, vous pouvez facilement la charger sur l’iPod shuffle. Il est possible de définir le mode de chargement de la musique d’iTunes vers l’iPod shuffle en branchant ce dernier sur l’ordinateur, en sélectionnant iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source puis en configurant les options situées dans la partie inférieure de la sous-fenêtre Contenu. Des options supplémentaires concernant le chargement de musique et l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle s’affichent dans la sous-fenêtre Réglages. Remplissage automatique de l’iPod shuffle iTunes vous permet de charger de manière automatique une sélection de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle en un seul clic. Vous pouvez décider d’obtenir les morceaux de la totalité de la bibliothèque ou bien d’une seule liste de lecture, mais aussi définir d’autres options pour la fonction de remplissage automatique. Pour charger automatiquement de la musique sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la liste des dispositifs de la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Contenu. 4 Choisissez la liste de lecture que vous souhaitez charger automatiquement sur l’iPod dans le menu local. Pour charger automatiquement les morceaux de la totalité de votre bibliothèque, sélectionnez Musique. 5 Sélectionnez une des options suivantes, au choix : Choisir les éléments aléatoirement : iTunes modifie l’ordre des morceaux au cours de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, iTunes télécharge les morceaux dans l’ordre où ils apparaissent dans la liste de lecture sélectionnée ou dans la bibliothèque. Favoriser les éléments les mieux cotés: iTunes charge automatiquement les morceaux que vous écoutez le plus souvent.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 17 Remplacer tous les éléments lors du remplissage automatique : iTunes remplace les morceaux présents sur l’iPod shuffle par les nouveaux morceaux sélectionnés. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, les morceaux déjà chargés sur l’iPod shuffle y demeurent et iTunes sélectionne de nouveaux morceaux pour remplir l’espace qui y est disponible. 6 Cliquez sur Remplissage auto. Lorsque le chargement de musique d’iTunes sur l’iPod shuffle est en cours, la fenêtre d’état d’iTunes affiche sa progression. Une fois le « remplissage automatique » terminé, le message « L’iPod est à jour » apparaît dans iTunes. Comment limiter la fonction de remplissage automatique aux éléments cochés dans la bibliothèque iTunes Il est possible de configurer iTunes de manière à ce que la fonction de remplissage automatique charge uniquement les éléments qui, dans la bibliothèque iTunes, sont cochés. Les éléments désélectionnés seront ignorés. Pour limiter la fonction de remplissage automatique aux éléments cochés : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Lorsque l’iPod shuffle apparaît dans la fenêtre d’iTunes, sélectionnez-le. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Sélectionnez l’option « Ne mettre à jour que les morceaux cochés ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer. Chargement manuel de morceaux, de livres audio et de podcasts Il est possible de charger manuellement des morceaux et des listes de lecture sur l’iPod shuffle. Si vous souhaitez charger des livres audio et des podcasts sur l’iPod shuffle, vous devrez obligatoirement le faire manuellement. Pour charger un morceau ou tout autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez une liste de lecture ou la bibliothèque dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Faites glisser le morceau (ou l’élément) vers l’iPod shuffle, situé dans la sous-fenêtre Source. Vous pouvez également faire glisser des listes de lecture entières afin de les charger sur l’iPod shuffle.18 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Organisation des morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle Une fois que les morceaux sont chargés sur l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez les organiser et les placer dans l’ordre que vous le souhaitez, tout comme vous le faites avec les listes de lecture dans iTunes. Pour organiser les morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Contenu. 4 Cliquez sur l’en-tête vide situé au-dessus de la première colonne pour classer les morceaux par numéro. 5 Faites glisser les morceaux afin de les placer dans l’ordre souhaité. Comment faire tenir davantage de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle Si vous avez importé des morceaux dans iTunes dans un format au débit plus élevé, tel que le format AIFF, vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’iTunes convertisse automatiquement les morceaux en fichiers AAC de 128 kbps lors de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Cela n’influe pas sur la qualité ni sur la taille des morceaux dans iTunes. Remarque : les morceaux aux formats non pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, comme Apple Lossless, doivent obligatoirement être convertis pour pouvoir être chargés sur l’iPod shuffle. Pour en savoir plus sur les formats pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section « Si vous ne parvenez pas à charger un morceau ou un autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle : » à la page 28. Pour convertir des morceaux au débit plus élevé en fichiers AAC : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Sélectionnez « Convertir en AAC 128 kbps les morceaux dont le débit est supérieur ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 19 Suppression de morceaux et d’autres éléments de l’iPod shuffle Vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’iTunes remplace automatiquement les éléments présents sur l’iPod shuffle par ceux qui y sont chargés via la fonction de remplissage automatique. Vous pouvez également supprimer les éléments de l’iPod shuffle manuellement. Pour remplacer automatiquement les éléments de l’iPod shuffle par ceux importés lors du processus de remplissage automatique : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Sélectionnez l’onglet Contenu. 4 Vérifiez que l’option « Remplacer tous les éléments lors du remplissage automatique » est sélectionnée. Pour supprimer un morceau ou un autre élément de l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Sélectionnez un morceau ou autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle puis appuyez sur la touche Supprimer ou Arrière de votre clavier. La suppression manuelle d’un morceau ou d’un autre élément de l’iPod shuffle ne supprime pas cet élément de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Lecture de musique Après avoir chargé de la musique et d’autres données audio sur votre iPod shuffle, vous pouvez les écouter. Pour écouter les morceaux et les autres éléments présents sur l’iPod shuffle : 1 Branchez les écouteurs sur l’iPod shuffle et placez-les dans vos oreilles. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). Appuyez sur Augmenter le volume (?) ou Baisser le volume (D) pour régler le volume sonore. Évitez d’augmenter le volume à outrance. Consultez la section « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la page 21. Pour obtenir un résumé des commandes de l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section « Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 4. Remarque : si vous écoutez un livre audio, placez le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position de répétition (/) afin que les chapitres soient lus dans l’ordre. AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser les écouteurs, lisez les consignes de sécurité de la page 32 pour savoir comment éviter d’endommager votre audition.20 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Comment configurer l’iPod shuffle de manière à ce qu’il lise les morceaux dans l’ordre ou dans un ordre aléatoire Il est possible de régler l’iPod shuffle pour qu’il lise les morceaux de manière aléatoire ou dans l’ordre. Pour que l’iPod shuffle lise les morceaux dans un ordre aléatoire : m Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position aléatoire (¡). Pour changer l’ordre des morceaux de façon à les lire dans un autre ordre aléatoire, appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’), rapidement. Pour que l’iPod shuffle lise les morceaux dans l’ordre : m Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position de répétition (/). Pour revenir au premier morceau, appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’), rapidement. Comment régler les morceaux pour qu’ils soient lus au même volume Le niveau sonore des morceaux et des autres données audio peut varier en fonction de leur mode d’enregistrement ou d’encodage. Avec iTunes, il est possible de régler le volume des morceaux de manière automatique ; de cette manière, ils sont lus au même niveau sonore. Vous pouvez configurer l’iPod shuffle de sorte qu’il utilise les réglages de volume d’iTunes. Pour régler iTunes de sorte qu’il lise les morceaux au même niveau sonore : 1 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez iTunes > Préférences si vous utilisez un Mac ou sélectionnez Édition > Préférences si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows. 2 Cliquez sur Lecture puis choisissez Égaliseur de volume. Pour régler l’iPod shuffle de manière à ce qu’il utilise les réglages de volume d’iTunes : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Sélectionnez « Activer l’Égaliseur de volume ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer. Important : si vous n’avez pas activé l’option Égaliseur de volume dans iTunes, la configurer sur l’iPod shuffle n’a aucun effet.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 21 Définition d’une limite de volume Il est possible d’établir une limite de volume sur l’iPod shuffle, mais aussi de définir un mot de passe dans iTunes afin d’empêcher toute autre personne de modifier ce réglage. Si vous avez défini une limite de volume sur l’iPod shuffle, le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote trois fois si vous essayez de monter le son au-delà de la limite établie. Pour définir la limite du volume pour l’iPod Shuffle : 1 Réglez le son sur l’iPod shuffle sur le niveau que vous souhaitez établir comme volume maximum. 2 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 3 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 5 Sélectionnez « Limiter le volume maximum ». 6 Faites alors glisser le curseur pour définir le niveau sonore maximum. Il faut savoir que l’emplacement initial du curseur représente le volume qui était établi sur l’iPod shuffle au moment de cocher la case « Limiter le volume maximum ». 7 Pour qu’un mot de passe vous soit demandé avant de modifier ce réglage, cliquez sur le verrou et saisissez un mot de passe. Si vous définissez un mot de passe, vous devrez alors le saisir avant de modifier la llimite du volume ou de la supprimer. Remarque : le niveau sonore peut varier selon le type d’écouteurs ou de casque utilisé. Pour supprimer la limite de volume : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Désélectionnez « Limiter le volume maximum ». Au besoin, saisissez le mot de passe. Remarque : si vous avez oublié le mot de passe, vous avez la possibilité de restaurer l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30 pour en savoir plus.22 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique Activation et désactivation des boutons de l’iPod shuffle Il est possible de désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle. De cette manière, si vous appuyez malencontreusement dessus, cela n’aura aucune incidence sur le fonctionnement de l’appareil. Pour désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle : m Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant trois secondes. Le voyant d’état devient vert, puis passe au orange et clignote trois fois lorsque la désactivation des boutons est effective. Si vous appuyez sur un bouton lorsque les boutons de l’iPod sont désactivés, le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote une fois. Pour réactiver les boutons : m Maintenez à nouveau le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) enfoncé pendant trois secondes. Le voyant d’état devient orange, puis passe au vert et clignote trois fois lorsque la réactivation des boutons est effective.3 23 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle L’iPod shuffle vous permet de transportez votre musique ainsi que vos données. Lisez ce chapitre pour savoir comment utiliser l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe. Utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe pour y stocker des fichiers de données. Remarque : pour charger sur l’iPod shuffle la musique et les diverses données audio que vous souhaitez écouter, vous devez utiliser l’application iTunes. L’iPod shuffle ne pourra pas lire des fichiers audio copiés via le Finder de Macintosh ou l’explorateur Windows. Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Dans la section Options, sélectionnez « Activer l’utilisation comme disque dur ». Remarque : il vous sera peut-être nécessaire de faire défiler les éléments pour arriver aux réglages concernant le disque. 5 En faisant glisser le curseur, définissez la quantité d’espace réservée aux morceaux (par rapport à celle réservée aux données). 6 Cliquez sur Appliquer. Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe, une icône de disque iPod shuffle apparaît sur le bureau si vous utilisez un Mac, tandis que si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows, la première lettre de disque disponible lui est attribuée dans l’explorateur Windows.24 Chapitre 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle Transfert de fichiers entre ordinateurs Lorsque l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque dur est activée, vous pouvez transférer des fichiers d’un ordinateur à un autre. L’iPod shuffle est formaté en FAT-32, système pris en charge par les ordinateurs Mac et les PC sous Windows. De cette manière, vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle pour transférer des fichiers entre ordinateurs fonctionnant sous systèmes d’exploitation différents. Pour transférer des fichiers entre ordinateurs : 1 Après avoir activé la fonction d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque dur, branchez-le à l’ordinateur qui contient les fichiers que vous souhaitez copier. Important : lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un ordinateur (ou un utilisateur de votre ordinateur) qui n’est pas l’habituel, un message s’affiche et vous demande si vous souhaitez effacer l’iPod shuffle et le synchroniser avec la nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes. Si vous ne voulez pas effacer la musique actuellement présente sur l’iPod shuffle, cliquez sur Annuler. 2 Faites glisser les fichiers désirés vers votre iPod shuffle via le système de fichiers de l’ordinateur (le Finder sur un Mac et l’explorateur Windows sur un PC). 3 Débranchez ensuite l’iPod shuffle puis branchez-le sur l’autre ordinateur. Cliquez à nouveau sur Annuler si vous ne voulez pas effacer la musique actuellement présente sur l’iPod shuffle. 4 Faites glisser les fichiers depuis l’iPod shuffle vers une des unités du nouvel ordinateur. Comment empêcher l’ouverture automatique d’iTunes Il est possible d’empêcher iTunes de s’ouvrir automatiquement quand vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. Pour empêcher iTunes de s’ouvrir automatiquement : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. 4 Dans la section Options, désélectionnez « Ouvrir iTunes à la connexion de cet iPod ». 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.Chapitre 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle 254 24 4 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle Avec l’iPod shuffle sont fournis des écouteurs et un socle pour iPod shuffle. Obtenez des informations sur vos écouteurs Apple Earphones, sur le socle pour iPod shuffle et sur les autres accessoires disponibles pour l’iPod shuffle. Écouteurs Apple Earphones L’iPod shuffle est livré avec une paire d’écouteurs. Pour utiliser des écouteurs : m Branchez les écouteurs sur le port de sortie casque. Placez ensuite les écouteurs dans vos oreilles comme sur l’illustration. AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser les écouteurs, lisez les consignes de sécurité de la page 32 pour savoir comment éviter d’endommager votre audition. Le cordon des écouteurs est réglable.Chapitre 4 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle 25 Le socle pour iPod shuffle L’iPod shuffle est livré avec un socle pour iPod shuffle (de deuxième génération) permettant de connecter l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur ou à d’autres périphériques USB. Consultez « Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 5. L’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter L’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter est un accessoire vendu en option qui vous permet de recharger l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous n’êtes pas devant votre ordinateur. Accessoires disponibles Pour acheter des accessoires iPod shuffle, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore. Parmi les accessoires disponibles, citons :  les écouteurs ergonomiques iPod In-Ear Headphones d’Apple ;  le socle pour iPod shuffle (de deuxième génération) ;  l’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter.5 26 5 Astuces et dépannage La plupart des problèmes de l’iPod shuffle peuvent être rapidement résolus si vous suivez les conseils de ce chapitre. Si l’iPod shuffle ne s’allume ou ne répond pas :  Si le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote lorsque vous appuyez sur un bouton, cela signifie que les boutons de l’iPod shuffle sont désactivés. Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant environ trois secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état devienne vert et clignote.  Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur. La batterie de votre iPod shuffle peut avoir besoin d’être rechargée.  Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez cinq secondes et rallumez-le.  Il est possible que le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle ait besoin d’être restauré. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30. Les 5 R : Réinitialiser, Réessayer, Redémarrer, Réinstaller, Restaurer Souvenez-vous de ces conseils élémentaires si un problème survient avec l’iPod shuffle. Essayez de réaliser ces opérations l’une après l’autre jusqu’à ce que le problème soit résolu. Si l’une des suggestions suivantes ne permet pas de résoudre le problème, continuez à lire et consultez les solutions aux problèmes spécifiques.  Réinitialisez l’iPod shuffle en l’éteignant, en attendant cinq secondes puis en l’allumant à nouveau.  Réessayez avec un port USB différent si l’iPod shuffle n’apparaît pas dans iTunes.  Redémarrez votre ordinateur et assurez-vous que les mises à jour de logiciels les plus récentes sont installées.  Réinstallez le logiciel d’iTunes à partir de la dernière version disponible sur le web.  Restaurez l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30.Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage 27 Si l’iPod shuffle ne lit pas de musique :  Assurez-vous que le connecteur du casque ou des écouteurs est complètement enfoncée dans la prise casque.  Assurez-vous que le volume est correctement réglé. Il est possible qu’une limite de volume ait été définie. Consultez « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la page 21.  Il se peut que l’iPod shuffle soit en pause. Tentez d’appuyer sur le bouton Lecture/ Pause (’). Si rien ne se produit lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur votre ordinateur :  Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur. L’iPod shuffle a peut-être besoin d’être rechargé.  Assurez-vous que vous avez installé la dernière version d’iTunes sur www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start.  Essayez de le brancher sur un autre port USB de votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que l’iPod shuffle est bien placé sur le socle. Vérifiez que le connecteur USB est orienté correctement. Il ne peut être inséré que dans un sens.  L’iPod shuffle a peut-être besoin d’être réinitialisé. Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez cinq secondes puis rallumez-le.  Si le voyant d’état ne s’allume pas (ou s’il s’allume faiblement) et que l’iPod shuffle n’apparaît pas dans iTunes ou dans le Finder, il est possible que la batterie soit entiè- rement déchargée. Laissez l’iPod shuffle se recharger pendant plusieurs minutes pour voir si cela lui permet de se réactiver.  Assurez-vous que vous disposez de l’ordinateur et du logiciel requis. Consultez « Si vous souhaitez effectuer une double vérification de la configuration requise : » à la page 29.  Essayez de redémarrer votre ordinateur.  Si aucune de ces suggestions n’aide à résoudre le problème, vous devrez éventuellement restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30.  Si la restauration de l’iPod shuffle ne résout pas le problème, il se peut que l’iPod shuffle ait besoin d’être réparé. Vous pouvez obtenir des services en consultant le site web de service et d’assistance de l’iPod shuffle à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle/service. Si le chargement des morceaux est lent : Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur pour réaliser des chargements plus rapides. Une connexion USB 2.0 permet de charger des morceaux et des données beaucoup vite qu’une connexion USB 1.1.28 Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage Si vous ne parvenez pas à charger un morceau ou un autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle : Le morceau peut être encodé dans un format que l’iPod shuffle ne prend pas en charge. Les formats de fichiers audio suivants sont pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle. Ils comprennent les formats des livres audio et des podcasts :  AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P) (jusqu’à 320 kbps)  MP3 (jusqu’à 320 kbps)  MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR)  WAV  AA (texte lu audible.com, formats 2, 3 et 4)  AIFF Un morceau encodé au format Apple Lossless possède la même qualité sonore qu’un CD tout en occupant deux fois moins d’espace qu’un morceau encodé au format AIFF ou WAV. Le même morceau encodé au format AAC ou MP3 utilise encore moins de place. Quand vous importez de la musique depuis un CD à l’aide d’iTunes, elle est convertie par défaut au format AAC. Vous pouvez faire en sorte que l’iPod shuffle convertisse automatiquement les fichiers encodés à des débits plus élevés (comme Apple Lossless) en fichiers AAC de 128 kbps lors de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Comment faire tenir davantage de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle » à la page 18. Si vous utilisez iTunes pour Windows, vous pouvez convertir les fichiers WMA non protégés en fichiers au format AAC ou MP3. Cela peut être utile si vous disposez d’une collection de musique encodée au format WMA. L’iPod shuffle ne prend pas en charge les fichiers audio Apple Lossless, WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 ni le format 1 d’audible.com. Si vous possédez dans iTunes un morceau qui n’est pas pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez le convertir en un format que l’iPod shuffle prend en charge. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’Aide iTunes. Si les chapitres d’un livre audio ne se lisent pas dans l’ordre :  Assurez-vous que le bouton de mode aléatoire de l’iPod shuffle est placé sur la position de répétition (/), ce qui permet une lecture des chapitres dans l’ordre.  Si les chapitres n’ont pas été ajoutés à l’iPod shuffle dans l’ordre, branchez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur puis réorganisez les pistes via iTunes. Consultez « Organisation des morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle » à la page 18.Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage 29 Si vous souhaitez effectuer une double vérification de la configuration requise : Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants :  Une des configurations d’ordinateur suivantes :  Un ordinateur Macintosh doté d’un port USB (USB 2.0 recommandé).  Un PC sous Windows doté d’un port ou d’une carte USB (USB 2.0 recommandé).  Un des systèmes d’exploitation suivants : Mac OS X v10.3.9 ou ultérieur, Windows 2000 avec Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur ou Windows XP Édition Familiale ou Professionnel avec Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur.  Un accès à Internet (une connexion à haut débit est recommandée).  iTunes 7.0.2 ou ultérieur (vous pouvez télécharger iTunes depuis l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start). Si votre PC sous Windows n’est pas doté d’un port USB à forte alimentation, vous pouvez acheter une carte USB 2.0 et l’installer. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur le site www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore. Si vous souhaitez utiliser l’iPod shuffle avec un Mac et un PC sous Windows : Chaque fois que vous synchronisez l’iPod shuffle avec une nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes, vous devez effacer la musique déjà présente sur l’iPod shuffle, quel que soit le système d’exploitation. Lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un ordinateur ou un utilisateur de votre ordinateur qui n’est pas l’habituel, un message s’affiche et vous demande si vous souhaitez effacer l’iPod shuffle et le synchroniser avec la nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes. Toutefois, il est possible d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe à la fois avec les ordinateurs Macintosh et les PC sous Windows, ce qui vous permet de transférer des fichiers d’un système d’exploitation à l’autre. Consultez le chapitre 3, « Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle, » à la page 23. Port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation30 Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle Vous pouvez utiliser iTunes pour mettre à jour ou restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle. Il est recommandé de mettre à jour l’iPod shuffle et d’utiliser le logiciel le plus récent. Vous pouvez également restaurer le logiciel et rétablir ainsi l’iPod shuffle à son état d’origine.  Si vous choisissez de mettre à jour, le logiciel sera mis à jour, mais vos réglages et morceaux seront conservés.  Si vous choisissez de restaurer, toutes les données sont effacées de l’iPod shuffle, y compris les morceaux et toutes les autres données. Tous les réglages d’origine de l’iPod shuffle seront rétablis. Pour mettre à jour ou restaurer l’iPod shuffle : 1 Assurez-vous que vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet et que vous avez installé la dernière version d’iTunes disponible sur www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start. 2 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 3 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source, puis cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. La section Version indique si l’iPod shuffle est à jour ou nécessite une version plus récente du logiciel. 4 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :  Pour installer la toute dernière version du logiciel, cliquez sur Mettre à jour.  Pour restaurer l’iPod shuffle et rétablir ses réglages d’origine, cliquez sur Restaurer. Cette opération efface toutes les données de l’iPod shuffle. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer la restauration.6 31 6 Sécurité et manipulation Ce chapitre contient des informations importantes sur la sécurité et la manipulation de l’iPod shuffle. Conservez ce guide des fonctions de l’iPod shuffle à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y reporter facilement. Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité Manipulation de l’iPod shuffle Évitez de tordre, d’écraser, de perforer, d’incinérer, d’ouvrir ou de laisser tomber l’iPod shuffle. Utilisation près de l’eau et dans des endroits humides N’utilisez pas l’iPod shuffle sous la pluie ni à proximité d’un lavabo ou de tout autre endroit humide. Veillez à ne pas renverser d’aliments ou de liquides sur l’iPod shuffle. Si l’iPod shuffle est mouillé, débranchez tous les câbles et éteignez l’iPod shuffle avant de procéder au nettoyage. Laissez-le ensuite sécher entièrement avant de le rallumer. Réparation de l’iPod shuffle N’essayez jamais de réparer l’iPod shuffle vous-même. L’iPod shuffle ne contient aucune pièce démontable par l’utilisateur. Pour des informations sur le service, choisissez Aide iPod dans le menu Aide d’iTunes ou allez sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod/service. La batterie de l’iPod shuffle ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour plus d’informations sur les batteries, rendez-vous à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/batteries. ± Pour éviter toute blessure, lisez toutes les informations relatives à la sécurité exposées ci-dessous, ainsi que le mode d’emploi, avant d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle. AVERTISSEMENT : ne pas suivre les présentes consignes de sécurité pourrait provoquer un incendie, un choc électrique ou un autre dommage.32 Chapitre 6 Sécurité et manipulation Utilisation de l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter (disponible séparément) Si vous utilisez l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter (vendu séparément sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore) pour recharger l’iPod shuffle, assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est correctement assemblé avant de le brancher sur une prise de courant. Insérez ensuite fermement l’adaptateur dans la prise de courant. Ne branchez ou ne débranchez pas l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter en ayant les mains mouillées. N’utilisez pas d’adaptateur secteur autre qu’un adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter d’Apple pour recharger votre iPod shuffle. Il se peut que l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter chauffe pendant une utilisation normale. Veillez à toujours assurer une ventilation correcte autour de lui et à toujours le manipuler avec précaution. Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter si l’une des conditions suivantes se présente :  Le câble d’alimentation ou la prise est effiloché ou endommagé.  L’adaptateur est exposé à la pluie ou à une humidité excessive.  Le boîtier de l’adaptateur est endommagé.  Vous pensez que l’adaptateur doit être réparé.  Vous voulez nettoyer l’adaptateur. Prévention de la diminution de l’acuité auditive Vous risquez une perte d’audition irréparable si vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs à volume sonore élevé. Réglez le volume à un niveau raisonnable. Vous pouvez vous habituer petit à petit à un volume de son plus élevé qui peut vous paraître normal mais entraîner une détérioration de votre audition. Si vos oreilles bourdonnent ou si les sons vous semblent sourds, arrêtez l’écoute et rendez-vous chez votre médecin pour vérifier votre audition. Plus le volume est élevé, plus vous risquez d’abîmer rapidement votre audition. Les spécialistes de l’audition suggèrent de protéger votre audition de la façon suivante :  Évitez au maximum d’écouter de la musique via des écouteurs ou un casque à un volume élevé.  Évitez de monter le son pour filtrer les bruits extérieurs.  Baissez le son si vous n’entendez pas ce que disent les gens à côté de vous. Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de définir un volume maximum sur l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la page 21. Informations Importantes A pleine puissance, l’écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l’oreille de l’utilisateur.Chapitre 6 Sécurité et manipulation 33 Utilisation d’un casque d’écoute en toute sécurité L’utilisation des écouteurs n’est pas recommandée lorsque vous conduisez et constitue par ailleurs une infraction au code de la route dans certains endroits. Soyez prudent et attentif au volant. Cessez d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle si vous vous rendez compte que cela vous distrait ou vous dérange lorsque vous conduisez un véhicule ou lorsque vous réalisez tout autre activité nécessitant toute votre attention. Informations importantes sur la manipulation Transport de l’iPod shuffle Les composants de l’iPod shuffle sont délicats. Ne tordez, n’écrasez ni ne laissez pas tomber l’iPod shuffle. Utilisation des connecteurs et des ports Ne forcez jamais un connecteur à entrer dans un port. Vérifiez que rien ne bloque l’entrée au port. Si le connecteur et le port ne s’assemblent pas facilement, c’est probablement parce qu’ils ne sont pas compatibles. Assurez-vous que le connecteur est compatible avec le port et que vous l’avez positionné correctement par rapport à ce dernier. Conservation de l’iPod shuffle à température normale Utilisez toujours l’iPod shuffle dans des endroits où la température se situe entre 0º et 35º C. Dans des conditions de basses températures, l’autonomie de l’iPod peut diminuer temporairement. Rangez l’iPod shuffle dans un endroit où la température est toujours comprise entre -20º et 45º C. La température dans les voitures en stationnement pouvant dépasser cette fourchette, ne laissez pas l’iPod shuffle dans votre voiture. Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle ou rechargez sa batterie, il est normal que l’iPod shuffle chauffe. L’extérieur de l’iPod shuffle sert en effet de surface de refroidissement et transfère la chaleur de l’intérieur de l’appareil vers l’extérieur, où l’air est moins chaud. Nettoyage de la partie externe de l’iPod shuffle Pour nettoyer l’iPod shuffle, retirez-le du socle et éteignez-le. Utilisez ensuite un chiffon doux, légèrement humide et non pelucheux. Évitez toute pénétration d’humidité dans les orifices de l’appareil. N’utilisez pas de produits pour le nettoyage des vitres, de produits d’entretien ménager, d’aérosols, de solvants, d’alcool, d’ammoniac ni d’abrasifs pour nettoyer l’iPod shuffle. Respect des consignes en matière d’élimination pour l’iPod shuffle Pour obtenir des informations sur la mise au rebut de l’iPod shuffle, y compris d’importantes informations sur le respect des normes en vigueur, consultez la section « Regulatory Compliance Information » à la page 35. AVIS : ne pas suivre les présentes instructions sur la manipulation peut provoquer des dommages à l’iPod shuffle ou à d’autres objets.7 34 7 En savoir plus, service et assistance Vous trouverez plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle dans l’aide à l’écran et sur le web. Le tableau suivant décrit à quel endroit trouver des informations sur les services et les logiciels de l’iPod. Pour en savoir plus sur : procédez ainsi : Les services et l’assistance, les forums de discussion, les guides d’initiation et les téléchargements de logiciels Apple Allez sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle. L’utilisation d’iTunes Ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Pour obtenir le guide d’initiation d’iTunes en ligne (uniquement disponible dans certains pays), allez sur www.apple.com/fr/ilife/tutorials/itunes. Les toutes dernières informations sur l’iPod shuffle Allez sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodshuffle L’enregistrement de l’iPod shuffle Pour enregistrer l’iPod shuffle, installez iTunes sur votre ordinateur et branchez-y l’iPod shuffle. La recherche du numéro de série de l’iPod shuffle Observez l’encoche située sous la pince de l’ iPod shuffleou bien sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes (lorsque l’iPod shuffle est connecté à l’ordinateur) et cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages. L’obtention des services assurés dans le cadre de la garantie Suivez d’abord les conseils qui figurent dans le présent fascicule, l’aide à l’écran et les ressources en ligne, puis allez sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle/service 35 Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:  Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.  Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio.  Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.  Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple Authorized Reseller. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Inc. Product Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A, Cupertino, CA 95014-2084, 408-974-2000. Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. VCCI Class B Statement Korea Class B Statement36 Russia Communauté Européenne Conforme aux directives européennes 2006/95/EEC et 89/336/EEC. Informations sur l’élimination et le recyclage Votre iPod renferme une batterie. Débarrassez-vous de l’iPod en respectant les lois et les directives environnementales locales. Pour en savoir plus sur le programme de recyclage d’Apple, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/environment. Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. China: Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Taiwan: Union Européenne-informations sur l’élimination : Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que vous devez vous débarasser de votre produit sans le mélanger avec les ordures ménagères, selon les normes et la législation de votre pays. Lorsque ce produit n’est plus utilisable, portez-le dans un centre de traitement des déchets agréé par les autorités locales. Certains centres acceptent les produits gratuitement. Le traitement et le recyclage séparé de votre produit lors de son élimination aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à protéger l’environnement et la santé des êtres humains. Apple et l’environnement Chez Apple, nous sommes conscients de la responsabilité qui nous incombe de réduire les impacts écologiques de nos activités et de nos produits. Pour plus d’informations, allez sur : www.apple.com/environment © 2007 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, le logo Apple, FireWire, iPod, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Finder et Shuffle sont des marques d’Apple Inc. Apple Store est une marque de service d’Apple Inc. déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les autres noms de produits et de sociétés peuvent être la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. La mention de produits tierces est réservée à des fins d’information et n’équivaut pas à une approbation ou à une recommandation. La responsabilité d’Apple n’est pas engagée concernant les performances ou l’utilisation de ces produits. Tous les accords ou garanties éventuels sont directement évoqués entre le fournisseur et les éventuels utilisateurs. Apple s’est attaché à fournir aux utilisateurs les informations les plus justes possible dans ce manuel. Apple n’est pas responsable des erreurs d’impression ou d’écriture. F019-0996/2-2007 iPhone 4 Important Product Information GuideThis Important Product Information Guide contains safety and handling, regulatory, software license, and warranty information for iPhone. Look for recycling, disposal, and other environmental information in the iPhone User Guide at:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone ±To avoid injury, read all operating instructions and the following safety information before using iPhone. For detailed operating instructions, read the iPhone User Guide on your iPhone by visiting help.apple.com/iphone or using the iPhone User Guide bookmark in Safari. For downloadable versions of the latest iPhone User Guide and this Important Product Information Guide, visit:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone Important Safety and Handling Information WARNING:??Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire, electric shock, or other injury or damage to iPhone or other property. Carrying and Handling iPhone iPhone contains sensitive components. Do not drop, disassemble, microwave, burn, paint, or insert foreign objects into iPhone. Do not use iPhone if it has been damaged—for example, if iPhone is cracked, punctured, or damaged by water. The front and back covers of iPhone are made of glass. This glass could break if iPhone is dropped on a hard surface, is subjected to a substantial impact, or is crushed, bent, or deformed. If the glass chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to remove the broken glass. Stop using iPhone until the glass is replaced by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Glass cracked due to misuse or abuse is not covered under the warranty. If you are concerned about scratching or abrasion, use a case, sold separately. Keeping the Outside of iPhone Clean Clean iPhone immediately if it comes into contact with any contaminants that may cause stains—for example, ink, dyes, makeup, dirt, food, oils, and lotions. To clean iPhone, unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the On/Off button, and then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPhone. The front glass surface has an oleophobic coating. To remove fingerprints, simply wipe these surfaces with a soft, lint-free cloth. The ability of this coating to repel oil will diminish over time with normal usage, and rubbing the screen with an abrasive material will further diminish its effect and may scratch the glass. Avoiding Water and Wet Locations Do not expose iPhone to water or rain, or handle iPhone near wet locations—for example, near washbasins or toilets. Take care not to spill any food or liquid on iPhone. In case iPhone gets wet, unplug all cables, turn off iPhone before cleaning, and allow it to dry thoroughly before turning it on again. Do not attempt to dry iPhone with an external heat source, such as a microwave oven or hair dryer. Damage to iPhone caused by contact with liquid is not covered under the warranty.Repairing or Modifying iPhone Never attempt to repair or modify iPhone yourself. iPhone does not contain any user-serviceable parts, except (where applicable) for the SIM card and SIM tray. Disassembling iPhone, including the removal of external screws and back cover, may cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. If iPhone has been submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to a severe fall, do not use it until you take it to an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Service should only be provided by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. If you have questions, contact Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For service information, go to: www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/faq Battery Replacement Do not attempt to replace the rechargeable battery in iPhone yourself. The battery should be replaced only by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For more information about battery replacement service, go to:?? www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html Charging iPhone To charge iPhone, use only the Apple Dock Connector to USB Cable with the following: (i) an Apple USB Power Adapter, (ii) another Apple-branded product or accessory designed to work with iPhone, (iii) a third-party accessory certified to use the Apple “Works with iPhone” or “Made for iPhone” logo, (iv) a high-power USB port on another device that is compliant with the USB 2.0 or 1.1 standard, or (v) a power adapter compliant with one or more of the following standards EN 301489-34, IEC 62684, YD/T 1591-2009, CNS 15285, ITU L.1000, or another applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standard. An iPhone Micro USB Adapter (available separately in some areas) or other adapter may be needed to connect iPhone to some compatible power adapters. Note:??Only micro USB power adapters in certain regions that comply with applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standards are compatible. Please contact the power adapter manufacturer to find out if your micro USB power adapter complies with these standards. Read all safety instructions for any products and accessories before using with iPhone. Apple is not responsible for the operation of, or any damage caused by, third-party accessories or their compliance with safety and regulatory standards. When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge iPhone, make sure that the power adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into a power outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter firmly into the power outlet. Do not connect or disconnect the Apple USB Power Adapter with wet hands. The Apple USB Power Adapter may become warm during normal use. Always allow adequate ventilation around the Apple USB Power Adapter and use care when handling. Unplug the Apple USB Power Adapter if any of the following conditions exist:  The power cord or plug has become frayed or damaged.  The adapter is exposed to rain, liquid, or excessive moisture.  The adapter case has become damaged.  You suspect the adapter needs service or repair.  You want to clean the adapter. Avoiding Hearing Damage Permanent hearing loss may occur if the receiver, earbuds, headphones, speakerphone, or earpiece are used at high volume. Use only compatible receivers, earbuds, headphones, speakerphones, or earpieces with your device. Turn on the audio and check the volume before inserting anything in your ear. You can adapt over time to a higher volume of sound that may sound normal but can be damaging to your hearing. If you experience ringing in your ears or muffled speech, stop listening and have your hearing checked. The louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing:  Limit the amount of time you use the receiver, earbuds, headphones, speakerphone, or earpieces at high volume.  Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.  Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you. For information about how to set a maximum volume limit on iPhone, see the iPhone User Guide. Emergency Calls You should not rely on wireless devices for essential communications, such as medical emergencies. Use of iPhone to call emergency services may not work in all locations or all operating conditions. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network availability or environmental interference. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if iPhone is not activated, if iPhone is not compatible with or configured to operate on a particular cellular network, or (when applicable) if iPhone does not have a SIM or if the SIM is PIN-locked. Driving and Riding Safely Use of iPhone while driving a vehicle or riding a bicycle may be distracting. If you find using iPhone disruptive or distracting while driving or riding, pull off the road and park before making or answering a call. Use of iPhone alone or with headphones (even if used only in one ear) while driving or riding is not recommended and is illegal in some areas. Consider using a compatible hands-free device with iPhone. Use of a hands-free device may be required in some areas. Check and obey the laws and regulations regarding the use of mobile devices like iPhone in the areas where you drive or ride. Navigating Safely Do not rely on iPhone applications that provide maps, digital compass headings, orientation information, traffic information, directions, or location-based navigation to determine precise locations, proximity, orientation, distance, traffic conditions or direction. These applications should only be used for basic navigation assistance. Maps, directions, and location-based applications depend on data services. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all areas, resulting in maps, digital compass headings, directions, traffic conditions or location-based information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. iPhone contains an internal digital compass located in the upper-right corner of iPhone. The accuracy of digital compass headings may be negatively affected by magnetic or other environmental interference, including interference caused by the close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. Never rely solely on the digital compass for determining direction. Compare the information provided on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. Do not use location-based applications while performing activities that require your full attention. Always comply with posted signs and the laws and regulations in the areas where you are using iPhone. For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag inflates with great force. Do not store iPhone or any of its accessories in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Seizures, Blackouts, and Eyestrain A small percentage of people may be susceptible to blackouts or seizures (even if they have never had one before) when exposed to flashing lights or light patterns such as when playing games or watching video. If you have experienced seizures or blackouts or have a family history of such occurrences, you should consult a physician before playing games (if available) or watching videos on your iPhone. Discontinue use of iPhone and consult a physician if you experience headaches, blackouts, seizures, convulsion, eye or muscle twitching, loss of awareness, involuntary movement, or disorientation. To reduce risk of headaches, blackouts, seizures, and eyestrain, avoid prolonged use, hold iPhone further away from your eyes, use iPhone in a well-lit room, and take frequent breaks. Choking Hazards iPhone and its accessories may contain small parts, which may present a choking hazard to small children. Keep such parts away from small children. Repetitive Motion When you perform repetitive activities such as typing or playing games on iPhone, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, arms, shoulders, neck, or other parts of your body. Take frequent breaks and if you have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off iPhone when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Do not charge iPhone, and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire, resulting in serious injury or even death. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, marked clearly. Potential areas may include: fueling areas (such as gas stations); below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain, dust, or metal powders); and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Using Connectors, Ports, and Buttons Never force a connector into a port or apply excessive pressure to a button, because this may cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. If the connector and port don’t join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Check for obstructions and make sure that the connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. Accessories and Wireless Performance Not all iPod accessories are fully compatible with iPhone. Turning on Airplane Mode on iPhone may eliminate audio interference between iPhone and an accessory. While Airplane mode is on, you cannot make or receive calls or use features that require wireless communication. Under some conditions, certain accessories may affect iPhone wireless performance. Reorienting or relocating iPhone and the connected accessory may improve wireless performance. Keeping iPhone Within Acceptable Temperatures iPhone is designed to be operated in temperatures between 0º and 35º C (32º to 95º F) and stored in temperatures between -20º and 45º C (-4º to 113º F). Low- or high-temperature conditions might temporarily shorten battery life or cause iPhone to temporarily stop working properly. Leaving iPhone in a parked vehicle or in direct sunlight can cause iPhone to exceed these storage or operating temperature ranges. Avoid dramatic changes in temperature or humidity when using iPhone as condensation may form on or within iPhone. When you’re using iPhone or charging the battery, it is normal for iPhone to get warm. The exterior of iPhone functions as a cooling surface that transfers heat from inside the unit to the cooler air outside. Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy iPhone transmits and receives radio frequency (RF) energy through its antennas. The iPhone cellular antennas are located at the top and bottom edges of iPhone. The Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® antenna is located near the top of iPhone. iPhone is designed and manufactured to comply with the limits for exposure to RF energy set by international regulatory agencies, including the FCC of the United States, IC of Canada, MIC of Japan, and the Counsel of the European Union, among others. “Specific Absorption Rate,” or SAR, refers to the rate at which the body absorbs RF energy. The SAR limits for mobile phones are 1.6 watts per kilogram (W/kg) for the FCC and IC, and 2.0 W/kg for the Council of the European Union. iPhone has been tested, 1 and meets the FCC, IC, and European Union RF exposure guidelines for cellular, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth operation. During SAR testing, iPhone is held in standard operating positions (i.e., at the head and on the body) and its radios are set to transmit at the highest power level. iPhone’s maximum SAR levels on each frequency of operation are provided in a chart at the end of this section. The SAR levels experienced during normal use may be lower than the maximum SAR levels. In normal use, iPhone automatically adjusts radio transmission power to the lowest level necessary to communicate with the wireless network. When carrying iPhone, keep it 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) or more away from your body to ensure exposure levels remain at or below the maximum levels. Avoid cases with metal parts. 1 The device was tested according to measurement standards and procedures specified in FCC OET Bulletin 65, Supplement C (Edition 01-01) and IEEE 1528-2003, and Canada RSS 102, Issue 4, March 2010. iPhone adheres to the European Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the Limitation of Exposure of the General Public to Electromagnetic Fields [1999/519/EC]. Exposure to RF energy is related to time and distance. If you are concerned about RF exposure, decrease your total talk time on iPhone and increase your distance to iPhone by using one of the many hands-free options available, including the built-in speakerphone, the supplied headphones with built-in mic, or other third-party accessories. For more information about RF energy exposure, see the FCC’s Radio Frequency Safety page at:??www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety For information about the scientific research related to RF energy exposure, see the World Health Organization’s EMF Research Database at: www.who.int/peh-emf/research/database Frequency Band 2 Body 3 Head FCC & IC 1g SAR Limit (W/kg) GSM 850 1.15 1.04 1.6 GSM 1900 0.99 1.08 1.6 UMTS II 1900 0.578 1.18 1.6 UMTS V 850 0.981 1.13 1.6 CDMA 800 MHz Band Class 0 1.11 1.15 1.6 CDMA 1900 MHz Band Class 1 0.649 1.18 1.6 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.191 0.372 1.6 Frequency Band 2 Body 3 Head EU 10g SAR Limit (W/kg) EGSM 900 0.989 0.766 2.0 GSM 1800 0.695 0.959 2.0 UMTS I 2100 0.495 0.98 2.0 UMTS VIII 900 0.681 0.988 2.0 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.106 0.267 2.0 Radio Frequency Interference Radio-frequency emissions from electronic equipment can negatively affect the operation of other electronic equipment, causing them to malfunction. Although iPhone is designed, tested, and manufactured to comply with regulations governing radio frequency emission in countries such as the United States, Canada, the European Union, and Japan, the wireless transmitters and electrical 2 Your iPhone may be configured to support one or more of the listed frequency bands, depending on carrier technology and network availability. The frequency band used by iPhone varies depending on wireless service provider, wireless technology, and region. 3 iPhone positioned 10 mm (13/32 inch) away from the body.circuits in iPhone may cause interference in other electronic equipment. Therefore, please take the following precautions: Aircraft Use of iPhone may be prohibited while traveling in aircraft. For more information about using Airplane Mode to turn off the iPhone wireless transmitters, see the iPhone User Guide. Vehicles Radio frequency emissions from iPhone may affect electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of 15 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. Persons with pacemakers:  Should always keep iPhone more than 15 cm (6 inches) from the pacemaker when the phone is turned on  Should not carry iPhone in a breast pocket  Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn iPhone off immediately. Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) iPhone has been tested and rated under the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) C63.19-2007 hearing aid compatibility standard. The ANSI standard measures radio frequency interference for acoustic coupling (“M” rating) and inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode (“T” rating). Phones must be rated M3 or greater and T3 or greater to be hearing aid compatible under FCC rules. For more information, see the “Hearing Aid Compatibility” section of the iPhone User Guide. For current iPhone hearing aid compatibility ratings, go to:??www.apple.com/support/hac iPhone may interfere with some hearing aids. If you experience interference, consult the hearing aid manufacturer or your physician for alternatives or remedies. Compatibility With Other Wireless Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the device manufacturer or your physician to determine if it is adequately shielded from radio frequency emissions from iPhone. Health Care Facilities Hospitals and health care facilities may use equipment that is particularly sensitive to external radio frequency emissions. Turn iPhone off when staff or posted signs instruct you to do so.Blasting Areas and Posted Facilities To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn off iPhone when in a “blasting area” or in areas posted “Turn off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions. Certification and Compliance See iPhone for the certification and compliance marks specific to that device. To view, choose Settings > General > About > Regulatory. Australia/ New Zealand Canada IC: 579C-E2430A E.U. Japan Mexico Singapore U.S. FCC ID: BCG-E2430A Important:??Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple could void the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and wireless compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components. It is important that you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, televisions, and other electronic devices. FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Compliance Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. This Class B device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil. European Union Regulatory Conformance The equipment complies with the RF Exposure Requirement 1999/519/EC, Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0–300 GHz). This equipment meets the following conformance standards: EN 300 328, EN 301 489-17, EN 301 511, EN 301 908, EN 50385 This wireless device complies with the R&TTE Directive. EU Declaration of Conformity ???????????Apple Inc. ?????????, ?? ???? ?????????? ? ????????, Wi-Fi ? Bluetooth ?????????? ? ? ???????????? ??? ???????????? ?????????? ? ??????? ????????? ??????? ?? ????????? 1999/5/??. Cesky??Spolecnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že toto mobilní zarízení s technologií Wi-Fi a Bluetooth vyhovuje základním požadavkum a dalším príslušným ustanovením smernice 1999/5/ES. Dansk??Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr cellular, Wi-Fi og Bluetooth overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch??Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dasssich Mobiltelefon,Wi-Fi und Bluetooth in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befinden.Eesti??Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see mobiil-, Wi-Fi- ja Bluetooth-seade vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele. English??Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this cellular, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Español??Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo celular, Wi-Fi y Bluetooth cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ??????????Me t?? pa???sa, ? Apple Inc. d????e? ?t? a?t? ? s?s?e?? ????t??, Wi-Fi ?a? Bluetooth s?µµ??f??eta? p??? t?? ßas???? apa?t?se?? ?a? t?? ???p?? s?et???? d?at??e?? t?? ?d???a? 1999/5/??. Français??Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil cellulaire, Wi-Fi, et Bluetooth est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Islenska??Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta tæki, sem er farsími, þráðlaus og með blátannartækni (e: cellular, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth,) fullnægir lágmarkskröfum og öðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum Evróputilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Italiano??Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo dispositivo cellulare, Wi-Fi e Bluetooth è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski??Ar šo Apple Inc. deklare, ka cellular, Wi-Fi un Bluetooth ierice atbilst Direktivas 1999/5/EK butiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem. Lietuviu??Šiuo„Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad korinio,„Wi-Fi“ ir„Bluetooth“ ryšio irenginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Magyar??Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a mobil, Wi-Fi és Bluetooth megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak. Malti??Hawnhekk, Apple Inc. tiddikjara li dan l-apparat cellulari, Wi-Fi, u Bluetooth huwa konformi mar-rekwiziti essenzjali u dispozizzjonijiet ohra relevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/5/KE. Nederlands??Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel cellular, Wi-Fi, en Bluetooth in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Norsk??Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette mobiltelefon-, Wi-Fi- og Bluetooth-apparatet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og øvrige relevante krav i EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF. Polski??Niniejszym Apple Inc. oswiadcza, ze ten telefon komórkowy, urzadzenie Wi-Fi oraz Bluetooth sa zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Português??Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo móvel, Wi-Fi e Bluetooth está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Româna??Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declara ca acest aparat celular, Wi-Fi ?i Bluetooth este în conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si cu celelalte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE. Slovensko??Apple Inc. izjavlja, da so celicne naprave ter naprave Wi-Fi in Bluetooth skladne z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi ustreznimi dolocili direktive 1999/5/ES.Slovensky??Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto mobilné, Wi-Fi & Bluetooth zariadenie splna základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Suomi??Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä matkapuhelin-, Wi-Fija Bluetooth-tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Svenska??Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna mobiltelefoni-, Wi-Fi-, och Bluetooth-enhet står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at: www.apple.com/euro/compliance iPhone can be used in the following countries: European Community Restrictions Français??Pour usage en intérieur uniquement. Consultez l’Autorité de Régulation des Communications Electroniques et des Postes (ARCEP) pour connaître les limites d’utilisation des canaux 1 à 13. www.arcep.fr Japan Compliance Statement—VCCI Class B Statement iPhone Terms and Conditions IMPORTANT:??BY USING YOUR iPHONE, iPAD or iPOD TOUCH (“iOS DEVICE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE FOLLOWING APPLE AND THIRD PARTY TERMS: A.??APPLE iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT B.??NOTICES FROM APPLE C.??GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS D.??YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPLE INC. iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Single Use License PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING YOUR iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE UPDATE ACCOMPANYING THIS LICENSE. BY USING YOUR iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING A SOFTWARE UPDATE, AS APPLICABLE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOAD THE SOFTWARE UPDATE. FOR iOS DEVICE PURCHASERS, IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE, YOU MAY RETURN THE iOS DEVICE WITHIN THE RETURN PERIOD TO THE APPLE STORE OR AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A REFUND, SUBJECT TO APPLE’S RETURN POLICY FOUND AT http://www.apple.com/legal/sales_policies/. 1. General. (a) The software (including Boot ROM code and other embedded software), documentation, interfaces, content, fonts and any data that came with your iOS Device (“Original iOS Software”), as may be updated or replaced by feature enhancements, software updates or system restore software provided by Apple (“iOS Software Updates”), whether in read only memory, on any other media or in any other form (the Original iOS Software and iOS Software Updates are collectively referred to as the “iOS Software”) are licensed, not sold, to you by Apple Inc. (“Apple”) for use only under the terms of this License. Apple and its licensors retain ownership of the iOS Software itself and reserve all rights not expressly granted to you. (b) Apple, at its discretion, may make available future iOS Software Updates for your iOS Device. The iOS Software Updates, if any, may not necessarily include all existing software features or new features that Apple releases for newer or other models of iOS Devices. The terms of this License will govern any iOS Software Updates provided by Apple that replace and/or supplement the Original iOS Software product, unless such iOS Software Update is accompanied by a separate license in which case the terms of that license will govern. 2. Permitted License Uses and Restrictions. (a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted a limited non-exclusive license to use the iOS Software on a single Apple-branded iOS Device. Except as permitted in Section 2(b) below, and unless as provided in a separate agreement between you and Apple, this License does not allow the iOS Software to exist on more than one Apple-branded iOS Device at a time, and you may not distribute or make the iOS Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple devices at the same time. This License does not grant you any rights to use Apple proprietary interfaces and other intellectual property in the design, development, manufacture, licensing or distribution of third party devices and accessories, or third party software applications, for use with iOS Devices. Some of those rights are available under separate licenses from Apple. For more information on developing third party devices and accessories for iOS Devices, please email madeforipod@apple.com. For more information on developing software applications for iOS Devices, please email devprograms@apple.com. (b) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted a limited non-exclusive license to download iOS Software Updates that may be made available by Apple for your model of the iOS Device to update or restore the software on any such iOS Device that you own or control. This License does not allow you to update or restore any iOS Device that you do not control or own, and you may not distribute or make the iOS Software Updates available over a network where they could be used by multiple devices or multiple computers at the same time. If you download an iOS Software Update to your computer, you may make one copy of the iOS Software Updates stored on your computer in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original. (c) You may not and you agree not to, or to enable others to, copy (except as expressly permitted by this License), decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, decrypt, modify, or create derivative works of the iOS Software or any services provided by the iOS Software, or any part thereof (except as and only to the extent any foregoing restriction is prohibited by applicable law or to the extent as may be permitted by licensing terms governing use of open-sourced components included with the iOS Software). Any attempt to do so is a violation of the rights of Apple and its licensors of the iOS Software. (d) By storing content on your iOS Device you are making a digital copy. In some jurisdictions, it is unlawful to make digital copies without prior permission from the rights holder. The iOS Software may be used to reproduce materials so long as such use is limited to reproduction of non-copyrighted materials, materials in which you own the copyright, or materials you are authorized or legally permitted to reproduce. (e) You agree to use the iOS Software and the Services (as defined in Section 5 below) in compliance with all applicable laws, including local laws of the country or region in which you reside or in which you download or use the iOS Software and Services. (f) Use of and access to certain features of the iOS Software and certain Services (as defined in Section 5) may require you to apply for a unique user name and password combination, known as an Apple ID. In addition, you acknowledge that many features and Services of the iOS Software transmit data and could impact charges to your data plan, and that you are responsible for any such charges. For more information, please consult the User Guide for your iOS Device. 3. Transfer. You may not rent, lease, lend, sell, redistribute, or sublicense the iOS Software. You may, however, make a one-time permanent transfer of all of your license rights to the iOS Software to another party in connection with the transfer of ownership of your iOS Device, provided that: (a) the transfer must include your iOS Device and all of the iOS Software, including all its component parts, original media, printed materials and this License; (b) you do not retain any copies of the iOS Software, full or partial, including copies stored on a computer or other storage device; and (c) the party receiving the iOS Software reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License. 4. Consent to Use of Data. (a) Diagnostic and Usage Data. If you opt in to diagnostic and usage collection, you agree that Apple and its subsidiaries and agents may collect, maintain, process and use diagnostic, technical, usage and related information, including but not limited to information about your iOS Device, computer, system and application software, and peripherals, that is gathered periodically to facilitate the provision of software updates, product support and other services to you (if any) related to the iOS Software, and to verify compliance with the terms of this License. Apple may use this information, as long as it is collected in a form that does not personally identify you, to provide and improve Apple’s products and services. If you have opted in and have Location Services turned on, the location of your device may also be sent to help Apple analyze wireless or cellular performance issues (e.g. the strength or weakness of a cellular signal in a particular location). To enable Apple’s partners and third party developers to improve their software, hardware and services designed for use with Apple products, Apple may also provide any such partner or third party developer with a subset of diagnostic information that is relevant to that partner’s or developer’s software, hardware and/or services, as long as the diagnostic information is in a form that does not personally identify you. (b) Location Data. Apple and its partners and licensees may provide certain services through your iOS Device that rely upon location information. To provide and improve these services, where available, Apple and its partners and licensees may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use your location data, including the real-time geographic location of your iOS Device, road travel speed information, and location search queries. The location data and queries collected by Apple are collected in a form that does not personally identify you and may be used by Apple and its partners and licensees to provide location-based products and services. By using any location-based services on your iOS Device, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its partners’ and licensees’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing and use of your location data and queries to provide and improve location-based and road traffic-based products and services. You may withdraw this consent at any time by going to the Location Services setting on your iOS Device and either turning off the global Location Services setting or turning off the individual location settings of each location-aware item on your iOS Device. Disabling these location features will only impact the location-based functionality of your iOS Device. It will not affect iOS Device features unrelated to location services. When using third party applications or services on the iOS Device that use or provide location data, you are subject to and should review such third party’s terms and privacy policy on use of location data by such third party applications or services. (c) Siri. If your iOS Device supports Siri, which includes the dictation feature, these features allow you to make requests, give commands and dictate text to your device using your voice. When you use Siri, the things you say will be recorded and sent to Apple to process your requests. Your device will also send Apple other information, such as your first name and nickname; the names, nicknames, and relationship with you (e.g., “my dad”) of your address book contacts; and song names in your collection (collectively, your “User Data”). All of this data is used to help Siri understand you better and recognize what you say. It is not linked to other data that Apple may have from your use of other Apple services. By using Siri, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its subsidiaries’ and agents’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing, and use of this information, including your voice input and User Data, to provide and improve Siri and other Apple products and services. If you have Location Services turned on, the location of your iOS Device at the time you make a request will also be sent to Apple to help Siri improve the accuracy of its response to your location-based requests. You may disable the location-based functionality of Siri by going to the Location Services setting on your iOS Device and turning off the individual location setting for Siri. You can also turn off Siri altogether at any time. To do so, open Settings, tap General, tap Siri, and slide the Siri switch to “off”. You may also restrict the ability to use Siri under the Restrictions Setting. (d) FaceTime. The FaceTime video calling feature of the iOS Software (“FaceTime”) requires Internet access and may not be available in all countries or regions. Your use of FaceTime is subject to your compliance with Section 2(e) above. In order to set up FaceTime, and to initiate and receive FaceTime calls between you and other FaceTime users, certain unique identifiers for your iOS Device and account are needed. These unique identifiers may include your email address(es), the Apple ID information you provide, a hardware identifier for your iOS Device, and your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the iOS Software, you agree that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use these identifiers for the purpose of providing and improving the FaceTime feature. You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will be displayed to the other party on the video call (even if you have a blocked number) or your email address will be shown, depending on what setting you choose. If you are using a FaceTime-capable iPad or iPod touch, your email address will be displayed to the other party on the video call. You may turn off the FaceTime feature by going to the FaceTime setting on your iOS Device or by going to the Restrictions setting and enabling the FaceTime restriction. (e) iMessage. The messaging feature of the iOS Software (“iMessage”) may not be available in all countries or regions. Your use of iMessage is subject to your compliance with Section 2(e) above. In order to set up iMessage, and to initiate and receive iMessages between you and other iOS Device users, certain unique identifiers for your iOS Device and account are needed. These unique identifiers may include your email address(es), the Apple ID information you provide, a hardware identifier for your iOS Device, and your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the iOS Software, you agree that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use these identifiers for the purpose of providing and improving the iMessage service. The iMessage service requires a Wi-Fi or cellular data connection. To facilitate delivery of your iMessages and to enable you to maintain conversations across your devices, Apple may hold your iMessages in encrypted form for a limited period of time. If your message cannot be sent as an iMessage, your message may be sent as an SMS or MMS message, for which carrier messaging rates may apply. You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will be displayed to the other party (even if you have a blocked number) or your email address will be shown, depending on what setting you choose. If you are using an iMessage-capable iPad or iPod touch your email address will be displayed to the other party. You may turn off the iMessage service by going to the Messages setting on your iOS Device. (f) Photo Stream. By using the Photo Stream feature of iCloud, you agree that Apple may store photos taken on your iOS Device or uploaded from your computer for a limited period of time and automatically send the photos to your other Apple iOS Devices or computers that are Photo Stream-enabled. Please note that a limited number of photos may be stored at any one time, and older photos will be automatically deleted from Photo Stream over time. Any photos you want to keep must be saved to your camera roll, another album or your computer. Photo resolution may vary depending on the device to which the photos are downloaded. If you do not wish to use Photo Stream, you can turn Photo Stream off on all of your iOS Devices or computers that are Photo Stream-enabled. All use of the Photo Stream feature is subject to the terms and conditions of this agreement and the iCloud Terms and Conditions located at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/. (g) Interest-Based Advertising. Apple may provide mobile, interest-based advertising to you. If you do not want to receive relevant ads on your iOS Device, you can opt out by going to this link on your iOS Device: http://oo.apple.com. If you opt out, you will continue to receive the same number of mobile ads, but they may be less relevant because they will not be based on your interests. You may still see ads related to the content on a web page or in an application or based on other non-personal information. This opt-out applies only to Apple advertising services and does not affect interest-based advertising from other advertising networks. (h) Privacy Policy. At all times your information will be treated in accordance with Apple’s Privacy Policy, which is incorporated by reference into this License and can be viewed at: www.apple.com/ privacy/. 5. Services and Third Party Materials. (a) The iOS Software enables access to Apple’s iTunes Store, App Store, Game Center, iCloud and other Apple and third party services and web sites (collectively and individually, “Services”). Such Services may not be available in all languages or in all countries. Use of these Services requires Internet access and use of certain Services may require an Apple ID, may require you to accept additional terms and may be subject to additional fees. By using this software in connection with an Apple ID, iTunes Store account, Game Center account, or iCloud account, you agree to the applicable terms of service for that account, such as the latest iTunes Store Terms and Conditions or Game Center Terms and Conditions, which you may access and review at http://www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/, or the iCloud Terms and Conditions which can be found at http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/, respectively. (b) If you sign up for iCloud, certain iCloud features like “Back Up” and “Find My iPhone” may be accessed directly from the iOS Software. You acknowledge and agree that your use of iCloud and these features is subject to the latest terms and conditions of the iCloud service, which you may access and review at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/ (c) You understand that by using any of the Services, you may encounter content that may be deemed offensive, indecent, or objectionable, which content may or may not be identified as having explicit language, and that the results of any search or entering of a particular URL may automatically and unintentionally generate links or references to objectionable material. Nevertheless, you agree to use the Services at your sole risk and that Apple shall have no liability to you for content that may be found to be offensive, indecent, or objectionable. (d) Certain Services may display, include or make available content, data, information, applications or materials from third parties (“Third Party Materials”) or provide links to certain third party web sites. By using the Services, you acknowledge and agree that Apple is not responsible for examining or evaluating the content, accuracy, completeness, timeliness, validity, copyright compliance, legality, decency, quality or any other aspect of such Third Party Materials or web sites. Apple, its officers, affiliates and subsidiaries do not warrant or endorse and do not assume and will not have any liability or responsibility to you or any other person for any third-party Services, Third Party Materials or web sites, or for any other materials, products, or services of third parties. Third Party Materials and links to other web sites are provided solely as a convenience to you. (e) Financial information displayed by any Services is for general informational purposes only and should not be relied upon as investment advice. Before executing any securities transaction based upon information obtained through the Services, you should consult with a financial or securities professional who is legally qualified to give financial or securities advice in your country or region. Location data provided by any Services is for basic navigational purposes only and is not intended to be relied upon in situations where precise location information is needed or where erroneous, inaccurate, time-delayed or incomplete location data may lead to death, personal injury, property or environmental damage. Neither Apple nor any of its content providers guarantees the availability, accuracy, completeness, reliability, or timeliness of stock information, location data or any other data displayed by any Services. (f) You agree that the Services contain proprietary content, information and material that is owned by Apple and/or its licensors, and is protected by applicable intellectual property and other laws, including but not limited to copyright. You agree that you will not use such proprietary content, information or materials other than for permitted use of the Services or in any manner that is inconsistent with the terms of this License or that infringes any intellectual property rights of a third party or Apple. No portion of the Services may be reproduced in any form or by any means. You agree not to modify, rent, lease, loan, sell, distribute, or create derivative works based on the Services, in any manner, and you shall not exploit the Services in any unauthorized way whatsoever, including but not limited to, using the Services to transmit any computer viruses, worms, trojan horses or other malware, or by trespass or burdening network capacity. You further agree not to use the Services in any manner to harass, abuse, stalk, threaten, defame or otherwise infringe or violate the rights of any other party, and that Apple is not in any way responsible for any such use by you, nor for any harassing, threatening, defamatory, offensive, infringing or illegal messages or transmissions that you may receive as a result of using any of the Services. (g) In addition, Services and Third Party Materials that may be accessed from, displayed on or linked to from the iOS Device are not available in all languages or in all countries or regions. Apple makes no representation that such Services and Materials are appropriate or available for use in any particular location. To the extent you choose to use or access such Services and Materials, you do so at your own initiative and are responsible for compliance with any applicable laws, including but not limited to applicable local laws. Apple and its licensors reserve the right to change, suspend, remove, or disable access to any Services at any time without notice. In no event will Apple be liable for the removal of or disabling of access to any such Services. Apple may also impose limits on the use of or access to certain Services, in any case and without notice or liability. 6. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. Your rights under this License will terminate automatically or otherwise cease to be effective without notice from Apple if you fail to comply with any term(s) of this License. Upon the termination of this License, you shall cease all use of the iOS Software. Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12 and 13 of this License shall survive any such termination. 7. Disclaimer of Warranties. 7.1 If you are a customer who is a consumer (someone who uses the iOS Software outside of your trade, business or profession), you may have legal rights in your country of residence which would prohibit the following limitations from applying to you, and where prohibited they will not apply to you. To find out more about rights, you should contact a local consumer advice organization. 7.2 YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, USE OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. 7.3 TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND APPLE AND APPLE’S LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS “APPLE” FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 7 AND 8) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. 7.4 APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN OR SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, THAT ANY SERVICE WILL CONTINUE TO BE MADE AVAILABLE, THAT DEFECTS IN THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE WILL BE COMPATIBLE OR WORK WITH ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES. INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE MAY AFFECT THE USABILITY OF THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES. 7.5 YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE NOT INTENDED OR SUITABLE FOR USE IN SITUATIONS OR ENVIRONMENTS WHERE THE FAILURE OR TIME DELAYS OF, OR ERRORS OR INACCURACIES IN, THE CONTENT, DATA OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES COULD LEAD TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS. 7.6 NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY APPLE OR AN APPLE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 8. Limitation of Liability. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES OR ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE iOS SOFTWARE, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall Apple’s total liability to you for all damages (other than as may be required by applicable law in cases involving personal injury) exceed the amount of two hundred and fifty dollars (U.S.$250.00). The foregoing limitations will apply even if the above stated remedy fails of its essential purpose. 9. Digital Certificates. The iOS Software contains functionality that allows it to accept digital certificates either issued from Apple or from third parties. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DECIDING WHETHER OR NOT TO RELY ON A CERTIFICATE WHETHER ISSUED BY APPLE OR A THIRD PARTY. YOUR USE OF DIGITAL CERTIFICATES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, SECURITY, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO DIGITAL CERTIFICATES. 10. Export Control. You may not use or otherwise export or re-export the iOS Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction(s) in which the iOS Software was obtained. In particular, but without limitation, the iOS Software may not be exported or reexported (a) into any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department’s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce Denied Person’s List or Entity List. By using the iOS Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located in any such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use the iOS Software for any purposes prohibited by United States law, including, without limitation, the development, design, manufacture or production of missiles, nuclear, chemical or biological weapons. 11. Government End Users. The iOS Software and related documentation are “Commercial Items”, as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation”, as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. 12. Controlling Law and Severability. This License will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, excluding its conflict of law principles. This License shall not be governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If you are a consumer based in the United Kingdom, this License will be governed by the laws of the jurisdiction of your residence. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect. 13. Complete Agreement; Governing Language. This License constitutes the entire agreement between you and Apple relating to the iOS Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by Apple. Any translation of this License is done for local requirements and in the event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this License shall govern, to the extent not prohibited by local law in your jurisdiction. 14. Third Party Acknowledgements. Portions of the iOS Software may utilize or include third party software and other copyrighted material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the electronic documentation for the iOS Software, and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. Use of the Google Safe Browsing Service is subject to the Google Terms of Service (http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and to Google’s Privacy Policy (http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html). 15. Use of MPEG-4; H.264/AVC Notice. (a) The iOS Software contains MPEG-4 video encoding and/or decoding functionality. The iOS Software is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG-4 video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. (b) The iOS Software contains AVC encoding and/or decoding functionality, commercial use of H.264/AVC requires additional licensing and the following provision applies: THE AVC FUNCTIONALITY IN THE iOS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED HEREIN ONLY FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR AVC VIDEO THAT WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. INFORMATION REGARDING OTHER USES AND LICENSES MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. 16. Yahoo Search Service Restrictions. The Yahoo Search Service available through Safari is licensed for use only in the following countries and regions: Argentina, Aruba, Australia, Austria, Barbados, Belgium, Bermuda, Brazil, Bulgaria, Canada, Cayman Islands, Chile, China, Colombia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Grenada, Guatemala, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, India, Indonesia, Ireland, Italy, Jamaica, Japan, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Netherlands, New Zealand, Nicaragua, Norway, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Puerto Rico, Romania, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, South Korea, Spain, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Thailand, The Bahamas, Trinidad and Tobago, Turkey, UK, Uruguay, US and Venezuela. 17. Microsoft Exchange Notice. The Microsoft Exchange mail setting in the iOS Software is licensed only for over-the-air synchronization of information, such as email, contacts, calendar and tasks, between your iOS and Microsoft Exchange Server or other server software licensed by Microsoft to implement the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync protocol. EA0790 Rev. 8/15/11 NOTICES FROM APPLE If Apple needs to contact you about your product or account, you consent to receive the notices by email. You agree that any such notices that we send you electronically will satisfy any legal communication requirements. GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS Thank you for trying out the Google Maps for mobile software application! This page contains the terms and conditions (the “Terms and Conditions”) for Google Maps for mobile and the enterprise version of Google Maps for mobile. In order to use this software, including any third party software made available to you in conjunction with this software and/or the related service, (collectively referred to below as “Google Maps for mobile”) you agree to be bound by these Terms and Conditions, either on behalf of yourself or on behalf of your employer or other entity. If you are agreeing to be bound by these Terms and Conditions on behalf of your employer or other entity, you represent and warrant that you have full legal authority to bind your employer or such entity to these Terms and Conditions. If you don’t have the legal authority to bind, please press “No” when asked whether you agree to these Terms and Conditions, and do not proceed with use of this product. Additional Terms??Google Maps for mobile is designed to be used in conjunction with Google’s Maps services and other Google services. Accordingly, you agree and acknowledge that your use of Google Maps for mobile is also subject to (a) the specific terms of service for Google Maps (which can be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/terms_local. html) including the content notices applicable thereto (which can be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/legalnotices_local.html), (b) the general Google terms of service (which can be viewed at http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and (c) Google’s overall privacy policy (which can be viewed at http://www.google.com/ privacypolicy.html), as well as specific privacy policies, such as the Google Maps for mobile privacy policy included with this application, such provisions being hereby incorporated into these Terms and Conditions by reference. To the extent that there is any inconsistency or conflict between such additional terms and these Terms and Conditions, the provisions of these Terms and Conditions take precedence. Network Charges??Google does not charge for downloading or using Google Maps for mobile, but depending on your plan and your carrier or provider, your carrier or other provider may charge you for downloading Google Maps for mobile or for use of your mobile phone when you access information or other Google services through Google Maps for mobile. Non-Commercial Use Only??Google Maps for mobile is made available to you for your non-commercial use only. This means that you may use it for your personal use only: you may use it at work or at home, to search for anything you want, subject to the terms set out in these Terms and Conditions. You need to obtain Google’s permission first, which you can do by contacting mobile-support@google.com, if you want to sell Google Maps for mobile or any information, services, or software associated with or derived from it, or if you want to modify, copy, license, or create derivative works from Google Maps for mobile. Unless you have our prior written consent, you agree not to modify, adapt, translate, prepare derivative works from, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise attempt to derive source code from Google Maps for mobile. Furthermore, you may not use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that could damage, disable, overburden, or impair Google’s services (e.g., you may not use the Google Maps for mobile in an automated manner), nor may you use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that could interfere with any other party’s use and enjoyment of Google’s services. If you have comments on Google Maps for mobile or ideas on how to improve it, please email mobile-support@google.com. Please note that by doing so, you also grant Google and third parties permission to use and incorporate your ideas or comments into Google Maps for mobile (or third party software) without further notice or compensation. Intellectual Property??As between you and Google, you agree and acknowledge that Google owns all rights, title and interest in and to Google Maps for mobile, including without limitation all associated Intellectual Property Rights. “Intellectual Property Rights” means any and all rights existing from time to time under patent law, copyright law, trade secret law, trademark law, unfair competition law, and any and all other proprietary rights, and any and all applications, renewals, extensions and restorations thereof, now or hereafter in force and effect worldwide. You agree to not remove, obscure, or alter Google’s or any third party’s copyright notice, trademarks, or other proprietary rights notices affixed to or contained within or accessed in conjunction with or through the Google Maps for mobile. Disclaimer of Warranties??Google and any third party who makes its software available in conjunction with or through Google Maps for mobile disclaim any responsibility for any harm resulting from your use of Google Maps for mobile and/or any third party software accessed in conjunction with or through Google Maps for mobile. GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” WITH NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. GOOGLE AND SUCH THIRD PARTIES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. GOOGLE AND ANY SUCH THIRD PARTIES DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE SECURITY, RELIABILITY, TIMELINESS, AND PERFORMANCE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE AND SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. YOU UNDERSTAND AND AGREE THAT YOU DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND THAT YOU WILL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES TO YOUR COMPUTER OR MOBILE DEVICE SYSTEM OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOAD OR USE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SOME STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE AND JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. Limitation of Liability??UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL GOOGLE OR ANY THIRD PARTY WHO MAKE THEIR SOFTWARE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE BE LIABLE TO ANY USER ON ACCOUNT OF THAT USER’S USE OR MISUSE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO PREVENT RECOVERY OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, AND PUNITIVE DAMAGES WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), OR OTHERWISE, (EVEN IF GOOGLE AND/ OR A THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDER HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES). SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY WHETHER THE DAMAGES ARISE FROM USE OR MISUSE OF AND RELIANCE ON GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR ON PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, FROM INABILITY TO USE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, OR FROM THE INTERRUPTION, SUSPENSION, OR TERMINATION OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE (INCLUDING SUCH DAMAGES INCURRED BY THIRD PARTIES). SUCH LIMITATION SHALL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING A FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED REMEDY AND TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. SOME STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Miscellaneous Provisions??These Terms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to the conflict of laws provisions of California or your actual state or country of residence. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion of these Terms and Conditions to be unenforceable, the remainder of these Terms and Conditions will continue in full force and effect. These Terms and Conditions constitute the entire agreement between you and Google with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersede and replace all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. Any waiver of any provision of these Terms and Conditions will be effective only if in writing and signed by Google. September 2007 YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS http://www.youtube.com/t/terms Apple One (1) Year Limited Warranty—iPhone For Apple Branded Products Only HOW CONSUMER LAW RELATES TO THIS WARRANTY. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR BY COUNTRY OR PROVINCE). OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE DOES NOT EXCLUDE, LIMIT OR SUSPEND OTHER RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE, INCLUDING THOSE THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE NONCONFORMITY OF A SALES CONTRACT. FOR A FULL UNDERSTANDING OF YOUR RIGHTS YOU SHOULD CONSULT THE LAWS OF YOUR COUNTRY, PROVINCE OR STATE. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS THAT MAY AFFECT CONSUMER LAW. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THIS WARRANTY AND THE REMEDIES SET FORTH ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, REMEDIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER ORAL, WRITTEN, STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. APPLE DISCLAIMS ALL STATUTORY AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND WARRANTIES AGAINST HIDDEN OR LATENT DEFECTS, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. IN SO FAR AS SUCH WARRANTIES CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED, APPLE LIMITS THE DURATION AND REMEDIES OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE DURATION OF THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY AND, AT APPLE’S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT SERVICES DESCRIBED BELOW. SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY (OR CONDITION) MAY LAST, SO THE LIMITATION DESCRIBED ABOVE MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.WHAT IS COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? Apple warrants the Applebranded hardware product and accessories contained in the original packaging (“Apple Product”) against defects in materials and workmanship when used normally in accordance with Apple’s published guidelines for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of original retail purchase by the end-user purchaser (“Warranty Period”). Apple’s published guidelines include but are not limited to information contained in technical specifications, user manuals and service communications. WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? This warranty does not apply to any non-Apple branded hardware products or any software, even if packaged or sold with Apple hardware. Manufacturers, suppliers, or publishers, other than Apple, may provide their own warranties to you but Apple, in so far as permitted by law, provides their products “AS IS”. Software distributed by Apple with or without the Apple brand (including, but not limited to system software) is not covered by this warranty. Please refer to the licensing agreement accompanying the software for details of your rights with respect to its use. Apple does not warrant that the operation of the Apple Product will be uninterrupted or error-free. Apple is not responsible for damage arising from failure to follow instructions relating to the Apple Product’s use. This warranty does not apply: (a) to consumable parts, such as batteries or protective coatings that are designed to diminish over time, unless failure has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (b) to cosmetic damage, including but not limited to scratches, dents and broken plastic on ports; (c) to damage caused by use with another product; (d) to damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, liquid contact, fire, earthquake or other external cause; (e) to damage caused by operating the Apple Product outside Apple’s published guidelines; (f) to damage caused by service (including upgrades and expansions) performed by anyone who is not a representative of Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider (“AASP”); (g) to an Apple Product that has been modified to alter functionality or capability without the written permission of Apple; (h) to defects caused by normal wear and tear or otherwise due to the normal aging of the Apple Product, or (i) if any serial number has been removed or defaced from the Apple Product. IMPORTANT RESTRICTION. Apple may restrict warranty service to the country where Apple or its Authorized Distributors originally sold the Apple Product. YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES. YOU SHOULD MAKE PERIODIC BACKUP COPIES OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT’S STORAGE MEDIA TO PROTECT THE CONTENTS AND AS A PRECAUTION AGAINST POSSIBLE OPERATIONAL FAILURES. Before receiving warranty service, Apple or its agents may require that you furnish proof of purchase details, respond to questions designed to assist with diagnosing potential issues and follow Apple’s procedures for obtaining warranty service. Before submitting your Apple Product for warranty service you should maintain a separate backup copy of the contents of its storage media, remove all personal information that you want to protect and disable all security passwords.DURING WARRANTY SERVICE THE CONTENTS OF THE STORAGE MEDIA WILL BE DELETED AND REFORMATTED. APPLE AND ITS AGENTS ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF SOFTWARE PROGRAMS, DATA OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE STORAGE MEDIA OR ANY OTHER PART OF THE APPLE PRODUCT SERVICED. Following warranty service your Apple Product or a replacement product will be returned to you as your Apple Product was configured when originally purchased, subject to applicable updates. Apple may install system software updates as part of warranty service that will prevent the Apple Product from reverting to an earlier version of the system software. Third party applications installed on the Apple Product may not be compatible or work with the Apple Product as a result of the system software update. You will be responsible for reinstalling all other software programs, data and information. Recovery and reinstallation of other software programs, data and information are not covered under this warranty. Important: Do not open the Apple Product. Opening the Apple Product may cause damage that is not covered by this warranty. Only Apple or an AASP should perform service on this Apple Product. WHAT WILL APPLE DO IN THE EVENT THE WARRANTY IS BREACHED? If during the Warranty Period you submit a valid claim to Apple or an AASP, Apple will, at its option, (i) repair the Apple Product using new or previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance and reliability, (ii) replace the Apple Product with a product that is at least functionally equivalent to the Apple Product and is formed from new and/or previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance and reliability, or (iii) exchange the Apple Product for a refund of your purchase price. Apple may request that you replace certain user-installable parts or products. A replacement part or product, including a user-installable part that has been installed in accordance with instructions provided by Apple, assumes the remaining warranty of the Apple Product or ninety (90) days from the date of replacement or repair, whichever provides longer coverage for you. When a product or part is replaced or a refund provided, any replacement item becomes your property and the replaced or refunded item becomes Apple’s property. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE. Please access and review the online help resources described below before seeking warranty service. If the Apple Product is still not functioning properly after making use of these resources, please contact an Apple representative or, if applicable, an Apple owned retail store (“Apple Retail”) or AASP, using the information provided below. An Apple representative or AASP will help determine whether your Apple Product requires service and, if it does, will inform you how Apple will provide it. When contacting Apple via telephone, other charges may apply depending on your location. Online information with details on obtaining warranty service is provided below. WARRANTY SERVICE OPTIONS. Apple will provide warranty service through one or more of the following options:(i) Carry-in service. You may return your Apple Product to an Apple Retail or AASP location offering carry-in service. Service will be performed at the location, or Apple Retail or an AASP may send your Apple Product to an Apple Repair Service (“ARS”) location to be serviced. Once you are notified that service is complete, you will promptly retrieve the Apple Product from the Apple Retail or AASP location, or the Apple Product will be sent directly to your location from the ARS location. (ii) Mail-in service. If Apple determines that your Apple Product is eligible for mail-in service, Apple will send you prepaid waybills and if applicable, packaging material, so that you may ship your Apple Product to an ARS or AASP location in accordance with Apple’s instructions. Once service is complete, the ARS or AASP location will return the Apple Product to you. Apple will pay for shipping to and from your location if all instructions are followed. (iii) Do-it-yourself (DIY) parts service. DIY parts service allows you to service your own Apple Product. If DIY parts service is available in the circumstances, the following process will apply. (a) Service where Apple requires return of the replaced product or part. Apple may require a credit card authorization as security for the retail price of the replacement product or part and applicable shipping costs. If you are unable to provide credit card authorization, DIY parts service may not be available to you and Apple will offer alternative arrangements for service. Apple will ship a replacement product or part to you with installation instructions, if applicable, and any requirements for the return of the replaced product or part. If you follow the instructions, Apple will cancel the credit card authorization, so you will not be charged for the product or part and shipping to and from your location. If you fail to return the replaced product or part as instructed or return a replaced product or part that is ineligible for service, Apple will charge your credit card for the authorized amount. (b) Service where Apple does not require return of the replaced product or part. Apple will ship you free of charge a replacement product or part accompanied by instructions on installation, if applicable, and any requirements for the disposal of the replaced product or part. (c) Apple is not responsible for any labor costs you incur relating to DIY parts service. Should you require further assistance, contact Apple at the telephone number listed below. Apple reserves the right to change the method by which Apple may provide warranty service to you, and your Apple Product’s eligibility to receive a particular method of service. Service will be limited to the options available in the country where service is requested. Service options, parts availability and response times may vary according to country. You may be responsible for shipping and handling charges if the Apple Product cannot be serviced in the country it is in. If you seek service in a country that is not the original country of purchase, you will comply with all applicable import and export laws and regulations and be responsible for all custom duties, V.A.T. and other associated taxes and charges. Where international service is available, Apple may repair or replace products and parts with comparable products and parts that comply with local standards.LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONDITION, OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE; LOSS OF REVENUE; LOSS OF ACTUAL OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS ON CONTRACTS); LOSS OF THE USE OF MONEY; LOSS OF ANTICIPATED SAVINGS; LOSS OF BUSINESS; LOSS OF OPPORTUNITY; LOSS OF GOODWILL; LOSS OF REPUTATION; LOSS OF, DAMAGE TO, COMPROMISE OR CORRUPTION OF DATA; OR ANY INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE HOWSOEVER CAUSED INCLUDING THE REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, PROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH THE APPLE PRODUCT OR ANY FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE CONFIDENTIALITY OF INFORMATION STORED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CLAIMS, OR ANY STATUTORY LIABILITY FOR INTENTIONAL AND GROSS NEGLIGENT ACTS AND/OR OMISSIONS. APPLE DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION THAT IT WILL BE ABLE TO REPAIR ANY APPLE PRODUCT UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR REPLACE THE APPLE PRODUCT WITHOUT RISK TO OR LOSS OF INFORMATION STORED IN THE APPLE PRODUCT. SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. PRIVACY. Apple will maintain and use customer information in accordance with the Apple Customer Privacy Policy available at www. apple.com/legal/warranty/privacy. GENERAL. No Apple reseller, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty. If any term is held to be illegal or unenforceable, the legality or enforceability of the remaining terms shall not be affected or impaired. This warranty is governed by and construed under the laws of the country in which the Apple Product purchase took place. Apple is identified at the end of this document according to the country or region in which the Apple Product purchase took place. Apple or its successor in title is the warrantor under this warranty. ONLINE INFORMATION. More information of the following is available online: International Support Information www.apple.com/support/country Authorized Distributors www.apple.com/iphone/countries Apple Authorized Service Providers support.apple.com/kb/HT1937 Apple Retail Store www.apple.com/retail/storelistApple Support and Service support.apple.com/kb/HE57 Apple Complimentary Support www.apple.com/support/country/index.html?dest=complimentary Warranty Obligor for Region or Country of Purchase Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address Americas Brazil Apple Computer Brasil Ltda Av. Cidade Jardim 400, 2 Andar, Sao Paulo, SP Brasil 01454-901 Canada Apple Canada Inc. 7495 Birchmount Rd.; Markham, Ontario, Canada; L3R 5G2 Canada Mexico Apple Operations México S.A. de C.V. Prolongación Paseo de la Reforma #600, Suite 132 Colonia Peña Blanca, Santa Fé Delegación Álvaro Obregón México D. F., CP 01210, México United States and Other Americas Countries Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA Europe, Middle East and Africa All countries Apple Sales International Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill, Cork, Republic of Ireland Asia Pacific Australia; New Zealand; Fiji, Papua New Guinea; Vanuatu Apple Pty. Limited. PO Box A2629, Sydney South, NSW 1235, Australia Hong Kong Apple Asia Limited 2401 Tower One, Times Square, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong India Apple India Private Ltd. 19th Floor, Concorde Tower C, UB City No 24, Vittal Mallya Road, Bangalore 560-001, India Japan Apple Japan Inc. 3-20-2 Nishishinjuku, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo, Japan Korea Apple Korea Ltd. 3201, ASEM Tower; 159, Samsung-dong, Gangnam-Gu; Seoul 135-798, Republic of Korea Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia, Guam, Indonesia, Laos, Singapore, Malaysia, Nepal, Pakistan, Philippines, Sri Lanka, Vietnam Apple South Asia Pte. Ltd. 7 Ang Mo Kio Street 64 Singapore 569086Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address People’s Republic of China Apple Computer Trading (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Room 1815, No. 1 Jilong Road, Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone, Shanghai 200131 China Thailand Apple South Asia (Thailand) Limited 25th Floor, Suite B2, Siam Tower, 989 Rama 1 Road, Pataumwan, Bangkok, 10330 Taiwan Apple Asia LLC 16A, No. 333 Tun Hwa S. Road. Sec. 2, Taipei, Taiwan 106 Other Asian Pacific Countries Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA iPhone US Warranty v3.0© 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, FaceTime, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes, Safari, Siri, the Made for iPod logo, and the Works with iPhone logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The Made for iPhone logo and iMessage are trademarks of Apple Inc. iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store and iCloud are service marks of Apple Inc. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. 034-5992-A Printed in XXXX iPhone User Guide For iPhone OS 3.1 SoftwareContents 9 Chapter 1: Getting Started 9 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone 9 What You Need 10 Activating iPhone 10 Installing the SIM Card 10 Registering iPhone 11 Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver 11 Syncing 16 Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts 18 Installing Configuration Profiles 19 Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer 20 Chapter 2: Basics 20 iPhone at a Glance 23 Home Screen 26 Buttons 28 Touchscreen 31 Onscreen Keyboard 37 Searching 38 Voice Control 39 Stereo Headset 40 Connecting to the Internet 43 Battery 45 Security Features 46 Cleaning iPhone 46 Restarting and Resetting iPhone 47 Chapter 3: Phone 47 Phone Calls 51 Visual Voicemail 54 Contacts 54 Favorites 54 Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch 255 Bluetooth Devices 56 International Calls 59 Chapter 4: Mail 59 Setting Up Email Accounts 59 Sending Email 60 Checking and Reading Email 64 Searching Email 64 Organizing Email 66 Chapter 5: Safari 66 Viewing Webpages 69 Searching the Web 69 Bookmarks 70 Web Clips 71 Chapter 6: iPod 71 Getting Music, Video, and More 73 Music and Other Audio 81 Videos 84 Setting a Sleep Timer 85 Changing the Browse Buttons 86 Chapter 7: Messages 86 Sending and Receiving Messages 88 Sharing Photos and Videos 88 Sending Voice Memos 89 Editing Conversations 89 Using Contact Information and Links 90 Managing Previews and Alerts 91 Chapter 8: Calendar 91 About Calendar 91 Syncing Calendars 92 Viewing Your Calendar 93 Searching Calendars 93 Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars 94 Adding Calendar Events to iPhone 95 Responding to Meeting Invitations 96 Alerts 97 Chapter 9: Photos 97 About Photos 97 Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer Contents 398 Viewing Photos and Videos 99 Slideshows 100 Sharing Photos and Videos 102 Assigning a Photo to a Contact 102 Wallpaper 103 Chapter 10: Camera 103 About Camera 104 Taking Photos and Recording Videos 105 Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos 105 Trimming Videos 106 Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer 107 Chapter 11: YouTube 107 Finding and Viewing Videos 108 Controlling Video Playback 109 Managing Videos 109 Getting More Information 110 Using YouTube Account Features 111 Changing the Browse Buttons 111 Sending Videos to YouTube 112 Chapter 12: Stocks 112 Viewing Stock Quotes 113 Getting More Information 114 Chapter 13: Maps 114 Finding and Viewing Locations 119 Bookmarking Locations 119 Getting Directions 121 Showing Traffic Conditions 121 Finding and Contacting Businesses 123 Chapter 14: Weather 123 Viewing Weather Summaries 124 Getting More Weather Information 125 Chapter 15: Voice Memos 125 Recording Voice Memos 126 Listening to Voice Memos 127 Managing Voice Memos 128 Trimming Voice Memos 128 Sharing Voice Memos 129 Syncing Voice Memos 4 Contents130 Chapter 16: Notes 130 Writing and Reading Notes 131 Searching Notes 131 Emailing Notes 131 Syncing Notes 132 Chapter 17: Clock 132 World Clocks 133 Alarms 133 Stopwatch 134 Timer 135 Chapter 18: Calculator 135 Using the Calculator 135 Standard Memory Functions 136 Scientific Calculator Keys 138 Chapter 19: Settings 138 Airplane Mode 139 Wi-Fi 140 VPN 140 Notifications 141 Carrier 141 Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch 142 Brightness 142 Wallpaper 142 General 150 Mail, Contacts, Calendars 153 Phone 156 Safari 157 Messages 158 iPod 159 Photos 159 Store 159 Nike + iPod 160 Chapter 20: iTunes Store 160 About the iTunes Store 161 Finding Music, Videos, and More 162 Purchasing Ringtones 162 Purchasing Music or Audiobooks 163 Purchasing or Renting Videos 164 Streaming or Downloading Podcasts Contents 5165 Checking Download Status 165 Syncing Purchased Content 165 Changing the Browse Buttons 166 Viewing Account Information 166 Verifying Purchases 167 Chapter 21: App Store 167 About the App Store 167 Browsing and Searching 169 Info Screen 170 Downloading Applications 171 Deleting Applications 171 Writing Reviews 172 Updating Applications 172 Syncing Purchased Applications 173 Chapter 22: Compass 173 Getting Compass Readings 174 Compass and Maps 176 Chapter 23: Contacts 176 About Contacts 176 Adding Contacts 177 Searching Contacts 178 Managing Contacts on iPhone 180 Chapter 24: Nike + iPod 180 Activating Nike + iPod 181 Additional Nike + iPod Settings 182 Chapter 25: Accessibility 182 Accessibility Features 183 VoiceOver 189 Zoom 190 White on Black 190 Mono Audio 190 Speak Auto-text 191 Triple-click Home 191 Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features 193 Appendix A: Troubleshooting 193 Apple iPhone Support Site 193 General 195 iTunes and Syncing 6 Contents196 Phone and Voicemail 197 Safari, Text, Mail, and Contacts 200 Sound, Music, and Video 201 iTunes Stores 201 Removing the SIM Card 202 Backing Up iPhone 204 Updating and Restoring iPhone Software 205 Appendix B: Other Resources 205 Safety, Software, and Service Information 206 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone 206 Disposal and Recycling Information 207 Apple and the Environment 208 Index Contents 7Getting Started 1 · WARNING: To avoid injury, read all operating instructions in this guide and safety information in the iPhone Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone before using iPhone. Viewing the User Guide on iPhone The iPhone User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPhone, is available at help.apple.com/iphone. View the guide on iPhone: In Safari, tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark. Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPhone User Guide is available in many languages. View the guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want. What You Need To use iPhone, you need: • A wireless service plan with a carrier that provides iPhone service in your area • A Mac or a PC with a USB 2.0 port and one of the following operating systems: • Mac OS X version 10.4.11 or later; version 10.5.7 or later is required for syncing Notes and for using iPhone as a modem • Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later • Windows Vista Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, or Ultimate edition • Display resolution on your computer set to 1024 x 768 or higher • iTunes 8.2 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download (iTunes 9 or later required for certain features) • QuickTime 7.6.2 or later (for playing videos recorded by iPhone 3GS on your computer) 9• An iTunes Store account (for purchases from the iTunes Store or App Store) • An Internet connection for your computer (broadband recommended) Activating iPhone Before you can use any of iPhone’s features, you must activate iPhone by signing up for a service plan with an iPhone service carrier in your area and registering iPhone with the network. Your iPhone may have been activated at the time of purchase. If it isn’t activated, contact your iPhone retailer or cellular service provider. For more information about iPhone, go to www.apple.com/iphone. Installing the SIM Card If your SIM card was not preinstalled, you must install the SIM card before you can use iPhone. SIM card SIM tray SIM eject tool Install the SIM card: 1 Insert the end of the SIM eject tool into the hole on the SIM tray. Press firmly and push it straight in until the tray pops out. If you don’t have a SIM eject tool, you can use the end of a paper clip. 2 Pull out the SIM tray and place the SIM card in the tray. The angled corner of the SIM ensures that the card fits only the correct way in the tray. 3 With the tray aligned as shown, carefully replace the SIM tray containing the SIM card in iPhone. Registering iPhone Registering iPhone with iTunes enables iTunes to identify your iPhone when it’s connected to your computer and help you manage its contents. You can then sync information with your computer and media from iTunes, and create backups of iPhone’s contents and settings. You can create an iTunes Store account, or specify an existing account, to enable purchases with iPhone. iTunes also records iPhone’s serial number in the event you need it for service or in case of loss. 10 Chapter 1 Getting StartedRegister iPhone: 1 Download and install the latest version of iTunes from www.itunes.com/download. 2 Connect iPhone to a USB 2.0 port on your Mac or PC using the cable that came with iPhone. 3 Follow the onscreen instructions in iTunes to register iPhone and sync iPhone with your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks on your computer, and with music, video, and other content from your iTunes library. In the Set Up Your iPhone screen, select “Automatically sync contacts, calendars and bookmarks” to configure those items to sync automatically when you connect iPhone to your computer. You can also customize your sync settings in iTunes. See the following section. Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver If you’re visually impaired, VoiceOver (available only on iPhone 3GS) can help you set up iPhone without a sighted assistant. VoiceOver describes aloud what appears on the screen, so you can use iPhone without seeing it. When you connect iPhone to your computer, iTunes detects whether you’re using a compatible screen reader on your computer, such as VoiceOver on a Mac or GW Micro Window-Eyes on a PC, and automatically enables VoiceOver on iPhone. A sighted user can also enable VoiceOver on iPhone for you, using Accessibility settings. See “Using VoiceOver” on page 187. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. Syncing With iPhone, you can have easy access to important information on your computer, including your contacts, calendars, and even your browser bookmarks, as well as to music, video, and other content in your iTunes library. About Syncing Syncing copies information and content between iPhone and your computer, keeping it current and up-to-date, whether you make changes on iPhone or on your computer. Chapter 1 Getting Started 11iTunes lets you specify the information and content on your computer that you want to sync with iPhone. By default, iTunes syncs automatically with iPhone whenever you connect iPhone to your computer. You can also set up iPhone to sync your MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange accounts, over the air. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts” on page 16. Syncing with iTunes You can set iTunes to sync any or all of the following: • Contacts—names, phone numbers, addresses, email addresses, and more • Calendars—appointments and events • Email account settings • Webpage bookmarks • Notes (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC) • Ringtones • Music and audiobooks • Photos and videos (in your computer’s photo application or folder) • iTunes U collections • Podcasts • Movies, TV shows, and music videos • Applications downloaded from the iTunes Store You can adjust sync settings whenever iPhone is connected to your computer. Ringtones, music, audiobooks, podcasts, iTunes U collections, videos, and applications can be synced from your iTunes library. If you don’t already have content in iTunes, the iTunes Store (available in some countries) makes it easy to preview and download content to iTunes. You can also add music to your iTunes library from your CDs. To learn about iTunes and the iTunes Store, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Contacts, calendars, notes, and webpage bookmarks are synced with applications on your computer, as described in the following section. Contacts and calendars are synced both ways between your computer and iPhone. New entries or changes you make on iPhone are synced to your computer, and vice versa. Notes and webpage bookmarks are also synced both ways. Photos and videos (Mac only) can be synced from an application or from a folder. Email account settings are synced only from your computer’s email application to iPhone. This allows you to customize your email accounts on iPhone without affecting email account settings on your computer. 12 Chapter 1 Getting StartedNote: You can also set up email accounts directly on iPhone. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts.” Purchases you make on iPhone in the iTunes Store or the App Store are synced back to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and applications directly from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPhone. You can set iPhone to sync with only a portion of what’s on your computer. For example, you might want to sync only a group of contacts from your address book, or only unwatched video podcasts. Important: You should be logged in to your own computer user account before connecting iPhone. Set up iTunes syncing: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer, and open iTunes (if it doesn’t open automatically). 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Configure the sync settings in each of the settings panes. See the following section for descriptions of the panes. 4 Click Apply in the lower-right corner of the screen. By default, “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected. iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes The following sections provide an overview of each of the iPhone settings panes. For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Summary Pane Select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” to have iTunes sync iPhone automatically whenever you connect it to your computer. Deselect this option if you want to sync only by clicking the Sync button in iTunes. For more information about preventing automatic syncing, see “Preventing Automatic Syncing” on page 15. Chapter 1 Getting Started 13Select “Sync only checked songs and videos” if you want iTunes to skip unchecked items in your iTunes library when syncing. Select “Manually manage music and videos” to turn off automatic syncing in the Music and Video settings panes. See “Manually Managing Content” on page 72. Select “Encrypt iPhone backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a padlock icon, and a password is required to restore the information to iPhone. See “Backing Up iPhone” on page 202. Click Configure Universal Access to turn on Accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS). See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182. Info Pane The Info pane lets you configure the sync settings for your contacts, calendars, email accounts, and web browser. • Contacts Sync contacts with applications such as Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, and Google Contacts on a Mac, or with Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Windows Vista Contacts, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync contacts with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync contacts with only one application at a time.) If you sync with Yahoo! Address Book, you only need to click Configure to enter your new login information when you change your Yahoo! ID or password after you’ve set up syncing. • Calendars Sync calendars from applications such as iCal on a Mac, or from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync calendars with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync calendars with only one application at a time.) • Mail Accounts Sync email account settings from Mail on a Mac, and from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 or Outlook Express on a PC. Account settings are transferred only from your computer to iPhone. Changes you make to an email account on iPhone don’t affect the account on your computer. Note: The password for your Yahoo! email account isn’t saved on your computer, so it can’t be synced and must be entered on iPhone. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap your Yahoo! account, and enter the password. • Web Browser You can sync bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Notes Sync notes in the Notes application on iPhone with notes in Mail on a Mac or with Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you must have Mac OS version 10.5.7 or later installed to sync notes.) • Advanced These options let you replace the information on iPhone with the information on your computer during the next sync. Applications Pane Use the Applications pane to specify which App Store applications to sync on iPhone, or to arrange your Home screen (requires iTunes 9 or later). Any applications downloaded directly to iPhone are automatically backed up to your iTunes library when you sync. If you manually delete an application on iPhone, you can reinstall it from this pane as long as it was previously synced. Ringtones Pane Use the Ringtones pane to select the ringtones you want to sync to iPhone. Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U Panes Use these panes to specify the media you want to sync. You can sync all music, movies, TV shows, podcasts, and iTunes U collections, or select the content you want on iPhone. If you want to watch rented movies on iPhone, transfer them to iPhone using the Movies pane in iTunes. If there’s not enough room on iPhone for all the media you’ve specified, iTunes can create a special playlist and set it to sync with iPhone. Note: The iTunes U pane appears only in iTunes 9 or later. In earlier versions of iTunes, iTunes U content appeared in the Podcasts pane. Photos Pane You can sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 required) with iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture on a Mac; or with Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later on a PC. You can also sync photos and videos in any folder on your computer that contains images. Preventing Automatic Syncing You can prevent iPhone from syncing automatically when you connect iPhone to a computer other than the one you usually sync with. Turn off automatic syncing for iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar, then click the Summary tab. Deselect “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected.” You can still sync by clicking the Sync button. Chapter 1 Getting Started 15Prevent automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods: In iTunes choose iTunes > Preferences (on a Mac) or Edit > Preferences (on a PC), click Devices, and select “Disable automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods.” If this checkbox is selected, iPhone won’t sync automatically, even if “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected in the Summary pane. Prevent automatic syncing one time, without changing settings: Open iTunes, connect iPhone to your computer, then press and hold Command-Option (on a Mac) or Shift-Control (on a PC) until you see iPhone appear in the sidebar. Sync manually: In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar, then click Sync in the bottomright corner of the window. Or, if you’ve changed any sync settings, click Apply. Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems. Setting Up Accounts MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange provide not only email, but contact and calendar information that can be synced to iPhone automatically, over the air. MobileMe can also sync your bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. You set up MobileMe, Exchange, and other email accounts directly on iPhone. iPhone uses the Exchange ActiveSync protocol to sync email, calendars, and contacts with the following versions of Microsoft Exchange: • Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2 • Exchange Server 2007 Service Pack 1 For many popular email accounts, iPhone automatically enters most of the settings for you. If you don’t already have an email account, you can get a free account online at www.yahoo.com, www.google.com, or www.aol.com. You can also try MobileMe, free for 60 days. Go to www.me.com. Set up an account on iPhone: 1 From the iPhone Home screen, tap Settings. 2 Tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account. 3 Tap an account type: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email 16 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other 4 Enter your account information and tap Save. Your service provider or system administrator can provide the account settings you need. Exchange accounts: Enter your complete email address, domain (optional), user name, password, and a description. The description can be whatever you like. iPhone supports Microsoft’s Autodiscovery service, which uses your user name and password to determine the address of the Exchange server. If the server’s address can’t be determined, you’re asked to enter it. (Enter the complete address in the Server field.) Once you connect to the Exchange server, you may be prompted to change your passcode to match the policies set on the server. 5 If you’re setting up a MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange account, tap the items you want to use on iPhone—mail, contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only). MobileMe includes the Find My iPhone feature that helps you locate iPhone if it’s been lost or stolen, and remotely lock, set a passcode, or erase the information on iPhone if necessary. See “Security Features” on page 45. If you enable Find My iPhone for your MobileMe account, make sure that Push is turned on for Fetch New Data. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, and if Push is off, tap to turn it on. For Exchange accounts, you can set how many days of email you want to sync to iPhone. If you already have contact or calendar information on iPhone when you enable the account, iPhone asks what you want to do with existing information on iPhone. You can choose to merge the existing data into your MobileMe or Exchange account. If you don’t merge the data, you can choose to keep it in a separate account on iPhone (the account is labeled “On My iPhone”), or delete it. Existing bookmarks can only be merged or deleted. Similarly, when you disable contacts or calendars in an MobileMe or Exchange account, or if you delete an account, iPhone asks if you want to keep information or delete it. You can add contacts using an LDAP account if your company or organization supports it. See “Adding Contacts” on page 176. You can subscribe to CalDAV or iCal (.ics) calendars. See “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93. Chapter 1 Getting Started 17Push Accounts MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and Yahoo! Mail are known as “push” accounts. When new information is available, such as the arrival of an email message, the information is automatically delivered (pushed) to iPhone. (In contrast, “fetch” services require your email software to periodically check with your service provider to see if new messages have arrived, and then request them to be delivered.) MobileMe and Exchange also use push to sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) if you have those items selected in the account settings. Synced information is transferred automatically over your wireless connection; you don’t need to connect iPhone to your computer to sync. If you don’t have a cellular connection, iPhone can receive pushed data over a Wi-Fi connection when iPhone is awake (the screen is on, or iPhone is connected to your computer or a power adapter). Installing Configuration Profiles If you’re in an enterprise environment, you may be able to set up accounts and other items on iPhone by installing a configuration profile. Configuration profiles provide a way for system administrators to quickly set up your iPhone to work with the information systems at your company, school, or organization. For example, a configuration profile might set up your iPhone to access the Microsoft Exchange servers at work, enabling iPhone to access your Exchange email, calendars, and contacts. Configuration profiles can configure multiple settings on iPhone all at once. For example, a configuration profile can set up your Microsoft Exchange account, VPN account, and certificates for secure access to your company’s network and information. A configuration profile may turn on the Passcode Lock, requiring you to create and enter a passcode for using iPhone. Your system administrator may distribute configuration profiles by email or by putting them on a secure webpage. A system administrator may also install a configuration profile directly on iPhone for you. Install a configuration profile: 1 Using iPhone, open the email message or download the configuration profile from the website provided by your system administrator. 2 When the configuration profile opens, tap Install. 3 Enter passwords and other information as requested. Important: You may be asked to verify that the configuration profile is trusted. If in doubt, consult your system administrator before installing a configuration profile. 18 Chapter 1 Getting StartedSettings provided by a configuration profile cannot be altered. If you want to change these settings, you must first remove the configuration profile or install an updated configuration profile. Remove a profile: In Settings, choose General > Profile, then select the configuration profile and tap Remove. Removing a configuration profile deletes the settings and all other information installed by the configuration profile from iPhone. Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer Unless iPhone is syncing with your computer, you can disconnect it from your computer at any time. When iPhone is syncing with your computer, iPhone shows “Sync in progress.” If you disconnect iPhone before it finishes syncing, some data may not get transferred. When iPhone finishes syncing, iTunes shows “iPhone sync is complete.” Cancel a sync: Drag the slider on iPhone. If you get a call during a sync, the sync is canceled automatically and you can unplug iPhone to answer the call. Connect iPhone after the call to finish syncing. Chapter 1 Getting Started 19Basics 2 iPhone at a Glance Headset jack Receiver Ring/Silent switch Camera (on back) SIM card tray Volume buttons Touchscreen Speaker Dock connector Home button Sleep/Wake button Microphone Application icons Status bar Your Home screen may look different, depending on the model of iPhone you have and whether you have rearranged its icons. iPhone Included Accessories Dock Connector to USB Cable Stereo headset USB power adapter SIM eject tool 20Item What you can do with it Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (iPhone 3GS) iPhone Stereo Headset (iPhone 3G) Listen to music, videos, and phone calls. Use the built-in microphone to talk. Press the center button to answer or end a call. When listening to iPod, press the button once to play or pause a song, or press twice quickly to skip to the next track. Use the + and – buttons to adjust the volume (iPhone 3GS only). Press and hold the center button to use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only). Dock Connector to USB Cable Use the cable to connect iPhone to your computer to sync and charge. The cable can be used with the optional dock or plugged directly into iPhone. USB power adapter Connect the power adapter to iPhone using the included cable, then plug it into a standard power outlet to charge iPhone. SIM eject tool Eject the SIM card. Status Icons The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPhone: Status icon What it means Cell signal Shows whether you’re in range of the cellular network and can make and receive calls. The more bars, the stronger the signal. If there’s no signal, the bars are replaced with “No service.” Airplane mode Shows that airplane mode is on—you cannot use the phone, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth® devices. Non-wireless features are available. See “Airplane Mode” on page 138. 3G Shows that your carrier’s 3G network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over 3G. Available on iPhone 3G or later. See “How iPhone Connects to the Internet” on page 40. Chapter 2 Basics 21Status icon What it means EDGE Shows that your carrier’s EDGE network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over EDGE. See “How iPhone Connects to the Internet” on page 40. GPRS Shows that your carrier’s GPRS network is available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet over GPRS. See “How iPhone Connects to the Internet” on page 40. Wi-Fi Shows that iPhone is connected to the Internet over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger the connection. See “Joining a Wi-Fi Network” on page 41. Network activity Shows over-the-air syncing or other network activity. Some third-party applications may also use this icon to indicate an active process. Call Forwarding Shows that Call Forwarding is set up on iPhone. See “Call Forwarding” on page 154. VPN Shows that you’re connected to a network using VPN. See “Network” on page 143. Lock Shows that iPhone is locked. See “Sleep/Wake Button” on page 26. TTY Shows that iPhone is set to work with a TTY machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine” on page 154. Play Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is playing. See “Playing Songs” on page 73. Alarm Shows that an alarm is set. See “Alarms” on page 133. Bluetooth Blue or white icon: Bluetooth is on and a device, such as a headset or car kit, is connected. Gray icon: Bluetooth is on, but no device is connected. No icon: Bluetooth is turned off. See “Bluetooth Devices” on page 55. Battery Shows battery level or charging status. See “Battery” on page 43. 22 Chapter 2 BasicsHome Screen Press the Home button at any time to go to the Home screen, which contains your iPhone applications. Tap any application icon to get started. iPhone Applications The following applications are included with iPhone: Phone Make calls, with quick access to recent callers, favorites, and all your contacts. Dial manually using the numeric keypad. Or just use voice dialing. Visual voicemail presents a list of your voicemail messages. Just tap to listen to any message you want, in any order you want. Mail iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as most industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. View PDFs and other attachments within Mail. Save attached photos and graphics to your Camera Roll album. Safari Browse websites over a cellular data network or over Wi-Fi. Rotate iPhone sideways for widescreen viewing. Double-tap to zoom in or out—Safari automatically fits the webpage column to the iPhone screen for easy reading. Open multiple pages. Sync bookmarks with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on your computer. Add Safari web clips to the Home screen for fast access to favorite websites. Save images from websites to your Photo Library. iPod Listen to your songs, audiobooks, and podcasts. Create on-the-go playlists, or use Genius to create playlists for you. Listen to Genius Mixes of songs from your library. Watch movies and video podcasts in widescreen. Messages Send and receive SMS text messages. Conversations are saved in an iChat-like presentation, so you can see a history of messages you’ve sent and received. Send photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only), contact information, and voice memos to MMS devices (iPhone 3G or later). Calendar View and search your MobileMe, iCal, Microsoft Entourage, Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange calendars. Enter events on iPhone and they get synced back to the calendar on your computer. Subscribe to calendars. Set alerts to remind you of events, appointments, and deadlines. Photos View photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) you’ve taken with iPhone, received in Mail or MMS (iPhone 3GS only) messages, or synced from your computer’s photo application. (Video syncing on Macs only.) View them in portrait or landscape orientation. Zoom in on photos for a closer look. Watch a slideshow. Email photos and videos, send them in MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later), or publish them to MobileMe galleries. Assign images to contacts, and use them as wallpaper. Chapter 2 Basics 23Camera Take photos, and record videos (iPhone 3GS only). View them on iPhone, email them, send them in an MMS message (iPhone 3G or later), or upload them to your computer. Trim and save video clips. Upload videos directly to YouTube. Take a friend’s picture and set iPhone to display it when that person calls you. YouTube Play videos from YouTube’s online collection. Search for any video, or browse featured, most viewed, most recently updated, and top-rated videos. Set up and log in to your YouTube account—then rate videos, sync your favorites, show subscriptions, and more. Upload your own videos taken with iPhone. Stocks Watch your favorite stocks, updated automatically from the Internet. View company news and current trading information, such as opening or average price, trading volume, or market capitalization. Rotate iPhone to see detailed charts in landscape orientation. Drag your finger along the charts to track price points, or use two fingers to see a range between points. Maps See a street map, satellite view, or hybrid view of locations around the world. Zoom in for a closer look, or check out the Google Street View. Find and track your current (approximate) location. See which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only, using its builtin compass). Get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and see current highway traffic conditions. Find businesses in the area and call with a single tap. Weather Get current weather conditions and a six-day forecast. Add your favorite cities for a quick weather report anytime. Voice Memos Record voice memos on iPhone. Play them back on iPhone or sync them with iTunes to listen to voice memos on your computer. Attach voice memos to email or MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later). Notes Jot notes on the go—reminders, grocery lists, brilliant ideas. Send them in email. Sync notes to Mail or Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express. Clock View the time in cities around the world—create clocks for your favorites. Set one or more alarms. Use the stopwatch, or set a countdown timer. 24 Chapter 2 BasicsCalculator Add, subtract, multiply, and divide. Rotate iPhone sideways to use expanded scientific functions. Settings Set up accounts and adjust all iPhone settings in one convenient place. Set your own volume limit for listening comfort. Set your ringtone, wallpaper, screen brightness, and settings for network, phone, mail, web, music, video, photos, and more. Set autolock and a passcode for security. Restrict access to explicit iTunes content and certain applications. Reset iPhone. iTunes Search the iTunes Store for music, ringtones, audiobooks, TV shows, music videos, and movies. Browse, preview, purchase, and download new releases, top items, and more. Rent movies to view on iPhone. Stream and download podcasts. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite store items. App Store Search the App Store for iPhone applications you can purchase or download using your Wi-Fi or cellular data network connection. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite apps. Download and install the application on your Home screen. Compass Use the built-in digital compass (iPhone 3GS only) to determine your heading. Get your current coordinates. Choose between true north and magnetic north. Contacts Get contact information synced from MobileMe, Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange. Search, add, change, or delete contacts, which get synced back to your computer. Nike + iPod Nike + iPod (which appears when you activate it in Settings) turns iPhone into a workout companion. Track your pace, time, and distance from one workout to the next and choose a song to power through your routine. (iPhone 3GS only. Requires select Nike shoes and a Nike + iPod Sensor, sold separately.) Note: Application functionality and availability may vary depending on the country or region where you purchase and use iPhone. Contact your carrier for more information. Customizing the Home Screen You can customize the layout of icons on the Home screen—including the Dock icons along the bottom of the screen. If you want, arrange them over multiple Home screens. Rearrange icons: 1 Touch and hold any Home screen icon until the icons begin to wiggle. 2 Arrange the icons by dragging them. 3 Press the Home button to save your arrangement. You can also add links to your favorite webpages on the Home screen. See “Web Clips” on page 70. Chapter 2 Basics 25You can also rearrange the Home screen icons and the order of the screens (in iTunes 9 or later) when iPhone is connected to your computer. Select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, then click the Applications tab. Create additional Home screens: While arranging icons, drag an icon to the right edge of the screen until a new screen appears. You can flick to return to the original screen and drag more icons to the new screen. You can create up to 11 screens. The number of dots above the Dock shows the number of screens you have, and indicates which screen you’re viewing. Switch to another Home screen: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home button. Reset your Home screen to the default layout: Choose Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Buttons A few simple buttons make it easy to turn iPhone on and off, adjust the volume, and switch between ring and silent modes. Sleep/Wake Button When you’re not using iPhone but you still want to receive calls and text messages, you can lock it. When iPhone is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. You can still listen to music and adjust the volume, and use the center button on your iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to play or pause a song, or answer or end a call. 26 Chapter 2 BasicsBy default, if you don’t touch the screen for a minute, iPhone locks automatically. Sleep/Wake button Lock iPhone Press the Sleep/Wake button. Unlock iPhone Press the Home button or the Sleep/Wake button, then drag the slider. Turn iPhone completely off Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then drag the slider. When iPhone is off, incoming calls go straight to voicemail. Turn iPhone on Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. For information about changing how long before iPhone locks, see “Auto-Lock” on page 145. For information about setting iPhone to require a passcode to unlock it, see “Passcode Lock” on page 145. Volume Buttons When you’re on the phone or listening to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons on the side of iPhone adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the volume for the ringer, alerts, and other sound effects. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. To adjust the volume, use the buttons on the side of iPhone. Volume up Volume down To set a volume limit for music and videos on iPhone, see “Music” on page 158. Chapter 2 Basics 27Ring/Silent Switch Flip the Ring/Silent switch to change between ring and silent modes. Ring Silent When set to ring mode, iPhone plays all sounds. When set to silent mode, iPhone doesn’t ring or play alerts and other sound effects. Important: Clock alarms, audio-dependent applications such as iPod, and many games still play sounds through the built-in speaker when iPhone is set to silent mode. By default, when you get a call, iPhone vibrates whether it’s set to ring mode, or in silent mode. If iPhone is set to ring mode, you can silence a call by pressing the Sleep/ Wake button or one of the volume buttons once. Press a second time to send the call to voicemail. For information about changing sound and vibrate settings, see “Sounds and the Ring/ Silent Switch” on page 141. Touchscreen The controls on the iPhone touchscreen change dynamically depending on the task you’re performing. Opening Applications Open an application: Tap an icon. 28 Chapter 2 BasicsClose an application and return to the Home screen: Press the Home button below the display. Scrolling Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens such as webpages, you can also scroll side to side. Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen. Flick to scroll quickly. You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch anywhere on the screen to stop it immediately. Touching the screen to stop scrolling won’t choose or activate anything. To quickly scroll to the top of a list, webpage, or email, just tap the status bar. Chapter 2 Basics 29Lists Some lists have an index along the right side, which helps you navigate quickly. Find items in an indexed list: Tap a letter to jump to items starting with that letter. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly through the list. Index Choose an item: Tap an item in the list. Depending on the list, tapping an item can do different things—for example, it may open a new list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information so you can call that person. Return to a previous list: Tap the back button in the upper-left corner. Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, webpages, email, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or apart. For photos and webpages, you can double-tap (tap twice quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, double-tap to zoom in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out. 30 Chapter 2 BasicsViewing in Landscape Many iPhone applications let you view the screen in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPhone and the display rotates too, adjusting automatically to fit the new screen orientation. You may prefer landscape for viewing webpages in Safari, or when entering text, for example. Webpages automatically scale to the wider screen in landscape, making the text and images larger. Similarly, the onscreen keyboard is larger in landscape, which may help increase your typing speed and accuracy. The following applications support both portrait and landscape orientation: • Mail • Safari • Messages • Notes • Contacts • Stocks • iPod • Photos • Camera • Calculator Movies viewed in iPod and YouTube appear only in landscape orientation. Street views in Maps also appear in landscape. Onscreen Keyboard Use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, such as contact information, text messages, and web addresses. Chapter 2 Basics 31Typing Depending on the application you’re using, the intelligent keyboard may automatically suggest corrections as you type to help prevent mistyped words. Enter text: 1 Tap a text field, such as in a note or new contact, to bring up the keyboard. 2 Tap keys on the keyboard. Start by typing with just your index finger. As you get more proficient, you can type more quickly using two thumbs. As you type, each letter appears above your thumb or finger. If you touch the wrong key, you can slide your finger to the correct key. The letter isn’t entered until you release your finger from the key. Type uppercase Tap the Shift key before tapping a letter. Or touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter. Quickly type a period and space Double-tap the space bar. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.) Turn caps lock on Double-tap the Shift key. The Shift key turns blue, and all letters you type are uppercase. Tap the Shift key again to turn caps lock off. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.) Show numbers, punctuation, or symbols Tap the Number key. Tap the Symbol key to see additional punctuation and symbols. Type letters or symbols that aren’t on the keyboard Touch and hold the related letter or symbol, then slide to choose a variation. 32 Chapter 2 BasicsDictionary For many languages, iPhone has dictionaries to help you type. The appropriate dictionary is activated automatically when you select a supported keyboard. For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html. iPhone uses the active dictionary to suggest corrections or complete the word you’re typing. You don’t need to interrupt your typing to accept the suggested word. Suggested word Accept or reject dictionary suggestions: m To reject the suggested word, finish typing the word as you want it, then tap the “x” to dismiss the suggestion before typing anything else. Each time you reject a suggestion for the same word, iPhone becomes more likely to accept your word. m To use the suggested word, type a space, punctuation mark, or return character. Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. Auto-Correction is on by default. Note: If you’re entering Chinese or Japanese, tap one of the suggested alternatives. Editing An onscreen magnifying glass helps you position the insertion point for typing and editing text. You can select text to cut, copy, and paste. Chapter 2 Basics 33Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass, then drag to position the insertion point. Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap Select to select the adjacent word or tap Select All to select all text. When you’re typing, you can also double-tap to select a word. In read-only documents, such as webpages, or email or text messages you’ve received, touch and hold to select a word. Drag the grab points to select more or less text. Cut or copy text: Select text, then tap Cut or Copy. Paste text: Tap the insertion point and tap Paste. The last text that you cut or copied is inserted. Or select text and tap Paste to replace the text. Undo the last edit: Shake iPhone and tap Undo. 34 Chapter 2 BasicsInternational Keyboards iPhone provides keyboards that allow you to enter text in many different languages, including languages that read from right to left. For a complete list of supported keyboards, go to www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html. Turn international keyboards on or off: 1 In Settings, choose General > International > Keyboards. 2 Turn on the keyboards you want. Languages with more than one keyboard, such as Japanese and Chinese, indicate the number of keyboards available. Tap to choose a keyboard for that language. Switch keyboards if more than one keyboard is turned on Tap to switch keyboards. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly activated keyboard appears briefly. Type letters, numbers, or symbols that aren’t on the keyboard Touch and hold the related letter, number, or symbol, then slide to choose a variation. On the Hebrew and Thai keyboards, for example, you can choose native numbers by touching and holding the related Arabic number. Enter Japanese Kana Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window. Enter Japanese QWERTY Use the QWERTY keyboard to input code for Japanese syllables. As you type, suggested syllables appear. Tap the syllable to choose it. Enter Emoji picture characters Use the Emoji keyboard. Available only on iPhones purchased and used in Japan. Enter Korean Use the 2-Set Korean keyboard to type Hangul letters. To type double consonants or compound vowels, touch and hold the letter, then slide to choose the double letter. Enter Simplified or Traditional Chinese Pinyin Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Pinyin for Chinese characters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Pinyin to see more character options. Chapter 2 Basics 35Enter Traditional Chinese Zhuyin Use the keyboard to enter Zhuyin letters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Zhuyin to see more character options. After you type an initial letter, the keyboard changes to show more letters. Enter handwritten Simplified or Traditional Chinese Use the touchpad to enter Chinese characters with your finger. As you write character strokes, iPhone recognizes them and shows matching characters in a list, with the closest match at the top. When you choose a character, its related characters appear in the list as additional choices. You can get some complex characters by entering two or more component characters. For example, enter ? (fish), then ? (bristle), to get ? (partial name of Hong Kong International Airport), which appears in the character list with an arrow next to it. Tap the character to replace the characters you entered. When Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on, you can enter Chinese characters with your finger, as shown: Touchpad 36 Chapter 2 BasicsSearching You can search many applications on iPhone, including Mail, Calendar, iPod, Notes, and Contacts. You can search an individual application, or search all the applications at once using Spotlight. Go to Spotlight: From the main page of the Home screen, flick left to right. If you’re on the main Home screen page, you can press the Home button to go to Spotlight. From the Spotlight page, press the Home button to return to the main Home screen page. You can also set iPhone to go to Spotlight when you double-click the Home button. See “Home” on page 147. Search iPhone: On the Spotlight page, enter text in the Search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Icons to the left of the search results let you know which application the results are from. Tap an item in the results list to open it. Application What’s searched Contacts First, last, and company names Mail To, From, and Subject fields of all accounts (the text of messages isn’t searched) Calendar Event titles, invitees, and locations (notes aren’t searched) iPod Music (names of songs, artists, and albums) and the titles of podcasts, video, and audiobooks Notes Text of notes Spotlight also searches the names of the native and installed applications on iPhone, so if you have a lot of applications you may want to use Spotlight as a way to locate and open applications. Open applications from Spotlight: Enter the application name, then tap to open the application directly from the search results. Use the Search Results settings to choose which applications are searched and the order in which they’re searched. See “Home” on page 147. Chapter 2 Basics 37Voice Control Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control iPod music playback using voice commands. Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Use the following commands to make calls or play songs. Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial,” then say the name of the person. If the person has more than one phone number, you can add “home” or “mobile,” for example. Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number. Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.” Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name. Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.” Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.” Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.” For best results: • Speak into the iPhone microphone as if you were making a phone call. You can also use the microphone in your iPhone or Bluetooth headset. • Speak clearly and naturally. 38 Chapter 2 Basics• Say only iPhone commands and names, and numbers. Pause slightly between commands. • Use full names. By default, Voice Control expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s set for iPhone (the General > International > Language setting). The Voice Control settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages are available in different dialects or accents. Change language or country: In Settings, choose General > International > Voice Control and tap the language or country. Voice Control for the iPod application is always on, but for security you can prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked. Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing. See“Voice Dialing” on page 48 and“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77. Stereo Headset The headset included with iPhone features a microphone and an integrated button that allows you to answer and end calls easily, and control audio and video playback. The headset included with iPhone 3GS (shown here) also has volume buttons. Center button Plug in the headset to listen to music or make a phone call. Callers hear you through the built-in microphone. Press the center button to control music playback and answer or end calls, even when iPhone is locked. (You can also use the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to control these functions.) Pause a song or video Press the center button once. Press again to resume playback. Skip to the next song Press the center button twice quickly. Return to previous song Press the center button three times quickly. Fast-forward Press the center button twice quickly and hold. Chapter 2 Basics 39Rewind Press the center button three-times quickly and hold. Adjust the volume (iPhone 3GS only) Press the + or – button. Answer an incoming call Press the center button once. End the current call Press the center button once. Decline an incoming call Press and hold the center button for about two seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you declined the call. Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and put the current call on hold Press the center button once. Press again to switch back to the first call. Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and end the current call Press and hold the center button for about two seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you ended the first call. Use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) Press and hold the center button. See “Voice Control” on page 38. If you get a call while the headset is plugged in, you can hear the ringtone through both the iPhone speaker and the headset. Connecting to the Internet iPhone connects to the Internet automatically whenever you use Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the App Store, or the iTunes Store. How iPhone Connects to the Internet iPhone connects to the Internet using either a Wi-Fi network or a cellular data network. iPhone does the following, in order, until connected: • Connects over the last Wi-Fi network you used that’s available. • If no previously used Wi-Fi networks are available, iPhone shows a list of Wi-Fi networks in range. Tap a network and, if necessary, enter the password to join. Networks that require a password show next to them. You can prevent iPhone from automatically showing available networks. See “Wi-Fi” on page 139. • If no Wi-Fi networks are available or you choose not to join any, iPhone connects to the Internet over a cellular data network ( , , or ). If no Wi-Fi networks are available and a cellular data network isn’t available, iPhone cannot connect to the Internet. Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you cannot use the Internet over a cellular data network when you’re on a call. You must have a Wi-Fi connection to use Internet applications while also talking on the phone. 40 Chapter 2 BasicsMany Wi-Fi networks can be used free of charge including, in some regions, Wi-Fi hotspots provided by your iPhone carrier. Some Wi-Fi networks require a fee. To join a Wi-Fi network at a hotspot where charges apply, you can usually open Safari to see a webpage that allows you to sign up for service. Joining a Wi-Fi Network The Wi-Fi settings let you turn on Wi-Fi and join Wi-Fi networks. Turn on Wi-Fi: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects networks in range, then select a network (fees may apply to join some Wi-Fi networks). If necessary, enter a password and tap Join (networks that require a password appear with a lock icon). Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically connects to it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPhone joins the one last used. When iPhone is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows the connection strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the connection. For information about configuring Wi-Fi settings, see “Wi-Fi” on page 139. Cellular Data Network Access 3G, EDGE, and GPRS allow Internet connectivity over the cellular network available through your iPhone carrier’s wireless service. Check the carrier’s network coverage in your area for availability. You can tell iPhone is connected to the Internet via the cellular data network if you see the 3G ( ), EDGE ( ), or GPRS ( ) icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you may not be able to receive calls while iPhone is actively transferring data over a cellular network—downloading a webpage, for example. Incoming calls then go directly to voicemail. Turn 3G on: In Settings, choose General > Network and tap Enable 3G. If you’re outside your carrier’s network, you may be able to access the Internet through another carrier. To enable email, web browsing, and other data services whenever possible, turn Data Roaming on. Turn Data Roaming on: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data Roaming on. Important: Roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, make sure Data Roaming is turned off. Chapter 2 Basics 41Internet Access on an Airplane Airplane mode turns off the iPhone radio transmitters to avoid interfering with aircraft operation. In some regions, where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can turn on Wi-Fi while airplane mode is on, to: • Send and receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts and calendars over the air • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Purchase music and applications For more information, see “Airplane Mode” on page 138. VPN Access VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings to configure and turn on VPN. See “Network” on page 143. VPN can also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18. When VPN is set up by a configuration profile, iPhone may turn on VPN automatically whenever it’s needed. Contact your system administrator for more information. Using iPhone as a Modem You can use iPhone 3G or later as a modem to connect, or tether, your computer to the Internet. You can connect iPhone to your computer using the Dock Connector to USB Cable, or via Bluetooth. Note: Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for more information. Tethering works over the cellular data network. You can’t share a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet. If you have a 3G connection, you can make and receive phone calls while tethering. Note: To use iPhone as a modem with a Mac computer, it must be running Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later. Set up a tethering connection: 1 In Settings, choose General > Network > Internet Tethering. 2 Slide the Internet Tethering switch to On. 3 Connect iPhone to your computer: 42 Chapter 2 Basics• USB: Connect your computer to iPhone, using the Dock Connector to USB Cable. In your computer’s Network services settings, choose iPhone. On a Mac, a pop-up window appears the first time you connect, saying “A new network interface has been detected.” Click Network Preferences, configure the network settings for iPhone, then click Apply. On a PC, use the Network Control Panel to configure the iPhone connection. • Bluetooth: On iPhone, choose Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn on Bluetooth. Then refer to the documentation that came with your computer system software to pair and connect iPhone with your computer. When you’re connected, a blue band appears at the top of the screen. Tethering remains on when you connect with USB, even when you aren’t actively using the Internet connection. Monitor your cellular data network usage: In Settings, choose General > Usage. Battery iPhone has an internal rechargeable battery. Charging the Battery WARNING: For important safety information about charging iPhone, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status. You can also display the percentage of the battery charge (iPhone 3GS only). Charging Charged Charge the battery: Connect iPhone to a power outlet using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable and USB power adapter. Chapter 2 Basics 43Charge the battery and sync iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable. Or connect iPhone to your computer using the included cable and the Dock, available separately. Unless your keyboard has a high-powered USB 2.0 port, you must connect iPhone to a USB 2.0 port on your computer. Important: The iPhone battery may drain instead of charge if iPhone is connected to a computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode. If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPhone, it may take longer to charge. Important: If iPhone is very low on power, it may display one of the following images, indicating that iPhone needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. If iPhone is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes before one of the low-battery images appears. or Maximizing Battery Life iPhone uses lithium-ion batteries. To learn more about how to maximize the lifespan and battery life of your iPhone, go to www.apple.com/batteries. Replacing the Battery Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may eventually need to be replaced. The iPhone battery isn’t user replaceable; it can only be replaced by an authorized service provider. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery. 44 Chapter 2 BasicsSecurity Features Security features help protect the information on iPhone from being accessed by others. You can set up a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up iPhone. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. For addition information about using a passcode lock, see “Passcode Lock” on page 145. Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing. The Find My iPhone feature helps you locate iPhone if it’s been lost or misplaced, and display a message on your iPhone to help someone return it to you. It includes Remote Wipe, which lets you erase all your information on iPhone in case you don’t recover it. The Remote Passcode Lock feature lets you remotely lock your iPhone and create a new or replacement 4-digit passcode. Find My iPhone requires a MobileMe account. MobileMe is an online service, available by subscription. Go to www.apple.com/mobileme for more information. To enable this feature, turn on Find My iPhone in your MobileMe account settings. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. Find your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com and go to the Find My iPhone pane. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate your device on a map and display a message on its screen along with an optional sound to help you find it. Remotely wipe information on your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click “Remote Wipe…,” and follow the onscreen instructions. A remote wipe is equivalent to the “Erase all content and settings” feature in Settings. It resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Remotely lock your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click Remote Passcode Lock, and follow the onscreen instructions. Chapter 2 Basics 45Cleaning iPhone To clean iPhone, unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the Sleep/ Wake button, then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPhone. If your iPhone has an oleophobic coating on the screen (iPhone 3GS only), simply wipe your iPhone’s screen with a soft, lint-free cloth to remove oil left by your hands and face. For additional information about handling iPhone, see the iPhone Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Restarting and Resetting iPhone If something isn’t working right, try restarting, force quitting an application, or resetting iPhone. Restart iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears. Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPhone. To turn iPhone back on, press and hold the Sleep/Wake until the Apple logo appears. If you can’t turn off iPhone or if the problem continues, you may need to reset. A reset should be done only if turning iPhone off and on doesn’t resolve the problem. Force quit an application: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application quits. Reset iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. For more troubleshooting suggestions, see Appendix A,“Troubleshooting,” on page 193. 46 Chapter 2 BasicsPhone 3 Phone Calls Making a call on iPhone is as simple as tapping a name and number in your contacts, tapping one of your favorites, or tapping a recent call to return it. Making Calls Buttons at the bottom of the Phone screen give you quick access to your favorites, recent calls, your contacts, and a numeric keypad for dialing manually. WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Number of missed calls Number of unheard voicemail messages Use Contacts to call someone Tap Contacts, choose a contact, then tap a phone number. Call a favorite Tap Favorites, then choose a contact. Return a recent call Tap Recents, then tap a name or number in the list. Dial a number Tap Keypad, enter the number, then tap Call. If you copy a phone number to the clipboard, you can paste it to the keypad and dial it. 47Paste a number to the keypad: Tap the screen above the keyboard, then tap Paste. If the phone number you copied included letters, iPhone automatically converts them to the appropriate digits. Jump to favorites from anywhere: Double-click the Home button. You can change this preference in Settings. See “Home” on page 147. Bring up the last number you dialed: Tap Keypad, then tap Call. Tap Call again to dial the number. Voice Dialing You can use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) to call someone in your contacts or dial a specific number. Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control to make phone calls: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to make calls. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to use Voice Control. Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial” then say the name of the person. If the person has more than one number, specify which one you want to call. Examples:  Call John Appleseed  Call John Appleseed at home  Call John Appleseed, mobile Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number. For best results, speak the full name of the person you’re calling. If you give only the first name, and you have more than one contact with that same name, iPhone asks which of those contacts you want to call. If there’s more than one number for the person you’re calling, specify which number to use. If you don’t specify which number, iPhone asks you which one to use. When voice dialing a number, speak each digit separately—for example, say “four one five, five five five, one two one two.” Note: For the “800” area code in the U.S., you can say “eight hundred.” Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing. 48 Chapter 3 PhoneReceiving Calls When you receive a call, tap Answer. If iPhone is locked, drag the slider. You can also press the center button on your iPhone headset or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to answer a call. Center button Silence a call: Press the Sleep/Wake button or either volume button. You can still answer the call after silencing it, until it goes to voicemail. Decline a call: Do one of the following to send a call directly to voicemail. • Press the Sleep/Wake button twice quickly. Sleep/Wake button • Press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) for about two seconds. Two low beeps confirm that the call was declined. • Tap Decline (if iPhone is awake when a call comes in). Block calls and maintain Wi-Fi access to the Internet: In Settings, turn on Airplane Mode, then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. While On a Call When you’re on a call, the screen shows call options. Chapter 3 Phone 49Mute your line Tap Mute. You can still hear the caller, but the caller can’t hear you. Use the keypad to enter information Tap Keypad. Use the speakerphone or a Bluetooth device Tap Speaker. The Button is labeled Audio Source when a Bluetooth device is available, which lets you select the Bluetooth device, iPhone, or Speaker Phone. See contact information Tap Contacts. Put a call on hold Tap Hold. Neither party can hear the other. Make another call Tap Add Call. Use other applications during a call: Press the Home button, then tap an application icon. End a call: Tap End Call. Or press the center button on your iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Second Calls During a call, you can make or receive another call. If you receive a second call, iPhone beeps and shows the caller’s information and a list of options. Note: Making and receiving a second call may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your carrier for more information. Respond to a second call: • To ignore the call and send it to voicemail, tap Ignore. • To hold the first call and answer the new one, tap Hold Call + Answer. • To end the first call and answer the new one, tap End Call + Answer. Make a second call: Tap Add Call. The first call is put on hold. Switch between calls: Tap Swap. The active call is put on hold. Create a conference call: Tap Merge Calls. See “Conference Calls” below. Conference Calls You can talk to more than one person at a time, and merge up to five calls, depending on your carrier. Note: Conference calling may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your carrier for more information. Create a conference call: 1 Make a call. 2 Tap Add Call and make another call. The first call is put on hold. 3 Tap Merge Calls. The calls are merged on one line and everyone can hear each other. 50 Chapter 3 Phone4 Repeat steps two and three to add up to five calls. Drop one call Tap Conference and tap next to a call. Then tap End Call. Talk privately with a call Tap Conference, then tap Private next to a call. Tap Merge Calls to resume the conference. Add an incoming call Tap Hold Call + Answer, then tap Merge Calls. If your service includes conference calling, iPhone always has a second line available in addition to the conference call. Emergency Calls If iPhone is locked with a passcode, you may still be able to make an emergency call. Make an emergency call when iPhone is locked: On the Enter Passcode screen, tap Emergency Call, then dial the number using the keypad. Important: Only emergency numbers valid in the region where you’re making the call will work. In some countries, you can’t make emergency calls unless your SIM card is installed and activated, and the SIM PIN has been correctly entered or turned off. In the U.S., location information (if available) is provided to emergency service providers when you dial 911. Important: You should not rely on wireless devices for essential communications, such as medical emergencies. Use of any cellular phone to call emergency services may not work in all locations. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network availability or environmental interference. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if it doesn’t have a SIM, if you locked your SIM, or if you haven’t activated your iPhone. Visual Voicemail On iPhone, visual voicemail lets you see a list of your messages and choose which ones to listen to or delete, without having to listen to instructions or prior messages. Note: Visual voicemail may not be available in all regions, or may be an optional service. Contact your carrier for more information. If visual voicemail isn’t available, tap Voicemail and follow the voice prompts to retrieve your messages. Number of missed calls and unheard voicemail messages appears on the Home screen Phone icon. Chapter 3 Phone 51Setting Up Voicemail The first time you tap Voicemail, iPhone prompts you to create a voicemail password and record your voicemail greeting. Change your greeting: 1 Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Custom. 2 Tap Record when you’re ready to start. 3 When you finish, tap Stop. To review, tap Play. To rerecord, repeat steps 2 and 3. 4 Tap Save. Use your carrier’s default greeting Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Default. Set an alert sound for new voicemail In Settings, choose Sounds and turn New Voicemail on. The alert sounds once for each new voicemail. If the Ring/Silent switch is off, iPhone won’t sound alerts. Change the voicemail password In Settings, choose Phone > Change Voicemail Password. Checking Voicemail When you tap Phone, iPhone shows the number of missed calls and unheard voicemail messages. Number of missed calls Number of unheard voicemail messages 52 Chapter 3 PhoneTap Voicemail to see a list of your messages. Skip to any point in a message: Drag the playhead. Unheard messages Play/Pause Contact info Scrubber bar Speakerphone (Audio, when a Bluetooth device is connected. Tap to choose audio output.) Return the call Listen to a message: Tap the message. (If you’ve already heard the message, tap the message again to replay it.) Use and to pause and resume playback. Once you listen to a message, it’s saved until your carrier automatically erases it. Check voicemail from another phone: Dial your own number or your carrier’s remote access number. Deleting Messages Select a message, then tap Delete. Deleted visual voicemail messages are saved on iPhone until your carrier permanently erases them. Listen to a deleted message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list), then tap the message. Undelete a message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list), then tap the message and tap Undelete. Getting Contact Information Visual voicemail saves the date and time of the call, the length of the message, and any available contact information. See a caller’s contact information: Tap next to a message. You can use the information to email or text the caller, or update contact info. Chapter 3 Phone 53Contacts From a contact’s Info screen, a quick tap lets you make a phone call, create a new email message, find the location of their address, and more. See “Searching Contacts” on page 177. Favorites Favorites gives you quick access to your most-used phone numbers. Add a contact’s number to your favorites list: Tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap “Add to Favorites” and choose the number you want to add. Add a recent caller’s number to your favorites list: Tap Recents and tap next to a caller, then tap “Add to Favorites.” Go to favorites: Double-click the Home button. See “Home” on page 147. Call a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and choose a contact. Delete a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then tap next to a contact or number and tap Remove. Reorder your favorites list Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then drag next to a contact to a new place in the list. Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch iPhone comes with ringtones you can use for incoming calls, Clock alarms, and the Clock timer. You can also create and purchase ringtones from songs in iTunes. Ring/Silent Switch and Vibrate Modes A switch on the side of iPhone makes it easy to turn the ringer on or off. Turn the ringer on or off: Flip the switch on the side of iPhone. Ring Silent Important: Clock alarms still sound even if you set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. Set iPhone to vibrate: In Settings, choose Sounds. Separate controls let you set vibrate for both ring mode and silent mode. 54 Chapter 3 PhoneFor more information, see Chapter 19,“Settings,” on page 138. Setting Ringtones You can set the default ringtone for calls and Clock alarms and timers. You can also assign individual ringtones to contacts so you know who’s calling. Set the default ringtone: In Settings, choose Sounds > Ringtone, then choose a ringtone. Assign a ringtone to a contact: From Phone, tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap Ringtone and choose a ringtone. Purchasing Ringtones You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on your iPhone. See “Purchasing Ringtones” on page 162. Bluetooth Devices You can use iPhone with hands-free Bluetooth headsets and Bluetooth car kits. iPhone also supports Bluetooth stereo headphone devices when using iPod. Pairing a Device with iPhone You must first pair a Bluetooth device with iPhone before you can use it. Pair with iPhone: 1 Follow the instructions that came with the device to make it discoverable or to set it to search for other Bluetooth devices. 2 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. 3 Choose the device on iPhone and enter its passkey or PIN number. See the instructions about the passkey or PIN that came with the device. After you pair a Bluetooth device to work with iPhone, you must make a connection to have iPhone use the device for your calls. Connect with iPhone: See the documentation that came with the headset or car kit. When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, outgoing calls are routed through the device. Incoming calls are routed through the device if you answer using the device, and through iPhone if you answer using iPhone. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss and about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Chapter 3 Phone 55Bluetooth Status The Bluetooth icon appears in the iPhone status bar at the top of the screen: • (blue) or (white): Bluetooth is on and a device is connected to iPhone. (The color depends on the current color of the status bar.) • (gray): Bluetooth is on but no device is connected. If you’ve paired a device with iPhone, it may be out of range or turned off. • No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is turned off. Routing Calls Back Through iPhone When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, you listen to calls through iPhone by doing one of the following: • Answer a call by tapping the iPhone screen. • During a call, tap Audio on iPhone. Choose iPhone to hear calls through iPhone or Speaker Phone to use the speakerphone. • Turn off Bluetooth. In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and drag the switch to Off. • Turn off the Bluetooth device, or move out of range. You must be within about 30 feet of a Bluetooth device for it to be connected to iPhone. Unpairing a Device from iPhone If you’ve paired iPhone with a device and want to use another device instead, you must unpair the first device. Unpair a device: 1 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on. 2 Choose the device and tap Unpair. International Calls iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS are multi-band phones, supporting UMTS/HSDPA (850, 1900, 2100 MHz) and GSM (850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz), ensuring broad international coverage. Making International Calls from Your Home Area For information about making international calls from your home area, including rates and other charges that may apply, contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. Using iPhone Abroad You can use iPhone to make calls in many countries around the world. Enable international roaming: Contact your carrier for information about availability and fees. 56 Chapter 3 PhoneSet iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings, tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only. When you make a call using International Assist, “International Assist” appears on the iPhone screen, alternating with the “calling ...” message, until your call is connected. Note: International Assist is not available in all areas. Set the carrier to use: In Settings, tap Carrier, then select the carrier you prefer. This option is available only when you’re traveling outside your carrier’s network. You can make calls only on carriers that have roaming agreements with your iPhone service provider. For more information, see “Carrier” on page 141. Important: Voice and data roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, turn Data Roaming off. Turn Data Roaming on or off: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data Roaming on or off. Data Roaming is turned off by default. Turning Data Roaming off helps to avoid data roaming charges when traveling outside your carrier’s network by disabling data transmission over the cellular network. You can still access the Internet if you have a Wi-Fi connection. If Wi-Fi network access isn’t available, however, you cannot: • Send or receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks with MobileMe or Exchange • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Purchase music or applications Other third-party applications that use data roaming may also be disabled. If Data Roaming is turned off, you can still make and receive phone calls, and send and receive text messages. Voice roaming charges may apply. Visual voicemail is delivered if there’s no charge; if your carrier charges for delivery of visual voicemail when roaming, turning Data Roaming off prevents the delivery of visual voicemail. To enable email, web browsing, and other data services, turn Data Roaming on. Chapter 3 Phone 57Important: If Data Roaming is turned on, you may incur charges when roaming outside your carrier’s network for the use of any of the features listed above, as well as for delivery of visual voicemail. Check with your carrier for information about roaming charges. Get voicemail when visual voicemail isn’t available: Dial your own number, or touch and hold “1” on the keypad. You can use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services and then turn Wi-Fi on to get access to the Internet, while preventing voice roaming charges. Use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services: In Settings, tap Airplane Mode to turn it on, then tap Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. See “Airplane Mode” on page 138. Incoming phone calls are sent to voicemail. To make and receive calls again and get your voicemail messages, turn Airplane Mode off. 58 Chapter 3 PhoneMail 4 Mail works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as other industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. You can send and receive embedded photos and graphics, and view PDFs and other attachments. Setting Up Email Accounts You can set up email accounts on iPhone in either of the following ways: • Set up an account directly on iPhone. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. • In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync email accounts settings from your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11. Sending Email You can send an email message to anyone who has an email address. Compose and send a message: 1 Tap . 2 Type a name or email address in the To field, or tap to add a name from your contacts. As you type an email address, matching email addresses from your contacts list appear below. Tap an address to add it. To add more names, tap Return or . Note: If you’re composing a message from your Microsoft Exchange account and have access to your enterprise Global Address List (GAL), matching addresses from the contacts on iPhone appear first, followed by matching GAL addresses. 3 Tap Cc/Bcc/From if you want to copy or blind copy the message to others, or change the account you send the message from. If you have more than one email account, you can tap the From field to change the account you’re sending from. 594 Enter a subject, then your message. You can tap Return to move from one field to another. 5 Tap Send. Send a photo or video (iPhone 3GS only) in an email message In Photos, choose a photo or video, tap , then tap Email Photo or Email Video. You can also copy and paste photos and videos. The photo or video is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 152). Send a video in an email message (iPhone and iPhone 3G) In Photos, choose a video, then touch and hold the video until the Copy command appears. Tap Copy. Go to Mail and create a new message. Tap to place an insertion point where you want the video, then tap the insertion point to display the edit commands and tap Paste. The video is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 152). Save a draft of a message to complete later Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved in the Drafts mailbox. Reply to a message Tap . Tap Reply to reply only to the sender or tap Reply All to reply to the sender and all recipients. Type your return message, then tap Send. Files or images attached to the initial message aren’t sent back. Forward a message Open a message and tap , then tap Forward. Add one or more email addresses, type your message, then tap Send. When you forward a message, you can include the files or images attached to the original message. Share contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact at the bottom of the Info screen, then tap Email. Checking and Reading Email The Mail icon shows the total number of unread messages in all your inboxes. You may have other unread messages in other mailboxes. Number of unread emails in your inboxes Check for new messages: Choose a mailbox or tap at any time. 60 Chapter 4 MailOn each account screen, you can see the number of unread messages in each mailbox. Number of unread messages Tap to see all your email accounts Tap a mailbox to see its messages. Unread messages have a blue dot next to them. Unread messages When you open a mailbox, Mail loads the number of most recent messages specified in your Mail settings, if the messages haven’t already been loaded automatically. (See “Mail” on page 152.) Load additional messages: Scroll to the bottom of the list of messages and tap Load More Messages. Read a message: Tap a mailbox, then tap a message. Within a message, tap or to see the next or previous message. Zoom in on part of a message Double-tap an area of the message to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out. Resize any column of text to fit the screen Double-tap the text. Resize a message manually Pinch to zoom in or out. Chapter 4 Mail 61Follow a link Tap the link. Text links are typically underlined and blue. Many images are also links. A link can take you to a webpage, open a map, dial a phone number, or open a new preaddressed email message. Web, phone, and map links open Safari, Phone, or Maps on iPhone. To return to your email, press the Home button and tap Mail. See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address is displayed, and you can choose to open the link in Safari or copy the link address to the clipboard. iPhone displays picture attachments in many commonly used formats (JPEG, GIF, and TIFF) inline with the text in email messages. iPhone can play many audio attachments (such as MP3, AAC, WAV, and AIFF). You can download and view files (such as PDF, webpage, text, Pages, Keynote, Numbers, and Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint documents) attached to messages you receive. Open an attached file: Tap the attachment. It downloads to iPhone and then opens. Tap attachment to download You can view attachments in portrait or landscape orientation. If the format of an attached file isn’t supported by iPhone, you can see the name of the file but you can’t open it. iPhone supports the following document types: .doc Microsoft Word .docx Microsoft Word (XML) .htm webpage .html webpage .key Keynote .numbers Numbers .pages Pages 62 Chapter 4 Mail.pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat .ppt Microsoft PowerPoint .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML) .rtf Rich Text Format .txt text .vcf contact information .xls Microsoft Excel .xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML) Save an attached photo to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save an attached video to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. See all the recipients of a message Tap Details. Tap a name or email address to see the recipient’s contact information. Then tap a phone number, email address, or text message to contact the person. Tap Hide to hide the recipients. Add an email recipient to your contacts list Tap the message and, if necessary, tap Details to see the recipients. Then tap a name or email address and tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.” Mark a message as unread Open the message and tap “Mark as Unread.” A blue dot appears next to the message in the mailbox list until you open it again. Open a meeting invitation: Tap the invitation. You can get contact information for the organizer and other attendees, set an alert, add notes to the event, and add comments that are included in your response emailed to the organizer. You can accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation. See “Responding to Meeting Invitations” on page 95. Turn Push on or off: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then turn Push on or off. See “Fetch New Data” on page 151. Chapter 4 Mail 63Searching Email You can search the To, From, and Subject fields of email messages. Mail searches the downloaded messages in the currently open mailbox. For MobileMe, Exchange, and some IMAP mail accounts, you can also search messages on the server. Search email messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, and enter text in the Search field. Tap From, To, Subject, or All (From, To, and Subject) to choose which fields you want to search. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the list and reveal the search field.) Search results for the messages already downloaded to iPhone appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Search messages on the server: Tap “Continue Search on Server” at the end of the search results. Note: Search results of messages on servers may vary depending on the type of account. Some servers may search only whole words. Organizing Email You can delete messages one at a time, or select a group to delete all at once. You can also move messages from one mailbox or folder to another. Delete a message: Open the message and tap . You can also delete a message directly from the mailbox message list by swiping left or right over the message title, then tapping Delete. To show the Delete button, swipe left or right over the message. 64 Chapter 4 MailDelete multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to delete, then tap Delete. Move a message to another mailbox or folder: When viewing a message, tap , then choose a mailbox or folder. Move multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to move, then tap Move and select a mailbox or folder. Chapter 4 Mail 65Safari 5 Viewing Webpages Safari lets you surf the web and view webpages on iPhone in the same way as if you were on your computer. You can create bookmarks on iPhone and sync bookmarks with your computer. Add web clips for quick access to your favorite sites directly from the Home screen. You can view webpages in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPhone and the webpage rotates too, automatically adjusting to fit the page. Opening Webpages Open a webpage: Tap the address field (on the left side of the title bar), then type the web address and tap Go. If the address field isn’t visible, tap the status bar at the top of the screen to quickly scroll to the address field at the top of the webpage. As you type, web addresses that start with those letters appear. These are bookmarked pages or recent pages you’ve opened. Tap an address to go to that page. Keep typing if you want to enter a web address that’s not in the list. Erase the text in the address field: Tap the address field, then tap . 66Zooming and Scrolling Zoom in or out: Double-tap a column on a webpage to expand the column. Doubletap again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out manually. Scroll around a webpage Drag up, down, or sideways. When scrolling, you can touch and drag anywhere on the page without activating any links. Scroll within a frame on a webpage Use two fingers to scroll within a frame on a webpage. Use one finger to scroll the entire webpage. Scroll quickly to the top of a webpage Tap the status bar at the top of the iPhone screen. Navigating Webpages Links on webpages typically take you to another place on the web. Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link. Links on iPhone can also initiate a phone call, display a location in Maps, or create a preaddressed Mail message. To return to Safari after a link opens another application, press the Home button and tap Safari. See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address pops up next to your finger. You can touch and hold an image to see if it has a link. Stop a webpage from loading Tap . Reload a webpage Tap . Return to the previous or next page Tap or at the bottom of the screen. Return to a recently viewed page Tap and tap History. To clear the history list, tap Clear. Send a webpage address via email Tap and tap “Mail Link to this Page.” Save an image or photo to your Camera Roll album Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image. Chapter 5 Safari 67Opening Multiple Pages You can have up to eight pages open at a time. Some links automatically open a new page instead of replacing the current one. The number inside the pages icon at the bottom of the screen shows how many pages are open. If there’s no number inside, just one page is open. For example: = one page is open = three pages are open Open a new page: Tap and tap New Page. Go to another page: Tap and flick left or right. Tap the page you want to view. Close a page: Tap and tap . You can’t close a page if it’s the only one open. Entering Text and Filling Out Forms Some webpages have text fields and forms to fill out. You can set Safari to remember names and passwords of websites you visit and fill out text fields automatically with information from Contacts. See “Safari” on page 156. Bring up the keyboard Tap inside a text field. Move to another text field Tap another text field, or tap the Next or Previous button. Submit a form Once you finish filling out a form, tap Go or Search. Most pages also have a link you can tap to submit the form. Close the keyboard without submitting the form Tap Done. 68 Chapter 5 SafariEnable AutoFill to help you fill out web forms: In Settings, choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on. When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All. Searching the Web By default, Safari searches using Google. You can search using Yahoo!, instead. Search the web: 1 Tap the search field (on the right side of the title bar). 2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Google. 3 Tap a link in the list of search results to open a webpage. Set Safari to search using Yahoo!: From the Home screen choose Settings > Safari > Search Engine, then choose Yahoo!. Bookmarks You can bookmark webpages you want to return to later. Bookmark a webpage: Open the page and tap . Then tap Add Bookmark. When you save a bookmark you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at the top level of Bookmarks. Tap Bookmarks to choose another folder. If you use Safari on a Mac, or Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC, you can sync bookmarks with the web browser on your computer. Sync bookmarks with your computer: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Click the Info tab, select “Sync … bookmarks” under Web Browser, then click Apply. See “Syncing” on page 11. Sync bookmarks with MobileMe: In Settings on iPhone, select Bookmarks in your MobileMe account. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. Open a bookmarked webpage: Tap , then choose a bookmark or tap a folder to see the bookmarks inside. Chapter 5 Safari 69Edit a bookmark or bookmark folder: Tap , choose the folder that has the bookmark or folder you want to edit, then tap Edit. Then do one of the following: • To make a new folder, tap New Folder. • To delete a bookmark or folder, tap , then tap Delete. • To reposition a bookmark or folder, drag . • To edit the name or address, or to put it in a different folder, tap the bookmark or folder. When you’re finished, tap Done. Web Clips Add web clips to the Home screen for fast access to your favorite webpages. Web clips appear as icons on the Home screen, and you can arrange your web clips along with the other icons. See “iPhone Applications” on page 23. Add a web clip: Open the webpage and tap . Then tap “Add to Home Screen.” When you open a web clip, Safari automatically zooms and scrolls to the area of the webpage that was displayed when you saved the web clip. The displayed area is also used to create the icon for the web clip on your Home screen, unless the webpage comes with its own custom icon. When you add a web clip, you can edit its name. If the name is too long (more than about 10 characters), it may appear abbreviated on the Home screen. Web clips aren’t bookmarks, and aren’t synced by MobileMe or iTunes. Delete a web clip: 1 Touch and hold any icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle. 2 Tap in the corner of the web clip you want to delete. 3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement. 70 Chapter 5 SafariiPod 6 iPhone syncs with iTunes on your computer to get songs, videos, and other content you’ve collected in your iTunes library. For information about adding music and other media to your iTunes library, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Getting Music, Video, and More To get music, video, and other content onto iPhone, you can set up iTunes on your computer to automatically sync content in your library, or you can manually manage the media you put on iPhone. Syncing Content from iTunes You can transfer music, video, and more onto iPhone by syncing content from iTunes. You can sync all of your media, or you can select specific songs, videos, podcasts, and iTunes U collections. Set iTunes to sync iPod content: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 On the Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U tabs, select the content you want to sync to iPhone. For example, you could set iTunes to sync selected music playlists and the three most recent episodes of your favorite video podcast. 4 Click Apply. To set iTunes to sync iPod content and other info automatically, click the Summary tab and select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected.” Important: If you delete an item from iTunes, it will also be deleted from iPhone the next time you sync. 71Only songs and videos encoded in formats that iPhone supports are transferred to iPhone. For information about which formats iPhone supports, see “Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play” on page 200. If there are more songs in your iTunes library than can fit on your iPhone, iTunes offers to create a special playlist to sync with iPhone. iTunes fills the playlist with random selections from your library. You can add or delete songs from the playlist and sync again. If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, your place in the story is included if you sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening to the story on iPhone, you can pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa. For more information about using iTunes to get music and other media onto your computer, see “What You Need” on page 9. Manually Managing Content The manually managing feature lets you choose just the music, video, and podcasts you want to have on iPhone. Set up iPhone for manually managing content: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Click the Summary tab and select “Manually manage music and videos.” 4 Click Apply. Add items to iPhone: Drag a song, video, podcast, or playlist in your iTunes library to iPhone (in the sidebar). Shift-click or Command-click (Mac) or Control-click (Windows) to select multiple items to add at the same time. iTunes syncs the content immediately. If you deselect “Manually manage music and videos,” the content you added manually is removed from iPhone the next time iTunes syncs content. Remove items from iPhone: With iPhone connected to your computer, select the iPhone icon in the iTunes sidebar. Click the disclosure triangle to the left of the icon to show the contents. Select a content area, such as Music or Movies, then select the items you want to delete and press the Delete key on the keyboard. Removing an item from iPhone doesn’t delete it from your iTunes library. Purchasing and Downloading Content from the iTunes Store You can use the iTunes Store on iPhone to purchase and download songs, albums, TV shows, movies, music videos, ringtones, and audiobooks directly to iPhone. You can also stream and download audio and video podcasts, as well as iTunes U content. See “About the iTunes Store” on page 160. 72 Chapter 6 iPodTransferring Purchased Content to Another Computer You can transfer content on iPhone that was purchased using iTunes on one computer to an iTunes library on another authorized computer. The computer must be authorized to play content from your iTunes Store account. To authorize the computer, open iTunes on the computer and choose Store > Authorize Computer. Transfer purchased content: Connect iPhone to the other computer. iTunes asks if you want to transfer purchased content. Converting Videos for iPhone You can add videos other than those purchased from the iTunes Store to iPhone, such as videos you create in iMovie on a Mac, or videos you download from the Internet and then add to iTunes. If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPhone and a message says the video can’t play on iPhone, you can convert the video. Convert a video to work with iPhone: Select the video in your iTunes library and choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to iPhone. Music and Other Audio The high-resolution Multi-Touch display makes listening to songs on iPhone as much a visual experience as a musical one. You can scroll through your playlists, or use Cover Flow to browse through your album art. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Playing Songs Browse your collection: Tap Playlists, Artists, or Songs. Tap More to browse Albums, Audiobooks, Compilations, Composers, Genres, iTunes U, or Podcasts. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. If Genius doesn’t appear, you need to turn on Genius in iTunes 9 or later, and then sync iPhone with iTunes. See “Using Genius on iPhone” on page 79. Play a song: Tap the song. Shake to shuffle: Shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately change songs. Shake anytime to change to another song. You can turn the “Shake to Shuffle” feature on or off in Settings > iPod (it’s on by default). See “Music” on page 158. Chapter 6 iPod 73Controlling Song Playback When you play a song, the Now Playing screen appears. Next/Fast-forward Play/Pause Track List Back Previous/ Volume Rewind Pause a song Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider or use the buttons on the side of iPhone. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only). Restart a song or a chapter in an audiobook or podcast Tap . Skip to the next song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly. Go to the previous song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast Tap twice, or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) three times quickly. Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . The longer you hold the control, the faster the song rewinds or fastforwards. On the iPhone headset, press the center button (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly and hold to fast forward, or three times quickly and hold to rewind. 74 Chapter 6 iPodReturn to the iPod browse lists Tap , or swipe to the right over the album cover. Return to the Now Playing screen Tap Now Playing. Display a song’s lyrics Tap the album cover when playing a song. (Lyrics appear if you’ve added them to the song using the song’s Info window in iTunes.) You can display playback controls at any time when you’re listening to music and using another application—or even when iPhone is locked—by double-clicking the Home button. See “Home” on page 147. If you’re using an application, the playback controls appear on top of the application. After using the controls, you can close them or tap Music to go to the Now Playing screen. If iPhone is locked, the controls appear onscreen, then disappear automatically after you finish using them. Additional Song Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover. The repeat, Genius, and shuffle controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the song number. The song’s lyrics also appear, if you’ve added them to the song in iTunes. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Repeat Genius Shuffle Scrubber bar Playhead Chapter 6 iPod 75Set iPhone to repeat songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to repeat only the current song. = iPhone is set to repeat all songs in the current album or list. = iPhone is set to repeat the current song over and over. = iPhone isn’t set to repeat songs. Skip to any point in a song Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger. Make a Genius playlist Tap , and the Genius playlist appears. See “Using Genius on iPhone” on page 79. Set iPhone to shuffle songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to play songs in order. = iPhone is set to shuffle songs. = iPhone is set to play songs in order. Shuffle the tracks in any playlist, album, or other list of songs Tap Shuffle at the top of the list. For example, to shuffle all the songs on iPhone, choose Songs > Shuffle. Whether or not iPhone is set to shuffle, if you tap Shuffle at the top of a list of songs, iPhone plays the songs from that list in random order. Podcast and Audiobook Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the cover. The email, 30-second repeat, and playback speed controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the episode or chapter number. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Scrubber bar Playhead Playback speed Email 30-second repeat 76 Chapter 6 iPodSend an email link to this podcast Tap . Skip to any point Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger. Play back the last 30 seconds Tap . Set the playback speed Tap . Tap again to change the speed. = Play at double speed. = Play at half speed. = Play at normal speed. Using Voice Control with iPod You can use Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) to control music playback on iPhone. Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to play songs. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to bring up Voice Control. Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.” Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name. Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.” Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.” Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.” Chapter 6 iPod 77Browsing Album Covers in Cover Flow When you’re browsing music, you can rotate iPhone sideways to see your iTunes content in Cover Flow and browse your music by album artwork. Browse album covers Drag or flick left or right. See the tracks on an album Tap a cover or . Play any track Tap the track. Drag up or down to scroll through the tracks. Return to the cover Tap the title bar. Or tap again. Play or pause the current song Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). 78 Chapter 6 iPodViewing All Tracks on an Album See all the tracks on the album that contains the current song: From the Now Playing screen tap . Tap a track to play it. Tap the album cover thumbnail to return to the Now Playing screen. Rating bar Back to Now Playing screen Album tracks In track list view, you can assign ratings to songs. You can use ratings to create smart playlists in iTunes that dynamically update to include, for example, your highest rated songs. Rate a song: Drag your thumb across the rating bar to give the song zero to five stars. Searching Music You can search the titles, artists, albums, and composers of songs, podcasts, and other content you’ve synced to iPhone. Search music: Enter text in the search field at the top of a song list, playlist, artist list, or other view of your iPod content. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of a list and reveal the search field.) Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. You can also use Spotlight to search for music. See “Searching” on page 37. Using Genius on iPhone Genius finds songs in your iTunes library that go great together. A Genius playlist is a collection of songs that are picked for you to go with a song you choose from your library. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music. Genius Mixes are recreated each time you listen to them, so they’re always new and fresh. You can create Genius playlists in iTunes and sync them to iPhone. You can also create and save Genius playlists directly on iPhone. Chapter 6 iPod 79Genius Mixes are created in iTunes. iTunes creates different mixes depending on the variety of music you have in your iTunes library. For example, you may have Genius Mixes that highlight R&B songs, or Alternative Rock songs. To use Genius on iPhone, first turn on Genius in iTunes, then sync iPhone with iTunes. Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music and choose which mixes you want to sync in iTunes. Genius is a free service, but requires an iTunes Store account. Genius Mixes require iTunes 9 or later. When you sync a Genius Mix, iTunes may select and sync songs from your library that you haven’t otherwise chosen to sync. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. The number of dots at the bottom of the screen shows the number of mixes you’ve synced from iTunes, and indicates which mix you’re viewing. Flick left or right to access your other mixes. Play a Genius Mix: Tap the mix or tap . Make a Genius playlist on iPhone: 1 Tap Playlists and tap Genius. 2 Tap a song in the list. Genius creates a playlist with additional songs that go great with that song. You can also make a Genius playlist of songs that go great with the song you’re playing. From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover to display additional controls, then tap . Save a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Save. The playlist is saved in Playlists with the title of the song you picked. You can make and save as many Genius playlists as you want. If you save a Genius playlist created on iPhone, it syncs back to iTunes the next time you connect. 80 Chapter 6 iPodRefresh a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Refresh. Refreshing a playlist creates a playlist of different songs that go great with the song you picked. You can refresh any Genius playlist, whether it was created in iTunes and synced to iPhone, or created directly on iPhone. Create a Genius playlist from a new song: In the playlist, tap New, then pick a new song. Delete a saved Genius playlist: In a playlist that you saved directly on iPhone, tap Edit, then tap Delete Playlist. Once a Genius playlist is synced back to iTunes, you won’t be able to delete it directly from iPhone. You can use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the playlist. Making On-The-Go Playlists Make an on-the-go playlist: 1 Tap Playlists and tap On-The-Go. 2 Browse for songs using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. Tap any song or video to add it to the playlist. Tap Add All Songs at the top of any list of songs to add all the songs in the list. 3 When you finish, tap Done. When you make an on-the-go playlist and then sync iPhone to your computer, the playlist is saved on iPhone and in your iTunes library, then deleted from iPhone. The first is saved as “On-The-Go 1,” the second as “On-The-Go 2,” and so on. To put a playlist back on iPhone, select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click the Music tab, and set the playlist to sync. Edit an on-the-go playlist: Tap Playlists, tap On-The-Go, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To move a song higher or lower in the list, drag next to the song. • To delete a song from the playlist, tap next to a song, then tap Delete. Deleting a song from the on-the-go playlist doesn’t delete it from iPhone. • To clear the entire playlist, tap Clear Playlist. • To add more songs, tap . Videos With iPhone, you can view video content such as movies, music videos, and video podcasts. If a video contains chapters, you can skip to the next or previous chapter, or bring up a list and start playing at any chapter that you choose. If a video provides alternate language features, you can choose an audio language or display subtitles. Chapter 6 iPod 81Playing Videos Play a video: Tap Videos and tap the video. Display playback controls: Tap the screen to show the controls. Tap again to hide them. Controlling Video Playback Videos play in widescreen to take full advantage of the display. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Scrubber bar Playhead Play/Pause Next/Fastforward Scale Restart/Rewind Volume Lovers in Japan by Coldplay is available in the iTunes Store Pause a video Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only). Start a video over Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar all the way to the left, or tap if the video doesn’t contain chapters. Skip to the next chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly. Go to the previous chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) three times quickly. Start playing at a specific chapter (if available) Tap , then choose a chapter from the list. 82 Chapter 6 iPodRewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger. Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done. Or press the Home button. Scale a video to fill the screen or fit to the screen Tap to make the video fill the screen. Tap to make it fit the screen. You can also double-tap the video to toggle between fitting and filling the screen. When you scale a video to fill the screen, the sides or top may be cropped from view. When you scale it to fit the screen, you may see black bars on the sides or above and below the video. Select an alternate audio language (if available) Tap , then choose a language from the Audio list. Show or hide subtitles (if available) Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the Subtitles list. Searching Video You can search the titles of movies, TV shows, and video podcasts you’ve synced to iPhone. Search video: Enter text in the search field at the top of the list of videos. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Watching Rented Movies You can rent movies in standard (480p) definition from the iTunes Store and watch them on iPhone. You can download rented movies directly to iPhone, or transfer them from iTunes on your computer to iPhone. You can also transfer rented movies back to iTunes from iPhone. (Rented movies aren’t available in all regions.) The movie must be fully downloaded before you can start watching. You can pause a download and resume it later. Rented movies expire after a certain number of days, and once you start a movie you have a limited amount of time to finish watching it. The time remaining appears near a movie’s title. Movies are automatically deleted when they expire. Check the iTunes Store for the expiration time before renting a movie. Chapter 6 iPod 83Transfer rented movies to iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. Then select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click Movies, and select the rented movies you want to transfer. Your computer must be connected to the Internet. View a rented movie: On iPhone, choose iPod > Videos and select a movie. Watching Videos on a TV You can connect iPhone to your TV and watch your videos on the large screen. Use the Apple Component AV Cable, Apple Composite AV Cable, or other authorized iPhone compatible cable. You can also use these cables with the Apple Universal Dock to connect iPhone to your TV. (The Apple Universal Dock includes a remote that lets you control playback from a distance.) Apple cables and docks are available for purchase separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/ipodstore (not available in all countries). Deleting Videos from iPhone You can delete videos from iPhone to save space. Delete a video: In the videos list, swipe left or right over the video, then tap Delete. When you delete a video (other than rented movies) from iPhone, it isn’t deleted from your iTunes library and you can sync the video back to iPhone later. If you don’t want to sync the video back to iPhone, set iTunes to not sync the video. See “What You Need” on page 9. Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPhone, it’s deleted permanently and cannot be transferred back to your computer. Setting a Sleep Timer You can set iPhone to stop playing music or videos after a period of time. Set a sleep timer: From the Home screen choose Clock > Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod, tap Set, then tap Start to start the timer. When the timer ends, iPhone stops playing music or video, closes any other open application, and then locks itself. 84 Chapter 6 iPodChanging the Browse Buttons You can replace the browse buttons at the bottom of the screen with buttons you use more frequently. For example, if you often listen to podcasts, you can replace the Songs button with Podcasts. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. Tap Done when you finish. Tap More at any time to access the buttons you replaced. Chapter 6 iPod 85Messages 7 Sending and Receiving Messages WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Messages lets you exchange text messages with anyone using an SMS-capable phone. Messages also supports MMS, so you can send photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only), contact information, and voice memos to other MMS-capable devices. You can enter multiple addresses and send a message to several people at the same time. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. SMS or MMS support may not be available in all regions. Additional fees may apply for use of Messages. Contact your carrier for complete information. You can use Messages whenever you’re in range of the cellular network. If you can make a call, you can send a message. Depending on your phone plan, you may be charged for the messages you send or receive. Send a message: Tap , then enter a phone number or name, or tap and choose a contact from your contacts list. Tap the text field above the keyboard, type a message, and tap Send. The Messages icon on the Home screen shows the total number of unread messages you have. Number of unread messages 86Your conversations are saved in the Messages list. Conversations that contain unread messages have a blue dot next to them. Tap a conversation in the list to see that conversation or add to it. Text messages you sent Text messages from the other person iPhone displays the 50 most recent messages in the conversation. To see earlier messages, scroll to the top and tap Load Earlier Messages. Send a message to more than one person: Tap , then add recipients. If you enter a phone number manually (instead of selecting it from Contacts), tap Return before entering another entry. Replies from any of the recipients are sent only to you, not to the other people you texted. Reply or send a message to a person (or group) you’ve texted before: Tap an entry in the Messages list, then type a new message in the conversation and tap Send. Send a message to a favorite or to a recent call: 1 From the Home screen tap Phone, then tap Favorites or Recents. 2 Tap next to a name or number, then tap Text Message. 3 If multiple phone numbers appear, tap the one you want to text. When MMS is available, Messages allows you to include a subject in your text messages. You can turn this feature on or off in Messages settings. It is turned on by default. Include or remove the subject field: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap Show Subject Field to turn it on or off. Note: The subject field and the Show Subject Field setting don’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier. Chapter 7 Messages 87Turn MMS messaging on or off: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap MMS Messaging to turn it on or off. You may want to turn MMS Messaging off, for example, to prevent sending or receiving attachments when fees apply. Note: The MMS Messaging setting doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier. Sharing Photos and Videos You can take a photo or make a video (iPhone 3GS only) from within Messages and include it in your conversation with another MMS-capable device. You can save photos or videos you receive in Messages to your Camera Roll album. If MMS isn’t supported by your carrier, the button doesn’t appear and you can’t send photos or videos. Send a photo or video: Tap and tap “Take Photo or Video” (iPhone 3GS only; on earlier models, tap “Take Photo”) or “Choose Existing” and select an item from a photo album and tap Choose. The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103. Save a photo or video attachment to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo or video in the conversation, tap , then tap Save Image or Save Video. Copy a photo or video: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Copy. You can paste the photo or video to an Mail message or another MMS message. Sending Voice Memos You can send voice memos in a message to another MMS-capable device. Send a voice memo: In Voice Memos, tap , tap the voice memo you want to send, then tap Share and tap MMS. Address the message and tap Send. 88 Chapter 7 MessagesEditing Conversations If you want to keep a conversation but not the entire thread, you can delete the parts you don’t want. You can also delete entire conversations from the Messages list. Edit a conversation: Tap Edit. Tap the circles along the left side to select the parts of the conversation you want to delete, then tap Delete. When you’re finished, tap Done. Clear all text and files, without deleting the conversation: Tap Edit, then tap Clear All. Tap Clear Conversation to confirm. Forward a conversation: Select a conversation, then tap Edit. Tap the circles on the left side of the screen to select the parts of the conversation you want to include, then tap Forward, enter one or more recipients, and tap Send. Delete a conversation: Tap Edit, then tap next to the conversation and tap Delete. You can also swipe left or right over the conversation and tap Delete. To show the Delete button, swipe left or right over the message. Using Contact Information and Links Call or email someone you’ve texted: Tap a message in the Text Messages list and scroll to the top of the conversation. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the screen.) • To call the person, tap Call. • To email the person, tap Contact Info, then tap an email address. Follow a link in a message: Tap the link. A link may open a webpage in Safari, initiate a phone call in Phone, open a preaddressed message in Mail, or display a location in Maps. To return to your text messages, press the Home button and tap Messages. Add someone you’ve texted to your contacts list: Tap a phone number in the Messages list, then tap “Add to Contacts.” Send contact information: In Contacts, tap the person whose information you want to share. Tap Share Contact at the bottom of the screen, then tap MMS. Address the message and tap Send. Save contact information received: Tap the contact bubble in the conversation and tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.” Chapter 7 Messages 89Managing Previews and Alerts By default, iPhone displays a preview of new messages when iPhone is locked or you are using another application. You can turn this preview on or off in Settings. You can also enable alerts for text messages. Turn previews on or off: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Show Preview. Repeat previews: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Repeat Alert. If you don’t respond to the first preview of a new message, the preview will be displayed twice more. Set whether an alert sounds when you get a text message or preview: In Settings, choose Sounds, then tap New Text Message. Tap the alert sound you want, or None if you don’t want an audible alert. Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, text alerts won’t sound. 90 Chapter 7 MessagesCalendar 8 About Calendar Calendar lets you view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. You can view your events in a continuous list, by day, or by month, and search events by title, invitee, or location. You can sync iPhone with the calendars on your computer. You can also make, edit, or cancel appointments on iPhone, and have them synced back to your computer. You can subscribe to Google, Yahoo!, or Mac OS X iCal calendars using a CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) account. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations. Syncing Calendars You can sync Calendar in either of the following ways: • In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync with iCal or Microsoft Entourage on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC when you connect iPhone to your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11. • In Settings on iPhone, select Calendar in your MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts to sync your calendar information over the air. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16. 91Viewing Your Calendar You can view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. View a different calendar: Tap Calendars, then select a calendar. Tap All Calendars to view combined events from all calendars. You can view your calendar events in a list, by day, or by month. The events for all of your synced calendars appear in the same calendar on iPhone. Switch views: Tap List, Day, or Month. • List view: All your appointments and events appear in a scrollable list. • Day view: Scroll up or down to see the events in a day. Tap or to see the previous or next day’s events. • Month view: Tap a day to see its events. Tap or to see the previous or next month. Add an event Days with dots have scheduled events Go to today Switch views Respond to calendar invitation Events for selected day See the details of an event: Tap the event. Set iPhone to adjust event times for a selected time zone: 1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars.” 2 Under Calendars, tap Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. 3 Tap Time Zone and search for a major city in the time zone you want. When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time. 92 Chapter 8 CalendarSearching Calendars You can search the titles, invitees, and locations of the events in your calendars. Calendar searches the calendar you’re currently viewing, or all calendars if you’re viewing them all. Search events: In list view, enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more results. Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars You can subscribe to calendars that use the CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) formats. Many calendar-based services, including Yahoo!, Google, and the Mac OS X iCal application, support either format. Subscribed calendars are read only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on iPhone, but can’t edit them or create new events. You also can’t accept invitations from CalDAV accounts. Subscribe to a CalDAV or .ics calendar: 1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account. 2 Choose Other, then choose either Add CalDAV Account or Add Subscribed Calendar. 3 Enter your account information, then tap Next to verify the account. 4 Tap Save. Apple provides links to a number of free iCal calendars—for national holidays or sports events, for example—that you may want to subscribe to. The calendars are automatically added to iCal on your desktop when you download them. You can then sync them to iPhone as described in “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93. Go to /www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars. Chapter 8 Calendar 93You can also subscribe to an iCal (or other .ics) calendar published on the web by tapping a link to the calendar you receive in an email or text message on iPhone. Adding Calendar Events to iPhone You can also enter and edit calendar events directly on iPhone. Add an event: Tap and enter event information, then tap Done. You can enter any of the following: • Title • Location • Starting and ending times (or turn on All-day if it’s an all-day event) • Repeat times—none, or every day, week, two weeks, month, or year • Alert time—from five minutes to two days before the event When you set an alert, the option to set a second alert appears. When an alert goes off, iPhone displays a message. You can also set iPhone to play a sound (see “Alerts” on page 96). Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone may not alert you at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147. • Notes To select which calendar to add the event to, tap Calendar. Read-only calendars don’t appear in the list. Edit an event Tap the event, then tap Edit. Delete an event Tap the event, tap Edit, then scroll down and tap Delete Event. 94 Chapter 8 CalendarResponding to Meeting Invitations If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone with Calendars enabled, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization. When you receive an invitation, the meeting appears in your calendar with a dotted line around it. The icon in the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the total number of new invitations you have, as does the Calendar icon on the Home screen. Number of meeting invitations Respond to an invitation in Calendar: 1 Tap a meeting invitation in the calendar, or tap to display the Event screen and tap an invitation. • Tap “Invitation from” to get contact information for the meeting organizer. Tap the email address to send a message to the organizer. If the organizer is in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text message. Chapter 8 Calendar 95• Tap Attendees to see the other people invited to the meeting. Tap a name to see an attendee’s contact information. Tap the email address to send a message to the attendee. If the attendee is in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text message. • Tap Alert to set iPhone to sound an alert before the meeting. • Tap Add Comments to add comments in the email response to the meeting organizer. You comments will also appear in your Info screen for the meeting. Notes are made by the meeting organizer. 2 Tap Accept, Maybe, or Decline. When you accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation, a response email that includes any comments you added is sent to the organizer. If you accept or tentatively accept the meeting, you can change your response later. Tap Add Comments if you want to change your comments. Exchange meeting invitations are also sent in an email message, which lets you open the meeting’s Info screen from Mail. Open a meeting invitation in an email message: Tap the invitation. Alerts Set calendar alerts: In Settings, choose Sounds, then turn Calendar Alerts on. If Calendar Alerts is off when an event is about to occur, iPhone displays a message but makes no sound. Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, calendar alerts won’t sound. Sound alerts for invitations: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendar.” Under Calendars, tap New Invitation Alert to turn it on. 96 Chapter 8 CalendarPhotos 9 About Photos iPhone lets you carry photos and videos with you, so you can share them with your family, friends, and associates. You can sync photos and videos (Mac only) from your computer, view photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) taken with the built-in camera, use photos as wallpaper, and assign photos to identify contacts when they call. You can also send photos and videos in email messages, send photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) in MMS messages, and upload photos and videos to MobileMe galleries. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier. Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer iTunes can sync your photos and videos (Mac only) with the following applications: • Mac: iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture • PC: Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12. iPhone supports H.264 and MPEG-4 video formats, with AAC audio. If you are having trouble syncing a video to iPhone, you might be able to use iTunes to create an iPhone version of the video. Create an iPhone version of a video: 1 Copy the video to your iTunes library. 2 In iTunes, select Movies in the Library list and select the video you want to sync. 3 Choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” For additional information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1211. 97Viewing Photos and Videos Photos and videos (Mac only) synced from your computer’s photo application can be viewed in Photos. You can also view the photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) you’ve taken with iPhone’s built-in camera or saved from an email or MMS message (iPhone 3GS only). View photos and videos: 1 In Photos, tap a photo album. 2 Tap a thumbnail to see the photo or video in full screen. Show or hide the controls: Tap the full-screen photo or video to show the controls. Tap again to hide the controls. Play a video: Tap in the center of the screen. To replay a video, tap at the bottom of the screen. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. View a photo or video in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. The photo or video reorients automatically and, if it’s in landscape format, expands to fit the screen. 98 Chapter 9 PhotosZoom in on part of a photo: Double-tap where you want to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out. View video in full screen, or fit video to screen: Double tap the screen to scale the video to fill the screen. Double-tap again to fit the video to the screen. Pan around a photo: Drag the photo. See the next or previous photo or video: Flick left or right. Or tap the screen to show the controls, then tap or . Slideshows You can view photo albums as slideshows, complete with background music. View a photo album as a slideshow: Tap an album, then tap . Videos play automatically when they appear during the slideshow. Stop a slideshow: Tap the screen. Set slideshow settings: In Settings, choose Photos and set the following options: • To set the length of time each slide is shown, tap Play Each Slide For and choose a time. • To set transition effects when moving from photo to photo, tap Transition and choose a transition type. • To set whether slideshows repeat, turn Repeat on or off. • To set whether photos and videos are shown in random order, turn Shuffle on or off. Chapter 9 Photos 99Play music during a slideshow: In iPod, play a song, then choose Photos from the Home screen and start a slideshow. Sharing Photos and Videos You can send photos and videos in email and MMS messages, add photos and videos to MobileMe galleries, and publish videos to YouTube. You can also copy and paste photos and videos, save photos and videos from email messages to Photos, and save images from webpages to Photos. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier. MMS video attachments are supported only on iPhone 3GS. Sending a Photo or Video in an Email or MMS Message Send a photo or video: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap Email Photo/ Video or MMS. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103. Copying and Pasting Photos and Videos You can copy a photo or video from Photos and paste it to an email or MMS message. Some third-party applications may also support copying and pasting photos and videos. Copy a photo or video: Hold your finger on the screen until the Copy button appears, then tap Copy. Paste a photo or video: Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the photo or video, then tap the insertion point and tap Paste. Adding a Photo or Video to a MobileMe Gallery If you have a MobileMe account, you can add photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) directly from iPhone to a gallery you’ve created. You can also add photos and videos to someone else’s MobileMe gallery if that person has enabled email contributions. Before you can add photos or videos to a gallery in your MobileMe account, you must: • Set up your MobileMe account on iPhone • Publish a MobileMe gallery, and allow adding photos via email or iPhone For more information about creating a gallery and adding photos and videos to it, see MobileMe Help. 100 Chapter 9 PhotosAdd a photo or video to your gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap “Send to MobileMe.” Enter a title and description, if you like, then select the album to add the photo or video to and tap Publish. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. iPhone tells you when the photo or video has been published, and gives you options to view it on MobileMe or email a link to a friend. Adding a photo or video to someone else’s gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap “Email Photo/Video.” Enter the album’s email address, then click Send. Publishing Videos to YouTube If you have a YouTube account, you can publish videos directly from iPhone to YouTube (iPhone 3GS only). You can’t publish videos longer than than ten minutes. Publish a video to You Tube: 1 While viewing a video, tap , then tap “Send to YouTube.” 2 Sign in to your YouTube account. 3 Enter publishing information such as Title, Description, and Tags. 4 Tap Category to choose a category. 5 Tap Publish. Saving Photos and Videos from Email Messages, MMS Messages, and Webpages Save a photo in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a video in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a photo on a webpage to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the photo, then tap Save Image. Save a photo or video in an MMS message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the image in the conversation, tap , and tap Save Image or Save Video. If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls. You can download the photos and videos in your Camera Roll album to your computer’s photo application by connecting iPhone to your computer. Chapter 9 Photos 101Assigning a Photo to a Contact You can assign a photo to a contact. When that person calls, iPhone displays the photo. Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Choose Camera from the Home screen and take someone’s picture. Or choose any photo already on iPhone and tap . 2 Tap “Assign to Contact” and choose a contact. 3 Position and size the photo until it looks the way you want. Drag the photo to pan, and pinch to zoom in or out. 4 Tap Set Photo. You can also assign a photo to a contact in Contacts by tapping Edit and then tapping the picture icon. Wallpaper You see a wallpaper background picture as you unlock iPhone or when you’re on a call with someone you don’t have a high-resolution photo for. Set a photo as wallpaper: 1 Choose any photo and tap , then tap Use As Wallpaper. 2 Drag the photo to pan, or pinch the photo to zoom in or out, until it looks the way you want. 3 Tap Set Wallpaper. You can also choose from several wallpaper pictures included with iPhone by choosing Settings > Wallpaper > Wallpaper from the Home screen. 102 Chapter 9 PhotosCamera 10 About Camera With the built-in camera, it’s easy to take photos and record videos with iPhone. The lens is on the back of iPhone, so you can use the screen to see the photo or video you’re taking. “Tap to focus” (iPhone 3GS only) lets you focus on a specific area of your shot and automatically adjust the exposure. You can quickly review—and keep or delete—photos and videos you’ve taken. Note: Video features are available only on iPhone 3GS. Camera photos are tagged with location data, including your current geographical coordinates provided by the built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only), if Location Services is turned on. You can use location data with some applications and photo-sharing websites to track and post where you took your pictures. If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. If you don’t want to include location data with your photos and videos, you can still use Camera without having Location Services turned on. See “Location Services” on page 144. 103Taking Photos and Recording Videos Taking photos and recording videos with iPhone is as easy as point and tap. Photo/Video switch Focus area Thumbnail of last shot Click to take photo Take a photo: Aim iPhone and tap . Make sure the Camera/Video switch is set to . When you take a photo or start a video recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound. The sound isn’t played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141. Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera are played even if the Ring/Silent switch is set to silent. Record a video: Slide the Camera/Video switch to . Tap to start recording. The record button blinks while Camera is recording. Tap again to stop recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to start and stop recording. If you take a picture or record a video with iPhone rotated sideways, the picture is saved in landscape orientation. A rectangle on the screen shows the area where Camera is focusing the shot. Change the focus area and set exposure: Tap where you want to focus. Camera automatically adjusts the exposure for the selected area of the image. Review a photo or video you’ve just taken: Tap the thumbnail of your last shot, in the lower-left corner of the screen. Delete a photo or video: Tap . If you don’t see , tap the screen to display the controls. 104 Chapter 10 CameraTake a screenshot of the iPhone display: Quickly press and release the Sleep/ Wake and Home buttons at the same time. A flash of the screen lets you know the screenshot was taken. The screenshot is added to the Camera Roll album. Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos The photos and videos you take with Camera are saved in the Camera Roll album on iPhone. You can view the Camera Roll album from either Camera or Photos. View photos and videos in the Camera Roll album: In Camera, tap the thumbnail image in the lower-left corner of the screen. In Photos, tap the Camera Roll album. Tap the left or right button, or flick left or right to flip through the photos and videos. When viewing a photo or video in the Camera Roll album, tap the screen to display the controls. For more information about viewing and sharing photos and videos, see: • “Viewing Photos and Videos” on page 98 • “Sharing Photos and Videos” on page 100 Trimming Videos You can trim the frames from the beginning and end of videos that you record. You can trim the original video or save the trim as a new clip. Chapter 10 Camera 105Trim a video: 1 While viewing a video, tap the screen to display the controls. 2 Drag either end of the frame viewer at the top of the video, then tap Trim. 3 Tap Trim Original or tap Save as New Clip. Important: Trimming the original video permanently deletes the frames you edit from the video. New clips are saved in the Camera Roll album along with the original video. Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer You can upload the photos and videos you take with Camera to photo applications on your computer, such as iPhoto on a Mac. Upload images to your computer: Connect iPhone to your computer. • Mac: Select the photos you want and click the Import or Download button in iPhoto or other supported photo application on your computer. • PC: Follow the instructions that came with your camera or photo application. If you delete the photos and videos from iPhone when you upload them to your computer, they’re removed from the Camera Roll album. You can use the iTunes Photos setup pane to sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 or later required) back to the Photos application on iPhone. See “iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes” on page 13. 106 Chapter 10 CameraYouTube 11 Finding and Viewing Videos YouTube features short videos submitted by people from around the world. To use some features on iPhone, you need to sign in to a YouTube account when prompted. For information about requirements and how to get a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Note: YouTube isn’t available in all languages and locations. Browse videos: Tap Featured, Most Viewed, or Favorites. Or tap More to browse by Most Recent, Top Rated, History, Subscriptions, or Playlists. • Featured: Videos reviewed and featured by YouTube staff. • Most Viewed: Videos most seen by YouTube viewers. Tap All for all-time most viewed videos, or Today or This Week for most-viewed videos of the day or week. • Favorites: Videos you’ve added to Favorites. When you sign in to a YouTube account, account favorites appear and any existing favorites can be synced to your account. • Most Recent: Videos most recently submitted to YouTube. • Top Rated: Videos most highly rated by YouTube viewers. To rate videos, go to www.youtube.com. • History: Videos you’ve viewed most recently. • Subscriptions: Videos from YouTube accounts to which you’ve subscribed. You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. • Playlists: Videos you’ve added to playlists. You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. Search for a video: 1 Tap Search, then tap the YouTube search field. 2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Search. 107YouTube shows results based on video titles, descriptions, tags, and user names. Listed videos show title, rating, number of views, length, and the account name that posted the video. Play a video: Tap the video. The video begins to download to iPhone and a progress bar appears. When enough of the video has downloaded, it begins to play. You can also tap to start the video. Controlling Video Playback When a video starts playing, the controls disappear so they don’t obscure the video. Show or hide the video controls: Tap the screen. Next/ Fast-forward Play/Pause Email Scale Download progress Volume Playhead Scrubber bar Bookmark Previous/rewind Play or pause a video Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Adjust the volume Drag the volume slider, or use the volume buttons on the side of iPhone. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only). Start a video over Tap . Skip to the next or previous video in a list Tap twice to skip to the previous video. Tap to skip to the next video. Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done, or press the Home button. Toggle between scaling a video to fill the screen or fit to the screen Double-tap the video. You can also tap to make the video fill the screen, or tap to make it fit the screen. Add a video to Favorites using video controls Start playing a video and tap . Email a link to the video using video controls Start playing a video and tap . 108 Chapter 11 YouTubeManaging Videos Tap next to a video to see related videos and more controls for managing videos. Add the video to Favorites Tap “Add to Favorites.” Add the video to a playlist Tap “Add to Playlist,” then select an existing playlist or tap to create a new playlist. Email a link to the video Tap Share Video. Browse and view related videos Tap a video in the list of related videos to view, or tap next to a video for more information. Getting More Information Tap next to the video to show the video’s comments, description, date added, and other information. Chapter 11 YouTube 109Rate the video or add a comment On the More Info screen, tap “Rate, Comment, or Flag,” then choose “Rate or Comment.” You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. See more videos from this account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos. Subscribe to this YouTube account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos, then tap “Subscribe to ” at the bottom of the video list. You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. Using YouTube Account Features If you have a YouTube account, you can access account features such as subscriptions, comments and ratings, and playlists. To create a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Show favorites you’ve added to your account: In Favorites, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account favorites. Any existing favorites you’ve added to iPhone can be merged with your account favorites when you sign in. Delete a favorite: In Favorites, tap Edit, tap next to a video, then tap Delete. Show subscriptions you’ve added to your account: In Subscriptions, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account subscriptions. Tap an account in the list to see all videos for that account. Unsubscribe from a YouTube account: In Subscriptions, tap an account in the list, then tap Unsubscribe. View playlists: In Playlists, tap a playlist to see the list of videos you’ve added. Tap any video in the playlist to begin playing videos from that point in the playlist. Edit a playlist: In Playlists, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To delete the entire playlist, tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete. • To create a new playlist, tap , then enter a name for the playlist. Add a video to a playlist: Tap next to a video, then tap “Add to Playlist” and choose a playlist. Delete a video from a playlist: 1 In Playlists, tap a playlist, then tap Edit. 2 Tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete. 110 Chapter 11 YouTubeChanging the Browse Buttons You can replace the Featured, Most Viewed, Bookmarks, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you watch top rated videos often but don’t watch many featured videos, you could replace the Featured button with Top Rated. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing for videos, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible. Sending Videos to YouTube If you have a YouTube account, you can send videos directly from iPhone 3GS to YouTube. See “Publishing Videos to YouTube” on page 101. Chapter 11 YouTube 111Stocks 12 Viewing Stock Quotes Stocks lets you see the latest available quotes for your selected stocks, funds, and indexes. Quotes are updated every time you open Stocks when connected to the Internet. Quotes may be delayed by up to 20 minutes or more depending upon the reporting service. Add a stock, fund, or index to the stock reader: 1 Tap , then tap . 2 Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search. 3 Select an item from the search results and tap Done. View charts in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. Flick left or right to view the other charts in your stock reader. Show the progress of a stock, fund, or index over time: Tap the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. The chart adjusts to show progress over one day, one week, one month, three months, six months, one year, or two years. When you’re viewing a chart in landscape orientation, you can touch the chart to display the value for a specific point in time. 112Use two fingers to see the change in value over a specific period of time. Delete a stock: Tap and tap next to a stock, then tap Delete. Change the order of the list: Tap . Then drag next to a stock or index to a new place in the list. Switch the display to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization: Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. Tap again to switch to another view. Or tap and tap %, Price, or Mkt Cap, then tap Done. Getting More Information See the summary, chart, or news page about a stock, fund, or index: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then flick the pages underneath the stock reader to view the summary, chart, or recent news page. On the news page, you can scroll up and down to read headlines, or tap a headline to view the article in Safari. See more information at Yahoo.com: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap . Chapter 12 Stocks 113Maps 13 Finding and Viewing Locations WARNING: For important information about driving and navigating safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Maps provides street maps, satellite photos, a hybrid view, and street views of locations in many of the world’s countries. You can get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and traffic information. Find and track your current (approximate) location, and use your current location to get driving directions to or from another place. The built-in digital compass lets you see which way you’re facing. (iPhone 3GS only). Important: Maps, digital compass (iPhone 3GS only), directions, and location-based applications provided by Apple depend on data collected and services provided by third parties. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all geographic areas, resulting in maps, compass headings, directions, or locationbased information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. In order to provide your location, data is collected in a form that doesn’t personally identify you. If you don’t want such data collected, don’t use the feature. Not using this feature won’t impact the non–location-based functionality of your iPhone. Find a location and see a map: 1 Tap the search field to bring up the keyboard. 2 Type an address, intersection, area, landmark, bookmark, contact, or zip code. 3 Tap Search. 114A pin marks the location. Tap the pin to see the name or description of the location. Tap to get information about the location, get directions, add the location to your bookmarks or contacts list, or email a link to Google Maps. Locations can include places of interest added by Google My Maps users (“Usercreated content”), and sponsored links that appear as special icons (for example, ). Zoom in to a part of a map Pinch the map with two fingers. Or double-tap the part you want to zoom in on. Double-tap again to zoom in even closer. Zoom out Pinch the map. Or tap the map with two fingers. Tap with two fingers again to zoom out further. Pan or scroll to another part of the map Drag up, down, left, or right. Find your current location and turn tracking mode on: Tap . Chapter 13 Maps 115Your current (approximate) location is indicated by a blue marker. If your location can’t be determined precisely, a blue circle also appears around the marker. The size of the circle depends on how precisely your location can be determined—the smaller the circle, the greater the precision. As you move around, iPhone updates your location, adjusting the map so that the location indicator remains in the center of the screen. If you tap again or drag the map, iPhone continues to update your location but stops centering it, so the location information may move off the screen. iPhone uses Location Services to determine your location. Location Services uses available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on), and GPS ( iPhone 3G or later; GPS not available in all locations). This feature isn’t available in all areas. If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. You can’t find and track your current location if Location Services is turned off. See “Location Services” on page 144. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. In Settings, choose General > Location Services. Get information about your current location: Tap the blue marker, then tap . iPhone displays the address of your current location, if available. You can use this information to: • Get directions • Add the location to contacts • Send the address via email or MMS (iPhone 3G or later) • Bookmark the location 116 Chapter 13 MapsShow which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only): Tap again. (The icon changes to .) Maps uses the built-in compass to determine which way you’re facing. The angle shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle, the greater the accuracy. Maps uses true north to determine your heading, even if you have magnetic north set in Compass. If the compass needs calibrating, iPhone asks you to wave the phone in a figure eight. If there’s interference, you may be asked to move from the source of interference. See Chapter 22,“Compass,” on page 173. Use the dropped pin: Tap , then tap Drop Pin. A pin drops down on the map, which you can then drag to any location you choose. Replace the pin: Tap , then tap Replace Pin. iPhone drops the pin in the area you’re currently viewing. Chapter 13 Maps 117See a satellite or hybrid view: Tap , then tap Satellite or Hybrid to see just a satellite view or a combined street map and satellite view. To return to map view, tap Map. See the Google Street View of a location: Tap . Flick left or right to pan through the 360° panoramic view. (The inset shows your current view.) Tap an arrow to move down the street. Tap to return to map view To return to map view, tap the map inset in the lower-right corner. Street View isn’t available in all areas. 118 Chapter 13 MapsSee the location of someone’s address in your contacts list Tap in the search field, then tap Contacts and choose a contact. To locate an address in this way, the contact must include at least one address. If the contact has more than one address, choose the one you want to locate. You can also find the location of an address by tapping the address directly in Contacts. Add a location to your contacts list Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, tap “Add to Contacts,” then tap “Create New Contact” or “Add to Existing Contact.” Email a link to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap Share Location and tap Email. Send a link via MMS to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap Share Location and tap MMS (iPhone 3G or later). Bookmarking Locations You can bookmark locations that you want to find again later. Bookmark a location: Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap “Add to Bookmarks” at the bottom of the Info screen. See a bookmarked location or recently viewed location: Tap in the search field, then tap Bookmarks or Recents. Getting Directions You can get step-by-step directions for driving, taking public transit, or walking to a destination. Get directions: 1 Tap Directions. 2 Enter starting and ending locations in the Start and End fields. By default, iPhone starts with your current approximate location (if available). Tap in either field to choose a location in Bookmarks (including your current approximate location and the dropped pin, if available), Recents, or Contacts. For example, if a friend’s address is in your contacts list, you can tap Contacts and tap your friend’s name instead of having to type the address. To reverse the directions, tap . Chapter 13 Maps 1193 Tap Route (if you entered locations manually), then select driving ( ), public transit ( ), or walking ( ) directions. The travel options available depend on the route. 4 Do one of the following: • To view directions one step at a time, tap Start, then tap to see the next leg of the trip. Tap to go back. • To view all the directions in a list, tap , then tap List. Tap any item in the list to see a map showing that leg of the trip. Tap Route Overview to return to the overview screen. If you’re driving or walking, the approximate distance and travel time appear at the top of the screen. If traffic data is available, the driving time is adjusted accordingly. If you’re taking public transit, the overview screen shows each leg of the trip and the mode of transportation, including where you need to walk. The top of the screen shows the time of the bus or train at the first stop, the estimated arrival time, and the total fare. Tap to set your departure or arrival time, and to choose a schedule for the trip. Tap the icon at a stop to see the departure time for that bus or train, and to get a link to the transit provider’s website or contact info. When you tap Start and step through the route, detailed information about each leg of the trip appears at the top of the screen. You can also get directions by finding a location on the map, tapping the pin that points to it, tapping , then tapping Directions To Here or Directions From Here. Switch start and end points, for reverse directions: Tap . If you don’t see , tap List, then tap Edit. See recently viewed directions: Tap in the search field, then tap Recents. 120 Chapter 13 MapsShowing Traffic Conditions When available, you can show highway traffic conditions on the map. Show or hide traffic conditions: Tap , then tap Show Traffic or Hide Traffic. Highways are color-coded according to the flow of traffic: Green = more than 50 miles per hour Yellow = 25–50 miles per hour Gray = no data currently available Red = less than 25 miles per hour If you don’t see color-coded highways, you may need to zoom out to a level where you can see major roads, or traffic conditions may not be available for that area. Finding and Contacting Businesses Find businesses in an area: 1 Find a location—for example, a city and state or country, or a street address—or scroll to a location on a map. 2 Type the kind of business in the text field and tap Search. Pins appear for matching locations. For example, if you locate your city and then type “movies” and tap Search, pins mark movie theatres in your city. Tap the pin that marks a business to see its name or description. Find businesses without finding the location first: Type things like: • restaurants san francisco ca • apple inc new york Contact a business or get directions: Tap the pin that marks a business, then tap next to the name. From there, you can do the following: • Tap a phone number to call, an email address to send email to, or a web address to visit. • For directions, tap Directions To Here or Directions From Here. Chapter 13 Maps 121• To add the business to your contacts list, scroll down and tap “Create New Contact” or “Add to Existing Contact.” • Share the location of the business by email or text message See a list of the businesses found in the search: From the Map screen, tap List. Tap a business to see its location. Or tap next to a business to see its information. Get directions Visit website Tap to show contact info Call 122 Chapter 13 MapsWeather 14 Viewing Weather Summaries Tap Weather from the Home screen to get the current temperature and six-day forecast for one or more cities around the world. Six-day forecast Current temperature Current conditions Add and delete cities Number of cities stored Today’s high and low If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city—between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. If the board is dark purple, it’s nighttime—between 6:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m. Add a city: 1 Tap , then tap . 2 Enter a city name or zip code, then tap Search. 3 Choose a city in the search list. Switch to another city: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. The number of dots below the weather board shows how many cities are stored. Reorder cities: Tap , then drag next to a city to a new place in the list. 123Delete a city: Tap and tap next to a city, then tap Delete. Display temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius: Tap , then tap °F or °C. Getting More Weather Information You can see a more detailed weather report, news and websites related to the city, and more. See information about a city at Yahoo.com: Tap . 124 Chapter 14 WeatherVoice Memos 15 Recording Voice Memos Voice Memos lets you use iPhone as a portable recording device using the built-in microphone, iPhone or Bluetooth headset mic, or supported external microphone. Note: External microphones must be designed to work with the iPhone headset jack or Dock Connector, such as Apple-branded earbuds or authorized third-party accessories marked with the Apple “Works with iPhone” logo. You can adjust the recording level by moving the microphone closer to or further away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the level meter should be between –3dB and 0 dB. Record button Audio level meter Go to voice memos 125Record a voice memo: 1 Tap to start recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). 2 Tap to pause or to stop recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Recordings using the built-in microphone are mono, but you can record stereo using an external stereo microphone. When you start a voice recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound. The sound isn’t played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141. Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Voice Memos are played even if the Ring/ Silent switch is set to silent. To use other applications while recording your voice memo, you can lock iPhone or press the Home button. Play back a voice memo you just recorded: Tap . Listening to Voice Memos Scrubber bar Playhead Play a voice memo you’ve previously recorded: 1 Tap . Memos are listed in chronological order, with the most recent memo first. 2 Tap a memo, then tap . Tap to pause, then tap again to resume playback. Skip to any point in a memo: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. 126 Chapter 15 Voice MemosListen through the built-in speaker: Tap Speaker. Managing Voice Memos Delete a voice memo: Tap a memo in the list, then tap Delete. See more information: Tap next to the memo. The Info screen displays information about the length, recording time and date, and provides additional editing and sharing functions. Add a label to a memo: On the Info screen tap , then select a label in the list on the Label screen. To create a custom label, choose Custom at the bottom of the list, then type a name for the label. Chapter 15 Voice Memos 127Trimming Voice Memos You can trim the beginning or ending of a voice memo to eliminate unwanted pauses or noise. Trim a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen, tap next to the memo you want to trim. 2 Tap Trim Memo. 3 Using the time markers as a guide, drag the edges of the audio region to adjust the beginning and end of the voice memo. To preview your edit, tap . 4 Tap Trim Voice Memo. Important: Edits you make to voice memos can’t be undone. Sharing Voice Memos You can share your voice memos as attachments in email or MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later). Share a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen or Info screen, tap Share. 2 Choose Email Voice Memo to open a new message in Mail with the memo attached, or choose MMS to open a new message in Messages. A message appears if the file you’re trying to send is too large. 128 Chapter 15 Voice MemosSyncing Voice Memos iTunes automatically syncs voice memos to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you listen to voice memos on your computer and provides a backup if you delete them from iPhone. Voice memos are synced to the Voice Memos playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos application until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPhone, it isn’t deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo from iTunes, it is deleted from iPhone the next time you sync with iTunes. You can sync the iTunes Voice Memos playlist to the iPod application on iPhone using the Music pane in iTunes. Sync the Voice Memos playlist to iPhone: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 Select the Music tab. 4 Select the “Include voice memos” checkbox and click Apply. Chapter 15 Voice Memos 129Notes 16 Writing and Reading Notes Notes are listed in the order of the last modified date, with the most recently modified note at the top. You can see the first few words of each note in the list. Rotate iPhone to view notes in landscape orientation and type using a larger keyboard. Add a note: Tap , then type your note and tap Done. Read a note: Tap the note. Tap or to see the next or previous note. Edit a note: Tap anywhere on the note to bring up the keyboard. Delete a note: Tap the note, then tap . 130Searching Notes You can search the text of notes. Search for notes: 1 Drag the note list down or tap the status bar to expose the search window. 2 Enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Emailing Notes Email a note: Tap the note, then tap . To email a note, iPhone must be set up for email. See “Setting Up Email Accounts” on page 59. Syncing Notes You can set up iTunes to automatically sync your notes with email applications such as Mac OS X Mail (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later) or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12. Chapter 16 Notes 131Clock 17 World Clocks You can add clocks to show the time in other major cities and time zones around the world. View clocks: Tap World Clock. If the clock face is white, it’s daytime in that city. If the clock face is black, it’s nighttime. If you have more than four clocks, flick to scroll through them. Add a clock: 1 Tap World Clock. 2 Tap , then type the name of a city. Cities matching what you’ve typed appear below. 3 Tap a city to add a clock for that city. If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone. Delete a clock: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then tap next to a clock and tap Delete. Rearrange clocks: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then drag next to a clock to a new place in the list. 132Alarms You can set multiple alarms. Set each alarm to repeat on days you specify, or to sound only once. Set an alarm: 1 Tap Alarm and tap . 2 Adjust any of the following settings: • To set the alarm to repeat on certain days, tap Repeat and choose the days. • To choose the ringtone that sounds when the alarm goes off, tap Sound. • To set whether the alarm gives you the option to hit snooze, turn Snooze on or off. If Snooze is on and you tap Snooze when the alarm sounds, the alarm stops and then sounds again in ten minutes. • To give the alarm a description, tap Label. iPhone displays the label when the alarm sounds. If at least one alarm is set and turned on, appears in the iPhone status bar at the top of the screen. Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone alerts may not sound at the correct local time. See “Date and Time” on page 147. Turn an alarm on or off: Tap Alarm and turn any alarm on or off. If an alarm is turned off, it won’t sound again unless you turn it back on. If an alarm is set to sound only once, it turns off automatically after it sounds. You can turn it on again to reenable it. Change settings for an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm you want to change. Delete an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm and tap Delete. Stopwatch Use the stopwatch to time an event: 1 Tap Stopwatch. 2 Tap Start to start the stopwatch. • To record lap times, tap Lap after each lap. • To pause the stopwatch, tap Stop. Tap Start to resume. • To reset the stopwatch, tap Reset when the stopwatch is pause. If you start the stopwatch and go to another iPhone application, the stopwatch continues running in the background. Chapter 17 Clock 133Timer Set the timer: Tap Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap Start to start the timer. Choose the sound: Tap When Timer Ends. Set a sleep timer: Set the timer, then tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod. When you set a sleep timer, iPhone stops playing music or video when the timer ends. If you start the timer and then switch to another iPhone application, the timer continues running. 134 Chapter 17 ClockCalculator 18 Using the Calculator Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator. When you tap the add, subtract, multiply, or divide button, a white ring appears around the button to let you know the operation to be carried out. Rotate iPhone to get an expanded scientific calculator. Standard Memory Functions • C: Tap to clear the displayed number. • MC: Tap to clear the memory. • M+: Tap to add the displayed number to the number in memory. If no number is in memory, tap to store the displayed number in memory. • M-: Tap to subtract the displayed number from the number in memory. • MR: Tap to replace the displayed number with the number in memory. If the button has a white ring around it, there is a number stored in memory. The stored number remains in memory when you switch between the standard and scientific calculators. 135Scientific Calculator Keys Rotate iPhone to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. 2nd Changes the trigonometric buttons (sin, cos, tan, sinh, cosh, and tanh) to their inverse functions (sin -1 , cos -1 , tan -1 , sinh -1 , cosh -1 , and tanh -1 ). It also changes ln to log2, and e x to 2 x . Tap 2nd again to return the buttons to their original functions. ( Opens a parenthetical expression. Expressions can be nested. ) Closes a parenthetical expression. % Calculates percentages, adds markups, and subtracts discounts. To calculate a percentage, use it with the multiplication (x) key. For example, to calculate 8% of 500, enter 500 x 8 % = which returns 40. To add a markup or subtract a discount, use it with the plus (+) or minus (–) key. For example, to compute the total cost of a $500 item with an 8% sales tax, enter 500 + 8 % = which returns 540. 1/x Returns the reciprocal of a value in decimal format. x 2 Squares a value. x 3 Cubes a value. y x Tap between values to raise the first value to the power of the second value. For example, to compute 3 4 , enter 3 y x 4 = which returns 81. x! Calculates the factorial of a value. v Calculates the square root of a value. x vy Use between values to calculate the x root of y. For example to compute 4 v81, enter 81 x vy 4 = which returns 3. 136 Chapter 18 Calculatorlog Returns the log base 10 of a value. sin Calculates the sine of a value. sin -1 Calculates the arc sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) cos Calculates the cosine of a value. cos -1 Calculates the arc cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) tan Calculates the tangent of a value. tan -1 Calculates the arc tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) ln Calculates the natural log of a value. log2 Calculates the log base 2. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) sinh Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a value. sinh -1 Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) cosh Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a value. cosh -1 Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) tanh Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a value. tanh -1 Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) e x Tap after entering a value to raise the constant “e” (2.718281828459045...) to the power of that value. 2 x Calculates 2 to the power of the displayed value. For example, 10 2 x = 1024. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.) Rad Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in radians. Deg Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in degrees. p Enters the value of p (3.141592653589793...). EE An operator that multiplies the currently displayed value by 10 to the power of the next value you enter. Rand Returns a random number between 0 and 1. Chapter 18 Calculator 137Settings 19 Settings allows you to customize iPhone applications, set the date and time, configure your network connection, and enter other preferences for iPhone. Airplane Mode Airplane mode disables the wireless features of iPhone to avoid interfering with aircraft operation and other electrical equipment. Turn on airplane mode: Tap Settings and turn airplane mode on. When airplane mode is on, appears in the status bar at the top of the screen. No phone, radio, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth signals are emitted from iPhone and GPS reception is turned off, disabling many of iPhone’s features. You won’t be able to: • Make or receive phone calls • Get visual voicemail • Send or receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange • Send or receive text messages • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Use the iTunes Store or the App Store If allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can continue to use iPhone to: • Listen to music and watch video 138• Listen to visual voicemail previously received • Check your calendar • Take or view pictures • Hear alarms • Use the stopwatch or timer • Use the calculator • Take notes • Record voice memos • Use Compass • Read text messages and email messages stored on iPhone Where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can turn Wi-Fi back on, enabling you to: • Send and receive email • Browse the Internet • Sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange • Stream YouTube videos • Get stock quotes • Get map locations • Get weather reports • Use the iTunes Store or the App Store Wi-Fi Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPhone uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the Internet. If no Wi-Fi networks are available, or you’ve turned Wi-Fi off, then iPhone connects to the Internet via your cellular data network, when available. You can use Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the iTunes Store, and the App Store over a cellular data network connection. Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Choose Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on or off. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects networks in range, then select a network. If necessary, enter a password and tap Join. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically joins it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPhone joins the one last used. Chapter 19 Settings 139When iPhone is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal. Set iPhone to ask if you want to join a new network: Choose Wi-Fi and turn “Ask to Join Networks” on or off. When you’re trying to access the Internet, by using Safari or Mail for example, and you aren’t in range of a Wi-Fi network you‘ve previously used, this option tells iPhone to look for another network. iPhone displays a list of all available Wi-Fi networks that you can choose from. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) If “Ask to Join Networks” is turned off, you must manually join a network to connect to the Internet when a previously used network or a cellular data network isn’t available. Forget a network, so iPhone doesn’t join it automatically: Choose Wi-Fi and tap next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.” Join a closed Wi-Fi network: To join a Wi-Fi network that isn’t shown in the list of scanned networks, choose Wi-Fi > Other, then enter the network name. If the network requires a password, tap Security, tap the type of security the network uses, and enter the password. You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to a closed network. Some Wi-Fi networks may require you to enter or adjust additional settings, such as a client ID or static IP address. Ask the network administrator which settings to use. Adjust settings to connect to a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, then tap next to a network. VPN This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPhone, allowing you to turn VPN on or off. See “Network” on page 143. Notifications This setting appears when you’ve installed an application from the App Store that uses the Apple Push Notification service. Push notifications are used by applications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. You can turn notifications off if you don’t want to be notified or want to conserve battery life. Turn all notifications on or off: Tap Notifications and turn notifications on or off. 140 Chapter 19 SettingsTurn sounds, alerts, or badges on or off for an application: Tap Notifications, then choose an application from the list and choose the types of notification you want to turn on or off. Carrier This setting appears when you’re outside of your carrier’s network and other local carrier data networks are available to use for your phone calls, visual voicemail, and cellular network Internet connections. You can make calls only on carriers that have roaming agreements with your carrier. Additional fees may apply. Roaming charges may be billed to you by the carrier of the selected network, through your carrier. For information about out-of-network coverage and how to enable roaming, contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. Select a carrier: Choose Carrier and select the network you want to use. Once you select a network, iPhone uses only that network. If the network is unavailable, “No service” appears on the iPhone screen and you can’t make or receive calls or visual voicemail, or connect to the Internet via cellular data network. Set Network Settings to Automatic to have iPhone select a network for you. Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch Switch between ring and silent mode: Flip the Ring/Silent switch on the side of iPhone. When set to silent, iPhone doesn’t play any ring, alert, or effects sounds. It does, however, play alarms set using Clock. Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera and Voice Memos are played even if the Ring/Silent switch is set to silent. Set whether iPhone vibrates when you get a call: Choose Sounds. To set whether iPhone vibrates in silent mode, turn Vibrate under Silent on or off. To set whether iPhone vibrates in ring mode, turn Vibrate under Ring on or off. Adjust the ringer and alerts volume: Choose Sounds and drag the slider. Or, if no song or video is playing and you aren’t on a call, use the volume buttons on the side of iPhone. Set the ringtone: Choose Sounds > Ringtone. Set alert and effects sounds: Choose Sounds and turn items on or off under Ring . When the Ring/Silent switch is set to ring, iPhone plays sounds for alerts and effects that are turned on. You can set iPhone to play a sound whenever you: • Get a call Chapter 19 Settings 141• Get a text message • Get a voicemail message • Get an email message • Send an email message • Have an appointment that you’ve set up to alert you • Lock iPhone • Type using the keyboard Brightness Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you need to recharge iPhone, or use Auto-Brightness. Adjust the screen brightness: Choose Brightness and drag the slider. Set whether iPhone adjusts screen brightness automatically: Choose Brightness and turn Auto-Brightness on or off. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPhone adjusts the screen brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor. Wallpaper You see a wallpaper background picture when you unlock iPhone. You can select one of the images that came with iPhone, or use a photo you’ve synced to iPhone from your computer. Set wallpaper: Choose Wallpaper and choose a picture. General The General settings include date and time, security, network, and other settings that affect more than one application. This is also where you can find information about your iPhone, and reset iPhone to its original state. About Choose General > About to get information about iPhone, including: • Name of your phone network • Number of songs, videos, and photos • Total storage capacity • Space available • Software version • Serial and model numbers • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth addresses 142 Chapter 19 Settings• IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) and ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier, or Smart Card) numbers • Modem firmware version of the cellular transmitter • Legal information • Regulatory information Usage Show battery percentage: Tap Usage and turn Battery Percentage on to display the percentage of battery charge next to the battery icon in the upper-right corner of iPhone (iPhone 3GS only). See your usage statistics: Choose Usage. There, you can see: • Usage—Amount of time iPhone has been awake and in use since the last full charge. iPhone is awake whenever you’re using it—including making or receiving phone calls, using email, sending or receiving text messages, listening to music, browsing the web, or using any other iPhone features. iPhone is also awake while performing background tasks such as automatically checking for and retrieving email messages. • Standby—Amount of time iPhone has been powered on since its last full charge, including the time iPhone has been asleep. • Current period call time and lifetime call time. • Amount of data sent and received over the cellular data network. Reset your usage statistics: Tap Usage and tap Reset Statistics to clear the data and cumulative time statistics. The statistics for the amount of time iPhone has been unlocked and in standby mode aren’t reset. Network Use the Network settings to configure a VPN (virtual private network) connection, access Wi-Fi settings, or turn Data Roaming on or off. Enable or disable 3G: Tap to turn 3G on or off. Using 3G loads Internet data faster in some cases, but may decrease battery performance. If you’re making a lot of phone calls, you may want to turn 3G off to extend battery performance. Turn Data Roaming on or off: Choose General > Network, then turn Data Roaming on or off. Data Roaming turns on Internet and visual voicemail access over a cellular data network when you’re in an area not covered by your carrier’s network. For example, when you’re traveling, you can turn off Data Roaming to avoid potential roaming charges. By default, Data Roaming is turned off. Chapter 19 Settings 143Turn Internet Tethering on or off: Choose General > Network > Internet Tethering, then turn Internet Tethering on or off. Internet Tethering lets you share iPhone’s Internet connection with a computer connected via USB or Bluetooth (not available in all regions). Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the setup. Additional fees may apply. See “Using iPhone as a Modem” on page 42. Add a new VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN > Add VPN Configuration. VPNs used within organizations allow you to communicate private information securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to access your work email on iPhone. iPhone can connect to VPNs that use the L2TP, PPTP, or Cisco IPSec protocols. VPN works over both Wi-Fi and cellular data network connections. Ask your network administrator which settings to use. In most cases, if you’ve set up VPN on your computer, you can use the same VPN settings for iPhone. Once you’ve entered VPN settings, a VPN switch appears in the Settings menu that you can use to turn VPN on or off. VPN may also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18. Change a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN and tap the configuration you want to update. Turn VPN on or off: Tap Settings and turn VPN on or off. Delete a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN, tap the blue arrow to the right of the configuration name, and tap Delete VPN at the bottom of the configuration screen. Bluetooth iPhone can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth devices such as headsets, headphones, and car kits for music listening and hands-free talking. See “Bluetooth Devices” on page 55. Turn Bluetooth on or off: Choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on or off. Location Services Location Services allows applications such as Maps Camera, and Compass to gather and use data indicating your location. Location Services doesn’t correlate the data it collects with your personally identifiable information. Your approximate location is determined using available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on), and GPS (iPhone 3G or later; GPS may not be available in all locations). 144 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can turn Location Services off if you don’t want to use this feature. If you turn Location Services off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on again the next time an application tries to use this feature. Turn Location Services on or off: Choose General > Location Services and turn location services on or off. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. Auto-Lock Locking iPhone turns off the display to save your battery and to prevent unintended operation of iPhone. You can still receive calls and text messages, and you can adjust the volume and use the mic button on the iPhone stereo headset when listening to music or on a call. Set the amount of time before iPhone locks: Choose General > Auto-Lock and choose a time. Passcode Lock By default, iPhone doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. Turn passcode lock off: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Turn Passcode Off, then enter your passcode again. Change the passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Change Passcode. Enter your passcode again, then enter and reenter your new passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Set how long before your passcode is required: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter your passcode. Tap Require Passcode, then select how long iPhone can be idle before you need to enter a passcode to unlock it. Turn Voice Dial on or off: Choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial on or off. Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Erase Data to turn it on. After ten failed passcode attempts, your settings are reset to their defaults and all your information and media is erased: • On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data Chapter 19 Settings 145Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone. (On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.) Restrictions You can set restrictions for the use of some applications and for iPod content on iPhone. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists, or turn off YouTube access entirely. Turn on restrictions: 1 Choose General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions. 2 Enter a four-digit passcode. 3 Reenter the passcode. Turn off restrictions: Choose General > Restrictions, then enter the passcode. Tap Disable Restrictions, then reenter the passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore your iPhone software from iTunes. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Set application restrictions: Set the restrictions you want by tapping individual controls on or off. By default, all controls are on (not restricted). Tap an item to turn it off and restrict its use. Safari is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot use Safari to browse the web or access web clips. Other third-party applications may allow web browsing even if Safari is disabled. YouTube is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. The iTunes Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot preview, purchase, or download content. The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot install applications on iPhone. Camera is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot take pictures. Location data isn’t provided to applications. Restrict purchases within applications: Turn In-App Purchases off. When enabled, this feature allows you to purchase additional content or features within applications downloaded from the App Store. Set content restrictions: Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. You can then set restrictions using that country’s ratings system for the following categories of content: 146 Chapter 19 Settings• Music & Podcasts • Movies • TV Shows • Apps In the United States for example, to allow only movies rated PG or below, tap Movies, then select PG from the list. Note: Not all countries have rating systems. Home Choose General > Home to set preferences for double-clicking the Home button and searching categories on the Spotlight page. You can set iPhone so that double-clicking the Home button goes to the Home screen, Search, Phone Favorites, Camera, or iPod. Set whether double-clicking the Home button shows iPod controls: Turn on iPod Controls to display iPod controls when you’re playing music and double-click the Home button. This feature works even when the display is turned off or iPhone is locked. Set what categories appear in search results: Tap Search Results. All search categories in the list are selected by default. Tap an item to deselect it. Set the order of search result categories: Tap Search Results, then drag next to a search category to a new place in the list. Date and Time These settings apply to the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and in world clocks and calendars. Set whether iPhone shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Choose General > Date & Time and turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (Not available in all countries.) Set whether iPhone updates the date and time automatically: Choose General > Date & Time and turn Set Automatically on or off. If iPhone is set to update the time automatically, it gets the correct time over the cellular network, and updates it for the time zone you’re in. Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone may not be able to automatically set the local time. Set the date and time manually: Choose General > Date & Time and turn Set Automatically off. Tap Time Zone and enter the name of a major city in your time zone. Tap the “Date & Time” return button, then tap “Set Date & Time” and enter the date and time. Chapter 19 Settings 147Keyboard Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. By default, if the default keyboard for the language you select has a dictionary, iPhone automatically suggests corrections or completed words as you type. Turn Auto-Capitalization on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn AutoCapitalization on or off. By default, iPhone automatically capitalizes words after you type sentence-ending punctuation or a return character. Set whether caps lock is enabled: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Enable Caps Lock on or off. If caps lock is enabled and you double-tap the Shift key on the keyboard, all letters you type are uppercase. The Shift key turns blue when caps lock is on. Turn the “.” shortcut on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn “.” Shortcut on or off. The “.” shortcut lets you double-tap the space bar to enter a period followed by a space when you’re typing. It’s on by default. Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > Keyboards > International Keyboards and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35. International Use International settings to set the language for iPhone, turn keyboards for different languages on or off, and set the date, time, and telephone number formats for your region. Set the language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Language, choose the language you want to use, then tap Done. Set the Voice Control language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Voice Control, then choose the language you want to use (available only on iPhone 3GS). Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > International > Keyboards, and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35. Set date, time, and telephone number formats: Choose General > International > Region Format, and choose your region. 148 Chapter 19 SettingsThe Region Format also determines the language used for the days and months that appear in native iPhone applications. Accessibility To turn on accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS), choose Accessibility and choose the features you want. See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182. Resetting iPhone Reset all settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset All Settings. All your preferences and settings are reset. Information, such as your contacts and calendars, and media, such as your songs and videos, aren’t deleted. Erase all content and settings: Connect iPhone to your computer or a power adapter. Choose General > Reset and tap “Erase All Content and Settings.” This resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media: • On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone. (On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.) Reset network settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Network Settings. When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to Join Networks” settings are left turned on. To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, choose Settings > General > Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove. Reset the keyboard dictionary: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Keyboard Dictionary. You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPhone suggests as you type. Tap a word to reject the correction and add the word to the keyboard dictionary. Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added. Reset the Home screen layout: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Reset the location warnings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Location Warnings. Chapter 19 Settings 149Location warnings are the requests made by applications (such as Camera, Compass, and Maps) to use Location Services with those applications. iPhone stops presenting the warning for an application the second time you tap OK. Tap Reset Location Warnings to resume the warnings. Mail, Contacts, Calendars Use Mail, Contacts, Calendars settings to set up and customize accounts for iPhone: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email • Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other POP and IMAP mail systems • LDAP accounts for Contacts • CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) accounts for Calendars Accounts The Accounts section lets you set up accounts on iPhone. The specific settings that appear depend on the type of account you’re setting up. Your service provider or system administrator should be able to provide the information you need to enter. For more information, see: • “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16 • “Adding Contacts” on page 176 • “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93 Change an account’s settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then make the changes you want. Changes you make to an account’s settings on iPhone are not synced to your computer, so you can configure your accounts to work with iPhone without affecting the account settings on your computer. Stop using an account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then turn Account off. If an account is off, iPhone doesn’t display the account and doesn’t send or check email from or sync other information with that account, until you turn it back on. Adjust advanced settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then do one of the following: 150 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages are stored on iPhone or remotely on your email server (IMAP accounts only), tap Advanced and choose Drafts Mailbox, Sent Mailbox, or Deleted Mailbox. If you store messages on iPhone, you can see them even when iPhone isn’t connected to the Internet. • To set how long before messages are removed permanently from Mail on iPhone, tap Advanced and tap Remove, then choose a time: Never, or after one day, one week, or one month. • To adjust email server settings, tap Host Name, User Name, or Password under Incoming Mail Server or Outgoing Mail Server. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. • To adjust SSL and password settings, tap Advanced. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. Delete an account from iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account. Deleting an account means you can no longer access the account with your iPhone. All email and the contacts, calendar, and bookmark information synced with the account are removed from iPhone. However, deleting an account doesn’t remove the account or its associated information from your computer. Fetch New Data This setting lets you turn Push on or off for MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo! Mail, and any other push accounts you’ve configured on iPhone. Push accounts automatically deliver new information to iPhone when new information appears on the server (some delays may occur). You might want to turn Push off to suspend delivery of email and other information, or to conserve battery life. When Push is off, and with accounts that don’t support push, data can still be fetched—that is, iPhone can check with the server and see if new information is available. Use the Fetch New Data setting to determine how often data is requested. For optimal battery life, don’t fetch too frequently. Turn Push on: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then tap to turn Push on. Set the interval to fetch data: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then choose how often you want to fetch data for all accounts. To conserve battery life, fetch less frequently. Setting Push to OFF or setting Fetch to Manually in the Fetch New Data screen overrides individual account settings. Chapter 19 Settings 151Mail The Mail settings, except where noted, apply to all accounts you’ve set up on iPhone. To turn alerts sounds for new or sent mail on or off, use the Sounds settings. Set the number of messages shown on iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Show, then choose a setting. Choose to see the most recent 25, 50, 75, 100, or 200 messages. To download additional messages when you’re in Mail, scroll to the bottom of your inbox and tap Load More Messages. Note: For Microsoft Exchange accounts, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose the Exchange account. Tap “Mail days to sync” and choose the number of days of mail you want to sync with the server. Set how many lines of each message are previewed in the message list: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Preview, then choose a setting. You can choose to see up to five lines of each message. That way, you can scan a list of messages in a mailbox and get an idea of what each message is about. Set a minimum font size for messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Minimum Font Size, then choose Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large, or Giant. Set whether iPhone shows To and Cc labels in message lists: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Show To/Cc Label on or off. If Show To/Cc Label is on, To or Cc next to each message in a list indicates whether the message was sent directly to you or you received a copy. Set whether iPhone confirms that you want to delete a message: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Ask Before Deleting on or off. If Ask Before Deleting is on, to delete a message you must tap , then confirm by tapping Delete. Set whether iPhone automatically loads remote images: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Load Remote Images on or off. If Load Remote Images is off, you can load images manually when reading a message. Set whether iPhone sends you a copy of every message you send: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Always Bcc Myself on or off. Set the default email account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Default Account, then choose an account. This setting determines which of your accounts a message is sent from when you create a message from another iPhone application, such as sending a photo from Photos or tapping the email address of a business in Maps. To send the message from a different account, tap the From field in the message and choose another account. Add a signature to your messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Signature, then type a signature. 152 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can set iPhone to add a signature—your favorite quote, or your name, title, and phone number, for example—to the bottom of every message you send. Contacts Set how contacts are sorted: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Sort Order and do one of the following: • To sort by first name first, tap First, Last. • To sort by last name first, tap Last, First. Set how contacts are displayed: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Display Order and do one of the following: • To show first name first, tap First, Last. • To show last name first, tap Last, First. Import contacts from a SIM: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Import SIM Contacts. The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which account you want to add the SIM contacts to. Calendar Set alerts to sound when your receive meeting invitation: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” and under Calendar tap “New Invitation Alerts” to turn it on. Set how far back in the past to show your calendar events on iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Sync, then choose a period of time. Turn on Calendar time zone support: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. Select a time zone for calendars by tapping Time Zone and entering the name of a major city. When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time. Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone may not display events or sound alerts at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147. Phone Use Phone settings to forward incoming calls, turn call waiting on or off, change your password, and other things. Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for pricing and availability. Chapter 19 Settings 153Calling from Abroad Set iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings, tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only. For more information, see “Using iPhone Abroad” on page 56. Call Forwarding You can set iPhone to forward incoming calls to another number. For example, you may be on vacation and want all calls to go somewhere else. If you’re going to an area with no cellular coverage, you may want to forward calls to a place where you can be reached. Set iPhone to forward your calls: 1 Choose Phone > Call Forwarding and turn Call Forwarding on. 2 Tap Forwarding To and enter the phone number you want calls forwarded to. When Call Forwarding is on, an icon appears in the status bar the top of the screen. You must be in range of the cellular network when you set iPhone to forward calls, or calls won’t be forwarded. Call Waiting Activate or deactivate call waiting: Choose Phone > Call Waiting, then turn Call Waiting on or off. If you turn call waiting off and someone calls you when you’re already on the phone, the call goes to voicemail. Show My Caller ID Show or hide your caller ID: Choose Phone > Show My Caller ID, then turn Show My Caller ID on or off. If Show My Caller ID is off, people you call can’t see your name or phone number on their phone. Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine In some regions, Teletype (TTY) machines are used by deaf or hearing-impaired people to communicate by typing and reading text. You can use iPhone with a TTY machine if you have the iPhone TTY Adapter cable, available for purchase separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/store (not available in all countries). Connect iPhone to a TTY machine: Choose Phone, then turn TTY on. Then connect iPhone to your TTY machine using the iPhone TTY Adapter. For information about using a TTY machine, see the documentation that came with the machine. 154 Chapter 19 SettingsFor more information about other accessibility features of iPhone, go to Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182. Changing Your Voicemail Password A voicemail password helps prevent others from access your voicemail. You need to enter the password only when you’re calling in to get your messages from another phone. You won’t need to enter the password when using voicemail on iPhone. Change your voicemail password: Choose Phone > Change Voicemail Password. Locking Your SIM Card You can lock your SIM card, so it can’t be used without a Personal Identification Number (PIN). You must enter the PIN each time you turn iPhone off and turn it back on again. Some carriers require a SIM PIN in order to use iPhone. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if the SIM is locked. Turn the SIM PIN on or off: 1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN, then turn SIM PIN on or off. 2 Enter your PIN to confirm. Use the PIN assigned by your carrier, or your carrier’s default PIN. Change the PIN for your SIM card: 1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN. 2 Turn SIM PIN on, then tap Change PIN. 3 Enter your current PIN, then enter your new PIN. 4 Enter your new PIN again to confirm, then tap Done. Accessing Your Carrier’s Services Depending on your carrier, you may be able to access some of your carrier’s services directly from iPhone. For example, you may be able to check your bill balance, call directory assistance, and view how many minutes you have left. Access your carrier’s services: Choose Phone. Then scroll down and tap the button for your carrier’s services. When you request information such as your bill balance, your carrier may provide the information in a text message. Contact your carrier to find out if there are any charges for these services. Chapter 19 Settings 155Safari Safari settings let you select your Internet search engine, set security options, and for developers, turn on debugging. General You can use Google or Yahoo! to perform Internet searches. Select a search engine: Choose Safari > Search Engine and select the search engine you want to use. You can set Safari to automatically fill out web forms using contact information, names and passwords you previously entered, or both. Enable AutoFill: Choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on. When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All. Security By default, Safari is set to show features of the web, such as some movies, animation, and web applications. You may wish to change security settings to help protect iPhone from possible security risks on the Internet. Change security settings: Choose Safari, then do one of the following: • To set whether you’re warned when visiting potentially fraudulent websites, turn Fraud Warning on or off. Fraud warning protects you from potentially fraudulent Internet sites. When you visit a suspicious site, Safari warns you about its suspect nature and doesn’t load the page. • To enable or disable JavaScript, turn JavaScript on or off. JavaScript lets web programmers control elements of the page—for example, a page that uses JavaScript might display the current date and time or cause a linked page to appear in a new pop-up page. • To enable or disable plug-ins, turn Plug-ins on or off. Plug-ins allow Safari to play some types of audio and video files and to display Microsoft Word files and Microsoft Excel documents. • To block or allow pop-ups, turn Block Pop-ups on or off. Blocking pop-ups stops only pop-ups that appear when you close a page or open a page by typing its address. It doesn’t block pop-ups that open when you tap a link. 156 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether Safari accepts cookies, tap Accept Cookies and choose Never, “From visited,” or Always. A cookie is a piece of information that a website puts on iPhone so the website can remember you when you visit again. That way, webpages can be customized for you based on information you may have provided. Some pages won’t work correctly unless iPhone is set to accept cookies. • To clear the history of webpages you’ve visited, tap Clear History. • To clear all cookies from Safari, tap Clear Cookies. • To clear the browser cache, tap Clear Cache. The browser cache stores the content of pages so the pages open faster the next time you visit them. If a page you open doesn’t show new content, clearing the cache may help. Developer The debug console can help you resolve webpage errors. If it’s turned on, the console appears automatically when a webpage error occurs. Turn the debug console on or off: Choose Safari > Developer, and turn Debug Console on or off. Messages Use Messages settings to adjust settings for SMS and MMS messages. Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. The MMS Messaging and Show Subject Field settings doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier. Choose whether or not to see a preview of messages on the Home screen: Choose Messages and turn Show Preview on or off. Choose whether or not to repeat message alerts: Choose Messages and turn Repeat Alert on or off. If you ignore a message alert, you’ll be alerted two more times. Turn MMS messaging on or off: Choose Messages and turn MMS Messaging on or off. If MMS messaging is turned off, you won’t be able to receive MMS file attachments such as images or audio. Show a subject line for messages you send or receive: Choose Messages and turn Show Subject Field on. Chapter 19 Settings 157iPod Use iPod Settings to adjust settings for music and video playback on your iPod. Music The Music settings apply to songs, podcasts, and audiobooks. Turn Shake to Shuffle on or off: Choose iPod, then turn Shake to Shuffle on or off. When Shake to Shuffle is on, you can shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately change the currently playing song. Set iTunes to play songs at the same sound level: In iTunes, choose iTunes > Preferences if you’re using a Mac, or Edit > Preferences if you’re using a PC, then click Playback and select Sound Check. Set iPhone to use the iTunes volume settings (Sound Check): Choose iPod and turn Sound Check on. Use the equalizer to customize the sound on iPhone: Choose iPod > EQ and choose a setting. Set a volume limit for music and videos: Choose iPod > Volume Limit and drag the slider to adjust the maximum volume. Tap Lock Volume Limit to assign a code to prevent the setting from being changed. Setting a volume limit only limits the volume of music (including podcasts and audiobooks) and videos (including rented movies), and only when headphones, earphones, or speakers are connected to the headset jack on iPhone. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Video Video settings apply to video content, including rented movies. You can set where to resume playing videos that you previously started, turn closed captioning on or off, and set up iPhone to play videos on your TV. Set where to resume playing: Choose iPod > Start Playing, then select whether you want videos that you previously started watching to resume playing from the beginning or where you left off. Turn closed captioning on or off: Choose iPod and turn Closed Captioning on or off. 158 Chapter 19 SettingsTV Out Use these settings to set up how iPhone plays videos on your TV. For more information about using iPhone to play videos on your TV, see “Watching Videos on a TV” on page 84. Turn widescreen on or off: Choose iPod and turn Widescreen on or off. Set TV signal to NTSC or PAL: Choose iPod > TV Signal and select NTSC or PAL. NTSC and PAL are TV broadcast standards. NTSC displays 480i and PAL displays 576i. Your TV might use either of these, depending on where you bought it. If you’re not sure which to use, check the documentation that came with your TV. Photos Use Photos settings to specify how slideshows display your photos. Set the length of time each slide is shown: Choose Photos > Play Each Slide For and select the length of time. Set a transition effect: Choose Photos > Transition and select a transition effect. Set whether to repeat slideshows: Choose Photos and turn Repeat on or off. Set photos to appear randomly or in order: Choose Photos and turn Shuffle on or off. Store Use Store settings to change or create an iTunes Store account. By default, the iTunes account you’re signed in to when you sync iPhone with your computer appears in Store settings. You can change accounts on iPhone to purchase music or applications from another account. If you don’t have an iTunes account, you can create one in Store settings. Sign in to an account: Choose Store and tap Sign in, then enter your user name and password. View your iTunes Store account information: Choose Store and tap View Account, then type your password and follow the onscreen instructions. Sign in to a different account: Choose Store and tap Sign out, then tap Sign in and enter your username and password. Create a new account: Choose Store and tap Create New Account, then follow the onscreen instructions. Nike + iPod Use Nike + iPod settings to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application (iPhone 3GS only). See Chapter 24,“Nike + iPod,” on page 180. Chapter 19 Settings 159iTunes Store 20 About the iTunes Store You can search for, browse, preview, purchase, and download music, ringtones, audiobooks, TV shows, movies, and music videos from the iTunes Store directly to iPhone. You can listen to audio or watch video podcasts from the iTunes Store, either by streaming them from the Internet or by downloading them directly to iPhone. Note: The iTunes Store is not available in all regions, and iTunes Store content may vary across regions. To access the iTunes Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 40. To purchase songs or write reviews, you need an iTunes Store account. By default, iPhone gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 159. You don’t need an iTunes Store account to play or download podcasts. 160Finding Music, Videos, and More Browse content: Tap Music, Videos, Ringtones, or Podcasts. Or tap More to browse by Audiobooks, iTunes U, or Downloads. Choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as Featured, Top Tens, or Genres. Search for content: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. Search results are grouped by category, such as Movies, Albums, or Podcasts. Tap an item in a list to see more details on its Info screen. You can read reviews, write your own review, or email a link about the item to a friend. Depending on the item, you can also buy, download, or rent it. Note: If you join a Starbucks Wi-Fi network in a select Starbucks location (available in the U.S. only), the Starbucks icon appears at the bottom of the screen. You can preview and purchase the currently playing and other songs from featured Starbucks Collections. Chapter 20 iTunes Store 161Purchasing Ringtones You can preview and purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store and download them to iPhone. Note: Ringtones may not be available in all countries. Browse for ringtones: Tap Ringtones or use Search to find a specific song in the iTunes Store. Preview a ringtone: Tap the item to preview. Double-tap the item for more information. Purchase and download ringtones: 1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. When you purchase a ringtone, you can set it as your default ringtone, or assign it to a contact. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. You can change your default ringtone or assign individual ringtones to contacts in Settings > Sounds. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141. Ringtones you purchase on iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. You can sync purchased ringtones to more than one iPhone, if they’re all synced to the same account you used to purchase the ringtones. You can’t edit ringtones you purchase from the iTunes Store. You can create custom ringtones in Garage Band. For information, see Garage Band Help. Purchasing Music or Audiobooks When you find a song, album, or audiobook you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPhone. You can preview an item before you purchase it to make sure it’s what you want. Preview a song or audiobook: Tap the item. Purchase and download a song, album, or audiobook: 1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. 162 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreYour purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. An alert appears if you’ve previously purchased one or more songs from an album. Tap Buy if you want to purchase the entire album including the songs you’ve already purchased, or tap Cancel if you want to purchase any remaining songs individually. Some albums include bonus content, which is downloaded to your iTunes library on your computer. Not all bonus content is downloaded directly to iPhone. Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. See “Checking Download Status” on page 165. Purchased songs are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one when you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions. Purchasing or Renting Videos When you find a movie, TV show, or music video you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPhone. You can purchase movies and TV shows in standard (480p) or high definition (720p) format. When you purchase a high-definition video on iPhone, a standard definition version compatible with iPod and iPhone immediately downloads for viewing. The high definition version appears in iTunes on your computer in the Downloads queue. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account on your computer to view and download items from the Downloads queue. Rented movies are available in standard definition only (not available in all regions). See “Watching Rented Movies” on page 83. Preview a video: Tap Preview. Purchase or rent a video: 1 Tap Buy or Rent. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Chapter 20 iTunes Store 163Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. Rented movies won’t begin playing until the download completes. See “Checking Download Status” on page 165. Purchased videos are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one the next time you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions. Streaming or Downloading Podcasts You can listen to audio podcasts or watch video podcasts streamed over the Internet from the iTunes Store. You can also download audio and video podcasts to iPhone. Podcasts you download to iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. Tap Podcasts to browse podcasts in the iTunes Store. To see a list of episodes, tap a podcast. Video podcasts are indicated by the icon. Stream a podcast: Tap the podcast title. Download a podcast: Tap the Free button, then tap Download. Downloaded podcasts appear in the Podcasts list in iPod. Listen to or watch a podcast you’ve downloaded: In iPod, tap Podcasts at the bottom of the screen (you may need to tap More first), then tap the podcast. Video podcasts also appear in your list of videos. Get more episodes of the podcast you’ve downloaded: In the Podcasts list in iPod, tap the podcast, then tap Get More Episodes. Delete a podcast: In the Podcasts list in iPod, swipe left or right over the podcast, then tap Delete. 164 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreChecking Download Status You can check the Downloads screen to see the status of in-progress and scheduled downloads, including purchases you’ve pre-ordered. See the status of items being downloaded: Tap Downloads. To pause a download, tap . If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account). See the status of pre-ordered items: Tap Downloads. Pre-ordered items appear in a list until the date the item is released. Tap the item for release date information. Once the item is available for download, a download icon appears next to the download. Download a pre-ordered item: Tap the item, then tap . Pre-ordered items don’t download automatically when they’re released. Return to the Downloads screen to begin the download. Syncing Purchased Content iTunes automatically syncs everything you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete purchased content from iPhone. Purchased content is synced to the “Purchased on ” playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. iTunes also copies your purchases to the Purchased playlist that iTunes uses for purchases you make on your computer, if that playlist exists and is set to sync with iPhone. Downloaded podcasts are synced to the Podcast list in your iTunes library. Changing the Browse Buttons You can replace the Music, Podcasts, Videos, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you download audiobooks often but don’t watch many videos, you could replace the Videos button with Audiobooks. Chapter 20 iTunes Store 165Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace. You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible. Viewing Account Information To view your iTunes Store account information on iPhone, tap your account (at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens). Or go to Settings > Store and tap View Account. You must be signed in to view your account information. See “Store” on page 159. Verifying Purchases You can use iTunes on your computer to verify that all the music, videos, applications, and other items you bought from the iTunes Store or App Store are in your iTunes library. You might want to do this if a download was interrupted. Verify your purchases: 1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet. 2 In iTunes, choose Store > Check for Available Downloads. 3 Enter your iTunes Store account ID and password, then click Check. Purchases not yet on your computer are downloaded. The Purchased playlist displays your purchases. However, because you can add or remove items in this list, it might not be accurate. To see all of your purchases, sign in to your account, choose Store > View My Account, and click Purchase History. 166 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreApp Store 21 About the App Store You can search for, browse, review, purchase, and download applications from the App Store directly to iPhone. Applications you download and install from the App Store on iPhone are backed up to your iTunes library the next time you sync iPhone with your computer. You can also install applications you’ve purchased or downloaded through iTunes on your computer when you sync with iPhone. Note: The App Store is not available in all regions. To use the App Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 40. You also need an iTunes Store account (not available in some countries) to download applications. By default, iPhone gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 159. Browsing and Searching Browse the featured selections to see new, notable, or recommended applications, or browse Top 25 to see the most popular applications. If you’re looking for a specific application, use Search. 167Browse applications: Tap Featured, Categories, or Top 25. Choose a category, or choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as New, What’s Hot, Genius, Top Paid, or Top Free. Browse using Genius: Tap Genius to see a list of recommended apps based on what’s already in your app collection. To turn Genius on, follow the onscreen instructions. Genius is a free service, but it requires an iTunes Store account. Search for applications: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. 168 Chapter 21 App StoreInfo Screen Tap any application in a list to see more information, such as the application’s price, screenshots, ratings, and other information. If you’ve already installed the application, “Installed” appears instead of the price on the Info screen. Email a link to the application’s Info page in iTunes: Tap “Tell a Friend” near the bottom of the Info screen. View screenshots: Swipe left or right over a screenshot to view additional screenshot pages. Double-tap to zoom in. Get ratings and read reviews: Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen. Report a problem: Tap “Report a Problem” near the bottom of the Info screen. Select a problem from the list or type optional comments, then tap Report. Chapter 21 App Store 169Downloading Applications When you find an application you want in the App Store, you can purchase and download it to iPhone. If the application is free, you can download it without charge after providing your iTunes account information. Once you download an application, it’s immediately installed on iPhone. Purchase and download an application: 1 Tap the price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now. 2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Downloads for purchase are charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional downloads made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Some applications allow you to make purchases within the application. You can restrict in-app purchases in Settings. See “Restrictions” on page 146. Some applications use push notifications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. See “Notifications” on page 140. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most App Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Redeem near the bottom of the Featured screen, then follow the onscreen instructions. See the status of downloading applications: After you begin downloading an application, its icon appears on the Home screen and shows a progress indicator. If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account). 170 Chapter 21 App StoreDeleting Applications You can delete applications you’ve installed from the App Store. If you delete an application, data associated with the application will no longer be available to iPhone, unless you reinstall the application and restore its data from a backup. You can reinstall an application and restore its data as long as you backed up iPhone with iTunes on your computer. (If you try to delete an application that hasn’t been backed up to your computer, an alert appears.) To retrieve the application data, you must restore iPhone from a backup containing the data. See “Restoring from a Backup” on page 203. Delete an App Store application: 1 Touch and hold any application icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle. 2 Tap in the corner of the application you want to delete. 3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement. When you delete an application, its data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Erase All Content and Settings” in iPhone settings. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Writing Reviews You can write and submit your own application reviews directly on iPhone. Write a review: 1 Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen. 2 On the Reviews screen, tap “Write a Review.” 3 Select the number of stars (1–5) for your rating of the application, and enter your nickname, a title for the review, and optional review comments. If you’ve written reviews before, the nickname field is already filled in. Otherwise, you’re asked to create a reviewer nickname. 4 Tap Send. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account and have purchased or downloaded the item in order to submit reviews. Chapter 21 App Store 171Updating Applications Whenever you access the App Store, it checks for updates to applications you’ve installed. The App Store also automatically checks for updates every week. The App Store icon shows the total number of application updates available. If an update is available and you access the App Store, the Updates screen appears immediately. Application updates are downloaded and automatically installed when you choose to update them. Application upgrades are new releases that can be purchased or downloaded through the App Store on iPhone or the iTunes Store on your computer. Update an application: 1 At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates. 2 Tap an application to see more information about the update. 3 Tap Update. Update all applications: At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates, then tap Update All. If you try to update an application purchased from a different iTunes Store account, you’re prompted for that account’s ID and password in order to download the update. Syncing Purchased Applications iTunes automatically syncs applications you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete applications from iPhone. Downloaded applications are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes. Applications are synced to the Applications list in your iTunes library. iTunes creates the list if it doesn’t exist. 172 Chapter 21 App StoreCompass 22 Getting Compass Readings The built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only) shows which direction you’re facing, along with the geographical coordinates of your current location. You can choose magnetic north, or have Compass adjust the declination to show true north. Important: The accuracy of digital compass headings may be negatively affected by magnetic or other environmental interference, including interference caused by the close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. The digital compass should only be used for basic navigation assistance and should not be solely relied on to determine precise locations, proximity, distance, or direction. The compass needs to be calibrated the first time you use it, and may need to be calibrated occasionally after that. iPhone alerts you whenever calibration is needed. Calibrate iPhone: Wave iPhone in a figure eight. You may be asked to move away from a source of interference. 173See which way you’re facing: Hold iPhone level to the ground. The compass needle rotates to point north. Your current direction appears at the top of the screen. The coordinates of your current location are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Switch between true north and magnetic north: Tap and tap the setting you want. Compass and Maps The icon at the bottom of the Compass screen lets you find your current location in Maps. Maps also takes advantage of the built-in compass to show which way you’re facing. See your current location in Maps: Tap . Maps opens and indicates your current location with a blue marker. 174 Chapter 22 CompassShow which way you’re facing: In Maps, tap again. (The icon changes to .) The angle shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle, the greater the accuracy. See “Finding and Viewing Locations” on page 114. Chapter 22 Compass 175Contacts 23 About Contacts Contact makes it easy to call, email, and text your friends and associates with iPhone. You can add contacts directly on iPhone, or sync contacts from applications on your computer, or with your MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Google, or Yahoo! accounts. You can open Contacts directly from the Home screen, or from within the Phone application. Adding Contacts You can add contacts to iPhone in the following ways: • In iTunes, sync contacts from Google or Yahoo!, or sync with applications on your computer (see “Syncing” on page 11) • Set up MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts on iPhone, with Contacts enabled (see “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16) • Install a profile that sets up an Exchange account, with Contacts enabled (see “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18) • Set up an LDAP account on iPhone • Enter contacts directly on iPhone • Import contacts from a SIM The number of contacts you can add is limited only by the amount of memory on iPhone. 176Set up an LDAP account: 1 In Settings, tap “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account. 2 Tap Other, then tap Add LDAP Account. 3 Enter your LDAP account information and tap Next to verify the account. 4 Tap Save. When you set up an LDAP account, you can view and search for contacts on your company or organization’s LDAP server. The server appears as a new group in Contacts. Since LDAP contacts aren’t downloaded to iPhone, you must have an Internet connection to view them. Check with your system administrator for specific account settings and other requirements (such as VPN). Import contacts from another phone’s SIM: In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Import SIM Contacts. The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which account you want to add the SIM contacts to. Important: iPhone doesn’t store contacts on its SIM. Searching Contacts You can search first, last, and company names in your contacts on iPhone. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone, you may also be able to search your enterprise Global Address List (GAL) for contacts in your organization. If you have an LDAP account set up on iPhone, you can search contacts on your organization’s LDAP server. When you enter search information, contacts with matching information appear immediately as you start to type. Search contacts: In Contacts, tap the search field at the top of any list of contacts and enter a first, last, or company name. (To scroll quickly to the top of the list, tap the status bar.) Search a GAL: Tap Groups, tap Directories at the bottom of the list, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit GAL contacts or save them to iPhone. Search an LDAP server: Tap Groups, tap the LDAP server name, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit LDAP contacts or save them to iPhone. Chapter 23 Contacts 177Managing Contacts on iPhone Add a contact on iPhone: Tap Contacts and tap . Delete a contact In Contacts, choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll down and tap Delete Contact. Add a contact from the keypad Tap Keypad, enter a number, then tap . Tap Create New Contact and enter the caller’s information, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact. Edit contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, then tap Edit. To add an item, tap . To delete an item, tap . Enter a pause in a number Tap , then tap Pause. One or more pauses may be required by a phone system before dialing an extension, for example. Pauses appear as commas when the number is saved. Add a recent caller’s phone number to your contacts Tap Recents and tap next to the number. Then tap Create New Contact, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact. Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Tap Contacts and choose a contact. 2 Tap Edit and tap Add Photo, or tap the existing photo. 3 Tap Take Photo to use the camera. Or tap Choose Existing Photo and choose a photo. 4 Drag and scale the photo as desired. 5 Tap Set Photo. 178 Chapter 23 ContactsUse a contact’s info screen: Tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap an item. Visit the website Call Send an email Send a text message Add a phone number to your favorites list See a map and get directions Note: The Contacts screen shown here includes the buttons across the bottom that are available when you view Contacts from within the Phone application. These buttons don’t appear if you open Contacts directly from the Home screen. A star next to a phone number means the number is in your favorites list. See your own phone number: Tap Contacts and scroll to the top of the list. (Not available in all regions.) Chapter 23 Contacts 179Nike + iPod 24 Activating Nike + iPod When activated in Settings, the Nike + iPod application appears on the Home screen (iPhone 3GS only). With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod application provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and calories burned during a running or walking workout. When iPhone is connected to iTunes on your computer, you can send your workout information to Nikeplus.com, where you can track your progress, set goals, and participate in challenges. See the Nike + iPod documentation for information about activating and using Nike + iPod. Turn Nike + iPod on or off: In Settings, choose Nike + iPod and turn Nike + iPod on or off. When Nike + iPod is turned on, its icon appears on the Home screen. 180Additional Nike + iPod Settings In Settings, choose Nike + iPod to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application. Choose a PowerSong: Choose PowerSong and select a song from your music library. Turn spoken feedback on or off: Choose Spoken Feedback and select a male or female voice to accompany your workout, or Off to turn off spoken feedback. Set a distance preference: Choose Distance, then select Miles or Kilometers to measure your workout distance. Set your weight: Choose Weight, then flick to enter your weight. Set the screen orientation: Choose Lock Screen, then select a screen orientation preference. Set up the Nike + iPod Sensor: Choose Sensor, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your sensor (sold separately). You can use a Nike+ compatible remote (sold separately) to control Nike + iPod wirelessly. Before using a remote for the first time, you must set it up on iPhone. Set up the Nike + iPod remote: Choose Remote, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your remote (third-party product sold separately). Chapter 24 Nike + iPod 181Accessibility 25 Accessibility Features In addition to the many features that make iPhone easy to use for everyone, accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS) are designed to make it easier for users with visual, auditory, or other physical disabilities to use iPhone. These accessibility features include: • VoiceOver • Zoom • White on Black • Mono Audio • Speak Auto-text With the exception of VoiceOver, these accessibility features work with all iPhone applications, including third-party applications you download from the App Store. VoiceOver works with all applications that come preinstalled on iPhone. In addition, third-party developers can use the iPhone Accessibility API to make their applications accessible for VoiceOver users. For more information about the accessibility features of iPhone, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. Each accessibility feature can be turned on or off in the Accessibility settings on iPhone. You can also turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes when iPhone is connected to your computer. Turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes: 1 Connect iPhone to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar. 3 In the Summary pane, click Configure Universal Access in the Options section. 1824 Select the accessibility features that you want to use and click OK. VoiceOver VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so that you can use iPhone without seeing it. VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which may be influenced by the Region Locale setting. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. VoiceOver tells you about each element on the screen as it’s selected. When an element is selected, it’s enclosed by a black rectangle (for the benefit of those who can see the screen) and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item. The enclosing rectangle is referred to as the VoiceOver cursor. If text is selected, VoiceOver reads the text. If a control (such as a button or switch) is selected and Speak Hints is turned on, VoiceOver may tell you the action of the item or provide instructions for you—for example, “double-tap to open.” When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound and automatically selects and speaks the first element of the screen (typically, the item in the upper-left corner). VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait, and when the screen is locked or unlocked. Setting Up VoiceOver Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures used to control iPhone. Once VoiceOver is turned on, you have to use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPhone—even to turn VoiceOver off again to resume standard operation. Turn VoiceOver on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and tap the VoiceOver On/Off switch. You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See “Triple-click Home” on page 191. Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Chapter 25 Accessibility 183Turn spoken hints on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and tap the Speak Hints On/Off switch. Spoken hints are turned on by default. Set the VoiceOver speaking rate: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and adjust the Speaking Rate slider. You can choose what kind of feedback you get when you type. You can set VoiceOver to speak characters, words, both, or nothing. If you choose to hear both characters and words, VoiceOver speaks each character as you type it, then speaks the whole word when you finish it by entering a space or punctuation. Choose typing feedback: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Typing Feedback, then choose Characters, Words, Characters and Words, or Nothing. Change the language spoken by VoiceOver: In Settings, choose General > International > Language, then select a language and tap OK. Some languages may be influenced by the Region Local setting. In Settings, choose General > International > Region Format and select the format. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. Practice gestures: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures, then tap Practice VoiceOver Gestures. Practice the gestures described in “VoiceOver Gestures,” below. When you’re finished practicing, tap Done. VoiceOver Gestures When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects. These and some additional gestures allow you to move around the screen and to control the individual elements when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include using two and three fingers to tap or flick. For best results when using two- and threefinger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between your fingers. You can use standard gestures when VoiceOver is turned on, by double-tapping and holding your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger. Then VoiceOver gestures resume. You can use many different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each hand. You can also use your thumbs. Try different techniques to discover which works best for you. If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tap and flicking gestures. To flick, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers. You can practice VoiceOver gestures in Settings: choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures and tap the Practice VoiceOver Gestures button. Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures: 184 Chapter 25 AccessibilityNavigate and Read • Tap: Speak item. • Flick right or left: Select the next or previous item. • Flick up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See “Rotor Control” on page 185. • Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item. • Two-finger flick up: Read all from top of screen. • Two-finger flick down: Read all from current position. • Three-finger flick up or down: Scroll one page at a time. • Three-finger flick right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home screen, Stocks, or Safari). • Three-finger tap: Speak the scroll status (which page or rows are visible). Select and Activate • Double-tap: Activate selected item. • Touch an item with one finger, tap the screen with another finger (“split-tapping”): Activate item. • Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture. The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPhone to interpret the subsequent gesture as standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, then without lifting your finger, drag your finger to slide a switch. • Two-finger double tap: Answer or end a call. Play or pause in iPod, YouTube, Voice Memos, or Photos. Take a picture (Camera). Start or pause recording in Camera or Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch. • Three-finger double tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver. • Three-finger triple tap: Turn the display on or off. Do single-finger flicking gestures quickly, to distinguish them from dragging gestures. Rotor Control The rotor control is an invisible dial that you can use to change the results of up and down flick gestures when VoiceOver is turned on. Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPhone screen to “turn” the dial to choose between options. Chapter 25 Accessibility 185The effect of the rotor depends on what you’re doing. For example, if you’re reading text in an email you received, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text spoken word-by-word or character-by-character when you flick up or down. If you’re browsing a webpage, use the rotor to choose whether you hear text word-by-word or character-by-character, hear just the headers, hear just the links (all of them, visited links, or links not yet visited), hear form elements, or hear descriptions of images. In other words, you can use the rotor setting to hear all the text, or to jump from one element to another of a certain type, such as headers or links. Rotor options depend on the context of what you’re doing. Reading text • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word Browsing a webpage • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word • Select and hear headers • Select and hear links • Select and hear form controls • Select and hear visited links • Select and hear links not visited • Select and hear images • Select and hear static text • Zoom in or out Entering text • Move insertion point and hear text character-by-character • Move insertion point and text word-by-word • Text editing functions • Auto-text Using a control (such as the spinner for setting the time in Clock) • Select and hear value character-by-character • Select and hear value word-by-word • Adjust the value of the control object 186 Chapter 25 AccessibilityUsing VoiceOver Select items on the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver identifies each element as you touch it. You can also move systematically from one element to the next by flicking left or right with a single finger. Elements are selected from leftto-right, top-to-bottom. Flick right to go to the next element, or flick left to go to the previous element. “Tap” a selected item when VoiceOver is turned on: Double-tap anywhere on the screen. Speak the text of an element, character by character or word by word: With the element selected, flick up or down with one finger. Flick down to read the next character, or flick up to read the previous character. Twist the rotor control to read word by word. Adjust a slider: With a single finger, flick up to increase the setting or down to decrease the setting. VoiceOver announces the setting as you adjust it. Scroll a list or area of the screen: Flick up or down with three fingers. Flick down to page down through the list, or flick up to page up through the list. When paging through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing rows 5 through 10”). You can also scroll continuously through a list, instead of paging through it. Doubletap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, you can move your finger up or down to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger. Use a list index: Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index cannot be selected by flicking between elements; you must touch the index directly to select it. With the index selected, flick up or down to move along the index. You can also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down. Unlock iPhone: Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen. Rearrange the Home screen: On the Home screen select the icon you want to move. Double-tap and hold, then drag the icon. VoiceOver speaks the row and column position as your drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move it to another page of the Home screen. When you’re finished rearranging the icons, press the Home button. Chapter 25 Accessibility 187Mute VoiceOver Double-tap with three fingers. Double-tap again with three fingers to turn speaking back on. To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the Ring/Silent switch to Silent. Stop speaking an item Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking automatically resumes when you select another item. Turn off the display while you use VoiceOver Triple-tap with three fingers. Triple-tap again with three fingers to turn on the display again. Speak entire screen from the top Flick up with two fingers. Speak from current item to bottom of screen Flick down with two fingers. Status information about iPhone can be heard by touching the top of the screen. This can include the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more. Entering and Editing Text When you select a text field with VoiceOver, you can use the onscreen keyboard to enter text. You can use the editing features of iPhone to cut, copy, or paste in the text field. Note: Safari doesn’t support copying webpage content. The editing features work only in editable text fields. Enter text: 1 Use VoiceOver to select an editable text field, then double tap to display the insertion point and bring up the onscreen keyboard. If the field already contains text, the insertion point is placed at the beginning or at the end of the text. Double-tap again to place the insertion point at the opposite end. VoiceOver tells you the position of the insertion point. The insertion point and onscreen keyboard may appear automatically when you select a text field. VoiceOver announces when you’re in editing mode. 2 To type, select a key on the keyboard by flicking left or right, then double-tap to enter the character. Or drag you finger around the keyboard to select a key, and, while holding the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger to enter the character. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when it’s entered. To enter an accented character, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound that indicates the alternate characters have appeared, then drag left or right to select and hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection. 188 Chapter 25 AccessibilityMove the insertion point: Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or backward in the text. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and speaks the character that the insertion point moved across. Use the rotor to choose whether you want to move the insertion point by character or by word. Select text: Use the rotor to choose edit. Flick up or down to choose between the Select and Select All functions, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, the entire text is selected. Pinch to increase or decrease the selection. Cut, Copy, or Paste: Make sure the rotor is set to edit. With text selected, flick up or down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap. Undo: Shake iPhone, flick left or right to choose the action to undo, then double-tap. Using Maps With VoiceOver, you can zoom in or out, select pins, and get information about locations. Zoom in or out: Use the rotor to choose zoom mode, then flick up or down to zoom in or out. Select a pin: Touch a pin, or flick left or right to move from one item to another. Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the information flag. Flick left or right to select the flag, then double-tap to display the information page. Editing Videos and Voice Memos You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Camera videos and Voice Memo recordings. Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap. Trim a video: While viewing a video, double-tap the screen to display the video controls. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Then flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim and double-tap. Zoom Many iPhone applications let you zoom in and out specific elements. For example, you can double-tap or use the pinch gesture to expand webpage columns in Safari. Zoom is a special accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any application you’re using to help you see what’s on the display. Chapter 25 Accessibility 189Turn Zoom on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Zoom and tap the Zoom On/Off switch. Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Zoom in or out: Double-tap the screen with three fingers. By default, the screen is magnified by 200 percent. If you manually change the magnification (by using the tapand-drag gesture, described below), iPhone automatically returns to that magnification when you zoom in by double-tapping with three fingers. Increase magnification: With three fingers, tap and drag toward the top of the screen (to increase magnification) or toward the bottom of the screen (to decrease magnification). The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger. Move around the screen: When zoomed in, drag or flick the screen with three fingers. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more of the screen. Hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side of the screen image. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you open a new screen, Zoom always goes to the top-middle of the screen. White on Black Use White on Black to invert the colors on the iPhone display, which may make it easier to read the screen. The screen looks like a photographic negative when White on Black is turned on. Invert the screen’s colors: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the “White on Black” switch. Mono Audio Mono Audio combines the sound of the left and right channels into a mono signal played on both sides. This enables users with hearing impairment in one ear to hear the entire sound signal with the other ear. Turn Mono Audio on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Mono Audio switch. Speak Auto-text Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPhone makes when you’re typing. Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Speak Auto-text switch. Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver or Zoom. 190 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTriple-click Home Triple-click Home provides an easy way to turn some of the Accessibility features on or off when you press the Home button quickly three times. You can set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off, turn White on Black on or off, or present the options to: • Turn VoiceOver on or off • Turn Zoom on or off • Turn White on Black on or off Triple-click Home is turned off by default. Set the Triple-click Home function: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home and choose the function you want. Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features Many features available on all models of iPhone help make iPhone accessible to all users, including those with visual or auditory impairments. Closed Captioning You can turn on closed captioning for videos in iPod settings. See “Video” on page 158. Voice Control Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control iPod music playback by using voice commands. See “Voice Dialing” on page 48, and “Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77. Large Phone Keypad Make phone calls simply by tapping entries in your contacts and favorites lists. When you need to dial a number, iPhone’s large numeric keypad makes it easy. See “Phone Calls” on page 47. Widescreen Keyboards Several applications let you rotate iPhone when you’re typing so that you can use a larger keyboard: • Mail • Safari • Messages • Notes • Contacts Chapter 25 Accessibility 191Visual Voicemail The play and pause controls in visual voicemail let you control the playback of messages. Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar to repeat a portion of the message that’s hard to understand. See “Checking Voicemail” on page 52. Assignable Ringtones You can assign distinctive ringtones to individuals in your contacts list for audible caller ID. You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on iPhone. See “Purchasing Ringtones” on page 162. Instant Messaging (IM) Chat The App Store features many Internet Messaging (IM) applications such as AIM, BeejiveIM, ICQ, and Yahoo! Messenger that are optimized for iPhone. Minimum Font Size for Mail Messages To increase readability, set a minimum font size for Mail message text to Large, Extra Large, or Giant. See “Mail” on page 152. TTY Support (Available in Some Areas) Use iPhone in TTY mode with the iPhone TTY Adapter (available separately) to use a Teletype (TTY) machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine” on page 154. Universal Access in Mac OS X Take advantage of the Universal Access features in Mac OS X when you use iTunes to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPhone. In the Finder, choose Help > Mac Help, then search for “universal access.” For more information about iPhone and Mac OS X accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. 192 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTroubleshooting A Appendix Apple iPhone Support Site Comprehensive support information is available online at www.apple.com/support/iphone. General Low-Battery Image Appears iPhone is low on power and needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43. or iPhone Doesn’t Respond • iPhone may be low on power. Connect iPhone to your computer or to its power adapter to charge. See “Charging the Battery” on page 43. • Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application you were using quits. • If that doesn’t work, turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/ Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • If that doesn’t work, reset iPhone. Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. 193iPhone Still Doesn’t Respond After Reset • Reset iPhone settings. From the Home screen choose Settings > General > Reset > Reset All Settings. All your preferences are reset, but your data and media aren’t deleted. • If that doesn’t work, erase all content on iPhone. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. • If that doesn’t work, restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. “This accessory is not made to work with iPhone” Appears Make sure the dock connector is free of debris. If you connect iPhone to an accessory not specifically made for it, iPhone may ask if you want to turn on airplane mode. This is to eliminate radio interference from cellular signals coming from iPhone. You may be able to use iPhone with the accessory whether or not you turn on airplane mode. However, the accessory may not charge iPhone. If you turn on airplane mode, you won’t be able to make calls, send or receive text messages, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth devices with iPhone until you disconnect iPhone from the accessory or turn off airplane mode. “This accessory is not supported by iPhone” Appears The accessory you attached may not work with iPhone. Make sure the dock connector is free of debris. Connect-to-iTunes Screen Appears iPhone needs to be activated. Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes if it doesn’t open automatically. iPhone Is Too Warm If the interior temperature of iPhone 3G or later exceeds normal operating temperatures, you may experience the following as it attempts to regulate its temperature: • iPhone stops charging • the display dims • the cellular signal is weak • a temperature warning screen appears Important: You cannot use iPhone while the temperature warning screen is displayed except to make an emergency call. If none of the above measures succeeds in lowering the internal temperature, iPhone automatically goes into a deep sleep mode until it cools. You cannot make an emergency call when iPhone is in this mode. Move iPhone to a cooler location and wait a few minutes before trying to use iPhone again. 194 Appendix A TroubleshootingiTunes and Syncing iPhone Doesn’t Appear in iTunes • The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer. • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. Syncing Doesn’t Work • The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer. • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. Contacts, Calendars, or Bookmarks Don’t Sync • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. Appendix A Troubleshooting 195Yahoo! or Google Contacts Doesn’t Sync iTunes may not be able to connect with Yahoo! or Google. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet, and that you’ve entered the correct ID and password in iTunes. Connect iPhone to your computer, click the Info tab in iTunes, click Configure in the Contacts section, then enter your current ID and password. Yahoo! Address Book Still Has Contacts Deleted From iPhone Yahoo! Address Book doesn’t allow contacts containing a Messenger ID to be deleted through syncing. To delete a contact containing a Messenger ID, log in to your Yahoo! account online and delete the contact using Yahoo! Address Book. Phone and Voicemail Can’t Make or Receive Calls • Check the cell signal icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. If there are no bars, or if it says “No service,” try moving to a different location. If you’re indoors, try going outdoors or moving closer to a window. • Check to make sure you’re in an area with network coverage. Go to your carrier’s website to see network coverage areas. • Make sure airplane mode isn’t on. From the Home screen choose Settings, then turn airplane mode off. If that doesn’t work, turn airplane mode on, wait 15 seconds, then turn airplane mode off again. • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • There may be a problem with your wireless service. Call your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. • Restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Visual Voicemail Isn’t Available Visual Voicemail is delivered over the cellular data network. Because Data Roaming is turned off by default, you may not have access to the Internet when traveling abroad unless you turn Data Roaming on. In Settings choose General > Network, then tap Data Roaming. Important: Data roaming charges may apply when Data Roaming is on. 196 Appendix A TroubleshootingVisual Voicemail may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your carrier for more information. You Can’t Remember Your Voicemail Password If iPhone prompts you for your password when you tap Voicemail and you don’t remember your password, tap for instructions on resetting it. Voicemail Service Is Called When You Tap Voicemail If the voice instructions prompt you, enter your voicemail password. Otherwise, wait until you hear any voice instruction, then end the call. After a time, Voicemail should become available again. This may occur if you removed the SIM card from iPhone and replace it with another SIM card. Safari, Text, Mail, and Contacts Websites, Text, or Email Aren’t Available • Check the cell signal icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. If there are no bars, or if it says “No service,” try moving to a different location. If you’re indoors, try going outdoors or moving closer to a window. • Check to make sure you’re in an area with network coverage. Go to your carrier’s website to see network coverage areas. • If the cellular network isn’t available, connect to a Wi-Fi network if possible. • Make sure airplane mode isn’t on. From the Home screen choose Settings, then turn airplane mode off. If that doesn’t work, turn airplane mode on, wait 15 seconds, then turn airplane mode off again. • Make sure to include an area code for every phone number in your contacts list that you use to send or receive text messages. • Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked. Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card documentation or contact your carrier. • There may be a problem with your wireless service. Call your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. Appendix A Troubleshooting 197• If you’re traveling abroad, you may not have Internet access because Data Roaming is turned off (the default). Turn Data Roaming on or connect to a Wi-Fi network. To turn Data Roaming on, in Settings choose General > Network and tap Data Roaming. Data roaming charges may apply. Important: Data roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, turn Data Roaming off. • Restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204. Can’t Send Email If iPhone is unable to send email, try the following: • In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and select the account you’re trying to use. Tap Account Info, then tap SMTP under Outgoing Mail Server. Under Other SMTP Server, tap the SMTP server for your carrier, then tap to turn the server on. The Under Other SMTP settings also allow you to set up additional SMTP servers. Contact your carrier or Internet service provider for configuration information. • Set up your email account directly on iPhone instead of syncing it from iTunes. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPhone is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account. • Turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • Turn off Wi-Fi so iPhone is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data network. In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t send email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account. Can’t Receive Email If iPhone is unable to receive email, try the following: • If you’re using one or more computers to check the same email account, that may be creating a lock-out issue. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS2621. 198 Appendix A Troubleshooting• Set up your email account directly on iPhone instead of syncing it from iTunes. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPhone is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account. • Turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • Turn off Wi-Fi so iPhone is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data network. In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t receive email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account. Email Attachment Won’t Open The file type may not be supported. iPhone supports the following email attachment file formats: .doc Microsoft Word .docx Microsoft Word (XML) .htm webpage .html webpage .key Keynote .numbers Numbers .pages Pages .pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat .ppt Microsoft PowerPoint .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML) .rtf Rich Text Format .txt text .vcf contact information .xls Microsoft Excel .xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML) Appendix A Troubleshooting 199GAL Contacts Don’t Appear Check your Microsoft Exchange settings to make sure you’re on the right server. In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose an account to display its settings. If you’re trying to search for GAL contacts in Contacts, tap Groups and tap Directories at the bottom of the list. Sound, Music, and Video No Sound • Unplug and reconnect the headset. Make sure the connector is pushed in all the way. • Make sure the volume isn’t turned down all the way. • Music on iPhone might be paused. Try pressing the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to resume playback. Or from the Home screen, tap iPod, tap Now Playing, then tap . • Check to see if a volume limit is set. From the Home screen choose Settings > iPod > Volume Limit. For more information, see “Music” on page 158. • Make sure you’re using the latest version of iTunes (go to www.apple.com/itunes). • If you’re using the optional dock’s line out port, make sure your external speakers or stereo are turned on and working properly. Pressing Mic Button Doesn’t Resume Music Playback iPhone goes to sleep after music has been paused for five minutes. Press the Home or Sleep/Wake button to wake up iPhone. Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play The song may have been encoded in a format that iPhone doesn’t support. The following audio file formats are supported by iPhone. These include formats for audiobooks and podcasting: • AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P, up to 320 Kbps) • Apple Lossless (a high-quality compressed format) • MP3 (up to 320 Kbps) • MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) • WAV • AA (audible.com spoken word, formats 2, 3, and 4) • AAX (audible.com spoken word, AudibleEnhanced format) • AIFF 200 Appendix A TroubleshootingThe following video file formats are supported by iPhone: • H.264 (Baseline Profile Level 3.0) • MPEG-4 (Simple Profile) A song encoded using Apple Lossless format has full CD-quality sound, but takes up only about half as much space as a song encoded using AIFF or WAV format. The same song encoded in AAC or MP3 format takes up even less space. When you import music from a CD using iTunes, it’s converted to AAC format by default. Using iTunes for Windows, you can convert nonprotected WMA files to AAC or MP3 format. This can be useful if you have a library of music encoded in WMA format. iPhone doesn’t support WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 audio files, or audible.com format 1. If you have a song or video in your iTunes library that isn’t supported by iPhone, you may be able to convert it to a format iPhone supports. See iTunes Help for more information. iTunes Stores iTunes Store Isn’t Available To use the iTunes Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 40. The iTunes Store isn’t available in all countries. Can’t Purchase Content To purchase content from the iTunes Store or App Store, you must have an iTunes Store account. Open iTunes on your computer and choose Store > Create Account. You can also set up an account on iPhone. See “Viewing Account Information” on page 166. Note: The iTunes Store is available only in some countries. Removing the SIM Card If you need to send your iPhone in for service, or if you want to loan your iPhone to someone and you still want to be able to make calls, you may be able to use the SIM card inside iPhone with another phone. Appendix A Troubleshooting 201Remove the SIM card: Insert the end of the SIM eject tool (or a small paper clip) into the hole on the SIM tray. Press firmly and push it straight in until the tray pops out. SIM eject SIM tray tool SIM card Backing Up iPhone iTunes creates backups of settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information on iPhone. You can use a backup to restore these items to your iPhone after a software restore or to transfer the information to another iPhone. Backing up iPhone or restoring from a backup is not the same as syncing content and other items (such as music, podcasts, ringtones, photos, videos, and applications that you download via iTunes) with your iTunes library. Backups include settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information that resides on iPhone. You can restore these items from a backup using iTunes, but you may also have to sync your iTunes library content again. Applications downloaded from the App Store are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes. Creating Backups Backups can be created in the following ways: • Once iPhone has been configured to sync with a particular computer, iTunes automatically makes a backup of iPhone on that computer when you sync. iTunes won’t automatically back up an iPhone that isn’t configured to sync with that computer. If you’ve configured iPhone to automatically sync with iTunes on a specific computer, iTunes will back up iPhone every time you connect it to that computer. Automatic syncing is turned on by default. iTunes only makes one backup each time you connect, even if you sync multiple times before disconnecting. • If you choose to update the software on iPhone, iTunes will back up iPhone automatically, even if it isn’t configured to sync with iTunes on that computer. • If you choose to restore the software on iPhone, iTunes asks if you want to back up iPhone before restoring. If you use a Bluetooth headset or car kit with iPhone and you restore settings, you must pair the Bluetooth device with iPhone again to use it. 202 Appendix A TroubleshootingFor more information about backups, including the settings and information stored in a backup, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1766. Restoring from a Backup You can restore the settings, application data, and other information from a backup, or use this feature to transfer these items to another iPhone. Restore iPhone from a backup: 1 Connect iPhone to the computer you normally sync with. 2 In iTunes, Control-click iPhone in the sidebar and choose “Restore from Backup” from the menu that appears. 3 Choose the backup that you want to restore from the pop-up menu, then click Restore. If your backup is encrypted, you’ll need to enter your password. After restoring from a backup, previous data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Important: Restoring iPhone from a backup restores all data in the backup, including data for other applications. If you choose an old backup, restoring from it could replace the data for applications with data that is not current. Removing a Backup You can remove a backup of iPhone from the list of backups in iTunes. You may want to do this, for example, if a backup was created on someone else’s computer. Remove a backup: 1 In iTunes, open iTunes Preferences. • Windows: Choose Edit > Preferences. • Mac: Choose iTunes > Preferences. 2 Click Devices (iPhone does not need to be connected). 3 Select the backup you want to remove, then click Delete Backup. 4 Confirm you wish to remove the selected backup by clicking Delete Backup. 5 Click OK to close the iTunes Preferences Window. Appendix A Troubleshooting 203Updating and Restoring iPhone Software You can use iTunes to update or reinstall iPhone software, restore default settings, and delete all data on iPhone. • If you update, the iPhone software is updated. Your downloaded applications, settings, and data aren’t affected. Note: In some cases, an update may also include restoring iPhone. • If you restore, the latest version of iPhone software is reinstalled, settings are restored to their defaults, and data stored on iPhone is deleted, including downloaded applications, songs, videos, contacts, photos, calendar information, and any other data. If you’ve backed up iPhone with iTunes on your computer, you can restore data from the backup at the end of the restore process. Deleted data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user interface, but isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPhone” on page 149. Update or restore iPhone: 1 Make sure you have an Internet connection and have installed the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes. 2 Connect iPhone to your computer. 3 Select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar and click the Summary tab. 4 Click “Check for Update.” iTunes tells you if there’s a newer version of the iPhone software available. 5 Click Update to install the latest version of the software. Or click Restore to restore. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the restore process. For more information about updating and restoring iPhone software, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1414. 204 Appendix A TroubleshootingOther Resources B Appendix Safety, Software, and Service Information The following table describes where to get more iPhone-related safety, software, and service information. To learn about Do this Using iPhone safely See the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone for the latest safety and regulatory information. iPhone service and support, tips, forums, and Apple software downloads Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone. Service and support from your carrier Contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website. The latest information about iPhone Go to www.apple.com/iphone. Using iTunes Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For an online iTunes tutorial (available in some areas only), go to www.apple.com/support/itunes. MobileMe Go to www.me.com. Using iPhoto on Mac OS X Open iPhoto and choose Help > iPhoto Help. Using Address Book on Mac OS X Open Address Book and choose Help > Address Book Help. Using iCal on Mac OS X Open iCal and choose Help > iCal Help. 205To learn about Do this Microsoft Outlook, Windows Address Book, Adobe Photoshop Album, and Adobe Photoshop Elements See the documentation that came with those applications. Finding your iPhone serial number or International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number You can find your iPhone serial and IMEI numbers on the iPhone packaging. Or, on iPhone, choose Settings > General > About from the Home screen. In iTunes on your computer, hold down the Control key and choose Help > About iTunes (Windows) or iTunes > About iTunes (Mac), then release the Control key. (Press the Space bar to pause the scrolling.) Obtaining warranty service First follow the advice in this guide and online resources. Then go to www.apple.com/support or see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone. Battery replacement service Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/ battery. Using iPhone in an enterprise environment Go to www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise. Viewing the User Guide on iPhone The iPhone User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPhone, is available at help.apple.com/iphone. View the guide on iPhone: In Safari, tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark. Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPhone User Guide is available in many languages. View guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want. Disposal and Recycling Information Apple Used Mobile Phone Recycling Program (available in some areas): For free recycling of your old mobile phone, a prepaid shipping label, and instructions, see: www.apple.com/environment/recycling 206 Appendix B Other ResourcesiPhone Disposal and Recycling: You must dispose of iPhone properly according to local laws and regulations. Because iPhone contains electronic components and a battery, iPhone must be disposed of separately from household waste. When iPhone reaches its end of life, contact local authorities to learn about disposal and recycling options, or simply drop it off at your local Apple retail store or return it to Apple. The battery will be removed and recycled in an environmentally friendly manner. For more information, see: www.apple.com/environment/recycling European Union—Electronics and Battery Disposal Information: This symbol means that according to local laws and regulations your product and its battery should be recycled separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities for the recycling of electronic equipment. The improper disposal of waste electronic equipment from the consumer may be subject to fines. The separate collection and recycling of your product and its battery at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For collection and recycling schemes for iPhone, go to: www.apple.com/environment/recycling/nationalservices/europe.html Battery Replacement for iPhone: The rechargeable battery in iPhone should be replaced only by an authorized service provider. For battery replacement services go to: www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Türkiye: EEE yönetmelig?ine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Es¸yalarda Bazi Zararli Maddelerin Kullaniminin Sinirlandirilmasina Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur. Apple and the Environment At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information go to: www.apple.com/environment Appendix B Other Resources 207Index 3G 21, 41 12-hour time 147 24-hour time 147 A accessibility features 182 Mono Audio 190 setting up iPhone using VoiceOver 11 settings 149 Speak Auto-text 190 Triple-click Home 191 VoiceOver 183 White on Black 190 Zoom 189 accounts 16, 150 “push” 18, 151 activating iPhone 10 adjusting brightness 142 Adobe Photoshop 97 Adobe Photoshop Elements 15 airplane mode settings 138 status icon 21 turning on 138 alarms deleting 133 setting 133 status icon 22 turning on or off 133 album covers 78 album tracks 79 alert voicemail 52 alerts adjusting volume 27, 141 calendar 96 turning on or off 141 alternate audio language 83 answering calls 39 anti-phishing. See Safari fraud warning App Store about 167 browsing 167 deleting applications 171 Genius 168 store account 159, 167 syncing 12 syncing purchased content 172 updating applications 172 verifying purchases 166 applications 23 deleting 171 attachments email 62 audio alternate language 83 mono 190 audio file formats, supported 201 audiobooks syncing 12 Auto-Brightness 142 AutoFill 69, 156 auto-lock, setting time for 145 AV cables 84 B backing up iPhone 14 backups creating 202 removing 203 restoring from 203 battery charging 43 low on power 44, 193 maximizing life 44 replacing 44, 206 status icon 22 Bluetooth finding address 143 headset 26, 38, 39, 48, 49, 50, 74, 77, 78, 82, 104, 108, 126, 200, 202 routing calls back through iPhone 56 status icon 22 turning on or off 144 unpairing device 56 Index 208bookmarking map locations 119 webpages 69 YouTube videos 108, 109 bookmarks, syncing 12, 14, 69 brightness adjusting 142 setting to adjust automatically 142 browser cache, clearing 157 browsing album covers 78 App Store 167 iTunes Music Store 161 YouTube videos 107 businesses, finding 121 buttons, changing 85 C cable, Dock Connector to USB 11, 21 cache, clearing browser 157 Calculator 135 scientific 136 Calendar about 91 searching 93 views 92 See also events calendars, syncing 12, 14, 91 call forwarding 154 call options 49 call waiting, turning on or off 154 caller ID, hiding or showing 154 calls no service 196 See also phone Camera deleting pictures 104 exposure 104 focus 104 seeing photos and videos you’ve taken 104, 105 taking pictures 104 upload pictures to your computer 106 caps lock, enabling 148 carrier services 155 Cc 152 cell signal, status icon 21 cellular network 41 charging battery 43 cleaning iPhone 46 Clock 132 clocks, adding 132 closed captioning, turning on or off 158 Compass current coordinates 174 heading 174 True and Magnetic North 174 component AV cable 84 composite AV cable 84 computer requirements 9 conference calls 50 configuration profiles 18 connecting to Internet 40 contacts adding and editing 178 adding from Maps 119 adding from text messages 89 assigning photo to 102 favorite 54 GAL (Global Address List) 59, 177, 200 LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 177 seeing location of 119 send info by email 60 setting how displayed 153 setting how sorted 153 syncing 12, 13, 14, 176 using to call someone 47 Yahoo! Address Book 14 controls, using 28 converting videos 73 converting unprotected WMA files 201 cookies 157 copying images 100 photos and videos in MMS messages 88 text 33 Cover Flow 78 current approximate location 119, 174 cutting and pasting text 33 D data, erasing 17, 45, 145, 149 date and time, setting 147 date format 148 debug console 157 declining calls 49 deleting alarms 133 all content and settings 45, 149 applications from the App Store 171 clocks 132 contacts 178 contacts from Favorites 54 email account 151 email messages 64 notes 130 pictures 104 playlists 81 removing 203 songs from a playlist 81 videos 84 Index 209YouTube playlists 110 YouTube videos from a playlist 110 developer settings 157 Dialing a phone number 47 directions, getting 119 disconnecting iPhone from computer 19 display freezes 194 Dock Connector 125 Dock Connector to USB cable 11, 21 downloading applications 170 podcasts 164 E EDGE 40 editing text 33 text conversations 89 videos 106 effects sounds, turning on or off 141 email accounts syncing 12 emergency calls 51 ending calls 39 enterprise, using iPhone 206 equalizer 158 erasing data 17, 45, 145, 149 events, calendar 94 Exchange. See Microsoft Exchange exposure 104 F favorites calling a contact from 47, 54 managing 54 sending text messages 87 Fetch New Data 151 file formats, supported 62, 199, 200, 201 Find My iPhone 17, 45 focus 104 force quit an application 46 formats date, time, and telephone number 148 forwarding messages 60 G GAL (Global Address List) 59, 177, 200 Genius Mixes 73, 80 Genius playlists 76, 79 Genius, App Store 168 gestures, VoiceOver 184 getting help 205 getting started 9 Google search engine 156 Google Contacts 14, 196 searching the web 69 GPRS 40 GPS 116 grab points 34 H hands-free phone calls 50, 144 headset about 21, 39 center button 21, 26, 38, 39, 48, 49, 50, 74, 77, 78, 82, 104, 108, 126, 200 using with Voice Memos 125 headset button. See mic button help, getting 205 hold, putting calls on 50 Home screen 23, 29 adding web clips 70 customizing 25 hybrid view 118 I iCal 14, 205 ICCID number 143 icons applications 23 status 21 See also buttons images copying 100 pasting 100 IMAP accounts 59 searching email 64 IMEI number 143 installing applications from the App Store 170 configuration profiles 18 international keyboards 35, 148 Internet, connecting to 40 iPhoto 15, 205 iPod changing browse buttons 85 converting videos for iPhone 73 deleting videos 84 Genius Mixes 80 Genius playlists 79 headset controls 39 on-the-go playlists 81, 110 playing songs using Voice Control 77 repeating or shuffling songs 76 searching 79, 83 settings 158 Shake to Shuffle 73, 158 sleep timer 84 210 IndexiTunes Store about 160 account 10, 159, 160, 163, 167 browsing 161 checking download status 165 purchasing ringtones 162 purchasing songs and albums 162 streaming or downloading podcasts 164 syncing purchased content 165 verifying purchases 166 iTunes U syncing 12, 15, 71 iTunes getting help 205 iPhone doesn’t appear in 195 settings panes 13 K keyboards Emoji 35 international 35, 148 typing on 32 keypad, numbers 50 L LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 177 links in email 62 on webpages 67 location. See Maps Location Services 144 location warnings 150 locking iPhone 22, 26, 27 lyrics, displaying 75 M Mac system requirements 9 magnetic north 173 Mail account setup 59, 150 attachments 62, 199 Cc 152 checking for new messages 60, 64 deleting email account 151 deleting messages 64 forwarding messages 60 links 62 load additional messages 61 marking messages as unread 63 organizing email 65 password settings 151 problems opening an attachment 199 reading messages 61 replying to messages 60 resizing text column 61 saving drafts 60 searching 64 seeing recipients 63 sending email to someone you’ve texted 89 sending messages 59 sending photos and videos 60 sending webpage addresses 67 sending YouTube video links 108, 109 settings 150, 151 share contact information 60 signatures 152 storing email on iPhone or server 151 syncing email account settings 12 Yahoo! email account 18 zooming in a message 61 Maps adding location to a contact 119 bookmarking location 119 current approximate location 116, 119 dropped pin 117 finding businesses 121 finding location 114 getting directions 119 GPS 116 hybrid view 118 satellite view 118 seeing location of a contact 119 share location 119 traffic conditions 121 zooming 115 Messages contacting someone you’ve texted 89 editing conversations 89 following links in messages 89 previews 90 replying to messages 87 saving a photo or video clip 88 saving conversations 87 sending a photo or video clip 88 sending messages 86 setting alert sounds 90 settings 157 show earlier messages 87 mic button 39 microphone about 39 built-in 125 muting 50 microphone, external 125 Microsoft Excel 156 Microsoft Exchange 16, 23, 25, 59, 176 push accounts 18 searching email 64 setting up account 16 syncing 16, 57, 91 Microsoft Internet Explorer 14, 69 Index 211Microsoft Outlook 14, 15 Microsoft Word 156 missed calls number of 52 returning 47 MMS 23, 24, 86, 88, 89, 97, 98, 100, 101, 116, 119, 128, 157 See also Messages MobileMe 16, 23, 25, 176 getting help 205 push accounts 18 searching email 64 security features 17, 45 sending photos to a gallery 100 setting up account 16 syncing 57, 69, 91 model number 142 modem firmware version 143 Mono Audio 190 movies rented 15, 83 syncing 12 music lyrics 75 managing manually 14 previewing 162 purchasing 162 searching 79 syncing 12, 15, 71 See also iPod music videos syncing 12 muting a call 50 N navigating. See panning, scrolling Network activity status icon 22 networks 139 Nike + iPod settings 159, 181 north, true and magnetic 173 Notes 130 searching 131 syncing 12 NTSC 159 O on-the-go playlists 81 orientation, changing 66 Outlook Express. See Windows Address Book Outlook. See Microsoft Outlook overview, iPhone applications 23 P pairing with Bluetooth headset 55 PAL 159 panning maps 115 webpages 67 parental controls. See Restrictions passcode 145 password changing 155 voicemail 197 pasting images 100 photos and videos in MMS messages 88 text 33 pausing songs and videos 39 PC system requirements 9 phone network name 142 Phone adding and editing contacts 178 answering calls 39, 40, 49 call waiting 154 calling internationally 56 calling someone you’ve texted 89 carrier services 155 changing voicemail password 155 conference calls 50 declining calls 40, 49 emergency calls 51 ending calls 39, 40, 50 forwarding calls 154 hands-free 50 hiding or showing caller ID 154 locking SIM card 155 making calls 47 missed calls 52 muting calls 50 putting calls on hold 50 ring mode 54 routing calls back through iPhone 56 second calls 50 setting up voicemail 52 settings 153 silencing calls 49 silent mode 54 switching between calls 40, 50 turning on vibrate 54 unpairing Bluetooth device 56 using favorites 54 using speakerphone 50 using TTY machine 154 voice dialing 48 voicemail 51, 52 voicemail alerts 52 photo albums 99 212 Indexphotos saving MMS attachments 88 sending in MMS messages 88 Photos assigning photos to contacts 102 emailing photos 100 playing music during slideshow 100 sending in email messages 60 settings 99, 159 syncing 12, 15, 97 using photos as wallpaper 102 viewing slideshows 99 zooming photos 99 See also Camera pictures taking 104 See also Camera, Photos PIN number 155 playlists, making 81 plug-ins 156 podcasts downloading 164 streaming 164 syncing 12, 15, 71 pop-ups 156 power adapter 21 power, low 44 previewing music 162 ringtones 162 videos 163 previewings text messages 90 problems. See troubleshooting purchased content syncing 165, 172 purchasing applications 167 iTunes content 72 music 160, 162 ringtones 162 videos 163 push accounts 18, 151 R reading email 61 Recents, using to call someone 47 rechargeable batteries 44 removing backups 203 SIM card 201 rented movies 83 renting movies 15 videos 163 repeating 76 replacing battery 44, 206 replying to messages 60 requirements for using iPhone 9 reset iPhone 46 resizing webpage columns 67 restarting 46 restoring iPhone software 204 restoring settings and information 203 restrictions, setting 146 ring mode 28, 54, 141 ringer adjusting volume 27, 141 turning on or off 141 Ring/Silent switch 28, 54 ringtones previewing 162 purchasing 162 setting 55, 141 syncing 12 rotor control 185 routing calls back through iPhone 56 S Safari AutoFill 69, 156 bookmarking webpages 69 clearing cache 157 cookies 157 Debug Console 157 developer settings 157 fraud warning 156 Home screen web clips 70 navigating 67 opening webpages 66, 68 plug-ins 156 pop-ups 156 reloading webpages 67 resizing columns to fit screen 67 saving images to your Photo Library 67 searching the web 69 security 156 sending webpage addresses in email 67 settings 156 stopping webpages from loading 67 syncing bookmarks 12, 14 typing in text fields 68 zooming webpages 67 satellite view 118 screen 142 setting to adjust automatically 142 using 28 screen reader 11 scrolling about 29 maps 115 webpages 67 Index 213search engine 156 searching App Store 167 calendars 93 global 37 iTunes Music Store 161 Mail messages 64 music 79 notes 131 videos 83 searching the web 69 searching YouTube videos 107 security erase data after ten failed passcode attempts 145 features 45 Find My iPhone 17, 45 setting passcode for iPhone 145 web 156 selecting text 34 sending email 59 photos and video clips 88 photos from Photos 100 text messages 86 voice memos 88 serial number, finding 142, 206 service and support information 205 settings accessibility 149 accounts 150 airplane mode 138 alarms 133 alerts 90, 96 auto-capitalization 148 auto-correction 33, 148 auto-lock 145 Bluetooth 144 brightness 142 Calendar 92, 96 date and time 92, 147 developer 157 email server 151 Fetch New Data 151 international 148 iPod 158 language 148 location services 144 Mail, Contacts, Calendars 150 Mail 150 messages 157 Nike + iPod 159, 181 notifications 140 passcode lock 145 Phone 153 Photos 99, 159 resetting 149 restrictions 146 Safari 69, 156 screen brightness 142 security 156 Shake to Shuffle 158 slideshow 99 sound 90, 96 Store 159 temperature 124 TV out 159 usage statistics 143 vibrate 54 video 158 VoiceOver 182 VPN 144 wallpaper 102, 142 Wi-Fi 139 Shake to Shuffle 73, 158 sharing photos and videos in email messages 60 photos and videos in MMS messages 88 shuffling songs 76 signatures, email 152 silencing calls 49 silent mode 28, 54, 141 SIM card, locking 155 sleep. See locking iPhone sleep timer 84 slideshows 99, 100 settings 159 SMS 86 See also Messages software getting help 205 updating and restoring 204 version 142 sound adjusting ringer and alerts volume 141 adjusting volume 27 no sound 200 setting limit 158 Sound Check 158 sound effects 27 sounds adjusting volume 40 calendar alert 96 setting ringtone 141 turning on or off 141 Speak Auto-text 190 speakerphone 50 SSL 151 star next to a phone number 179 Starbucks, browsing and purchasing music 161 status icons 21 stock information, Yahoo! 113 Stocks, adding and deleting quotes 112 214 Indexstopwatch, using 133 storage capacity 142 Store, settings 159 streaming podcasts 164 subtitles 83 surfing the web 66 switching between calls 50 syncing calendars 91 getting calls during 19 Google Contacts 14, 196 iTunes library contents 12 Microsoft Exchange 16, 57, 91 MobileMe 16, 57, 91 photos 97 preventing 15 purchased songs 165 “Sync in progress” message 19 webpage bookmarks 69 Yahoo! Address Book 196 syncing voice memos 129 system requirements 9 T taking pictures 104 telephone. See Phone telephone number format 148 text cutting or copying 33 pasting 33 typing 32 text messaging. See Messages Text typing in webpages 68 time format 148 time zone support 92, 93, 147, 153 time, setting 147 timer setting 134 sleep 134 touchscreen, using 28 traffic conditions, checking 121 transfer settings and information 202 transferring purchased content 73, 165 transferring purchased content 172 transferring settings and information 203 transition effects, setting 159 trimming videos 106 Triple-click Home setting 191 troubleshooting backing up 202 can’t browse websites 197 can’t make a call 196 can’t open an attachment 199 can’t purchase music or applications 201 can’t text 197 display freezes 193 email not available 197 GAL contacts don’t appear 200 iPhone calls voicemail service 197 iPhone doesn’t appear in iTunes 195 iPhone doesn’t respond 193 iPhone doesn’t turn on 193 no sound 200 problems playing songs or other content 200 removing the SIM card 201 restarting 46 software update and restore 204 true north 173 TTY machine, using 154 turning iPhone on or off 26 TV shows syncing 15 TV shows, syncing 12 TV signal settings 159 typing keyboard 32 in webpage text fields 68 U undoing edits 34 unlocking iPhone 27 unpairing Bluetooth device 56 unread messages, marking 63 unsupported audio file formats 201 updating iPhone software 204 usage statistics battery percentage 143 resetting 143 seeing 143 USB cable 11, 21 port 11 power adapter 21 V vibrate, setting 54, 141 video settings 158 videos alternate audio language 83 converting for iPhone 73 deleting 84 editing 106 previewing 163 purchasing 163 saving MMS attachments 88 searching 83 sending in MMS messages 88 subtitles 83 syncing 12, 15, 71 trimming 106 Index 215watching on a TV 84 See also iPod, Music, YouTube virtual private network. See VPN Voice Control making phone calls 38, 48 playing songs 38, 77 using with headset 40 Voice Memos attaching to MMS messages 128 emailing 128 recording 125 syncing 129 trimming 128 voicemail about 51 alerts 52 changing password 155 checking and managing 52 forgotten password 197 greeting 52 setting up 52 VoiceOver about 183 entering and editing text 188 gestures 184 rotor control 185 setting up iPhone using 11 volume adjusting 27, 40 adjusting for ringer and alerts 141 setting limit 158 VPN accessing networks using 42 configuring 144 set up by configuration profile 18 turning on or off 144 W waking iPhone 27 wallpaper choosing 142 settings 102 using photo as 102 warranty service 206 watching videos on a TV 84 weather information, Yahoo! 124 Weather adding cities 123 deleting cities 124 temperature settings 124 viewing 123 web. See Safari web clips, adding to Home screen 70 webpages bookmarking 69 syncing 12, 14 White on Black 190 Wi-Fi addresses 143 forgetting a network 140 joining networks 41, 139 settings 139 status icon 22 turning on or off 139 Windows Address Book 14 Windows XP 9 WMA files, converting 201 “Works with iPhone” logo 125 World Clock 132 Y Yahoo! Address Book 14, 196 search engine 156 search using 69 searching using 69 stock information 113 weather information 124 YouTube bookmarking videos 108, 109 browsing videos 107 emailing links 108, 109 playing videos 108 searching for videos 107 Z Zoom (Accessibility feature) 189 zooming email messages 61 maps 115 photos 99 webpages 67 216 IndexK Apple Inc. © 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, Cover Flow, iCal, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, Numbers, Pages, Safari, and Spotlight are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Finder, iPhone, Multi-Touch, and Shuffle are trademarks of Apple Inc. iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store and MobileMe are service marks of Apple Inc. The Nike + iPod Sport Kit is covered by one or more of U.S. patent numbers 6,018,705, 6,052,654, 6,493,652, 6,298,314, 6,611,789, 6,876,947, and 6,882,955, either alone or when used in combination with a Nike + iPod enabled iPod media player or iPhone 3GS. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/or other countries. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. 019-1650/2009-09 ð Macintosh User’s Guide the Includes setup, troubleshooting, and important health-related information for the Macintosh LC 630 DOS Compatible K Apple Computer, Inc. © 1995 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Apple Computer, Inc. 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014-2084 (408) 996-1010 Apple, the Apple logo, AppleShare, AppleTalk, ImageWriter, LaserWriter, Macintosh, MacTCP, ProDOS, QuickTime, and StyleWriter are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple Desktop Bus, AppleScript, Balloon Help, Disk First Aid, Finder, Macintosh PC Exchange, PlainTalk, PowerTalk, and QuickDraw GX are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. ExposurePro is a registered trademark of Baseline Publishing, Inc. Helvetica and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries. Hewlett-Packard, LaserJet, and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. MacLink Plus is a trademark of Data Viz., Inc. Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and SoftWindows is a trademark used under license. NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. QMS is a registered trademark of QMS, Inc. QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc. Sound Blaster is a trademark of Creative Technology, Ltd. SuperPaint is a trademark of Aldus Corporation, a subsidiary of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc. Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products.iii Communications regulation information vii Preface Your DOS-compatible Macintosh computer ix 1 Getting Started 1 Plugging in the computer 1 Installing an expansion card 3 Connecting a monitor 3 Connecting the mouse and keyboard 6 Connecting other equipment 7 Turning the computer on 8 Problems turning your computer on? 10 What’s next? 11 Learning the basics 12 Reviewing the basics 13 Turning the computer off 14 Where to find answers 15 Contents2 Getting Help 17 Getting answers to your questions 18 Identifying objects on the screen 26 Learning useful shortcuts 27 3 Connecting Additional Equipment 29 Where to connect additional equipment 30 Connecting an Apple PlainTalk Microphone 31 Connecting external stereo speakers 32 Connecting a game controller 33 Expanding memory 34 Installing internal drives 34 4 Installing and Using Application Programs in the Macintosh Environment 35 Installing Macintosh application programs 36 Working with several programs at a time 37 Backing up your files 38 5 Operating in the PC Environment 39 Switching between the Macintosh and PC environments 40 Setting up the PC environment 42 Working in the PC environment 44 Running network software 53 Using multimedia, MIDI, and game application programs 54 Using Macintosh peripherals in the PC environment 55 Using PC peripherals 59 iv Contents6 Configuring the PC Environment 61 Choosing settings 62 Configuring the PC serial ports 63 Setting the monitor 64 Setting the time and date 64 Setting shared memory 65 Choosing shared folders or volumes 67 Turning on PC sounds 69 Configuring drives C and D 70 Managing PC files from the Mac OS 71 Changing the size of the drive container 72 Understanding the status line 76 7 Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 77 When you have questions 77 When you run into trouble 77 Solutions to common problems 80 Initializing a hard disk 93 Repairing a damaged disk 97 Installing or reinstalling Mac OS system software 102 8 Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 113 When you have questions 113 Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software 119 Contents vAppendix A Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 129 Health-related information about computer use 129 Safety instructions 134 Handling your computer equipment 135 Cleaning your equipment 139 Locking and unlocking the mouse 141 Appendix B Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 143 Opening the computer 145 Installing a communication card 148 Installing a SIMM for the PC environment 149 Closing the computer 154 Appendix C Special Keys on Your Keyboard 157 Appendix D Installing Macintosh Easy Open 159 Choosing an application to open a document 159 Using the Macintosh Easy Open control panel 161 Appendix E Installing Network Management Software 163 Installing NetWare client software 163 Installing Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software 167 Installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software 169 Installing Windows for Workgroups 173 Installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software 173 Installing Mosaic 177 Index 179 vi ContentsCommunications regulation information FCC statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and television interference The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. You may find the following booklet helpful: Interference Handbook (stock number 004-000-00493-1). This booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission, is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc., could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. Communications regulation information viiDOC statement DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications. Observation des normes—Classe B Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des Communications. VCCI statement CD-ROM drive WARNING Making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in your equipment’s manual may result in hazardous exposure. WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses, with this product increases the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this equipment serviced only by an Apple-authorized service provider. If you have an internal Apple CD-ROM drive in your computer, your computer is a Class 1 laser product. The Class 1 label, located on the computer, indicates that the drive meets minimum safety requirements. A service warning label is on the CD-ROM drive inside the computer. viii Communications regulation informationYour Macintosh includes hardware and software that let you use DOS and Windows application programs directly on your Macintosh computer. It contains a high-performance microprocessor that’s fully compatible with the latest DOS and Windows software. You can m simultaneously run Macintosh operating system (Mac OS) and PC application programs m switch between the Mac OS and PC environment at any time without quitting the applications you’re using m view the current environment on a single monitor m use the same hard disk for both Mac OS and PC software m share files and folders (directories) between the Mac OS and the PC environment m cut, copy, and paste data between Mac OS and DOS or Windows documents m use your Macintosh keyboard and mouse with PC software m use your Macintosh modem, monitor, and printer with PC software, or connect PC-compatible equipment m use a joystick or other game controller with PC application programs ix Your DOS-Compatible Macintosh Computerm share the random-access memory (RAM) in your Macintosh with the PC environment, or use a memory module (SIMM) for the exclusive use of the PC environment m use the built-in Macintosh serial ports with PC software m access PC CD-ROM discs using an Apple CD-ROM drive m play Sound Blaster-compatible sounds m communicate with network servers and other computers running PC software To begin, follow the instructions in Chapters 1 and 2 to set up your computer and get started using it. Read Chapters 3 and 4 when you are ready to connect additional equipment to your computer and install Mac OS application programs. Read Chapters 5 and 6 to start using DOS and Windows application programs on your Macintosh computer. Turn to Chapters 7 and 8 if you have questions or problems using your Macintosh. x Your DOS-Compatible Macintosh ComputerMonitor cable (sometimes built into the monitor) Monitor power cord (sometimes built into the monitor) Computer power cord Keyboard Monitor Macintosh DOS-compatible computer Mouse Keyboard cable (sometimes built into the keyboard as shown here)The illustration on the facing page shows all the equipment you need to set up your computer and begin using it. Place your equipment on a sturdy, flat surface near a grounded wall outlet. Before following the setup instructions in this chapter, you may want to read “Arranging Your Office” in Appendix A (in the section on health-related information) for tips on adjusting your work furniture so that you’re comfortable when using the computer. Plugging in the computer Before you plug your Macintosh into a wall socket, carefully read all the setup instructions in this chapter. Then, before you connect anything to your Macintosh, follow the instructions in this section to plug it in. The plug grounds the computer and protects it from electrical damage while you are setting up. 1 1 Getting Started Follow the instructions in this chapter to set up your computer and learn the basics.When you are ready to begin, follow these steps: 1 Plug the socket end of the computer’s power cord into the recessed power cord socket (marked with the symbol ²) on the back of the computer. 2 Plug the other end of the power cord into a three-hole grounded outlet or power strip. Choose a power outlet to which you have easy access. IMPORTANT Be sure that at least one end of the power cord is within easy reach so that you can unplug the computer when you need to. If the computer starts up: If you hear a tone, the computer has started up and you need to turn it off before proceeding. Press the power button (also called the standby power button) located on the back of the computer to turn the computer off. Power cord plug Power cord socket Standby power button WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded.Your Macintosh is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug! 2 Chapter 1Installing an expansion card If you purchased any expansion cards for your Macintosh or extra memory for use in the PC environment, install the cards or memory now. (For instructions, see Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment,” as well as the documentation that came with the cards or memory module.) If you don’t have an expansion card or memory to install, go on to the next section, “Connecting a Monitor.” Connecting a monitor You can connect many types of monitors to your Macintosh. To connect a monitor from a manufacturer other than Apple, refer to the instructions that came with the monitor. Connecting the monitor power cord Monitors have two cords to connect—a power cord and a monitor cable. To connect the monitor power cord, follow these steps: 1 Place the monitor where you will be using it. You can place a monitor with a 15-inch or smaller screen on top of your computer. Don’t place larger monitors on the computer. Keep these considerations in mind: m Allow a few inches for air circulation around the sides of the computer and monitor. m Make sure that the top of the screen is slightly below eye level when you’re sitting at the keyboard. m Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections on the screen from overhead lights and windows. m Consult “Arranging Your Office” in the section “Health-Related Information About Computer Use” in Appendix A for suggestions on locating your computer equipment. Getting Started 32 Connect the monitor power cord to the monitor. On some monitors, the cord is already attached. 3 Plug in the monitor power cord. Be sure to plug the power cord into a three-hole grounded outlet or power strip. Monitor power cord Monitor power socket 4 Chapter 1Connecting the monitor cable After you plug in the monitor power cord, you connect the monitor cable to the computer’s monitor port. To connect the monitor cable, follow these steps: 1 Attach the monitor cable to the monitor. On some monitors, the cable is already attached (as shown below). 2 Attach the monitor cable to the monitor port on the back panel of the computer. The monitor port is on the upper-right corner of the back panel. It is marked with the ª icon (symbol). Be sure you plug the cable into the correct port. Monitor cable ª Monitor port Getting Started 5Connecting the mouse and keyboard You have a choice of several keyboards for your Macintosh. The way you connect the mouse and keyboard depends on whether the keyboard has a separate cable or a built-in cable. Connecting a keyboard with a separate cable 1 Plug the mouse cable into the port on either side of the keyboard. Most right-handed people prefer to use the mouse with their right hand; most left-handed people prefer to use their left hand. Plug the mouse into the port on the side you prefer. The plug and the port are marked with the × icon (symbol). Align the symbols before you insert the plug. (The positions of the port and icon on your keyboard may be different from those pictured here.) By the way: A port marked with the × icon is called an Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) port. 2 Plug the keyboard cable (both ends are the same) into the other port on the keyboard. If you plugged the mouse cable in on the right, for example, plug the keyboard cable in on the left. 3 Plug the keyboard cable into the port marked with the × icon on the back of the computer. Some monitors have a port to which you can connect the keyboard or mouse. See the information that came with your monitor. ADB icon 6 Chapter 1Connecting a keyboard with a built-in cable 1 Plug the mouse cable into the recessed port on the back of the keyboard. The plug and the port are marked with the × icon (symbol). The positions of the port and icon on your keyboard may be different from those pictured. By the way: A port marked with the × icon is called an Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) port. 2 Plug the keyboard cable into the port marked with the × icon on the back of the computer. Some monitors have a port to which you can connect the keyboard or mouse. See the information that came with your monitor. Connecting other equipment If you are new to the Macintosh, it’s a good idea to get some experience using your computer before you connect other equipment, such as a printer or scanner. To learn basic Macintosh skills, continue with the instructions in this chapter. When you’re ready to connect other equipment to your Macintosh, see the instructions in Chapter 3. This cable plugs into the Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) port on the back of the computer. The ADB port on the computer is marked with the × icon. Plug the mouse into the recessed port on the keyboard. The flat part of the plug should be pointing down, as shown here. Getting Started 7Turning the computer on Follow these steps to turn the computer on: 1 Turn on the monitor. See the information that came with your monitor for the location of the power button. 2 Turn on your computer by pressing the Power key. The Power key is at the top of the keyboard. You can recognize this key by the triangle outline on it (P). You hear a tone from the computer as it starts up. 8 Chapter 13 Check to see what’s on your screen. m If you see the Macintosh desktop, as in the illustration below, your system software has already been installed, and your computer is ready to use. Skip now to the section “What’s Next?” later in this chapter. m If you see a blinking question mark, you need to install system software on your computer’s hard disk. (System software is the set of programs your computer uses to start itself up.) See “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” in Chapter 7 for information on how to install system software. m If you see anything else on your screen, or nothing at all, see the next section, “Problems Turning Your Computer On?” Getting Started 9 Macintosh desktop Hard disk iconProblems turning your computer on? If you don’t see anything on the screen, check these items to see if you can identify the problem: m Is the computer plugged into a power source? If it is plugged into a power strip, is the power strip turned on? m Is the computer turned on? The power-on light on the front panel should be on. If it isn’t on, press the standby power button on the computer’s back panel (marked with the symbol ¨). m Are the keyboard and mouse cables connected correctly? (Don’t disconnect the keyboard or mouse cable while the computer is on. You could damage your equipment.) m Is the monitor power cord plugged in? m Is the monitor turned on? (Check the power-on light on the front of the monitor.) m Is the monitor cable attached firmly to both the monitor and computer? m Is the brightness control on the monitor adjusted correctly? (On Apple monitors, the brightness control is marked with the symbol Û.) 10 Chapter 1What’s next? Congratulations! You’ve finished setting up your computer. Now continue with one of the following steps: m If you are new to the Macintosh, turn to the next section, “Learning the Basics.” m If you are an experienced Macintosh user, turn to Chapter 2, “Getting Help,” to learn about Macintosh Guide, your main source of information when you’re working with the Mac OS (the Macintosh environment). m If you want to connect other equipment, such as a printer, to your computer, see Chapter 3, “Connecting Additional Equipment.” m If you want to start using DOS or Windows application programs on your Macintosh, turn to Chapter 5, “Operating in the PC Environment.” Before you begin working with your computer, be sure to read the important health and safety information in Appendix A. IMPORTANT If you need to turn off your computer at any point, please see “Turning the Computer Off” later in this chapter. It is very important to use the correct procedure for shutting down your Macintosh before turning it off. Getting Started 11Learning the basics If you are new to the Macintosh, you should begin by looking at the easy-touse program called the Macintosh Tutorial. The tutorial teaches you the basic skills you’ll need to use your computer in the Macintosh environment. To start the tutorial, follow these steps: 1 Slide the mouse along your mouse pad or desk. Hold the mouse as shown, with the cable pointing away from you. Don’t press the mouse button (under your index finger). Notice that the arrow (8) on the screen moves in the same direction that you move the mouse. If the arrow doesn’t move, make sure that the cables connecting the mouse and keyboard are secure and that your mouse is positioned as shown in the illustration. 2 Move the tip of the arrow (8) to the question mark (h) in the upper-right portion of the screen. If you run out of room on your mouse pad or desk while moving the mouse, pick up the mouse and place it where there’s more room. (The arrow on the screen moves only when the mouse is in contact with the mouse pad or desk.) 3 With the tip of the arrow on the question mark, press and hold down the mouse button. A list of choices (called a menu) appears. This is the Guide (h) menu, which is the place to go when you have a question about how to use your computer in the Macintosh environment (Mac OS). (The Guide [h] menu is not available when you’re in the PC environment.) Mouse button 12 Chapter 14 While holding down the mouse button, move the arrow until the words “Macintosh Tutorial” are highlighted, then release the mouse button. A window appears welcoming you to the tutorial. You can set this book aside for now and follow the instructions on the screen. When you have completed the tutorial, return to this book. Reviewing the basics The following illustration summarizes many of the basic skills and terms you learned from the tutorial. Getting Started 13 To throw away an item you no longer want, drag it to the Trash and choose Empty Trash from the Special menu. This icon represents your computer’s internal hard disk. To change the size or shape of a window, drag the size box. To bring hidden portions of a window’s contents into view, click the scroll arrows. The strip across the top of the screen is called the menu bar. The symbols and words in it represent menus of commands. Icons are small pictures that represent disks, folders, programs, and documents. To open an icon, click the icon twice quickly. Windows are boxes that display text, graphics, or icons. To bring a partially covered window to the front, click anywhere in the window. To close a window, click the close box. You can have several application programs open at once. To see which program is active or to switch from one program to another, use this menu (called the Application menu). To find an answer to a question about the Macintosh environment, look in the Guide (h) menu. To move a window, drag it by the title bar.Turning the computer off To turn the computer off, you choose Shut Down from the Special menu. Detailed instructions follow. 1 Move the tip of the arrow to the word “Special” at the top center of the screen. If the word “Special” does not appear at the top of the screen, you’re working in the wrong program. Pull down the Application menu (to the right of the Guide [h] menu) and choose Finder. Then try step 1 again. 2 With the tip of the arrow on the word “Special,” press and hold down the mouse button. 3 While holding down the mouse button, move the arrow down the list of choices until the words “Shut Down” are highlighted, then release the mouse button. You can also shut down your computer from the keyboard. 1 Press the Power key (marked with a triangle) on the keyboard. You will see a message asking whether you want to shut down or continue working. 2 Click Shut Down. To turn the computer on, simply press the Power key again. WARNING Do not turn the computer off by pressing the standby power button on the back panel. If you do so, you may lose any work you haven’t previously saved to a disk. You also risk losing any open documents. 14 Chapter 1Where to find answers When you have questions about using your Macintosh, there are several places you can look for answers. In this book Use this book to help you set up your computer and learn about it, or to find solutions to problems. In the Guide menu The Guide menu (marked with the h icon) is your main source of information about the Macintosh environment. To learn how to get different kinds of help from the Guide menu, see Chapter 2 in this book. In other manuals For answers to questions about other equipment or about application programs you have purchased, see the manuals that came with the equipment or programs. Manuals for DOS and Windows are included with your computer. From Apple’s customer support hotline If you can’t find an answer in any of the materials provided, call the customer support hotline. (The phone number for the hotline is in the service and support information that came with your computer.) User’s Guide Macintosh Getting Started 15The Guide menu is your main source of information when you’re working with your computer in the Macintosh environment. The menu is identified by a question mark (h) in the upper-right corner of the screen. (If you need instructions on using DOS or Windows, see the appropriate manual.) 17 2 Getting Help Use the instructions in this chapter to learn about the help available to you in the Guide menu.Getting answers to your questions When you have a question while working in the Macintosh environment, you can get the answer by choosing Macintosh Guide from the Guide menu. 1 Pull down the Application menu (in the upper-right corner of the screen) and choose Finder to make it the active application program. A checkmark in the menu indicates that the Finder is the active program. 2 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Macintosh Guide. The Macintosh Guide window appears. Whenever you use Macintosh Guide, its window remains in front of other windows. If the window gets in your way, you can move it by dragging its title bar (the gray bar across the top of the window). 18 Chapter 23 Notice the three buttons at the top of the window: Topics, Index, and Look For. Macintosh Guide gives you three ways of finding information: m Topics lets you choose from a list of general subjects; it is like the table of contents in a book. m Index lets you choose from an alphabetical list of more specific subjects; it is like the index in a book. m Look For lets you search for information related to a specific word or phrase that you type. In the following sections you will practice using each method. If you have problems while using Macintosh Guide, see “Tips for Using Macintosh Guide” later in this chapter. Getting answers with the Topics button 1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Topics button. A list of general topics appears on the left side of the Macintosh Guide window. (Depending on the hardware and software you have, the list of topics may look different.) Getting Help 192 Click “Setting Options” in the list of topics. When you click any topic area, a list of related questions appears on the right side of the Macintosh Guide window. 3 Click the question “How do I set the time and date?” and then click OK. Or double-click the question. A small window appears with instructions for you to follow. 4 Read and follow the instructions in this window. Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the lower-right corner to see the next step. 5 When you have completed all the steps, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to return to the main Macintosh Guide window. Now continue with the next section. 20 Chapter 2 Click here to see the next step (if there is one). To get instructions, click a question… …and then click OK. If you want to return to the main Macintosh Guide window, click here.Getting answers with the Index button 1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Index button. An alphabetical list of subjects appears on the left side of the window. 2 Scroll through the alphabetical list until the phrase “background pattern” is visible. You can scroll through the list either by dragging the slider to the letter B or by using the scroll bar at the right of the list. 3 Click the phrase “background pattern” in the alphabetical list. When you click any index entry, a list of related questions appears on the right side of the Macintosh Guide window. Getting Help 21 Scroll bar Slider To get instructions, click a question… …and then click OK.4 Click the question “How do I change the background pattern?” and then click OK. Or double-click the question. A small window appears with instructions for you to follow. 5 Read and follow the instructions in the window. Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the lower-right corner to see the next step. 6 When you have completed all the steps, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to return to the main Macintosh Guide window. Now continue with the next section. 22 Chapter 2 Click here to see the next step (if there is one). If you want to return to the main Macintosh Guide window, click here.Getting answers with the Look For button 1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Look For button. A small box appears on the left side of the window, where you can type text. 2 Click the arrow button to activate the text box. 3 Type “sound” in the text box and then click Search. When you click Search, a list of questions related to the word or phrase you typed appears on the right side of the Macintosh Guide window. Getting Help 23 To activate the text box, click here. Type a word or phrase in the text box… …and then click here. To get instructions, click a question… …and then click OK.4 Click the question “How do I change the beep sound?” and then click OK. Or doubleclick the question. A small window appears with instructions for you to follow. 5 Read and follow the instructions in the window. Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the lower-right corner to display the next step. 6 When you have completed all the steps, click the close box in the upper-left corner to close Macintosh Guide. 24 Chapter 2 If you want to close Macintosh Guide, click here. Click here to see the next step (if there is one).Tips for using Macintosh Guide Here are a few tips for using Macintosh Guide effectively: m Macintosh Guide is available only in the Macintosh environment, and only when you are in the Finder—the desktop area where you can see the icons of disks, folders, and files. (Other programs may also have help available in the Guide menu, however.) If you don’t see Macintosh Guide in the Guide menu, pull down the Application menu (to the right of the Guide menu) and choose Finder. m Follow the steps when you’re instructed to; don’t skip ahead or read ahead. That way the computer can check to make sure you’ve done a step correctly. m Unlike most windows, the Macintosh Guide window stays in front of other windows on the screen so that your instructions are never covered. If you need to move the Guide window out of the way, drag it by the title bar at the top of the window. You can also move the window out of the way by clicking the zoom box. Click the box once to shrink the window; click it a second time to expand the window to its original size. m If you need more information about an instruction or a term, click the button labeled “Huh?” to get further explanation. (The “Huh?” button is dimmed when no additional information is available.) m If you want to return to the main Macintosh Guide window, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner of the Guide window. m When you’re finished using Macintosh Guide, click the close box in the upper-left corner of the window. Getting Help 25 Zoom box Close box Title bar Topics button “Huh?” button Right arrowIdentifying objects on the screen Sometimes you’ll see an unfamiliar item on the screen and ask yourself, “What’s that?” You can get an answer by using a Macintosh feature known as Balloon Help. Balloon Help explains the function of icons, menus, commands, and other items in the Macintosh environment using balloons like those you see in comic strips. Follow these steps to use Balloon Help: 1 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Show Balloons. 2 Point to any object on the screen that you want to identify. A balloon appears next to the object. In the following illustration, for example, pointing to the Trash displays a balloon that explains how to use the Trash to throw items away. Although balloons appear next to items when you point to them, the way you work does not change; you can still select icons, choose commands, and so on. 3 When you’re finished using Balloon Help, choose Hide Balloons from the Guide menu. 26 Chapter 2Learning useful shortcuts You can perform many tasks in the Finder more quickly if you use keyboard or mouse shortcuts. For example, instead of clicking an icon and choosing Open from the File menu, you can simply double-click the icon to open it. Follow these steps to learn keyboard and mouse shortcuts: 1 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Shortcuts. The main Macintosh Shortcuts window appears. Getting Help 272 Click one of the category buttons. Another window appears, describing shortcuts for that category. 3 Read about the shortcuts available for the category you selected. Click the right arrow in the lower-right corner of the window to display the next window (if there is one). 4 When you finish reading about the shortcuts for your category, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to return to the main Macintosh Shortcuts window. Or click the close box in the upper-left corner to close the window. 28 Chapter 2 If you want to close the window, click here. Click here to see the next window (if there is one). Click here to return to the main Macintosh Shortcuts window for more categories.The illustration below shows a basic Macintosh system. You can expand your computer system by connecting additional hardware (such as a printer, modem, or external audio speakers). Mouse Monitor Computer Keyboard Hard disk drive (internal) Floppy disk drive CD-ROM drive (optional) Volume buttons Use these buttons to change the volume of the computer’s sound. CD-ROM drive Open/Close button Power-on light Headphone jack Remote control sensor - f 29 3 Connecting Additional Equipment Read this chapter for information on expanding your computer system with additional hardware.Where to connect additional equipment The illustration on this page shows where equipment should be connected to your computer. For instructions on connecting additional equipment such as a printer or scanner, see the manual that came with the equipment. - W Modem port [ Printer port Connects your Macintosh to a printer or LocalTalk network. V ADB port Connects your Macintosh to input equipment, such as a keyboard or a trackball. Å g SCSI port Connects your Macintosh to SCSI equipment, such as hard disk drives and scanners. Connects an external modem to your Macintosh. Sound output port Connects your Macintosh to headphones, externally powered (amplified) speakers, or other audio output equipment. Sound input port Connects your Macintosh to a professional-quality microphone or other audio input equipment. F Security lock port Standby power button ² Power socket ª Monitor port Connects your monitor to your Macintosh. Communication card access cover Covers port for optional communication card. Joystick port Connects your Macintosh to a joystick or other game controller. (For the PC environment only.) Video input card (optional) Connects your Macintosh to a video camera, VCR, or other video equipment. TV tuner card (optional) Connects your Macintosh to an external TV antenna or cable TV service. ¨ 30 Chapter 3Connecting an Apple PlainTalk Microphone Your computer has a sound input port, which you can use to connect an Apple PlainTalk Microphone. Use PlainTalk only: You should connect only the Apple PlainTalk Microphone. Other models of microphone will not work with your Macintosh. To connect the microphone, do this: m Plug the microphone’s connector into the sound input port (marked with the icon X) on the back of the computer. Sound input port Sound output port Connecting Additional Equipment 31Connecting external stereo speakers You can take advantage of your computer’s stereo sound output by attaching externally powered (amplified) speakers. (Only externally powered speakers will work with your Macintosh.) 1 Assemble the speakers and the cable you need. You need a cable with stereo miniplugs at each end to connect one or both speakers to the computer. (Some speakers require a dual-plug adapter. Others, like those shown here, accept a single stereo miniplug and are joined by standard speaker wires.) The following illustration shows the equipment configuration and the connections for a computer sound system. 2 Turn off the Macintosh. 3 Plug a stereo miniplug into the sound output port on the Macintosh. 4 Plug a stereo miniplug into the Audio In port on one of the speakers. If the speakers take a dual-plug cable, connect both plugs to the speakers’ Audio In ports. Stereo miniplug Audio In port - Sound output port Externally powered speakers 32 Chapter 35 Connect the speakers together with speaker wires, if necessary. 6 Turn on the computer. You hear the computer’s sound through the external speakers. Note: To control the volume of your external speakers, use the volume button on the front of the computer. If you are playing an audio compact disc (CD), you may also need to adjust the volume control in the program you’re using to play CDs. For more information on sound and playing audio CDs, see the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For information on hearing sounds in the PC environment, see “Turning On PC Sounds” in Chapter 6. Connecting a game controller Connect a game controller, such as a joystick, as shown. m Attach the joystick’s connector to the joystick port on the lower-right corner of the computer’s back panel. Tighten the thumbscrews securely. Joystick port Connecting Additional Equipment 33Expanding memory The random-access memory (RAM) in your computer can be expanded. Installing additional RAM adds more memory chips to your computer and expands its capabilities. The Technical Information booklet that came with your computer describes how much additional memory can be installed in your Macintosh. You can also add up to 32 megabytes (MB) of RAM for use exclusively in the PC environment. See Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment,” for further information. Memory for your computer is provided in packages called Single Inline Memory Modules (SIMMs). The SIMMs must be the correct type for your computer. It is very important that the SIMMs be correctly installed in your Macintosh. Incorrect installation can result in errors, unpredictable results, and damage to your equipment and data. Installing internal drives Your Macintosh can hold up to three internal storage devices, including a floppy disk drive, a CD-ROM (compact disc read-only memory) drive, and a hard disk drive (several capacities are available). These drives may already be installed. If you want to add or replace an internal drive, see your Appleauthorized dealer. WARNING To avoid damage to your computer, Apple recommends that only an Apple-certified technician install additional RAM. Consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for service. If you attempt to install additional RAM yourself, any damage you may cause to your equipment will not be covered by the limited warranty on your computer. See an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider for information about this or any other warranty question. 34 Chapter 3Your computer has several Macintosh application programs already installed, as well as some Macintosh programs that must installed before you can use them. You will need to run an application program’s Installer program before the application program will work. You’ll find these programs on your hard disk. You may want to experiment with AppleScript, one of the programs on your hard disk. With AppleScript you can automate tasks in the Finder and other scriptable programs (programs that support AppleScript). Instructions for using AppleScript are included in the AppleScript folder. If your computer has enough memory, you can install QuickDraw GX and PowerTalk. QuickDraw GX gives your computer more powerful printing and font capabilities. PowerTalk provides an open collaboration environment with a universal mailbox and other electronic mail services. To install each of these programs, open the folder of the item you want to install and double-click the Installer icon. Another program, Video Monitor, is for use with computers that have audiovisual (AV) capabilities. For information on using Video Monitor, see the “Video” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. If you want to install DOS application programs, see Chapter 5, “Operating in the PC Environment,” and refer to your DOS manual. 35 4 Installing and Using Application Programs in the Macintosh Environment Read this chapter for information on installing and using application programs in the Mac OS.Installing Macintosh application programs You’ll probably want to buy and install additional application programs. See the manuals you receive with your programs for instructions on installing and using them. In most cases, you’ll install a Macintosh application program on your internal hard disk from floppy disks that contain the program. The following illustration shows how to insert a floppy disk in your computer’s floppy disk drive. To use your programs most effectively, follow these guidelines: m Put only one copy of each program on your hard disk. Having more than one copy can cause errors. m Whenever you copy a program disk to your hard disk, be careful not to copy a System Folder. Always check to see what you’ve copied, and drag any extra System Folders to the Trash. m If a program malfunctions consistently, try installing a fresh copy. If that doesn’t help, find out from the software manufacturer whether your version of the program is compatible with the system software you’re using. For instructions on how to eject floppy disks, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Insert the floppy disk, metal end first, into the floppy disk drive of your computer. 36 Chapter 4Working with several programs at a time You can open as many application programs and desk accessories as your computer’s memory allows. All open programs in the Mac OS are listed in the Application menu at the right end of the menu bar. The name of the active program (the one you’re using right now) has a checkmark next to it, and its icon appears in the menu bar. You can have programs open in both the Macintosh and PC environments at the same time, but only your Macintosh programs appear in the Application menu. Finding out which programs are open If you have several programs and windows open, you can find out which program is active and which other programs are open by pulling down the Application menu. Switching programs You can switch to another open program or desk accessory by choosing its name from the Application menu. If a program’s icon is dimmed in the menu, that means its windows are hidden. Choosing the program from the Application menu displays its windows. You can also switch to another program by clicking in a window that belongs to an open program, or by double-clicking a program icon (or the icon of a document that was created with the program). Installing and Using Application Programs in the Macintosh Environment 37 The Finder icon Commands to hide or display open windows Open programs A checkmark indicates the active program.For instructions on switching from the Macintosh environment to the PC environment, see the section “Switching Between the Macintosh and PC Environments” in Chapter 5. Hiding and showing windows on the desktop You can hide all windows except those of the active program by choosing Hide Others from the Application menu. The other programs remain open even though their windows are hidden. When you switch to another program, its windows become visible again. If you want to see all the open windows, choose Show All from the Application menu. Backing up your files Making backup copies of important files is good protection against possible damage to the originals. m You can back up files stored on your hard disk by copying them to floppy disks. m You can back up an entire floppy disk by copying it to another floppy disk, or to a hard disk. m You can use a commercial backup program to copy new and changed files from a hard disk to another hard disk, to a tape drive, or to a series of floppy disks. m If your computer is on a network, you can back up files by copying them to a shared disk on the network. To back up files in the Macintosh environment, copy the files to a disk manually or use a Macintosh backup program. Do not use PC backup programs in the Mac OS. 38 Chapter 4Your DOS-compatible Macintosh comes with standard versions of DOS and Windows already installed. Also installed is software you can use to work in both the Macintosh and PC environments and share data between the two environments. This software is described in this chapter and the next. This chapter covers how to m switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment m set up and operate in the PC environment m use floppy disks and disk drives m cut, copy, and paste data between Mac OS and DOS or Windows documents m run network software m use multimedia, MIDI, and game applications m use both Macintosh and PC peripheral devices in the PC environment 39 5 Operating in the PC Environment Follow the instructions in this chapter to start working in the PC environment on your Macintosh.Switching between the Macintosh and PC environments You switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment using the PC Setup control panel. Follow these steps: 1 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu. 2 Double-click the PC Setup icon to open the control panel 3 Click Switch to PC to switch to the PC environment. 4 To switch back to the Mac OS, press x-Return. 40 Chapter 5Switching with a keyboard command You can set a keyboard command, or hot key, to switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment. To set the hot key, you must be in the Macintosh environment (if you are in the PC environment, press x-Return). m To choose a hot key, open the PC Setup control panel and press the Tab key to select the Hot Key text field; then type the keys you want to use. The x key is automatically included. You can use any alphanumeric or special key. You can also include other modifier keys (Option, Control, and/or Shift). x-Return always switches from the PC to the Mac OS, regardless of the control panel setting. You can also switch to the PC by clicking Switch to PC in the control panel. Ejecting disks in the PC environment Here are a few commands you will find useful while you work in the PC environment. m To eject a disk from the Macintosh disk drive while you’re in the PC environment, press x-E. m To eject a CD-ROM disc in the PC environment, press x-Y. For more details, see the section “Working in the PC Environment,” later in this chapter. Turning the PC on and off You use the buttons near the bottom of the control panel to switch environments, to restart the PC, or to shut the PC off. m Switch to PC immediately switches to the PC environment. m Start/Restart PC starts the PC if it’s off, or restarts it if it’s running (but doesn’t switch to the PC environment). m Shut down PC turns off the PC. IMPORTANT Clicking Off at the top of the PC Setup control panel prevents you from switching to the PC environment. When you restart the computer, the PC environment is turned off and any RAM you requested for it is available to the Mac OS. Operating in the PC Environment 41Starting the PC automatically To have the PC start automatically when you turn on your Macintosh: m Click the checkbox next to Auto-start PC. To make the PC environment appear when you turn on your Macintosh: 1 Click the checkbox next to Switch at Startup. 2 In the Control Panels folder, double-click the General Controls icon to open it. 3 Turn off the Shutdown Warning option in the General Controls panel. If Shutdown Warning is turned on when you switch from the Mac OS to the PC environment, you will not be able to switch back again for a few minutes. Fading the screen To have the screen fade briefly before switching environments, click the checkbox next to Fade Screens. Setting up the PC environment In order to take advantage of certain utilities, you may need to modify your DOS CONFIG.SYS file. For information about how to edit DOS files, see your DOS manual. For information about the kinds of changes you might need to make, read the information below. Note: Your DOS system software also includes alternate versions of the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files that allow you to select from a variety of memory management options each time you start DOS. For information on how to install these alternate files, see “Replacing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT Files” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. 42 Chapter 5Memory management utilities If you use a memory management utility such as EMM386 or QEMM, you need to configure it to be compatible with your DOS-compatibility hardware and software. IMPORTANT Apple does not recommend using automated memory configuration utilities with your DOS-compatible Macintosh because they can require more memory than management utilities you configure manually. Additionally, some memory configuration utilities may not be able to determine the exact nature of the DOS-compatibility hardware, and therefore may not be compatible. If you want to use EMM386 (included as part of DOS) and don’t require expanded memory, set CONFIG.SYS to the following: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS RAM=D000-EFFF If you require expanded memory, set CONFIG.SYS to the following: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 If you want to use QEMM, use the frame option (ST:F): DEVICE=C:\QEMM\QEMM386.SYS RAM ST:F ARAM=B080-B7FF ARAM=C900-DFFF R:1 If you want to use the Stealth mapping option (ST:M), set CONFIG.SYS to DEVICE=C:\QEMM\QEMM386.SYS RAM ST:M X=C800-CFFF X=FC00- FCFF X=FE00-FFFF ARAM=B080-B7FF ARAM=C900-DFFF R:2 Configure other memory management utilities such that D000 through EFFF is the only area in the BIOS that can be mapped to upper memory. To prevent the ROM BIOS from becoming corrupted when the DOS-compatibility card is configured for 2 MB of memory, set the switch in the CONFIG.SYS file to turn memory testing off. DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF For more information on making the best use of memory, read the sections on memory management in your DOS manual, or refer to the documentation for your memory manager if you are using something other than EMM386. Operating in the PC Environment 43Working in the PC environment When you switch to DOS or Windows, you’re operating in a real PC world. The floppy disk drive, mouse, and keyboard all act as they would with a standard PC. There are, however, some mapping issues you need to be aware of. Floppy disk drives and floppy disks m The Macintosh floppy disk drive is drive A. To eject a disk from this disk drive while you’re in the PC environment, press x-E. m If you insert a Mac OS-format floppy disk while you’re in the PC environment, it is ejected. You can access an unlocked floppy disk only in the environment that was in the foreground when the floppy disk was inserted. When you insert a locked PC disk, both environments have access to it. Blank disks are formatted as DOS disks in the PC environment. In the Mac OS, you can format disks for DOS or the Mac OS (among other choices). Some blank disks are preformatted by the manufacturer. If you insert a new, blank disk in the PC environment and it is ejected, it may have been preformatted as a Macintosh disk. To use the disk in the PC environment, you must first return to the Mac OS and reformat (reinitialize) the disk as a DOS disk. The Mac OS Disk Copy application program cannot read a DOS-formatted floppy disk unless the disk is unlocked. Floppy disks formatted in the PC environment in DOS 720K format are not readable by some DOS computers. Instead, format the disk in the Macintosh environment, choosing “DOS 720K” as the format. See “How do I prepare a disk for use?” in the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Restarting the PC from a floppy disk To restart (reboot) the PC environment from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the floppy drive. Press x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period. When the floppy disk is ejected, immediately reinsert it into the disk drive. 44 Chapter 5CD-ROM discs and drives You can use DOS and Windows CD-ROM discs in Apple CD-ROM drives. To eject a CD-ROM disc in the PC environment, press x-Y. If the CD-ROM disc cannot be ejected (because a file is in use or the CD-ROM disc is being shared), the Macintosh beeps. You can listen to audio CDs in either the PC environment or Mac OS, but you cannot control them from both environments at the same time. For example, if you began listening to an audio CD while working in the PC environment and then switched to the Mac OS, you would have to return to the PC environment in order to adjust the CD’s volume. Playing an audio CD in Windows while running low-level media tools, such as PC Tools or Microsoft Anti-Virus, may cause your system to crash. It is best to reduce computer activity to a minimum while using such tools. You cannot use more than one CD-ROM drive at a time in the PC environment. The PC sets up a drive letter (E) for a CD-ROM drive even if no drive is connected. If no CD-ROM drive is connected to your system, you can use this drive letter and free some memory by editing the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. In the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, add REM to the beginning of the line LH C:\DOS\MSCDEX /D:CDDRVR /L:E In the CONFIG.SYS file, add REM to the beginning of the line DEVICE=C:\Apple\CDROM.SYS /D:CDDRVR Prefacing these commands with REM makes DOS ignore them. Operating in the PC Environment 45Pointing device The standard Macintosh pointing device has one button; most PC devices have two. The button on the Macintosh pointing device behaves like the left button on a PC device. m To simulate the right button, press the = key on the keypad. m To press the left and right buttons at the same time, press the mouse button and the = key simultaneously. If you have Windows installed, you can use its Mouse control panel to switch the button assignment. Note: DOS does not come with a mouse driver. A mouse driver for Windows is installed on your system along with Windows, however. Keyboard The DOS-compatible Macintosh supports all Apple keyboards. The Option key on an Apple keyboard can be used as the Alt key in the PC environment. The Apple Extended Keyboard and the Apple Design Keyboard can be used normally. With the Apple Keyboard II, use the following equivalents for keys on a PC keyboard. These equivalents also apply to the Apple Adjustable Keyboard if the function key keyboard isn’t plugged in. 46 Chapter 5PC key Equivalent on Macintosh keyboard F1 through F9 x-1 through 9 F10 x-0 F11 x-(minus) F12 x-(equals) F13 x-[ F14 x-] F15 x-\ Home x-[keypad] 7 PageUp x-[keypad] 9 End x-[keypad] 1 PageDown x-[keypad] 3 Insert x-[keypad] 0 Del x-[keypad] (period) Using the Apple Adjustable keyboard: If you are using the Apple Adjustable keyboard, you cannot use key combinations made up of keys from the main keyboard and function keys (for example, Shift-F1). This means you cannot restart the PC using the x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period key combination. Click Restart PC in the PC Setup control panel instead. MacShare MacShare is a PC application program that lets the PC view Mac OS folders and volumes as drive letters. You can have as many shared drives as there are drive letters. m To specify the number of drive letters, modify your CONFIG.SYS file to include a LASTDRIVE statement. LASTDRIVE=x where x is a letter between E and Z. (The PC reserves drives A through D for its floppy and hard disk drives.) Operating in the PC Environment 47For example, if you use M as your LASTDRIVE value, you could have up to nine extra drives using drives labeled E through M. A CD-ROM drive, if installed, uses E. Each additional drive letter uses 100 bytes of PC memory. Clipboard You can exchange clipboard information between the PC environment and the Mac OS. The type of information you can exchange depends on whether you’re running DOS or Windows. Windows Clipboard You can exchange text, PICT, RTF, and bitmap files between the Mac OS and Windows using the Copy and Paste commands from the Edit menu. You can also purchase additional third-party software to provide translations for other data types. DOS “Clipboard” If you’re running DOS, you can capture text or a PICT file from a region of the screen that you define using the DOSCLIP TSR (Terminate-and-StayResident program). The memory-resident program is loaded automatically each time you switch to DOS. You activate DOSCLIP by pressing a keyboard combination, or keystroke, (preset to Shift-Control-C) and then selecting a region to copy. Keystroke starts process: On the PC side, enter the keystroke first; then, holding down the mouse button, select a region to copy. (This process works only if a DOS mouse driver is installed.) Releasing the mouse button sends the selection to the Clipboard. In the Mac OS, you select the area first and then issue the keystroke. 48 Chapter 5To capture text or a PICT file from a region on the screen if you don’t have a DOS mouse driver installed, follow these instructions: 1 Activate DOSCLIP. The DOSCLIP activation keystroke is preset to Shift-Control-C. A cursor appears in the center of the screen. 2 Use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor to the upper-left corner of the region you want to copy. 3 Holding down the Shift key, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the lower-right corner of the region. 4 Release the Shift key. The selected area is copied to the Clipboard. m You can paste text into DOS from the Mac OS. The preset keystroke is Shift-Control-V. Changing the predefined keystrokes in DOS You change the preset keystrokes for copying and pasting by editing the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. m To change the keystroke for the Copy command, use the form C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/Cnm… m To change the keystroke for the Paste command, use the form C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/Pnm… In both cases, n is a number representing a key scan code from the following table, and m… is one or more of the characters A, C, and S (for Alt, Control, and Left- or Right-shift). For example, the preset code for Copy is /C46CA—/C[opy using the key] 46 [which is C, plus the] C[ontrol key plus the] A[lt key]. To change the keystroke to F3, you’d type the following: C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/C61 Note: To get on-screen help about other DOSCLIP options, type DOSCLIP /? at the DOS prompt. Operating in the PC Environment 49Key Scan code Key Scan code 0 11 ' " 40 1 2 , < 51 2 3 - _ 12 3 4 . > 52 4 5 / ? 53 5 6 ; : 39 6 7 = + 13 7 8 [ { 26 8 9 \ | 43 9 10 ] } 27 ` ~ 41 + (keypad) 78 tab 15 - (keypad) 74 alt 56 arrow (down) 80 bksp 14 arrow (left) 75 caps 58 arrow (right) 77 center 76 arrow (up) 72 ctrl 29 del 83 pgdn 81 end 79 pgup 73 enter 28 prtsc 55 esc 1 scroll 70 home 71 shift (left side) 42 ins 82 shift (right side) 54 num 69 space 57 continues . 50 Chapter 5Key Scan code Key Scan code F1 59 F7 65 F2 60 F8 66 F3 61 F9 67 F4 62 F10 68 F5 63 F11 87 F6 64 F12 88 A 30 N 49 B 48 O 24 C 46 P 25 D 32 Q 16 E 18 R 19 F 33 S 31 G 34 T 20 H 35 U 22 I 23 V 47 J 36 W 17 K 37 X 45 L 38 Y 21 M 50 Z 44 Operating in the PC Environment 51Tips for using the Clipboard When the PC environment is running, you have three separate clipboards to work with—the Mac OS Clipboard, the Windows Clipboard, and DOSCLIP. Translation between the clipboards takes place each time you switch between the PC and Macintosh environments. When using these clipboards there are a few things to keep in mind. m If you copy an item to the Macintosh Clipboard, switch to Windows, and then copy an item to the Windows Clipboard, the original Macintosh Clipboard contents will be deleted. To prevent this, remove the PC Clipboard extension from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder in the Mac OS). m In order to translate the contents of the Macintosh Clipboard to the Windows Clipboard, Windows must be already running when you switch environments. If you switch to DOS and then launch Windows, the Macintosh Clipboard will be translated into DOSCLIP, and the Windows Clipboard will be blank. m In order to translate the contents of the Macintosh Clipboard to DOSCLIP, Windows must not be running when you switch environments. If Windows is running when you switch to the PC, the Macintosh Clipboard will be translated into the Windows Clipboard, and DOSCLIP will be blank. m DOSCLIP contents cannot be pasted into Windows, or vice versa. m Graphics can be copied from a DOS application program to DOSCLIP, but graphics cannot be pasted into a DOS program from DOSCLIP. m After copying a graphic from DOS using DOSCLIP, you may experience difficulty in pasting the graphic into a Macintosh application program. If this happens, try increasing the Macintosh program’s memory. (See the question “How do I change a program’s memory size?“ in the “Working with Programs” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide [h] menu.) m Sounds cannot be copied between the Macintosh and the PC. m Plain text is automatically translated from one environment to another, but in order to retain font and style information, additional Macintosh Easy Open translators must be used (for example, MacLink Plus from DataViz). 52 Chapter 5m When using DOSCLIP from within certain application programs, it may not be possible to select the text using the mouse. In these cases, either use the keyboard to select your text, or check that the standard DOS mouse driver is not loaded. m When the PC environment is active, all Macintosh programs are put in the background to allow the PC Clipboard to run in the foreground. If you do not want your Macintosh programs to run in the background while you are in the PC environment, you must disable the Clipboard translation by removing the PC Clipboard Extension from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder in the Mac OS). Running network software The DOS-Compatibility Software on your computer supports any networking protocols, operating systems, or application programs that are compatible with Novell’s Open Data-Link Interface specification (ODI). m To set up the software, install your networking client software in the PC environment. Networking client software such as Netware is not included with the DOScompatible Macintosh. Compatible and incompatible protocols You can run NetWare in the PC environment at the same time that you’re running AppleTalk in the Mac OS. To use IPX or TCP networking protocols, you must have an Ethernet card installed in your computer’s communication slot. (The Ethernet card is not a standard feature.) You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. Operating in the PC Environment 53If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. Network performance is improved by adding memory to the DOScompatibility card installed in your computer, as described in Appendix B. For more information, see Appendix E, “Installing Network Management Software.” Using multimedia, MIDI, and game application programs These types of programs, whether they are run in the PC or Macintosh environment, see a marked performance improvement when there is a memory SIMM on the DOS-compatibility card for the exclusive use of the PC environment. See the Technical Specifications booklet to determine whether your computer has a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatibility card. You can also install a SIMM with greater memory capacity, as described in Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment.” QuickTime application performance is especially improved with a SIMM. Some DOS-based MPEG players require a VGA monitor to output video. All VGA modes can be displayed on Macintosh monitors supported by the DOScompatible Macintosh. If the monitor specified to display the PC is a VGA monitor, select VGA in the Display box in the PC Setup control panel. You cannot select VGA for a shared monitor configuration from the PC Setup control panel if your monitor is not capable of displaying VGA. Multiscan monitors can display VGA. 54 Chapter 5Using Macintosh peripherals in the PC environment You use the serial ports of your Macintosh just like the serial ports of any PC-compatible computer. The maximum data transfer rate supported by the DOS-compatible hardware when a COM port is mapped to a Macintosh serial port is 19,200 bits per second (bps). If you’re capturing serial output to a Mac OS text file, there is no limit. Using printers For DOS or Windows printing, use the LPT1.DOS or LPT1 serial port. In general, you must use printers that are Macintosh-compatible and use their corresponding printer extension for the Macintosh. However, in a PC Novell NetWare environment you can print to a PC-compatible printer attached to a Novell network. See Appendix E, “Installing Network Management Software.” DOS uses the printer selected in the Macintosh Chooser as the default LPT1 device. If you have a serial printer directly connected to a COM port, however, DOS uses that printer instead. The DOS-compatible software can process output for Epson and PostScript printers, and for all printers that use Hewlett-Packard’s page control language (PCL). QuickDraw printers such as the StyleWriter or ImageWriter work only with Epson emulation. (If a printer is not a PostScript or PCL printer, it’s considered to be a QuickDraw printer.) For non-PostScript PCL printers, use the appropriate PCL driver in the PC environment. For non-PostScript, non-PCL printers, configure your DOS application program to use the Epson LQ-2500 driver. If this driver isn’t available, try another Epson LQ or LX series driver. Be sure to turn on the PCL option if it’s available for your printer. Operating in the PC Environment 55The Epson emulator works by first translating the DOS text to a similar Macintosh font, then interpreting that text into a series of QuickDraw commands. Some characters in the original DOS character set may not have exact translations to a Macintosh font. The use of a PostScript font is recommended in these cases, because the PostScript standard requires no translation. About color: Color printing is not supported under Epson emulation. When printing from the PC to a color or grayscale QuickDraw printer, be sure to select the Black & White option in the Print dialog box. If you have a PCL printer, printing is limited to text-only or graphics-only when printing over an AppleTalk network. To print text only, select your printer’s driver in the Windows Control Panel. To print graphics only, choose the LaserJet III driver from the Windows Control Panel. If you need to print mixed graphics and text, many Windows programs bit-map their text so that it becomes a graphic. Additionally, PCL printing of text and graphics together is possible when printing over a Novell network, where a PC print server is connected to the PCL printer and handles the print job. Select your printer’s own driver in the Windows Control Panel. For PostScript printers, use the Apple LaserWriter II NT driver (or another PostScript driver if the Apple LaserWriter II NT driver is not available) or the Windows PostScript driver. IMPORTANT Be sure to make settings in the Mac OS PC Print Spooler that match the drivers you use in the PC environment, or your printer will not work correctly. See “Setting Preferences in the PC Print Spooler” for details. Turning off Background Printing in the Macintosh Chooser may increase the performance of some printers. Configuring a printer for Windows: For better performance when you configure a printer for Windows, select LPT1.DOS instead of LPT as the port. 56 Chapter 5IMPORTANT If you try to print a file using a PostScript printer driver for a non-PostScript printer, and the preferences are set to Epson, your file will not be printed. Instead, the file will be moved to a folder called “Spooler Rejected” in the Mac OS. To print the file, choose the proper printer driver in the PC environment and try again. Note: Data sent to the LPT1 port is automatically routed to the printer selected in the Chooser in the Mac OS. There is no actual parallel port on the DOS-compatible Macintosh. AppleShare Print Server The AppleShare Print Server should not be installed in a DOS-compatible Macintosh because the server’s software conflicts with the PC Print Spooler. You can, however, connect your DOS-compatible Macintosh to a network that uses an AppleShare Print Server. Setting preferences in the PC Print Spooler You can set preferences in the PC Print Spooler to control a variety of print functions. To choose your Print Spooler settings, follow these steps: 1 In the Macintosh environment, open the Extensions folder inside the System Folder. 2 Find the PC Print Spooler icon and open it. Operating in the PC Environment 573 Choose Preferences from the File menu. A dialog box appears. 4 Choose your settings as appropriate. The selection you make for “Interpret non-PostScript as” must match the type of printer you have specified in the PC environment. If the settings are mismatched, your printer may produce gibberish. In addition, the PCL option works only if the printer is set up to accept PCL commands. The selection you make for “When emulating an Epson printer” determines how much of a page is available for printing. If you use the option that allows gaps between pages, configure your application programs to print to a 60-line page, rather than a 66-line page, or your margins will be off and your pages will not print correctly. 5 Click OK. 66 lines maximum for Epson: Page sizes greater than 66 lines (standard letter size paper) are not supported by the Epson driver. Legal and other larger sizes will be cut off after either 60 or 66 lines, depending on the setting you’ve chosen. If you find that your printing is clipped at either the top or bottom of the page, click the No Gaps option. 58 Chapter 5Using PC peripherals Because of the RS-422 implementation of the Macintosh, the following RS-232 signals are not available to the PC: m Carrier Detect (CD) m Data Set Ready (DSR) m Request to Send (RTS) m Ring Indicator (RI) Applications or serial devices requiring these signals won’t work. While the DOS-compatible Macintosh does not support Carrier Detect (CD), you can set most communications application programs to respond to the CARRIER string sent back by most modems. For more information about accessing serial ports from DOS, see the documentation that came with your DOS software. IMPORTANT The following chart lists the various signals present on the Macintosh Mini DIN-8 connector, and on what pins these signals are present on PC-style DB-9 and DB-25 connectors. This information may be of use if you are planning to have a custom cable built. Refer to the manual for the serial device that you plan to attach to the Macintosh for the recommended serial connection, and use the chart below to find out what the proper Macintosh wiring should be. Macintosh signal Macintosh Mini DIN-8 DB-9 DB-25 RS-232 name HSK0 1 4 20 DTR HSK1 2 8 5, 8 CTS, DCD TXD- 3 3 2 TXD GND 4 5 7 GND RXDA- 5 2 3 RXD TXDA+ 6 N/C N/C GP1 7 N/C N/C RXD+ 8 5 7 GND Operating in the PC Environment 59This chapter covers how to configure the PC environment and change PC options using the PC Setup control panel. Your Macintosh comes with the PC environment already configured and ready to use. Read this chapter only if you want to change the way the PC environment is set up, or if you have reinstalled the DOS-compatibility software and need to reconfigure it. You can control how your Macintosh and your DOS-compatible hardware and software work together with the PC Setup control panel. You use the control panel to accomplish the following tasks: m choose folders or volumes to be shared between the Mac OS and the PC environment m turn the PC card on and off m configure PC serial ports m set display options m set the shared memory size m turn PC sounds on and off and use Sound Blaster sound capabilities m configure PC drives You also use the control panel to switch environments immediately and to start, restart, or shut down the PC. 61 6 Configuring the PC Environment Use the instructions in this chapter if you need to change settings for the PC environment.Choosing settings To choose settings, follow these steps: 1 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu. 2 Double-click the PC Setup control panel to open it. 3 When you have specified the settings you want, close the control panel. All settings except RAM take effect as soon as you make them. If you change the RAM setting, you must restart the Macintosh before the change takes effect. Online help available: To get brief on-screen explanations of items in the control panel, choose Show Balloons from the Guide (h) menu. To get detailed step-by-step help, see the “DOS Compatibility Software” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. 62 Chapter 6Configuring the PC serial ports Your DOS-compatible Macintosh supports two serial ports, COM1 and COM2. You can map these ports to an unused Macintosh printer port or modem port, to a text file for later processing, or to a setting of None. m To assign a Macintosh serial port to a COM port, make a selection in the COM port’s pop-up menu. When you map a port to a text file, a dialog box appears that you use to specify a name and location for the file. Macintosh serial ports already in use appear dimmed in the menu. (The printer port may be in use by AppleTalk, which may be used for a network or LaserWriter connection; the modem port may be in use by communications or fax software.) Changes to these selections take place immediately. Assigned ports may not be available to the Mac OS: Mac OS programs may no longer be able to access ports that you’ve assigned to DOS. Allocate these ports only when they’re needed, and deallocate them when they’re no longer required by your DOS programs. (You won’t have to restart the computer to have the changes take effect.) The maximum baud rate supported by the DOS-compatible Macintosh when a COM port is mapped to a Macintosh serial port is 19,200. However, when the MODE command is issued in DOS and the serial port is set at 19,200 baud, the incorrect message “Function not supported on this computer” is displayed. This occurs because DOS is looking for specific hardware (a PC UART) that is not emulated by the DOS-compatible Macintosh. The Macintosh actually does support 19,200 baud, and can be set by a number of communication application programs. Configuring the PC Environment 63Setting the monitor The monitor connected to your Macintosh DOS-compatible system displays the environment (Mac OS or PC) you’re working in. Even though you see only one environment at a time, the other environment can still be active in the background. To set the monitor for the PC environment: m Choose a monitor type in the Display pop-up menu. See the Technical Information booklet that came with your computer for a list of supported Macintosh monitors and for VGA and SVGA monitor specifications. If the DOS-compatibility software recognizes the monitor connected to your computer as a non-multiscan display, it makes the appropriate selection for you; other menu options are dimmed. 16" monitor requires driver: If you have a 16" monitor, the PC doesn’t use the entire screen unless you install a display driver for the program that you’re using. (DOS can’t use a video driver, so there will always be a large black border around the DOS screen.) See “Reinstalling Video Drivers” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8 for instructions. Setting the time and date The PC environment uses the same date and time settings as the Mac OS. If you change the time and date on the PC, it will not affect the time and date on the Mac OS. When you restart the PC, it synchronizes its time and date with the settings you’ve chosen in the Mac OS. (The PC may lag up to 10 seconds behind the Mac OS.) 64 Chapter 6Setting shared memory You can install a 72-pin SIMM (memory module) on the DOS-compatible card in your computer to give the card up to 32 MB of RAM for its exclusive use. When no SIMM is installed, the card uses a portion of the RAM installed in your Macintosh. If your computer came with a SIMM already installed on the DOS-compatible card, you cannot share memory between the Mac OS and the PC environment. The PC uses the memory installed on the DOS-compatible card exclusively. The shared memory options in the PC Setup control panel will be dimmed (unavailable). See the Technical Specifications booklet to determine whether your computer contains a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatible card. m Choose the amount of memory you want for your PC in the RAM pop-up menu. In the RAM pop-up menu, a small square (M) shows the RAM that the PC is currently using and a bullet (•) indicates how much RAM you assigned. When the Macintosh starts up, it claims RAM for its own use before it sets aside RAM for the PC. If the PC has less RAM than you installed, turn off the Mac OS RAM disk (if you’re using one) in the Memory control panel. You may also need to lower the disk cache size in the Memory control panel to 128K or less. Memory changes take place when you restart the Macintosh. IMPORTANT Memory that you set aside for the PC environment is not available to the Mac OS. To make this memory available, you must turn off the PC (click the Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel) and restart the Macintosh. Configuring the PC Environment 65Changing the amount of conventional memory Many DOS and Windows programs require conventional memory to run. At the same time, many device drivers and TSRs may be loaded into conventional memory. If you find that you do not have enough conventional memory to run some of your DOS or Windows programs, take the following steps. To increase Upper Memory Block (UMB) space to 122K instead of 64K, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 To load DOS into the UMB (high memory) also add the following to your CONFIG.SYS file: DOS=HIGH, UMB Insert the LOADHIGH (LH) command before all TSRs and device drivers in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. For example: LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X This will load these into UMB (high memory). If you run out of UMB space, you may see an error message like this during the boot process: Run time error R6009 -not enough space for environment. In this case, remove LH from TSRs and device drivers one or two at a time, and try again until the error message does not appear. If a DOSCLIP copy command is executed from within Harvard Graphics 3.0, then the PC crashes when Harvard Graphics is quit. To prevent this, use the steps outlined above, making sure that SMARTDRV is one of the drivers preceded with LH. IMPORTANT To prevent the System BIOS from becoming corrupted when the PC is configured for 2 MB of memory, set the switch in the CONFIG.SYS file to turn memory testing off: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF 66 Chapter 6Choosing shared folders or volumes You can set up a Mac OS folder, Macintosh hard disk, shared disk, or CD-ROM disc on a network to act as a PC drive. Sharing a folder on your Macintosh hard disk is a convenient way to transfer files between the Mac OS and the PC environment, especially if you are dealing with many files, or large files. You can share entire disks, or volumes. This is especially useful for network volumes, CD-ROM drives, or other volumes that otherwise would not be readily available to the PC environment. DOS treats all shared volumes as network volumes. Some DOS commands, such as FORMAT, CHKDSK, UNDELETE, and SUBST will not work on shared volumes. m Choose an available drive letter from the Sharing pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel. A dialog box appears, letting you select a folder or disk (volume) for the drive. Shared folders and volumes revert to their usual unshared status when you shut down your Macintosh. To have a folder or volume automatically assigned to a drive letter at startup, click the checkbox next to Attach at Startup. The name of an automatically attached folder or volume appears underlined in the Sharing pop-up menu. To turn off an assignment, choose the underlined item in the menu. IMPORTANT For the sharing functions to work properly, DOS must be running, MacShare should be loaded as part of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, and a LASTDRIVE=x statement should appear in the CONFIG.SYS file, where x is the highest drive letter available for sharing. AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS have x preset to M. See “MacShare” in the section “Working in the PC Environment” in Chapter 5 for more information. See the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu, for more information on transferring files between the PC environment and the Mac OS using floppy disks and other media. IMPORTANT Use caution when handling the drive file. Erasing one of these is equivalent to reformatting the hard drive it is emulating. The drive file is locked when it is installed on your computer. If you must unlock it, be very careful not to erase it. Configuring the PC Environment 67Using shared folders Because two operating systems have access to each shared folder, there may be a noticeable slowdown in performance when using these folders for highspeed PC applications such as multimedia programs, or during large file transfers between them. For optimum performance, place PC application programs and their files in the C or D drive rather than in a shared folder. The performance of Macintosh programs is unaffected by placing them in shared folders. Since the PC doesn’t understand the concept of resource forks the same way the Macintosh does, information in a Macintosh file’s “resource fork” is lost when it is copied by the PC. For example, if a Macintosh file is copied between two shared folders using the COPY command in DOS, that file’s original icon will be lost, and the file itself may be unusable in the Mac OS. Many document files do not have resource forks and can be copied between shared folders with no problems. The applications that created the files contain the resource information for these files. However, QuickTime files cannot be successfully copied between shared folders. In some Microsoft application programs, there is a misrepresentation of the shared drive icons. When you open a file from a shared folder in Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word, the shared drive icon may appear as a floppy disk or CD. This does not affect the file’s content, and the file is still usable. Do not attempt to use shared folders from a DOS shell run from Windows. Strange text characters in a document When using shared folders to exchange documents between the Mac OS and the PC, in some cases a Macintosh application program may not be able to interpret the file format of a PC document. When this happens, the document’s formatting is displayed incorrectly and you may see strange characters in the document. m Try using a different application program. m Translate the document into a different file format using one of the file format translation utilities available for the Macintosh (such as MacLink Plus Easy Open Translators from DataViz). m Transfer the text using DOSCLIP. m Use the Export feature found in many programs. m Use a PC-Macintosh translation utility. 68 Chapter 6Turning on PC sounds To have Sound Blaster and other PC sounds played through the Macintosh speaker or through headphones, you need to make settings in both the PC Setup control panel and in the Sound control panel. Choosing a setting in the Sound pop-up menu The Sound pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel gives you three choices: m To hear PC sounds in both the PC environment and the Mac OS, choose Enabled. m To hear PC sounds only when you’re in the PC environment, choose Auto Enabled. m To shut off PC sounds entirely, choose Disabled. Sound control panel takes precedence: The setting in the PC Setup control panel’s Sound pop-up menu has no effect on sounds generated in the Mac OS. If the volume is set to 0 in the Sound control panel, however, you won’t hear any PC sounds no matter what the setting is in the PC Setup control panel’s Sound menu. For sounds generated by the Sound Blaster card and for sounds from the PC, the Sound control panel must be set with the Internal CD playthrough option turned on. For instructions, see the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. The PC Sound control in the PC Setup control panel does not affect sounds produced by the Sound Blaster card. Only PC-generated sounds such as the system beep are affected by this control. To turn off both PC and Sound Blaster-generated sounds, use the master volume control of the Mixer Control application from the Audio program group, or turn off the Internal CD playthrough in the Sound control panel in the Mac OS. (For instructions, see the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.) The Sound Blaster hardware installed in your DOS-compatible Macintosh is not able to record sounds. The DOS-compatible Macintosh does not fully support Sound Blaster 8-bit, Sound Blaster 2.0, or Sound Blaster Pro drivers. If problems occur, use the Sound Blaster 16 driver that comes with your computer. Configuring the PC Environment 69Configuring drives C and D You use the C: and D: pop-up menus to create or select PC drives. Drive C is required; drive D is optional. You can use a PC-formatted SCSI hard drive attached to your Macintosh, or you can create a drive container—a virtual PC drive—on any Macintosh hard drive. You can even use a drive container created by SoftPC or SoftWindows. To use a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a startup (boot) drive, format the drive to be bootable by using the FORMAT C: /S command. m To create a drive container for drive C or D, choose New Drive File from the C: or D: pop-up menu. Set a location for the drive container, and give it a name and a size. Then click Initialize Drive File. When using a PC-formatted SCSI device as the PC’s C or D drive, ensure that the driver for that device is not loaded by PC Exchange. This would cause PC Exchange to mount the drive instead of the PC environment. Open the PC Exchange control panel and click the Options button. Make sure the SCSI driver for the device you want to use is not checked. Then click OK. This ensures that the PC will be able to load the C drive. Single versus multiple partitions: When you initialize a container this way, it contains a single partition. To initialize a container with multiple partitions, prepare it in DOS using the FDISK command instead of initializing it through the PC Setup control panel. Then format it using the FORMAT command. Use the /S parameter in the FORMAT command to make the container bootable (for example, type FORMAT C: /S at the DOS prompt). See the DOS manual for further instructions on using these commands. m To change the drive container for drive C or D, choose Other Drive File from the C: or D: pop-up menu, then locate the new drive container in the dialog box that appears. The change takes effect the next time you restart the PC. To have the change take place immediately, click the Restart button at the bottom of the control panel. 70 Chapter 6m To use a PC drive or partition, choose Drive Partition from the C: or D: pop-up menu. A dialog box appears with a list of available partitions. If you use a PC drive or partition and you have a utility that mounts these devices on the Macintosh, unmount the drive or partition before starting the PC by dragging its icon to the Trash. If you intend to mount your PC drive file, partition, or disk on the Macintosh using Macintosh PC Exchange, do not use a PC compression program. Drives that are compressed cannot be mounted. Managing PC files from the Mac OS You can gain access to files in a drive container even if you’re in the Mac OS. Follow these steps: 1 Double-click the drive container in the Finder. The drive container appears as a disk icon on the Mac OS desktop. 2 Double-click the container’s disk icon. The icon opens and you have access to the files inside it. You can now manipulate these files as you would any Mac OS files. Drive container may be read-only: If the PC is running, you won’t be able to add anything to the drive container from the Mac OS. To do so, shut down the PC from the PC Setup control panel and then do steps 1 and 2 above. WARNING If you don’t unmount the drive or partition, you may lose data because both the Macintosh and the PC may write to the device at the same time. Configuring the PC Environment 71Changing the size of the drive container You may find, after installing software in a drive container, that the container is too small or too large for your needs. You cannot change the size of an existing drive container, but you can create a new one in the appropriate size and move the software to it. You can also create an additional drive container to supplement the existing one. Two active containers maximum: For the following procedure to work, drive D must be available for assignment to a new drive container. If both drives C and D have been assigned, you must first set drive D to None and drive C to the container you need to replace. (The contents of the container mapped to drive D are unaffected.) Calculating the proper size To determine the proper size for the new container, follow these steps: 1 Make sure you’re in the Mac OS, then open the PC Setup control panel. You see a small apple at the upper-left corner of the screen when you’re in the Mac OS. 2 Check the name of the container associated with drive C. The name of the container appears above the C: pop-up menu. 3 Locate the container in the Finder. 72 Chapter 64 Open the container’s Get Info window and note the container’s size. To open the container’s Get Info window, select the container’s icon and choose Get Info from the File menu. 5 Close the Get Info window by clicking its close box. 6 Switch to the PC environment. 7 At the DOS C: prompt, type DIR. Note how much space is available. 8 Subtract the amount of available space on the drive from the container size. The number you get is the current size you need for storage. 9 Add 10 percent to the result of the calculation in step 8. It’s a good idea to have extra space available, because some applications may need to write temporary work files to the drive, or you may need to add software to the drive at a later time. The 10 percent figure, however, is arbitrary; use a number that suits your needs. If the current container is too large, the result of this calculation is the size that the new container should be. Skip to step 12. 10 Determine the amount of storage needed by the additional software you want to install. To do so, add together the individual storage space required for each program you want to install. This information is probably available in the documentation that came with your software. 11 Add the sums from steps 9 and 10. The resulting sum is the size that the new container should be. 12 Press x-Return to switch back to the Mac OS. Configuring the PC Environment 73Creating the new container Now that you know what size the container should be, you’re ready to create it. 1 Follow the instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” earlier in this chapter to create a new container for drive D. You may need to remove some files from your hard disk to free enough space for the new container. 2 Click Restart PC at the bottom of the PC Setup control panel. 3 Click Switch to PC. You now have two drives available—drive C, your original container, and drive D, the container you just created. Moving the files You can transfer your files from the old container to the new one in either the Mac OS or the PC environment. m To move files in the Mac OS, drag all the files from the existing drive container to the new one. To move the files in the PC environment, follow these steps: 1 At the DOS prompt, type FORMAT D: /S and press Return. This command makes the new drive container bootable. Answer Y when DOS asks if you’re sure. 2 When the DOS prompt returns, type the following command: XCOPY C:\*.* D:\*.* /E /V This command copies all the files and directories from your drive C container to your drive D container. 3 Press x-Return to switch back to the Mac OS when copying is complete. 74 Chapter 64 In the PC Setup control panel, choose None from the D: pop-up menu. Doing so deallocates drive D. 5 Choose Other Drive File from the C: pop-up menu and select the container you just created. Your new container is now associated with drive C. 6 Click Restart PC at the bottom of the PC Setup control panel. 7 Click Switch to PC. 8 At the DOS prompt, type DIR. You should see a list of all the files you copied. You may want to run some of your programs to verify that everything has been copied correctly. m To throw away the original drive container, first switch to the Mac OS. Then drag the original container to the Trash and choose Empty Trash from the Special menu. Doing so frees up the space on your hard disk that the container held in reserve. Configuring The PC Environment 75Understanding the status line The status line at the bottom of the control panel gives you messages about the status of the PC hardware and software. Messages can include any of the following: m DOS-compatibility card not present Your computer’s system software did not recognize the DOS-compatible card installed in your computer. Reinstall the PC software according to the directions in Chapter 8. If reinstalling the software doesn’t help, contact an Apple-authorized service provider for assistance, or call Apple’s customer support hotline. (The phone number for the hotline is in the service and support information that came with your computer.) m PC Setup software not loaded An error occurred during the start-up process and the DOS environment won’t run. m PC is running You’ve clicked Start PC and the card is active. m PC is shut down The card is installed but not running. To start the card, click Start PC, or select Auto-Start PC and restart the computer. m PC is turned off The Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel is selected. m Not enough memory Your computer must have at least 8 megabytes (MB) of RAM installed, and the PC requires at least 2 MB of free RAM if you don’t have a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatible card for the exclusive use of the PC. Turn off the RAM disk, if you’re using one, in the Memory control panel, and restart your Macintosh. 76 Chapter 577 Consult this chapter if you experience problems using the Mac OS. When you have questions If you want to know how to do a particular task in the Mac OS, refer to Macintosh Guide in the Guide (h) menu. For instructions on using Macintosh Guide, see Chapter 2 of this manual. If you have problems working in the PC environment on your Macintosh, see Chapter 8, “Troubleshooting in the PC Environment.” If you have questions about using DOS, see your DOS manual. When you run into trouble While you’re using your computer, you may occasionally see a bomb icon or an error message, or you may have a problem such as the pointer (8) “freezing” on the screen. If you have trouble with your computer, take a few minutes to read the information in this chapter. If your problem is related to a particular procedure, you should also look for information on that procedure in Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For additional troubleshooting information and a list of common questions relating to the Mac OS, see the “Troubleshooting” topic of Macintosh Guide. If you are unable to access Macintosh Guide (for example, if your screen is “frozen”), refer to this chapter to see if you can resolve the problem. 7 Troubleshooting in the Macintosh EnvironmentTake your time When you see an error message, you don’t have to take action immediately. The message stays on the screen until you click the OK button or turn off the Macintosh. To help diagnose and correct the problem, gather as much information on the situation as you can before starting over. m Make a note of exactly what you were doing when the problem occurred. Write down the message on the screen and its ID number (if any). Also list the programs you were using and the names of any items you know have been added to the System Folder since the system software was installed. This information will help a service person diagnose the problem. (It is helpful to keep a printed copy of the items in your System Folder. For instructions on printing the contents of a folder, see the “Printing & Fonts” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide [h] menu.) m Check the screen for any clues. Is a menu selected? What programs and document icons are open? Note anything else that seems relevant. m If you were typing text and were not able to save it before the problem occurred, you can write down the parts of the text still visible on the screen so that some of your work will be easy to replace. m Ask other Macintosh users about the problem you’re having; they may have a solution for it. If you need repair service, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Appleauthorized service provider or Apple for assistance. 78 Chapter 7Start over Often you can eliminate a problem simply by clearing the computer’s memory and starting over. If you can, save any open documents before restarting the Macintosh. If your system is frozen and does not respond to anything you do, or if you have a “bomb” message on the screen, saving may not be possible. You can try pressing x-Option-Esc to quit the program in use when the problem occurred; if this works, you can then save the documents open in other programs before restarting. To restart your Macintosh, try the following steps: 1 If you can, choose Restart from the Special menu or from the dialog box that’s on the screen. Dialog boxes contain messages from the computer. If something goes wrong, a message may appear on the screen, asking you to restart the computer. 2 If you can’t choose Restart, hold down the x and Control keys while you press the Power key (marked with a triangle). This key combination restarts the computer. (Use this key combination only when you can’t choose Restart from the Special menu.) 3 If nothing happens, turn off your computer with the standby power button, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. 4 If the standby power button doesn’t turn off the computer, unplug your Macintosh. If you suspect that the problem is with other equipment, such as a printer or an external hard disk that’s attached to your computer, turn that equipment off for 10 seconds or longer, then turn it on again and restart the Macintosh. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 79Rebuild your desktop regularly A process known as “rebuilding the desktop” helps your Macintosh keep track of data on your startup disks. Although you usually use the hard disk in your computer as a startup disk, you can also start up from any other disk that has system software installed. It’s a good idea to rebuild the desktop of your startup disks once a month or so. To rebuild the desktop of a startup disk, follow these steps: 1 Hold down the Option and x keys while you start up your computer. Do not release the keys until you see a message asking whether you want to rebuild the desktop. 2 Click OK. Solutions to common problems The computer is turned on but the screen is dark. One of the following is probably the cause: m You have a screen saver program that darkens the screen when the computer has not been used for a certain period. Press a key or move the mouse to turn off the screen saver. m The monitor’s brightness control (Û) is not adjusted properly. Check the monitor’s brightness control and turn it up if necessary. m The Macintosh or the monitor is not getting power. Make sure the monitor is plugged in and turned on, and that the monitor cable is firmly connected to both the computer and the monitor. Make sure the computer’s power cord is firmly connected to the computer and plugged into a grounded electrical outlet, and that the outlet has power. If you have more than one monitor and only one is dark, check that it is set up correctly in the Monitors control panel. For information on using more than one monitor, see the “Monitors” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. 80 Chapter 7m The monitor is plugged into the wrong port on the computer. Make sure the monitor is plugged into the monitor port (marked with the ª icon) on the upper-right corner of the computer’s back panel. If the monitor is plugged into another port, it will not work. If you are displaying video from your computer on a television screen, it is normal for your computer monitor to be dark. The computer won’t start up. m The game controller is plugged into the wrong port. Make sure the game controller is plugged into the joystick port on the lower-right corner of the computer’s back panel. If the game controller is plugged into another port, the computer will not start up. The computer’s clock keeps time inaccurately. Your computer has a clock that runs continuously. When the computer is turned off, a battery keeps the clock running. If your clock begins to keep time inaccurately, have your Apple-authorized service provider replace the battery. When you start up, a disk icon with a blinking question mark appears in the middle of the screen. This icon indicates that your Macintosh cannot find the system software it needs to start up. One of the following is probably the cause: m Your computer may be having a problem recognizing external equipment that uses the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI). Turn off all external SCSI equipment and disconnect the first SCSI device in the chain from your computer’s SCSI port. Then restart the computer. If the computer starts up after you disconnect your SCSI equipment, refer to the manuals that came with the equipment for information on the proper way to connect SCSI equipment and assign SCSI ID numbers. If you have a printer connected to your computer’s SCSI port, make sure your printer is not supposed to be connected to the printer port instead. Check the manuals that came with your printer for information on how to connect it properly. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 81m System software is not installed on the startup hard disk, the system software is damaged, or the hard disk is not working properly. Start up your computer using the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) Then follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage. If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter to reinstall system software on your startup hard disk. When you try to start up from a floppy disk, a disk icon with an X appears in the middle of the screen and the floppy disk is ejected. This icon indicates that the floppy disk you tried to start up from is not a startup disk. Wait a few seconds. The computer should start up from its internal hard disk. Make sure you insert floppy disks only after the computer has begun starting up. 82 Chapter 7A “sad Macintosh” icon appears and the computer won’t start up. This icon indicates that your Macintosh cannot start up because of a problem with the system software or the computer hardware. Eject any floppy disks by turning off the computer and then holding down the mouse button while you turn the computer on again. Try starting up with the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) If the “sad Macintosh” icon appears again, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for information on contacting an Appleauthorized service provider or Apple for assistance. The Macintosh “hangs” or freezes during startup. If the Mac OS is sharing 16MB or more of memory with the PC environment and Disklight of Norton Utilities 3.1.1 is installed, the computer will freeze during startup. This does not occur with 8MB or less shared memory. Restart the Macintosh using one of the techniques described in “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble,” earlier in this chapter. Open the PC Setup control panel and change the shared memory setting to 8 MB or less. The hard disk icon does not appear on the desktop. If you don’t see a hard disk icon on the desktop, try the following: m If the hard disk is internal, shut down your computer, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. m If the hard disk is external, make sure that it is turned on and that its cable is connected firmly; then restart the Macintosh. m Check the ID numbers of all SCSI equipment connected to your computer. See the manuals that came with your SCSI equipment for information on setting SCSI ID numbers. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 83m If the hard disk is your startup disk, start your computer using the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) Then follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage. If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter to reinstall system software on your startup hard disk. Icons do not appear correctly on your screen. You need to rebuild the desktop—a process that helps your Macintosh keep track of files and folders on your hard disks. For instructions, see “Rebuild Your Desktop Regularly” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter. If icons do not appear correctly after you rebuild the desktop, restart your computer while pressing the Shift key to temporarily turn off system extensions. When you see the “Welcome to Macintosh—extensions off” message, release the Shift key and press the Option and x keys until you see a message asking if you want to rebuild the desktop. Your Macintosh can’t read a floppy disk. If you see a message that a floppy disk is unreadable, try one of the following: m If the disk has never been used, you may simply need to initialize it. For instructions, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in in the Guide (h) menu. m The disk may be damaged. See “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter for information on testing and repairing disks. m The disk may be a DOS disk that the Macintosh environment cannot use. Try switching to the PC environment and inserting the disk again. 84 Chapter 7If you are trying to use a DOS disk in the Macintosh environment, consider the following: m The disk may have been formatted incorrectly on a DOS computer (or in the PC environment on your Macintosh). On DOS computers it’s possible to format a standard double-sided disk in a high-density (1440K) format, and vice versa. Disks formatted in this way cannot be read by a Macintosh computer. When formatting disks in the DOS environment for use in both the Mac OS and DOS, always format standard double-sided disks in the 720K format. Always format high-density disks in the 1440K format. If a disk has been formatted incorrectly, switch to the PC environment and copy the disk’s contents onto another disk that has been properly formatted. The pointer (8) freezes on the screen. Your system has a software problem. m Press x-Option-Esc to quit the application program in use when the problem occurred. If this works, you can save the documents open in other programs before restarting. m Restart your Macintosh. (For instructions, see “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter.) Most software problems are temporary, and restarting usually corrects the problem. m Check the startup disk and program you were using when the problem occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. m Sometimes incompatible system extensions or control panels can cause system software problems. Restart while holding down the Shift key; this temporarily turns off all system extensions. If your computer works normally after you do this, remove all extensions from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder) and put them back into the Extensions folder one at a time. Restart after you add each extension. This procedure should identify any incompatible extensions. You can also use the Extensions Manager control panel to turn off individual extensions. For information on using this control panel to manage system extensions, see the “Setting Options” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 85m If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. A dialog box with a bomb appears. Your system has a software problem. m Write down what you were doing when the message appeared, the text of the message, and the message number, if there is one. m Restart your Macintosh. (See “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter for instructions.) Most software problems are temporary, and restarting usually corrects the problem. m Check the startup disk and application program you were using when the dialog box appeared. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. Reinstalling the system software may correct the problem. m Sometimes incompatible system extensions or control panels can cause system software problems. Restart while holding down the Shift key; this temporarily turns off all system extensions. If your computer works normally after you do this, remove all extensions from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder) and put them back into the Extensions folder one at a time. Restart after you add each extension. This procedure should identify any incompatible extensions. You can also use the Extensions Manager control panel to turn off individual extensions. For information on using this control panel to manage system extensions, see the “Setting Options” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. m If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. 86 Chapter 7The pointer (8) doesn’t move when you move the mouse. One of the following situations is probably the cause: m Your system has a software problem. Press x-Option-Esc to quit the application program in use when the problem occurred. If this works, you can save the documents open in other programs before restarting. Restart your Macintosh. See “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter for instructions. Check the startup disk and program you were using when the problem occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. Try starting up the computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) If your computer starts up normally, there may be an extension conflict. If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. m The mouse is not connected properly. Turn the computer off using the standby power button, check that the mouse and keyboard cables are connected properly, and then restart the computer. m Signals from the mouse are not reaching the computer, either because the mouse needs cleaning or because there is something wrong with the mouse. Clean the mouse according to the instructions in Appendix A of this book. If you have another mouse or pointing device, try connecting and using it. (Turn off the computer before connecting it.) If the new device works, there is probably something wrong with the mouse you replaced. If none of these procedures solves the problem, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 87Typing on the keyboard produces nothing on the screen. One of the following is probably the cause: m Your system has a software problem. Restart your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter. Check the startup disk and application program you were using when the problem occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See “Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter for instructions. m You haven’t selected any text or set the insertion point (i). Make sure the program you want to type in is the active program. Then place the pointer (8) in the active window and click to set an insertion point (i) or drag to select text (if you want to replace the text with your typing). m The keyboard is not connected properly. Turn off the computer using the standby power button, then check that the keyboard cable is connected properly at both ends. If you have a keyboard with an ADB port (marked with the × icon) on each end, turn off the Macintosh using the standby power button and plug the keyboard cable into the other ADB port on the keyboard. (You may have to unplug the mouse to do this.) Then restart the computer. m The keyboard is damaged. If you have access to another keyboard, try using it instead. (Turn the computer off before connecting it.) If the new keyboard works, there is probably something wrong with the one you replaced. If none of these procedures solves the problem, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. 88 Chapter 7You can’t start an application program or it quits unexpectedly. Or, when you try to open a program, you see a message that not enough memory is available. One of the following is probably the cause: m The Macintosh ran out of memory. Quit the programs that you have open and then open the program you want to use, or restart your Macintosh. Use the Memory control panel to turn on virtual memory. For more information on virtual memory, see the “Memory” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. m The program needs more memory. Use the program’s Info window to give it more memory. For more information on increasing a program’s memory, see the “Memory” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. m The program requires special hardware, such as a floating-point unit (FPU), and your computer doesn’t have the hardware installed. Check the documentation that came with the program to find out if the program requires a Macintosh with special hardware, such as an FPU. Then check the Technical Information booklet that came with your Macintosh to find out if your computer is equipped with such special hardware, or if the hardware can be installed. Consult your Apple-authorized service provider for information on installing special hardware in your computer. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 89You see a message that an application program can’t be found. The following dialog box appears if you try to open a document that was created with software that is not on your hard disk. Normally, you see this message if you try to open a document that came from another Macintosh with software that is different from yours. m The Macintosh Easy Open control panel is not installed. This is a control panel that you can use to open documents when you don’t have the program that created them. Reinstall the control panel from the system software disks or CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with your computer. (See the section “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter for instructions.) See Appendix D for instructions on using Macintosh Easy Open. m Some documents can be opened by more than one application program. Try starting a program that you think might be able to open the document, and then choose Open from the program’s File menu to try to open the document. m Purchase and install the correct software to use the document, or find out if the creator of the document can convert it to a form that one of your programs can use. m Don’t try to open the files in the System Folder. Most of the files in the System Folder are used by your computer for internal purposes and are not intended to be opened. m Rebuild the desktop by holding down the Option and x keys while starting up your computer. Keep holding down the keys until you see a message asking whether you want to rebuild the desktop. Click OK. 90 Chapter 7m If the document is from a DOS computer and you want to open it in the Macintosh environment, use the PC Exchange control panel to specify which Macintosh program will open the document. For information about working with DOS documents in the Mac OS, see the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. You experience problems using a DOS document. If you can’t open a DOS document using a Macintosh program, try the following: m Open the document from within the program by choosing Open in the program’s File menu. m Use the PC Exchange control panel to change the document’s type to one that can be opened by the program. If a DOS document is displayed incorrectly, or you see strange codes or characters in the document, try one of the following: m Your application program may have special procedures for opening and saving documents with different file formats. See the information that came with your program. m Try opening the document in another program. Note: Some characters that can be displayed on the Macintosh are not accurately displayed on DOS computers. For more information about working with DOS documents in the Mac OS, see the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 91The Mac OS is running out of memory even though I’m not running any PC programs. When sharing memory with the PC environment, the Macintosh allocates a portion of its memory to the PC. Because of this, the Mac OS may not be able to load all your system extensions, including the PC Setup control panel. If this problem occurs, try the following: m Add memory to the DOS-compatibility card, as described in Appendix B. m Decrease the shared memory setting. m Remove PowerTalk and QuickDraw GX from the Extensions folder inside the System Folder. m Remove any other system extensions you don’t need. m Change the name of the PC Setup control panel to !PC Setup so that it loads first. Shared memory assigned to the PC isn’t available to the Mac OS until you turn off the PC. If the previous suggestions don’t solve your problem, click the Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel and restart the Macintosh. 92 Chapter 7Initializing a hard disk Before you can use a new disk, the disk must be prepared so that the computer knows where to store information on the disk. This preparation is called initializing (or formatting) the disk. When do you need to initialize a hard disk? The hard disk inside your computer was initialized at the factory, so you shouldn’t need to initialize it. You need to initialize a hard disk only if m you purchase a hard disk that has not been initialized at the factory m your hard disk is damaged If a hard disk needs to be initialized, the disk’s icon does not appear on the desktop when you start up the computer using another disk. Starting up from a CD-ROM disc To initialize, test, or repair a hard disk, or to install system software on a hard disk, you need to start up your computer from another disk. If your computer has a CD-ROM drive, you can start up your computer using the CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with the computer. To start up the computer using the CD-ROM disc, follow these steps: 1 Turn your computer on. 2 Press the Open/Close button on your CD-ROM drive, and quickly insert the CD-ROM disc containing system software into the drive. 3 Immediately press and hold down the C key on your keyboard. Continue to hold down the key until you see the “Welcome to Macintosh” message. WARNING Initializing a disk erases any information that may be on it. Before you initialize a damaged disk, try to repair it as described in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 93If a blinking question mark appears, or if the computer starts up from your hard disk: You did not insert the CD-ROM disc quickly enough for the computer to recognize it as a startup disk. Follow these steps: 1 Shut down your computer. The CD-ROM disc will remain in the CD-ROM drive. 2 Turn the computer on. 3 Immediately press and hold down the C key on the keyboard. Continue to hold down the key until you see the “Welcome to Macintosh” message. Starting up from a floppy disk To initialize, test, or repair a hard disk, or to install system software on a hard disk, you need to start up your computer from another disk. If you don’t have a built-in CD-ROM drive, you can start up the computer using either the Disk Tools or Install Disk 1 floppy disk that came with your computer. To start up your computer using a floppy disk, follow these steps: 1 Shut down your computer. 2 Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive. If you want to initialize, test, or repair your hard disk, use the Disk Tools disk to start up your computer. If you want to install Mac OS system software, use the Install Disk 1 disk. 3 Turn the computer on. 94 Chapter 7Reinitializing your computer’s internal hard disk You initialize the internal hard disk using a program called Internal HD Format, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer came with a CD-ROM drive and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find Internal HD Format on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” earlier in this section. 2 Double-click the Internal HD Format icon to open it. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Internal HD Format. 3 Type a name for your disk in the name box. 4 If you want to make sure that none of the hard disk’s original information is recognizable after reinitialization, choose Zero Data in the Options menu. If you choose Zero Data, initialization may take a few minutes. (If you don’t choose Zero Data, initialization will take less than 30 seconds.) 5 Click Initialize. A message informs you that initializing the disk erases all information on it. 6 Click OK. During initialization, a status bar shows you the progress of the initialization. 7 When the initialization is complete, click Done. If a message reports that initialization failed, try again. If initialization fails a second time, take the disk to your Apple-authorized service provider for repair. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 95Initializing an external SCSI hard disk You initialize an Apple external SCSI hard disk using a program called Apple HD SC Setup, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer came with a CD-ROM drive and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find Apple HD SC Setup on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” earlier in this section. 2 Open the Apple HD SC Setup icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup. 3 Click Drive until the disk you want to initialize appears. You cannot initialize the disk that you used to start up your computer or the disk that contains the Apple HD SC Setup program. 4 Click Initialize. 96 Chapter 7 SCSI ID number of the currently selected hard disk Name of the currently selected hard disk5 Click Init to initialize the hard disk. 6 If a message appears asking you to name the disk, type a name and then click OK. 7 Click Quit when you see a message reporting that initialization was successful. If a message reports that initialization failed, try again. If initialization fails a second time, take the disk to your Apple-authorized service provider for repair. Repairing a damaged disk Disks can become damaged by repeated use and handling. When do you need to repair a disk? If you see a message reporting that a disk is damaged or unreadable, you may need to repair the disk. Try these suggestions first If you can’t start up from a hard disk or you don’t see the hard disk icon on the desktop, try the following: m If the hard disk is internal, shut down your Macintosh, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. m If the hard disk is external, make sure that it is turned on and that its cable is connected firmly; then restart the Macintosh. m If the hard disk is your startup disk, start up with a different startup disk. If the hard disk’s icon appears on your desktop, reinstall system software on the hard disk (see “Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter). Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 97 Click here to initialize the disk. m Check the ID numbers of all SCSI equipment connected to your computer. Each device must have a unique ID number (the computer itself has the ID number 7). Also check that the chain of devices is terminated properly. For information on setting SCSI ID numbers and terminating a SCSI chain, see the manuals that came with your SCSI equipment. m Test the disk following the instructions that come next. Checking for damage on your internal hard disk You can check for damage on your internal hard disk with the Internal HD Format program, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find the Internal HD Format program on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. You can use Internal HD Format at any time to check for damaged blocks (segments of the hard disk that cannot reliably be used to store information). 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Open the Internal HD Format icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Internal HD Format. 3 Choose Scan All Blocks in the Functions menu. If the program finds damaged blocks, it marks them so the computer will not store information in them. This process does not harm any information on the hard disk. 98 Chapter 7Testing an external SCSI hard disk You can test an external Apple SCSI hard disk with the Apple HD SC Setup program, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your computer. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive, and you didn’t receive floppy disks, you can find the Apple HD SC Setup program on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Open the Apple HD SC Setup icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup. 3 Click Drive until the disk you want appears. 4 Click Test. 5 When a message tells you that testing is complete, click Quit. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 99 SCSI ID number of the currently selected hard disk Name of the currently selected hard diskIf the test reveals a problem, you may be able to correct it by using Disk First Aid or another disk repair program (see the instructions in the next section), or you may need to reinitialize the disk (see “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter). Consult an Apple-authorized service provider for assistance, if necessary. How to repair a hard disk or floppy disk You can repair some types of disk damage by using the Disk First Aid program, which is included either on the Disk Tools floppy disk or on the CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with your computer. 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Open the Disk First Aid icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid. 3 Click the icon of the disk you want to test. Disk icons appear in a box at the top of the Disk First Aid window. 100 Chapter 74 Click Repair to begin testing and repairing the disk. You can’t repair the startup disk or the disk that contains the Disk First Aid program, but you can test these disks by clicking Verify. If the program reveals a problem with either of these disks, start up the computer from another disk so that you can repair the damaged disk. If you want to test and repair another disk, click its icon and then click Repair. 5 When testing and repair are finished, choose Quit from the File menu. If Disk First Aid cannot correct the problem m Try repairing the disk again. Sometimes repeating the process corrects the problem. m Use another disk repair or recovery program. Some disk repair programs let you recover information from a damaged disk. m Consult a computer repair specialist for help. m Once you have recovered all the information you can, erase (reinitialize) the disk. If initialization doesn’t work, discard the damaged disk (if it’s a floppy disk), or take it to your Apple-authorized service provider for repair (if it’s a hard disk). Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 101Installing or reinstalling Mac OS system software System software is the set of programs and other files that the Mac OS uses to start itself up, keep track of your files, and run the application programs you use. System software is kept in the folder called the System Folder. When you turn on your computer, it looks for a startup disk, which is a disk that contains the system software. The startup disk is usually the hard disk that’s inside your computer, although another hard disk or a floppy disk can also be a startup disk. The accessory kit that came with your Macintosh provides system software on either a set of floppy disks or a CD-ROM disc. You can use the floppy disks or the CD-ROM disc to install the system software on your Macintosh if you need to do so. When should you install system software? Your Macintosh came with all the necessary system software installed on its internal hard disk, so you don’t need to install system software on that disk unless you encounter software problems. If you have a new hard disk or a newly initialized hard disk that doesn’t contain system software, or if you want to upgrade to a more recent version of system software on a hard disk, follow the instructions in “Installing System Software” later in this chapter. If you want to install DOS on a drive container or another volume that you’re using as a PC drive, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. When should you reinstall system software? If you have a problem with your system software, you may see this icon in the middle of the screen: If this icon appears, follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” earlier in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage. 102 Chapter 7If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in the next section, “Installing System Software,” to reinstall system software on your startup hard disk. Installing system software Follow the steps in this section to do what is commonly called a “normal” installation of system software. If you’re installing system software on a hard disk for the first time, make sure that your hard disk has been initialized, a process that prepares the disk to store information. If you see the hard disk’s icon on the desktop when you start up the computer, the disk has been initialized. If no disk icon appears when you start up, see “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter for instructions. To do a normal installation, follow these steps: 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Find and open the Disk First Aid icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid. After Disk First Aid starts, follow the instructions on the screen. Disk First Aid checks your hard disk for any problems. 3 When Disk First Aid has finished checking your hard disk, choose Quit from the File menu. 4 Shut down your computer. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 1035 Start up your computer from the Install Disk 1 disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program. 6 Click OK. The Easy Install dialog box appears. 7 Make sure that the hard disk named in the box is the one on which you want to install system software. If it isn’t, click Switch Disk until the correct disk name appears. 8 Click Install. 9 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. If you’re installing system software from floppy disks, you see messages asking you to insert different disks. 104 Chapter 7 Parts of system software to be installed Disk on which system software will be installed Click here to install the software you need. Click here to install on a different disk.10 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart. If a message reports that installation was not successful, try installing again. (Follow the instructions on the screen.) If, after reinstalling system software by doing a normal installation, you still experience problems with your computer, follow the steps in the next section for doing a “clean” installation of system software. IMPORTANT Certain system extensions or application programs that were originally on your hard disk may not be installed with the Installer program. If you notice that a certain extension or program was not installed, you may need to install it separately. You can find these additional extensions and programs on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. If you don’t have a CD-ROM drive, see the service and support information that came with your computer for information on how to contact Apple directly for assistance. Doing a clean installation of system software The steps in this section outline what is commonly called a “clean” installation of system software. Do a clean installation if you can’t determine what is damaged in your System Folder (especially if you think any special software, such as control panels, system extensions, or custom utilities, may be causing the problems you’re experiencing). You should also do a clean installation if you’re still having problems with your computer after you’ve reinstalled system software by doing a normal installation. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 105Testing your hard disk To prepare your hard disk for a clean installation, follow these steps: 1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter. 2 Find and open the Disk First Aid icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid. After Disk First Aid starts, follow the instructions on the screen. Disk First Aid checks your hard disk for any problems. 3 When Disk First Aid has finished checking your hard disk, choose Quit from the File menu. Preparing an external SCSI hard disk for reinstallation of system software If you’re reinstalling system software on an Apple external SCSI hard disk, follow these additional steps. If you’re reinstalling system software on your internal hard disk, skip to the next section, “Installing New System Software.” 1 Find and open the Apple HD SC Setup icon. You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup. 2 Click Drive until the disk on which you want to reinstall system software appears. 3 Click Update and follow the instructions on the screen. 106 Chapter 74 When you see a message that the update (preparation for reinstalling system software) was successful, click Quit. The external SCSI hard disk is now prepared for reinstalling system software, and you can proceed with the installation. Installing new system software 1 Insert the Install Disk 1 disk into the floppy disk drive, or insert the CD-ROM disc that contains system software into the CD-ROM drive. The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program. 2 Click Continue. The Easy Install dialog box appears. 3 Make sure that the hard disk named in the Destination Disk box is the one on which you want to install system software. If it isn’t, click Switch Disk until the correct disk name appears. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 107 Parts of system software to be installed Disk on which system software will be installed Click here to install the software you need. Click here to install on a different disk.4 Hold down Shift–x–K to start the clean installation. The following dialog box appears. 5 Click the Install New System Folder button and click OK. The Easy Install dialog box appears. The Install button has changed to Clean Install, and the contents of your old System Folder have been moved to a new folder named Previous System Folder. 6 Click Clean Install. 7 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. It takes a few minutes to complete the installation. 8 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, you may need to click Restart. You need to click Restart only if you installed software onto the startup disk. If a message reports that installation was not successful, try repeating the clean installation procedure. 108 Chapter 7 Click here to install the software you need.Replacing special software 1 Copy any special software items from the Previous System Folder back to your System Folder one item at a time, restarting the computer after copying each item. Special software consists of items such as control panels, system extensions, or custom utilities that you may have added to your System Folder. IMPORTANT Be very careful not to replace (copy over) any of the files in the System Folder with files from the Previous System Folder. 2 Check after each restart to make sure your computer is not having any software problems. If any of your special software items causes software problems, contact the software manufacturer for assistance or an upgrade. Doing a custom installation For most Macintosh users, the Easy Install procedure described in the previous sections is appropriate, because it automatically installs all the items you need. However, if you’d like to select a combination of system software files for your specific needs, you can customize your system software installation. You use custom installation to install or update one or more specific files, or to save space on your hard disk by installing only the files you want. To install customized system software, follow these steps: 1 Insert the Install Disk 1 disk into the floppy disk drive, or insert the CD-ROM disc that contains system software into the CD-ROM drive. The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 1092 Click OK. The Easy Install dialog box appears. 3 Choose Custom Install from the pop-up menu. The Custom Install dialog box appears, listing all available system software components. 4 Scroll through the list of components, clicking the checkbox next to each component you want to install. 110 Chapter 7To get additional information about a component, click the box with the letter i in it to the right of the component. 5 Click Install. 6 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 7 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Quit. If a message reports that installation was not successful, try installing again. (Follow the instructions on the screen.) 8 Restart your Macintosh. The system software is installed and your computer is ready to use. Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 111When you have questions Read this chapter when you have questions about using the PC environment on your Macintosh. If you have questions about using DOS or DOS application programs, see your DOS manual or the manuals that came with your programs. WARNING If you have a problem with your DOS-compatibility hardware or software and nothing presented in this manual solves it, consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. If you attempt to repair the DOS-compatibility hardware yourself, any damage you may cause to the DOS-compatibility hardware will not be covered by the limited warranty on your DOScompatible Macintosh. Contact an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider for additional information about this or any other warranty question. 113 8 Troubleshooting in the PC Environment Consult this chapter if you have problems using the PC environment on your Macintosh.When I try to switch to DOS, my screen is blank or has no synchronization. If the monitor has never worked in DOS, it is most likely not able to synchronize properly to the DOS video signal. Refer to the information in the Technical Information booklet on monitor specifications and video modes, and check with your monitor vendor to see if your monitor conforms to these specifications. If your monitor was working previously, verify that its type is selected in the Display pop-up menu of the PC Setup control panel. If its type doesn’t show, use the Display pop-up menu to select the correct type. Restart the computer and, immediately after the chime sounds, hold down the x-Option-P-R keys. When you hear another chime, release the keys. Then open the PC Setup control panel again. You’ll get a message that PC Setup is not properly installed. This is normal. Verify the settings, and restart the computer again. The Macintosh “hangs” or freezes during startup. If the Mac OS is sharing 16 MB or more of memory with the PC environment, and Disklight of Norton Utilities 3.1.1 is installed, the computer will freeze during startup. This does not occur with 8 MB or less shared memory. Restart the Macintosh using one of the techniques described in “Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” in Chapter 7. Open the PC Setup control panel and change the shared memory setting to 8 MB or less. The DOS-compatibility software doesn’t seem to be installed. Open the Control Panels folder and look for the PC Setup control panel. If you find it, the DOS-compatibility software is installed. If not, or if you find it but it doesn’t work, there may be a problem with the software. Reinstall the software according to the instructions in “Reinstalling the DOS-compatibility Software,” later in this chapter. If you do find the PC Setup control panel, open it. If drive C is mapped to a drive container, a drive container has been created. If drive C is not mapped to a drive container, follow the instructions in “Creating a Drive Container” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” later in this chapter. 114 Chapter 8When I switch to the PC environment, I see this message: “Non-system disk or disk error. Replace and strike any key when ready.” The DOS-compatibility hardware can’t find DOS. Switch to the Mac OS by pressing x-Return, open the PC Setup control panel, and make sure drive C is mapped to a drive container. If not, follow the instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” in Chapter 6. If drive C is mapped to a drive container, it may not be the drive container that holds DOS. If other drive containers have been created, double-click each one in the Mac OS and look for DOS folders and files. If you locate a container with DOS in it, map it to drive C. If no drive container exists, the PC software may not be installed. First, create a drive container by following the instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” in Chapter 6. Then follow the instructions under “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” later in this chapter. I’m running applications in both environments and they seem sluggish. You may be sharing Macintosh RAM with the PC. Performance may improve if you give the PC environment its own memory by installing a SIMM (memory module) on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer. For instructions, see Appendix B. Additionally, significant drive access in one environment (including file sharing) can cause a slowdown in the other. There is a delay when switching between environments. When switching would interfere with a Mac OS system task, there is a slight delay until the task is completed. There also may be a delay while clipboard information is transferred between the two environments. (If there’s a large amount of information on the clipboard, you may actually see the translator window.) If Shutdown Warning is turned on in the General Controls panel in the Mac OS, you cannot switch back to the Mac OS immediately after switching to the PC. Wait a few minutes and try switching again. To fix the problem, open the General Controls panel in the Mac OS and turn off the Shutdown Warning option. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 115I switched to the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to switch back to the Mac OS. Press x-Return at any time to switch to the Mac OS. Inserting a PC-format disk in the Mac OS brings up an initialization message. Macintosh PC Exchange may not be installed. Look in the Control Panels folder for a control panel called Macintosh PC Exchange. If you don’t find it, reinstall Macintosh PC Exchange from the floppy disks or CD-ROM disc that contains system software. I’m in the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to eject a floppy disk. Press x-E. I’m in the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to eject a CD-ROM disc. Press x-Y. The PC drive file I initialized has only one partition. Macintosh PC Exchange configures drives to have a single partition. The DOS program FDISK can configure a drive with up to four partitions. See your DOS manual for more information. The PC won’t start up, and there’s a message saying there is not enough free memory. Your computer must have at least 8 MB of RAM installed. If you don’t have a SIMM installed for the exclusive use of the PC environment (see the Technical Information booklet), the PC requires at least 2 MB of free RAM if you are using DOS, and 4 MB if you are using Windows. Turn off the RAM disk, if you’re using one, in the Memory control panel. Additionally, set the disk cache size in the Memory control panel to 128K or less. 116 Chapter 8The PC Setup icon has a red slash through it at startup. If PC Setup doesn’t have enough memory to allocate to the PC at startup time, it will turn itself off. Check the Memory control panel for disk cache and RAM disk sizes; the disk cache should be set no higher than 128K, and the RAM disk should be off (or have a small amount of memory allocated to it). Restart the Macintosh if you change either of these settings. If these steps don’t correct the problem, throw away the PC Setup Prefs file in the Preferences folder within the System Folder and restart the Macintosh. Then use the PC Setup control panel to recreate your settings. When I switch to the Mac OS from the PC environment, the following message appears: “PC Clipboard requires additional system services in order to function. Please ensure that the DOS-compatibility card is successfully installed.” Macintosh Easy Open software is either not installed or has been turned off. Turn on the Macintosh Easy Open control panel, or reinstall it from the DOS Compatibility Installer (for the Mac OS) disk. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive and you don’t have the floppy disk, use the DOS Compatibility Installer program on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. I set the DOS-compatibility card to use 4 MB (or more) of RAM, but I get an error message from my PC application program saying that there’s not enough memory to run it. If you are sharing memory between the Macintosh and PC, the Mac OS may be using some of the RAM you requested for the PC. Turn off the RAM disk, if you’re using one, in the Memory control panel; then restart the Macintosh. A PC program displays a message that it needs 540K to run, but I have 4MB of memory allocated to the PC environment. The program is referring to conventional memory. Most of the balance of the 4 MB of memory you assigned to the PC is used by the EMM386 memory management software. Configure your application program to use more extended memory and less conventional memory. You may also need to disable some device drivers or other software in your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files to free up more conventional RAM. See the section on managing memory in your DOS manual for more information. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 117The Mac OS is running out of memory even though I’m not running any PC programs. When sharing memory with the PC environment, the Macintosh allocates a portion of its memory to the PC. Because of this, the Mac OS may not be able to load all your system extensions, including the PC Setup control panel. If this problem occurs, try the following: m Add memory to the DOS-compatibility card, as described in Appendix B. m Decrease the shared memory setting. m Remove PowerTalk and QuickDraw GX from the Extensions folder inside the System Folder. m Remove any other system extensions you don’t need. m Change the name of the PC Setup control panel to !PC Setup so that it loads first. Shared memory assigned to the PC isn’t available to the Mac OS until you turn off the PC. If the previous suggestions don’t solve your problem, click the Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel and restart the Macintosh. My monitor flashes oddly when I switch environments. This is a natural effect when a single monitor is used by two different environments. Turn on the Fade Screens option in the PC Setup control panel. The PC environment is frozen, and pressing Control-Alt-Delete doesn’t reset the system. Press the x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period keys. The system will reset with a cold start. When I print a document in the PC environment, the top and bottom get clipped. In the Mac OS, open PC Print Spooler in the Extensions folder, choose Preferences from the File menu, and click “Gaps between pages (60-lines).” In the PC environment, configure your applications to print to a 60 line page, rather than a 66-line page, or your margins will be off and your pages will not print correctly. 118 Chapter 8When I start up certain software in the PC environment, my Apple monitor shows a jumbled image and the display rolls. Some application programs that write directly to the hardware (especially games) may cause the Apple 13", 14", and 16" monitors to lose video synchronization at program startup. Call the software company to see if the software has a switch to force it to make BIOS calls (or if an upgrade is available with this feature). DOS begins to start up but then the screen freezes. My cursor blinks, but I cannot type anything. Press x-Control-Alt-[keyboard] period to restart the PC. When you see the message “Starting MS-DOS,” press and hold the F5 key. This will bypass your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file so that the HIMEM.SYS driver looks like the following: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF Restart the PC; it should now start up normally. Reinstalling the DOS-compatibility software Your Macintosh DOS-compatible computer comes with the DOS-compatibility hardware and software already installed. You should reinstall the software only if you are having severe software problems. Follow the instructions in this section. There are several steps to reinstalling your DOS-compatibility software: m install the Mac OS software m create a storage area (called a drive container) for DOS software m set aside RAM for the PC environment, if necessary m install the Microsoft MS-DOS operating system (and Microsoft Windows if you wish) m install the additional DOS software that came with your DOS-compatible computer m install your own PC software For information on setting up the software after you install it, including additional changes you may need to make to the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files, see Chapter 5. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 119Reinstalling Mac OS software You’ll install several extensions and control panels in your System Folder. 1 Start up your Macintosh while holding down the Shift key. This starts the Macintosh with extensions turned off. 2 Insert the floppy disk named DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for Mac OS Environment) into the floppy disk drive. If your computer has a built in CD-ROM drive, and you don’t have this floppy disk, insert the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. 3 Find the DOS Compatibility Installer icon and double-click it to open it. 4 Click Install in the dialog box that appears. The software is automatically installed onto your hard disk. 5 When the installation is complete, click Quit and restart your Macintosh. The following Mac OS software is now installed in your System Folder: Name Location Macintosh Easy Open Control Panels folder PC Exchange Control Panels folder PC Setup Control Panels folder PC Setup Guide Additions Extensions folder PC Clipboard Extensions folder PC Clipboard Translators Extensions folder PC Print Spooler Extensions folder PC Network Extension Extensions folder 120 Chapter 8Creating a drive container A drive container is a file on a Macintosh hard disk that acts as a hard drive for the PC. You create a drive container using the PC Setup control panel. 1 Open the PC Setup control panel. 2 Choose New Drive File from the C: pop-up menu. A dialog box appears. 3 Choose a location for the drive container. The drive container can be on any hard disk attached to the Macintosh. At least 40 MB of free space is recommended. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 121It’s best to locate the container at the root level of your hard disk (not in any folders or sub-folders) so that you can locate it easily. 4 Type a name for the drive container. You can type up to 31 characters. Pick a descriptive name such as PC Drive or PC Container so that you can easily identify it. When you finish, press the Tab key to move to the Size field. 5 Type a size (in MB) for the drive container. At least 40 MB is recommended. The exact amount of space you need depends on what application programs you intend to install for DOS and Windows. Check the documentation that came with the programs to see how much space you’ll need, then allow some extra room for growth. (The software included with your DOS-compatible computer requires about 25 MB.) 6 Check Initialize Drive File to automatically initialize the drive container with a single partition. If you want more than one partition, you can leave the box unchecked and use the FDISK and FORMAT programs after you’ve installed DOS. (See your DOS manual for instructions and information about the FDISK and FORMAT commands and their options.) 7 Click Create. Assigning RAM to the PC The PC needs memory to operate. You can provide memory with a memory module (SIMM) installed on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer, or by assigning it RAM from your Macintosh. If a memory module is installed on the DOS-compatibility card, the RAM pop-up menu options will be dimmed (unavailable). The amount of memory available to the PC will depend of the amount of RAM on the installed SIMM. See the Technical Specifications booklet to find out whether your DOS-compatibility card includes a SIMM and what RAM capacity the SIMM has. If a SIMM is installed, skip to “Reinstalling PC Software,” next. 122 Chapter 8Memory installed on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer is for the exclusive use of the PC environment, and provides a marked increase in performance of PC applications. If no memory module is installed, you need to assign RAM to the PC. 1 Choose a memory size from the RAM pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel. If you’re installing DOS only, choose a minimum of 2 MB. If you intend to install Windows, choose a minimum of 4 MB. Note: Windows performance will increase if you allocate more memory to the PC. However, RAM assigned to the PC is not available in the Mac OS until you turn off the card in the PC Setup control panel and restart the computer. 2 Restart the Macintosh. IMPORTANT If the RAM size is set to 2 MB, modify the CONFIG.SYS file in DOS as follows: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF Reinstalling PC software You begin by installing the Microsoft MS-DOS operating system included with your computer. You can also install Microsoft Windows if you wish. 1 Open the PC Setup control panel and click Switch to PC. The Macintosh desktop disappears, and you see a message about a missing operating system or about a disk error. Ignore the message. 2 Insert the CD-ROM disc containing DOS and Windows software into the computer’s CD-ROM drive. If you are using floppy disks, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS Setup floppy disk and press Return. The DOS disks and manual are in the same shrink-wrapped package. 3 If you are using the CD-ROM disc, find and open Microsoft MS-DOS Setup. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 1234 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. If you are using floppy disks, press x-E to eject a disk when necessary. Note: The MS-DOS installation disks do not include a DOS mouse driver. A mouse driver for Windows is automatically installed, however, if you install Microsoft Windows. Mouse drivers for DOS are widely available from thirdparty sources. 5 When DOS installation is complete, you may want to install Windows. If you are using the CD-ROM disc, find and open the file called Windows Series Installation Instruction Diskette 1 of 6, type A:setup, and press Return. If you are using floppy disks, insert the disk labeled Windows Series Installation Instruction Diskette 1 of 6, type A:setup, and press Return. The Windows disks and manual are in the same shrink-wrapped package. You can skip this and the next step if you don’t want to install Windows. 6 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. If you are using floppy disks, press x-E to eject a disk when necessary. The following PC software is now installed: DOS (directory) WINDOWS (directory) COMMAND.COM AUTOEXEC.BAT CONFIG.SYS 124 Chapter 8Installing additional PC software Your DOS-compatible computer comes with additional software utilities that you may want to install. The following table describes the function of each program. For more information on using these programs, see Chapter 5, “Operating in the PC Environment.” Program name Function DOSCLIP Lets you copy and paste between DOS and Mac OS. WINCLIP Lets you copy and paste between Windows and Mac OS. MACSHARE Lets you share Mac OS volumes and folders with the PC environment. CDROM Lets you access your Macintosh CD-ROM drive from the PC environment. MACODI Provides support for accessing networks in the PC environment. To install the additional software, follow these steps: 1 With the PC environment on the screen, insert the disk named DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for PC Environment) into the disk drive. 2 Choose one of the options below to install software for either DOS alone or both DOS and Windows. m To install software for DOS alone, type A:INSTALL at the DOS prompt and press Return. m To install software for both DOS and Windows, start Windows, select the Run command from the File menu, type A:SETUP for the program name, and click OK. 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 125Replacing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files Your DOS-compatible PC software includes alternate versions of the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files that let you select from a variety of DOS memory-management options. Each time you start DOS, you will see a menu that asks if you want to optimize memory for just DOS, for a DOS program that requires maximum conventional memory, for a DOS program that requires maximum expanded memory, or if you want to start Windows immediately. To install the alternate CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files, follow these instructions: 1 Switch to the PC environment. 2 At the DOS prompt, type the following: C: REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAK REN AUTOEXEC.BAT AUTOEXEC.BAK COPY ALT_CFGS\CONFIG.APL CONFIG.SYS COPY ALT_CFGS\AUTOEXEC.APL AUTOEXEC.BAT 3 To restart the PC with the alternate files installed, type Control-Alt-[keypad] period. If your keyboard has a Delete key, you can press Control-Alt-Delete instead. The PC restarts and the new menu appears. Modifying the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files You may want to modify the CONFIG.SYS file by hand to meet specific needs. Use the DOS Edit command (or any other DOS or Windows editor) and make the changes listed below. IMPORTANT Make backup copies of your original files before you change them. That way you still have your originals in case problems develop. Be sure to save the file when you are finished. To prevent the ROM BIOS from becoming corrupted when the PC is configured for 2 MB of memory, be sure to add the underlined text to the indicated line: DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS/ TESTMEM:OFF 126 Chapter 8If you do not intend to use software that requires expanded memory (EMS), make the following change: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS RAM=D000-EFFF If you intend to use software that does use expanded memory, or you’re unsure what you may need in the future, make the following change: DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 Depending on how you have reconfigured the file, your CONFIG.SYS file should look something like this: DEVICE=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000 DOS=HIGH,UMB FILES=30 LASTDRIVE=M Additionally, your AUTOEXEC.BAT file should contain the following: LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X @ECHO OFF PROMPT $p$g PATH C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOS SET TEMP=C:\DOS (The reference to Windows in the PATH line applies only if you chose to install Windows.) See your DOS manual to learn how to edit and save your DOS files. IMPORTANT Some memory configuration utilities, such as MEMMAKER, may not be able to determine the exact nature of the hardware of the DOScompatible computer and, therefore, may not be compatible. Additionally, using third-party compression software such as DriveSpace on a drive container prevents you from accessing the container or the files within it from the Mac OS. For these reasons, Apple does not recommend using these programs with your DOS-compatible computer. Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 127Bypassing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files at startup To bypass the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files during the startup process, press and hold the F5 key (x-5 on non-extended keyboards) after the memory testing is complete. Reinstalling Sound Blaster software To install Sound Blaster software, follow these steps: 1 Insert the Sound Blaster Software Installation disk in the floppy disk drive while the PC is in the foreground. 2 From DOS, type A:INSTALL and press Return. 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 4 Restart DOS to use the new software. To do so, press Control-Alt-[keypad] period. See the enclosed manual, Using PC Sounds with the DOS-Compatibility Card, for information about using the Sound Blaster utilities. Reinstalling video drivers If you intend to run Windows with 256 colors at a resolution of 640 by 480 pixels, or if you intend to use an Apple 16" or VGA display with 16 colors at a resolution of 800 by 600 pixels, follow these steps: 1 Insert the Display Drivers Disk 1 disk in the floppy disk drive while the PC is in the foreground. 2 From DOS, type A: and press Return to set the current drive to A. 3 Type SETUP and press Return to run the setup program. Follow the instructions on the screen to install the video drivers. Select Windows 3.1 as the application. Note: If you are using an Apple 16" monitor, DOS is displayed at a resolution of 640 by 480 pixels centered on your monitor and surrounded by a large black border. 128 Chapter 8For your own safety and that of your equipment, follow all the instructions in this chapter. Keep these instructions available for reference by you and others. Health-related information about computer use Muscle soreness, eye fatigue, and other discomforts and injuries sometimes associated with using computers can occur from performing any number of activities. In fact, misuse of the same muscles during multiple activities can create a problem that might not otherwise exist. For example, if you engage in nonwork activities that involve repetitive stress on the wrist—such as bicycling—and also use your computer’s keyboard improperly, you may increase your likelihood of developing wrist problems. Some individuals are at greater risk of developing these problems because of their health, physiology, lifestyle, and general exposure to stress. Work organization and conditions, such as workstation setup and lighting, also play a part in your overall health and comfort. Preventing health problems is a multifaceted task that requires careful attention to the way you use your body every hour of every day. The most common health effects associated with using a computer are musculoskeletal discomfort and eye fatigue. We’ll discuss each area of concern below. 129 Appendix A Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips Read this appendix for important health and safety instructions, as well as tips on keeping your computer in good working order.Musculoskeletal discomfort As with any activity that involves sitting for long periods of time, using a computer can make your muscles sore and stiff. To minimize these effects, set up your work environment carefully, using the guidelines that follow, and take frequent breaks to rest tired muscles. To make working with your computer more comfortable, allow enough space in your work area so that you can change position frequently and maintain a relaxed posture. Another type of musculoskeletal concern is repetitive stress injuries (RSIs), also known as cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs). These problems can occur when a certain muscle or tendon is repeatedly overused and forced into an unnatural position. The exact causes of RSIs are not totally understood, but in addition to awkward posture, such factors as the amount of repetition, the force used in the activity, the individual’s physiology, workplace stress level, and lifestyle may affect the likelihood of experiencing an RSI. RSIs did not suddenly arise when computers were invented; tennis elbow and writer’s cramp, for example, are two RSIs that have been with us for a long time. Although less common than other RSIs, one serious RSI discussed more often today is a wrist problem called carpal tunnel syndrome, which may be aggravated by improper use of computer keyboards. This nerve disorder results from excessive pressure on the median nerve as it passes through the wrist to the hand. This section offers advice on setting up your work area to enhance your comfort while you use your computer. Since the effects of repetitive movements associated with using a computer can be compounded by those of other work and leisure activities to produce or aggravate physical problems, proper use of your computer system must be considered as just one element of a healthy lifestyle. No one, of course, can guarantee that you won’t have problems even when you follow the most expert advice on using computer equipment. You should always check with a qualified health specialist if muscle, joint, or eye problems occur. 130 Appendix AEye fatigue Eye fatigue can occur whenever the eyes are focused on a nearby object for a long time. This problem occurs because the eye muscles must work harder to view an object that’s closer than about 20 feet (6 meters). Improper lighting can hasten the development of eye fatigue. Although eye fatigue is annoying, there’s no evidence that it leads to permanent damage. Whenever you’re engaged in an activity that involves close-up work—such as reading a magazine, doing craft work, or using a computer—be sure to have sufficient glare-free lighting and give your eyes frequent rest breaks by looking up and focusing on distant objects. Remember to have your eyes examined regularly. To prevent discomfort and eye fatigue: m Arrange your workspace so that the furniture is properly adjusted for you and doesn’t contribute to an awkward working posture. m Take frequent short breaks to give your muscles and eyes a chance to rest. Arranging your office Here are some guidelines for adjusting the furniture in your office to accommodate your physical size and shape. m An adjustable chair that provides firm, comfortable support is best. Adjust the height of the chair so your thighs are horizontal and your feet flat on the floor. The back of the chair should support your lower back (lumbar region). Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the backrest to fit your body properly. m When you use the computer keyboard, your shoulders should be relaxed. Your upper arm and forearm should form an approximate right angle, with your wrist and hand in roughly a straight line. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 131You may have to raise your chair so your forearms and hands are at the proper angle to the keyboard. If this makes it impossible to rest your feet flat on the floor, you can use a footrest with adjustable height and tilt to make up for any gap between the floor and your feet. Or you may lower the desktop to eliminate the need for a footrest. Another option is to use a desk with a keyboard tray that’s lower than the regular work surface. m Position the mouse at the same height as your keyboard. Allow adequate space to use the mouse comfortably. m Arrange the monitor so the top of the screen is slightly below your eye level when you’re sitting at the keyboard. The best distance from your eyes to the screen is up to you, although most people seem to prefer 18 to 28 inches (45 to 70 cm). m Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections on the screen from overhead lights and windows. You may want to use a tiltable monitor stand. The stand lets you set the monitor at the best angle for viewing, helping to reduce or eliminate glare from lighting sources you can’t move. Thighs horizontal Shoulders relaxed Screen positioned to avoid reflected glare Forearms and hands in a straight line Forearms level or tilted up slightly Lower back supported Feet flat on the floor Top of the screen at or slightly below eye level (You may need to adjust the height of your monitor by placing something under it or by raising your work surface.) Clearance under work surface 45–70 cm (18–28 in.) 132 Appendix AAvoiding fatigue m Change your seated position, stand up, or stretch whenever you start to feel tired. Frequent short breaks are helpful in reducing fatigue. m Use a light touch when typing or using a mouse and keep your hands and fingers relaxed. m Some computer users may develop discomfort in their hands, wrists, or arms after intensive work without breaks. If you begin to develop chronic pain or discomfort in your hands, wrists, or arms, consult a qualified health specialist. m Allow adequate work space so that you can use your keyboard and mouse comfortably. Place papers or other items so you can view them easily while using your computer. A document stand may make reading papers more comfortable. m Eye muscles must work harder to focus on nearby objects. Occasionally focus your eyes on a distant object, and blink often while you work. m Clean your screen regularly. Keeping the screen clean helps reduce unwanted reflections. What about electromagnetic emissions? There has been recent public discussion of the possible health effects of prolonged exposure to extremely low frequency (ELF) and very low frequency (VLF) electromagnetic fields. Such fields are associated with electromagnetic sources such as television sets, electrical wiring, and some household appliances—as well as computer monitors. Apple has reviewed scientific reports and sought the counsel of government regulatory agencies and respected health organizations. Based on the prevailing evidence and opinions, Apple believes that the electric and magnetic fields produced by computer monitors do not pose a health risk. In response to those customers who wish to reduce their exposure to electromagnetic fields, Apple has lowered the emission levels of our products. We are also actively encouraging further scientific research so we can continue to promote the health and safety of our customers and employees. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 133Safety instructions For your own safety and that of your equipment, always take the following precautions. Turn off the computer completely and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cord) if any of the following conditions exists: m the power cord or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged m you spill something into the case m your Macintosh is exposed to rain or any other excess moisture m your Macintosh has been dropped or the case has been otherwise damaged m you suspect that your Macintosh needs service or repair m you want to clean the case (use only the recommended procedure described later in this chapter) Be sure that you always do the following: m Keep your Macintosh away from sources of liquids, such as wash basins, bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on. m Protect your Macintosh from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on. m Read all the installation instructions carefully before you plug your Macintosh into a wall socket. m Keep these instructions handy for reference by you and others. m Follow all instructions and warnings dealing with your system. WARNING Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operation of this product, or similar products, must always be supervised by an adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical product and do not permit them to handle any cables. 134 Appendix AHandling your computer equipment Follow these guidelines for handling your computer and its components: m When setting up your computer, place components on a sturdy, flat surface, and carefully follow all setup instructions. m When connecting or disconnecting a cable, always hold the cable by its connector (the plug, not the cord). m Turn off your computer and all its components before connecting or disconnecting any cables to add or remove any component. Failure to do so could seriously damage your equipment. m Never force a connector into a port. If the connector and port do not join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. m Take care not to spill any food or liquid on the computer, keyboard, mouse, or other components. If you do, turn your computer off immediately and unplug it before cleaning up the spill. Depending on what you spilled and how much of it got into your equipment, you may have to bring your equipment to an Apple-authorized service provider. m Protect the computer and its components from direct sunlight and rain or other moisture. m Keep all ventilation openings clear and unobstructed. Without proper air circulation, components can overheat, causing damage or unreliable operation. WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded. Your Macintosh is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug! Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 135Handling the monitor Follow these procedures for handling a monitor: m Turn down the screen brightness control if you leave the computer turned on for extended periods. If the brightness is not turned down, the image on the screen could “burn in” and damage the screen. You can also use a “screen saver” program, which dims or varies the image on the screen when the computer has been idle for a specified period of time. These programs are available from independent suppliers and user groups. m Make sure that the ventilation openings on the computer and the monitor are clear and unobstructed. m Some large monitors cannot safely be placed on top of the computer. Check the instructions that came with the monitor for setup information. m If there is interference on the monitor’s screen or on a television or radio near your computer, move the affected equipment farther away. Handling the keyboard Take care not to spill any liquid on the keyboard. If you do, turn off your computer immediately. m If you spill liquid that is thin and clear, unplug the keyboard, turn it upside down to let the liquid drain out, and let it dry for 24 hours at room temperature. If, after you take these steps, the keyboard doesn’t work, take it to an Apple-authorized service provider for repair. m If you spill liquid that is greasy, sweet, or sticky, unplug the keyboard and take it to an Apple-authorized service provider for repair. 136 Appendix AHandling floppy disks Ejecting a disk For instructions on ejecting a floppy disk, a CD-ROM disc, or a removable media disk from the Mac OS, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For instructions on ejecting disks in the PC environment, see “Ejecting Disks in the PC Environment” in the section “Switching Between the Macintosh and PC Environments” in Chapter 5. 125° F (52° C) 50° F (10° C) Keep disks dry. Do not use a pencil or an eraser on a disk or disk label. Store disks at temperatures between 50° F and 125° F. Do not touch the exposed part of the disk behind the metal shutter. Keep disks away from magnets. Avoid exposing disks to extremely hot temperatures. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 137If you can’t eject a floppy disk If you can’t eject a floppy disk in the usual way, try the following in order: m Hold down the x and Shift keys and press the number 1 key on your keyboard to eject a disk in the internal disk drive. m Turn off the computer. If the disk isn’t ejected, then hold down the button on your mouse or other pointing device while you turn the computer on again. m Locate the small hole near the disk drive’s opening, and carefully insert the end of a large straightened paper clip into it. Push gently until the disk is ejected. Do not use excessive force. If nothing works, take the computer or disk drive to your Apple-authorized service provider to have the disk removed. Power supply The power supply in your computer is a high-voltage component and should not be opened for any reason, even when the computer is off. If the power supply needs service, contact your Apple-authorized dealer or service provider. 138 Appendix ACleaning your equipment Follow these general rules when cleaning the outside of your computer and its components: m Use a damp, soft, lint-free cloth to clean the computer’s exterior. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. m Don’t use aerosol sprays, solvents, or abrasives. Cleaning the computer case To clean the case, do the following: 1 Turn off the computer completely and then disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) 2 Wipe the surfaces lightly with a clean, soft cloth dampened with water. Cleaning the monitor To clean the screen, put household glass cleaner on a soft cloth and wipe the screen. Don’t spray the cleaner directly on the screen, because the liquid might drip into the monitor or computer. Cleaning the mouse The mouse contains a small ball that must roll smoothly for the mouse to work properly. You can keep this ball free of dirt and grease by using the mouse on a clean, lint-free surface and cleaning it occasionally. You need a few cotton swabs and a clean, soft, lint-free cloth. 1 Turn off your computer. Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 1392 Turn the mouse upside down and turn the plastic ring on the bottom counterclockwise to disengage it. If you have an older mouse, you may need to press the plastic ring (rather than turn it) to disengage it. If the mouse is locked, see the next section, “Locking and Unlocking the Mouse,” for instructions on how to unlock it. 3 Turn the mouse right-side up with one hand and catch the ring and the ball with your other hand. 4 Clean the three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab moistened with water. Rotate the rollers to clean all around them. 5 Wipe the mouse ball with a clean, soft, dry, and lint-free cloth. 6 If necessary, wash the mouse ball with warm soapy water (use a mild soap such as a dishwashing liquid) and then dry the mouse ball thoroughly. 7 Gently blow into the mouse case to remove any dust that has collected there. 140 Appendix A8 Put the ball and the ring back in place. Your mouse should roll smoothly across your mouse pad or desk. If it doesn’t, repeat these instructions carefully. Locking and unlocking the mouse If you have a newer mouse, you can lock it so the ball can’t be removed. A locking mouse has a small hole on the plastic ring. To lock the mouse, follow these steps: 1 Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the plastic ring. 2 Press down on the paper clip while you turn the ring clockwise. Turn the ring a very short distance, until it stops. When the recessed area on the ring is not lined up with the recessed area surrounding the ring, the mouse is locked. The mouse ring is locked when the recessed area on the ring does not line up with the recessed area surrounding the ring. Recessed area on ring Recessed area surrounding ring Insert a straightened paper clip into this hole. (The hole may be located here on your mouse.) Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 141To unlock the mouse, follow these steps: 1 Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the plastic ring. 2 Press down on the paper clip while you turn the ring counterclockwise. Turn the ring a very short distance. When the recessed area on the ring is lined up with the recessed area surrounding the ring, the mouse is unlocked. The mouse ring is unlocked when the recessed area on the ring lines up with the recessed area surrounding the ring. Recessed area on ring Recessed area surrounding ring Insert a straightened paper clip into this hole. (The hole may be located here on your mouse.) 142 Appendix AExpansion cards are printed circuit boards that can be installed in your computer to give it special capabilities, such as enhanced video capabilities, networking and communications, and additional processing power. You can install an expansion card by following the instructions that came with the card, or by following the instructions in this appendix. However, be sure to read this appendix for instructions that may be specific to your computer. If your computer comes with a Single Inline Memory Module (SIMM) installed on the DOS-compatibility card, you can remove it or replace it with a SIMM that has a higher memory capacity. 143 Appendix B Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment Read this appendix for instructions on installing an expansion card in your computer or memory for the PC environment. If your computer does not already have a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatibility card, you can add a SIMM that provides up to 32 MB (megabytes) of RAM for the exclusive use of your PC. The SIMM that your card uses is the same type of SIMM that your computer uses. Follow the instructions in this appendix to install a SIMM. Cards fit into slots on the computer’s logic board—the board that holds the components that make your computer work. There are three types of slots on your computer’s logic board, each labeled on the board: m a communication slot for an internal modem or an Ethernet card m a video-in slot for a card that brings signals into the computer from a videocassette recorder (VCR), laserdisc player, video camera, or similar equipment WARNING To avoid damage to your computer, Apple recommends that only an Apple-certified technician install additional RAM. Consult the service and support information that came with your Apple product for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for service. If you attempt to install additional RAM yourself, any damage you may cause to your equipment will not be covered by the limited warranty on your computer. See an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider for additional information about this or any other warranty question. 144 Appendix Bm an LC-compatible 68030 processor-direct slot (PDS). The DOS-compatibility card is already installed in this slot; you cannot add another card to it. Note: The process you use to install a TV tuner card is different from the one described in this appendix. See the documentation that came with that card for instructions. Installing an expansion card or SIMM involves three steps: m opening the computer m inserting the card or SIMM into a particular slot m closing the computer WARNING To avoid damaging your computer and expansion card, do not attempt to install any expansion card without first checking the documentation for that card. If the documentation specifies that an Apple-certified technician must install the card (usually because the installation requires special training or tools), consult the service and support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance. If you attempt to install the card yourself, any damage you may cause to the computer or card will not be covered by the limited warranty on your computer. If the card is not an Apple-labeled product, check with an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider to see if you can install it yourself. Video-in slot Communication slot Vertical plate LC-compatible PDS slot (with DOS-compatibility card installed) Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 145Opening the computer 1 Shut down your computer by choosing Shut Down from the Special menu. You can also press the Power key on the keyboard. 2 Unplug all the cables except the power cord from your computer. Leaving the power cord plugged in helps protect the computer from damage caused by electrostatic discharge. IMPORTANT To avoid generating static electricity that may damage components, do not walk around the room until you have completed the installation of the expansion card or SIMM and closed the computer. Additionally, move the logic board as little as possible while it is outside the computer case. 3 Place your thumbs on the two tabs at the top of the back panel, and press down. 4 Pulling gently, swing the panel down, and slip it out. Remove the back panel. 146 Appendix B5 If there are security screws on the vertical plate on the back of the computer, remove them with a Phillips screwdriver. 6 Unplug the power cord from your computer. 7 Swing the handle out from its storage position. Then grasp the handle and gently but firmly pull it toward you. The vertical plate and the logic board to which it’s attached slide all the way out of the computer. What you do next depends on the type of equipment you want to install. If there are security screws, remove both screws from the vertical plate. Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 147Installing a communication card 1 If your communication card has ports for connecting equipment, remove the plastic access cover from the vertical plate. 2 Remove the communication card from its static-proof bag. Hold the card by its edges to avoid touching any connectors on the card. 3 Locate the slot on the logic board labeled COMMUNICATION SLOT. Communication slot Push the two plastic tabs apart and pull off the metal retainer so the access cover can come off. Vertical plate Metal retainer 148 Appendix B4 Align the card over the communication slot. 5 Press down on the card until the connector is solidly in place. Don’t force the card. If you meet resistance, pull the card out and try again. To see if the card is properly connected, lift it gently. If it resists and stays in place, it’s connected. Installing or replacing a SIMM for the PC environment Your computer may have come with a SIMM already installed on the DOS-compatibility card inside your computer. The SIMM provides memory for the exclusive use of the PC environment. (See the Technical Information booklet to find out whether your computer has such a SIMM installed.) To replace the SIMM with a SIMM of greater capacity, or to install a SIMM if you don’t already have one installed, follow the instructions in this section. Note: The SIMMs used by the DOS-compatibility card are the same 72-pin SIMMs used to expand memory in your Macintosh. They are interchangeable. Communication slot Vertical plate Communication port access hole Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 149Removing a SIMM If your computer has a SIMM already installed on the DOS-compatibility card, follow these steps to remove it. 1 Push the metal clips at either end of the SIMM away from the SIMM. Use your fingernails. 2 Rotate the SIMM until it is at a slight angle. Rotate the SIMM away from its vertical position to disengage it from the SIMM slot. To release the SIMM, move the metal clip on each side away from the SIMM. SIMM slot Vertical plate 150 Appendix B3 Gently pull the SIMM from its slot. Hold the SIMM only by its edges. Don’t touch the connectors along the bottom edge. Handle the SIMM by the sides only, so that you don’t touch the connectors along the bottom edge. Pull the SIMM from the SIMM slot. (It comes out at a slight angle.) Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 151Installing a SIMM 1 Remove the SIMM from its static-proof bag. Handle the SIMM by its edges. Avoid touching the connectors. 2 Insert the SIMM into the SIMM slot on the DOS-compatibility card assembly, as shown in the illustration. (Your SIMM may have components on one side or on both sides, as shown.) The SIMM fits into the slot only one way. Make sure the notch on the SIMM is on this side. Insert the SIMM into the SIMM slot. (Insert the SIMM at a slight angle.) Connectors SIMM slot Vertical plate 152 Appendix B3 Rotate the SIMM gently to the back until you feel it snap into place. The plastic pin on the SIMM slot should engage the hole in the SIMM. Be sure that the metal clips snap into place. Rotate the SIMM back until it snaps into place. Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 153Closing the computer 1 Slip the base of the logic board into the guide rails inside the computer case and swing the handle back into its storage position. 2 Press the reset button on the logic board, and then slide the logic board back into the computer. 1 Press the reset button located on the main logic board (the bottom-most layer) with a ball-point pen or similar object. 2 Gently but firmly push the vertical plate back into the computer until the logic board is solidly in place. Make sure the logic board slides into the guides that are on both sides of the computer’s interior. Swing the handle up, into its storage position. 154 Appendix B3 If you removed security screws earlier, reinsert them now. 4 Slip the three hooks at the base of the back panel into the grooves in the computer case. 5 Swing the back panel up and snap it into place. Snap the plastic back panel into place. Slip the three hooks on the back panel into the grooves in the computer case. Insert security screws here. Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 1556 Plug the cables back into the computer. 7 Reconnect the power cord. Your computer is now ready to turn on and use. WARNING Never turn on your computer unless all of its internal and external parts are in place. Operating the computer when it is open or missing parts can be dangerous, and can damage your computer. 156 Appendix B157 Your computer keyboard contains certain special keys that typewriter keyboards don’t have. Many of these keys allow you to give commands to the computer without using the mouse. For example, in many application programs, pressing the x (Command) key at the same time as the Q key is often an alternative method of quitting a program. The following table describes what you can do with the special keys on your keyboard. The number of special keys on your keyboard may vary from this list; it depends on the model of keyboard you have. For information on how keys on Apple keyboards correspond to the keys on a PC keyboard, see “Keyboard” in the section “Working in the PC Environment” in Chapter 5. Special keys on Apple keyboards Arrow keys Use to move the insertion point, as an alternative to using the pointer. In some programs, the arrow keys have other functions. Caps Lock key Use to capitalize a series of letters (numbers and symbols aren’t affected). Clear key Use to delete the current selection (or use the Delete key). In some programs, Clear has other functions. x (Command) key Use in combination with other keys as an alternative to choosing a menu command. continued . num lock clear caps lock Read this appendix to learn how to use the special keys on your keyboard. Appendix C Special Keys on Your KeyboardSpecial keys on Apple keyboards (continued) Control key In combination with other keys, this key provides shortcuts or modifies other actions. Delete key Use to delete selected material, or the character to the left of the insertion point. Enter key In a dialog box, pressing Enter is the same as clicking the outlined button. In some programs, pressing this key confirms information you have provided. Escape key The function of this key depends on the program you’re using. Function keys Some programs allow you to use the 12 function keys to give commands. You can assign commands or action sequences to function keys with special utility programs. Option key Use in combination with other keys to produce special characters or modify actions. Numeric keys Use to produce numbers and mathematical symbols; some programs use these keys as function keys to initiate actions. Power key On some models, press to turn on the computer. Also press to shut down the computer on certain models. Return key Use to move the insertion point to the beginning of the next line. In a dialog box, pressing Return is the same as clicking the outlined button. Shift key Use to produce capital letters (or the upper character on the key). Other special keys The function of these keys depends on the operating system and program you’re using. Tab key Use to move the insertion point to the next stopping place (such as a tab stop or field in a dialog box or program). tab help home end ins del page up page down shift return num lock clear = / * 7 4 0 8 5 2 9 6 3 enter 1 . option alt F1 esc enter delete control 158 Appendix CYou use Macintosh Easy Open software to open a document when you don’t have the application that created it. When you choose Open from an application’s File menu with Macintosh Easy Open installed, you may see more documents than you did before. You’ll also see additional information when you use a list view of the files in a folder (including DOS, Windows, and ProDOS documents). Choosing an application to open a document Without Macintosh Easy Open, you see this message when you try to open a document created by an application missing from your computer. 159 Appendix D Using Macintosh Easy Open Follow the instructions in this chapter if you have problems opening some documents.With Macintosh Easy Open installed, you see a list of programs that can open the document. m Double-click any application in the dialog box to open the document. If you don’t like the results you see when the document opens, quit the application and try again using a different choice from the list. If Macintosh Easy Open can’t find any application to open your document, you see this dialog box: Note: Macintosh Easy Open lists only the programs that will produce the best results. To see applications that may produce less than optimum results, deselect “Show only recommended choices.” 160 Appendix DUsing the Macintosh Easy Open control panel You use the Macintosh Easy Open control panel to set preferences when you’ve installed additional translators available from your software retailer. Such translators give you more choices for opening documents. On/Off If you turn off Macintosh Easy Open, it won’t try to find applications to open your documents. You’ll still see extra information in list views. Always Show Choices When you use additional translators purchased from your software retailer, you can set preferences that determine which application opens a document. If you turn on Always Show Choices, Macintosh Easy Open presents the full list of applications and translators to open your documents, even if you have indicated a preference. Include Choices from Servers Turn off this option if you want Macintosh Easy Open to search for programs only on hard disks directly connected to your Macintosh, ignoring programs on shared disks. (Using applications over the network is slower than using them on a hard disk.) Delete Preferences Click this button to erase the record of choices you’ve made for specific translator preferences (useful only if you’ve previously installed translators purchased from your software retailer). You may want to erase your preferences when you install new translation software in order to have Macintosh Easy Open prompt you for new choices. Using Macintosh Easy Open 161In this chapter The DOS-compatibility card inside your computer supports network drivers that conform to Novell's Open Data-Link Interface (ODI). This appendix contains instructions for installing such network management software. It covers m installing NetWare client software m installing Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software m installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software m installing Windows for Workgroups m installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software m installing Mosaic Installing NetWare client software The instructions below will guide you through installation of client software for Novell NetWare versions 3.12, 4.01, and 4.02. PersonalNetWare is not supported at this time. You must have Windows installed before installing the NetWare client software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. 163 Appendix E Installing Network Management SoftwareBefore you start, be sure you have the appropriate floppy disks for the version of NetWare you wish to install. In addition, you need to know the Ethernet frame type in use on your network segment. You must choose the appropriate frame type in Step 11 below. If you are not certain which one to select, ask your network administrator before you begin the installation. 1 Insert the Novell NetWare Client for DOS WSDOS_1 disk into the disk drive. 2 At the DOS prompt, type the following: A: INSTALL 3 The NetWare Client Install screen appears. Follow the instructions, pressing Return for each selection. 4 Define the directory for NetWare. The default is C:\NWCLIENT. Press Return once to confirm the entry and press it again to execute this step. 5 Edit the CONFIG.SYS file. Change your LASTDRIVE statement so that it reads LASTDRIVE=Z. 6 Add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT Press Y-Return. 7 Decide whether you wish to load the Windows support in the directory where you have loaded Windows. Press Y or N. If yes, press Return once to confirm the Windows subdirectory entry and again to execute this step. 8 Select the driver for the network board. Press Return. 9 A message asks you to insert another disk. Follow the instructions on the screen. 10 In the dialog box, select Power Macintosh 6100 Ethernet Adapter and press Return. 164 Appendix E11 In the dialog box for selecting a frame type, press Return. 12 Use the arrow keys to choose the appropriate frame type for the Novell server you will be using. 13 Press Return. Then press Esc to continue. 14 Press Return to copy the MACODI.COM driver to the NetWare subdirectory. 15 Following the instructions on the screen, insert the NetWare Client for DOS WSDOS_1 disk again. 16 If you wish to add files and a NetWare group to the Windows directory, insert the NetWare Client for MS Windows WSWIN_1 disk and follow the instructions on the screen. When installation is complete, a dialog box appears asking you to reboot (restart) the computer. 17 Eject the disk by pressing x-E. 18 Press Control-Alt-Delete. You now have additional network drives and mappings available. Your first network drive letter is Novell’s default of F, unless this drive is already in use on your machine, or if your network is set up to use a different starting drive. 19 To log into the network, type: F: LOGIN PASSWORD: Installing Network Management Software 165Conserving memory During NetWare client installation you add the line CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT to the beginning of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. This command then loads four programs into DOS memory—LSL.COM, MACODI.COM, IPXODI.COM, and VLM.EXE (in this order). To conserve memory in the lower DOS region, you may wish to edit the STARTNET.BAT file (installed with your NetWare software) to load those four programs with the LOADHIGH (LH) command. See your DOS documentation for details on manually optimizing DOS memory. (Be aware that the Microsoft utility MEMMAKER does not work with the DOS-compatible Macintosh.) Mapping drive letters When you map a network resource as a drive letter, the Macintosh PC Setup control panel recognizes that those drive letters are unavailable for use as shared folders. However, when the network no longer uses the drive letter, PC Setup will still show them as unavailable for sharing folders until you restart the PC. In addition, if a drive letter is being shared before you start up the PC and Novell needs to use that drive letter, then the Novell network drive will take precedence over that shared drive letter. For further information, see your Novell installation and administration manuals, or contact your network adminstrator. 166 Appendix EInstalling Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing the LAN Workplace for DOS software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. In addition, you need to know the following information before you start: m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you’re installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can provide you with an address. If you have either a BOOTP or an RARP server to dynamically assign IP addresses, you don’t need to know the IP address before beginning the installation. Installing Network Management Software 167m If you are on a network with a subnet mask, you need the IP address for that mask, for example: 255.0.0.0 for client Class A IP addresses (those between 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254] 255.255.0.0 for client Class B IP addresses (those between 128.0.0.1 and 191.255.255.254] 255.255.255.0 for client Class C IP addresses (those between 192.0.0.1 and 223.255.255.254] m If you will connect to a TCP/IP host through a router, you need to know the IP address for that router. m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu). m The IP address of your domain name server. Once you have this information, you can proceed with the installation by following Novell’s instructions and answering the on-screen prompts. 168 Appendix EInstalling NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing the Chameleon TCP/IP software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. In addition, you need to know the following information before you start: m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you’re installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can provide you with an address. m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu). m The IP address of your domain name server (for example, 111.222.0.0). m The IP address of your Internet gateway, if any. Once you have this information, you can proceed. Installing Network Management Software 169To install Chameleon from Windows: 1 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu. 2 Type A:\SETUP. Follow the on-screen instructions and prompts. Near the end of the installation, you will be asked to respond to a series of dialog boxes. Respond as follows: ADD INTERFACE Click OK. INTERNET ADDRESS Enter the address provided by your network administrator or service provider. SUBNET MASK Click OK. The software will supply the correct mask. HOST NAME Select a name for your client machine. DOMAIN NAME Enter the name for your domain name server. 3 Choose Domain Servers from the Services menu. 4 Enter the IP address of the domain name server. 5 Choose Gateway from the Services menu. 6 Enter the IP address of the Internet gateway, if any. 7 Save the settings by pressing Alt-F-S. If you will be using a dial-up TCP/IP connection, skip to the next section, “Restarting Windows.” If not, proceed with step 8. 8 Go to the C:\NWCLIENT directory 9 Copy NET.CFG to NET.OLD. (Save a copy of the existing NET.CFG file.) 170 Appendix E10 Modify the NET.CFG file. A sample modified file is shown below. Note the addition of the Protocol statements in the Link Driver section and the addition of the Protocol TCP/IP section. The frame types and IP addresses used in your environment may be different from this example. Link Driver MACODI Protocol IPX E0 ETHERNET_802.2 Frame ETHERNET_802.2 Frame Ethernet_II ; Frame Ethernet_802.3 ; Frame Ethernet_SNAP Protocol RARP 8035 ethernet_ii Protocol ARP 806 ethernet_ii Protocol IP 800 ethernet_ii PORT 300 INT 10 ; node address 12d43 NetWare DOS Requester FIRST NETWORK DRIVE = F Protocol TCPIP ip_router 17.131.1.0 ip_netmask 255.0.0.0 ip_address 17.131.0.14 PATH LANG_CFG C:\NET\LANG PATH SCRIPT C:\NET\SCRIPT PATH PROFILE C:\NET\PROFILE PATH LWP_CFG C:\NET\HSTACC PATH TCP_CFG C:\NET\TCP Link Support Buffers 4 1500 MemPool 4096 Installing Network Management Software 171Restarting Windows 1 Restart the PC. 2 Start Windows. You see the Chameleon group window. Testing the installation If you will be using a direct connection to a domain name server, you can test the installation by using the Ping application program. 1 Double-click the Custom icon in the Chameleon group to open it. 2 Double-click the Ping icon. 3 Click Start. 4 Enter the name for a domain name server. You should get a response back within a few seconds. Using a dial-up service If you will be using a dial-up service such as Portal, you may need to edit the configuration file to reflect any differences between the default setup and your setup. Click the Custom icon in Windows, open the appropriate .CFG file, and edit the file. You can test the installation by using Ping. For example, with Portal: 1 Connect using Alt-C. 2 Ping the name news.ip.portal.com. You should get a response back within a few seconds. 172 Appendix EInstalling Windows for Workgroups To support networking with your DOS-compatibility hardware, you need to install software that supports ODI (Open Data-Link Interface) drivers. Follow these steps: 1 Install Windows for Workgroups 3.1.1, electing to not install the networking software. 2 Follow the instructions in “Installing NetWare Client Software,” earlier in this appendix. 3 Follow the instructions in “Installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP Software,” earlier in this appendix. Installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP Software IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. Installing Network Management Software 173If your PC is using a VGA driver, and your Air Series software is version 3.0, you need to make the following change. (These instructions assume that you have Windows installed in the C:\WINDOWS directory. If Windows is elsewhere, type the actual Windows location.) 1 Make sure the Air Series Setup disk is not read-only. 2 Place the disk in drive A. 3 Type the following at the DOS prompt: A: COPY SETUP.BMP SETUP.OLD COPY C:\WINDOWS\RIVETS.BMP A:SETUP.BMP In addition, you will need to know the following information before you start: m Your Internet e-mail address. m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you're installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can provide you with an address. m If you are on a network with a subnet mask, the IP address for that mask, for example: 255.0.0.0 for client Class A IP addresses (those between 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254), 255.255.0.0 for client Class B IP addresses (those between 128.0.0.1 and 191.255.255.254), and 255.255.255.0 for client Class C IP addresses (those between 192.0.0.1 and 223.255.255.254). m If you will connect through a gateway, the IP address for that device. m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu). Once you have this information, you can proceed. 174 Appendix ETo install Air Series from Windows: 1 In the Program Manager, open the File menu and choose Run. 2 Type A:\SETUP. Follow the instructions you see on the screen. 3 When the installation asks you to select the Ethernet card manufacturer and type, choose anything. Note the name of the adapter you select (for example, 3Com is 3C5x9). The Apple driver is not on the list, so you will need to edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file after completing the installation. 4 When the installation asks if you want to update the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, select YES. 5 Once the installation is complete, exit Windows. 6 Edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows. (You can use any convenient text editor, such as EDIT in the DOS directory.) m Comment out the line CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT m Change the line C:\AIR\BIN\ to C:\AIR\BIN\MACODI m If you are are on a NetWare local area network and using the Novell VLM redirector, add the line C:\NWCLIENT\VLM after the line C:\AIR\BIN\TCPIP m If you are using NETx, add the line C:\NWCLIENT\VLM before the line C:\AIR\BIN\TCPIP Installing Network Management Software 1757 Restart the PC. 8 Log into the network and start Windows. You should now see the Air Series group window. Testing the installation To test the installation: 1 Double-click the Air Telnet icon to open it. An Open Telnet Session dialog box appears. 2 Double-click the name of your domain name server. You see a VT100 window with a login prompt. 176 Appendix EInstalling Mosaic IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP software; the two will conflict with one another. You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use the same protocol in both environments at the same time. If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX control panel. If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the MacTCP control panel. You must have Windows installed before installing the Mosaic software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8. In addition, you must have already installed m A TCP/IP software package. m Win32s, which allows Windows to run 32-bit applications. Win32s is freeware and can be found on a number of on-line services. To install Mosaic: 1 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu. 2 Type C:\WIN32\DISK1\SETUP. 3 Answer all the dialog boxes to complete the installation. 4 After Win32s is installed, a Group window labeled Win32 Applications appears. 5 Press Alt-F-New to create an icon for Mosaic. 6 In the New Program Object dialog box, select Program Item. Installing Network Management Software 1777 Fill in the Program Item Properties dialog box as follows: Description: Mosaic Command Line: C:\MOSAIC\MOSAIC.EXE Working Directory: C:\MOSAIC 8 Click OK. A Mosaic icon appears in the Win32 Applications Group window. 9 Copy the C:\MOSAIC\MOSAIC.INI directory to the C:\WINDOWS\ directory. You are now ready to use Mosaic. 178 Appendix EA active program, identifying 13, 37 ADB. See Apple Desktop Bus Alt key (PC), simulating 46 Apple Adjustable keyboard, equivalent Macintosh and PC keys 46–47 Apple-authorized service provider, contacting can’t eject a floppy disk 138 damaged disks 100, 101 DOS-compatibility hardware/software problems 113 installing additional RAM (SIMMs) or internal drives 34, 144, 145 installing system extensions or programs 105 liquid or other spills on computer equipment 135, 136 radio or television interference vii repair service 78, 83, 87 replacing the clock battery 81 servicing the CD-ROM drive viii servicing the power supply 138 Apple Desktop Bus (ADB), port on computer 6, 7, 30 on keyboard 6, 7, 88 Apple HD SC Setup program 96, 99, 106–107 Apple Keyboard II, equivalent Macintosh and PC keys 46–47 Apple LaserWriter II NT printer driver 56 Apple PlainTalk Microphone, connecting 31 AppleScript program 35 AppleShare Print Server, conflict with PC Print Spooler 57 AppleTalk 53, 56 Application menu 13, 37–38 application programs installing (Mac OS) 36, 105 Macintosh Easy Open and 159–161 MacShare (PC environment) 47–48, 67, 125 memory management and 89, 117 Mixer Control 69 performance issues using shared folders 68 PowerTalk 35, 92, 118 QuickDraw GX 35, 92, 118 Sound Blaster 69 switching (Mac OS) 37–38 troubleshooting 89–91, 115, 117–119 working with several at a time (Mac OS) 37–38 179 Indexarrow keys 157 arrow pointer. See pointer audio compact discs, playing 33 Audio In port on external speakers 32 AUTOEXEC.BAT file (DOS) bypassing at startup 119, 128 changing preset keystrokes for DOSCLIP 49–51 freeing up RAM 117 installing NetWare client software 164, 166 installing Spry Air Series TCP/IP software 175 loading files into high memory (UMB) 66 loading MacShare program 67 modification guidelines 126–127 replacing with an alternate version 126 using CD-ROM drive letter if no CD-ROM drive is connected 45 using expanded memory 117, 127 Auto-start PC checkbox, PC Setup control panel 42 B background printing (PC environment) 56 backing up files (Mac OS) 38 Balloon Help 26 basic Macintosh system, illustration 29 battery in computer’s clock, replacing 81 baud rate, for a COM port mapped to a serial port 63 BIOS. See ROM BIOS; System BIOS blinking question mark on screen 9, 81–82, 94, 102 “bomb” message on screen 77, 79 brightness control on monitor 10, 80, 136 C C: or D: pop-up menu, PC Setup control panel 70–71, 72–73, 75 cables keyboard 6, 7 monitor 5 mouse 6, 7 safe handling of 135 Caps Lock key 157 carpal tunnel syndrome 130 CD-ROM discs ejecting while in PC environment 41, 45, 116 playing an audio CD in Windows while running low-level media tools 45 starting the computer from 93–94 using DOS or Windows CD-ROM discs 45 CDROM DOS utility 125 CD-ROM drive illustration 29 installing 34 PC drive letter for 45 chair, adjusting for computer use 131, 132 cleaning computer equipment 139–141 clean installation of system software 105–109 Clear key 157 Clipboard, exchanging information between PC environment and Mac OS 48–53, 115 clock keeps time inaccurately 81 setting time and date 64 close box 13 closing the computer 154–156 color printing (PC environment) 56 COM1/COM2 serial ports 63 x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period keys, to restart the computer (PC environment) 44, 47, 118, 119 180 Indexx-Control-Power key, to restart the computer (Mac OS) 79 x-E, to eject a disk in PC environment 41, 44 x key 157 x-Option-Esc, to quit an application program (Mac OS) 79, 85, 87 x-Option, restarting the computer to rebuild the desktop 80, 84, 90 x-Return, to switch back to Mac OS 40, 41, 116 x-Y, to eject a CD-ROM disc in PC environment 41, 45 communication card access cover 30, 148 installing 143–149, 154–156 communication slot on logic board 144, 145, 148, 149 COM port, mapped to Macintosh serial port 55, 63 compression programs, PC Exchange and 71 computer equipment arranging and adjusting for optimal use 130, 131–132 cleaning 139–141 closing the computer 154–156 components of a basic Macintosh system 29 guidelines for handling 135–138 opening the computer 146–147 safety precautions 134, 156 CONFIG.SYS file (DOS) bypassing at startup 119, 128 changing if RAM size is set to 2MB 123, 126 freeing up RAM 117 increasing high memory (UMB) 66 installing NetWare client software 164 modification guidelines 126–127 replacing with an alternate version 126 sharing Mac OS folders and volumes as PC drives 47–48, 67 turning memory testing off 66 using CD-ROM drive letter if no CD-ROM drive is connected 45 using expanded memory 43, 117, 127 using memory-management utilities 43 configuring the PC environment 61–76. See also PC environment connecting additional equipment 29–33 Apple PlainTalk Microphone 31 external stereo speakers 32–33 game controller or joystick 33 keyboard and mouse 6–7 monitor 3–5 containers. See drive containers Control-Alt-[keypad] period, to restart DOS 118, 119, 126, 128 Control key 158 control panels Extensions Manager 85, 86 Macintosh Easy Open 90, 117, 161 MacIPX 53 MacTCP 54 Memory 65, 89, 116, 117 Mouse (Windows) 46 PC Exchange 70, 91, 116 PC Setup 40–42, 61–76, 92, 114–115, 118, 121–123 Sound 69 Control Panels folder 53, 54, 116 conventional memory 66, 117. See also memory cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs) 130 customer service. See Apple-authorized service provider; customer support hotline customer support hotline 15 custom installation of system software (Mac OS) 109–111 Custom Install dialog box 110 Index 181D damaged disks, repairing 82, 84, 97–101 dampness, protecting the computer from 134, 135 data transfer rate for COM port mapped to Macintosh serial port 55, 63 date and time, setting (PC environment) 64 DB-9/DB-25 connectors (PC environment), signals present on 59 Delete key 158 desk accessories, working with several at a time 37 desktop, rebuilding 80, 84 dialog boxes Custom Install 110 dialog box with a bomb appears on screen 86 Easy Install 104, 107, 108 Disk First Aid program 100–101, 103, 106 disks. See CD-ROM discs; floppy disks; hard disks Disk Tools disk (or CD-ROM disc containing system software) initializing hard disks 94–96 installing system software 103 starting up from, for problem diagnosis 82–84, 87 testing/repairing hard disks 98–100 Display Drivers Disk 1 disk 128 Display pop-up menu, PC Setup control panel 64 documents. See files DOS “Clipboard” (DOSCLIP) 48–53, 125 DOS commands that do not work on shared volumes 67 DOS-compatibility card. See also PC environment installing a SIMM 143–147, 149–156 LC-compatible PDS slot 145 network management software support 53–54, 163–178 SIMM installed for exclusive use of PC environment 65, 76, 116, 122, 149 system software doesn’t recognize 76 DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for Mac OS Environment) 117, 120 DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for PC Environment) 125 DOS-compatibility software. See also AUTOEXEC.BAT file; CONFIG.SYS file; PC environment; PC Setup control panel; Windows networking protocol support 53–54, 163–178 reinstalling 119–128 troubleshooting 114, 115 DOS disks using in Mac OS 85 using in PC environment 44 drive containers accessing PC files in 71 choosing a location for 121–122 choosing or changing size of 72–74, 121–122 creating 70–71, 74, 121–122 naming 122 partitioning 70–71, 116, 122 throwing away 75 transferring files from an old to a new container 74–75 troubleshooting 114–115 DriveSpace DOS utility, compatibility issues with 127 182 IndexE Easy Install dialog box 104, 107, 108 ejecting disks can’t eject a disk 138 while in Mac OS 137 while in PC environment 41, 44, 45, 116, 137 electromagnetic emissions, health effects of exposure to 133 EMM386 memory management DOS utility 43, 117 Empty Trash command (Special menu) 13, 75 Enter key 158 Epson emulation, PC environment print output and 55–56, 57 error messages 77–79. See also messages Escape key 158 expansion card installing 3, 143–147, 149–156 Extensions folder PC Clipboard extension 52, 53 PC Print Spooler 57, 118 removing/replacing system extensions 85, 86 Extensions Manager control panel 85, 86 eye fatigue associated with computer use 129, 131, 133 F fading the screen before switching environments 42 fatigue from computer use, avoiding 131, 133 FDISK DOS utility 116 files accessing PC files in a drive container 71 backing up (Mac OS) 38 opening with Macintosh Easy Open 159–161 transferring between Mac OS and PC environment 67–68 transferring from an old to a new container 75 troubleshooting 68, 90–91 Finder, making active 18 floating-point unit (FPU) 89 floppy disk drive illustration 29 installing 34 floppy disks backing up files on (Mac OS) 38 Disk First Aid program and 100–101 DOS 720K format, problems with 44 ejecting 41, 44, 116, 137–138 formatting for use in both Mac OS and DOS 85 guidelines for handling 137 inserting 36 locked/unlocked (PC environment) 44 repairing 84, 100–101 restarting the PC environment from 44 starting the computer from 82, 94 unreadable 84–85 using a DOS disk in Mac OS 85, 116 using a Mac OS disk in PC environment 44 folders AppleScript 35 Control Panels 53, 54, 116 Extensions 52, 53, 57, 85, 86, 118 performance issues with shared folders 68 Previous System Folder 109 sharing with PC environment 47–48, 67–68, 125 Spooler Rejected 57 System Folder 36, 102, 109 Function keys 158 furniture for computer use, arranging 130, 131–132 Index 183G game applications, SIMMs and 54 game controller, connecting 33, 81 graphics DOSCLIP and 52 printing in PC environment 56 grounding plug 2, 135 Guide menu. See also Macintosh Guide defined 13, 15, 17 Macintosh Guide command 18 running the Macintosh Tutorial from 12–13 Shortcuts command 27–28 Show/Hide Balloons commands 26, 62 H hard disks backing up files on 38 checking for damage 98, 103, 106 Disk First Aid program and 100–101, 103, 106 icon 9, 13, 83 initializing/reinitializing 93–97 installing 34 repairing a damaged disk 82, 84, 97–101 testing an external SCSI hard disk 99–100 using a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a startup drive 70 headphone jack, illustration 29 health-related information about computer use 129–133 help. See Apple-authorized service provider; Balloon Help; customer support hotline; Macintosh Guide Hewlett-Packard page control language (PCL) 55, 58 Hide Balloons command (Guide menu) 26 Hide Others command (Application menu) 38 hiding/showing windows on the desktop 38 high memory (UMB), increasing (PC environment) 66 HIMEM.SYS driver (DOS) 119 hot key, to switch between Mac OS and PC environment 41 hotline. See customer support hotline “Huh?” button in Macintosh Guide window 25 I icons ADB 6, 7 Apple HD SC Setup 96, 99, 106 blinking question mark 9, 81, 102 defined 13 Disk First Aid 100, 103, 106 disk with an “X” 82 hard disk 9, 13, 83 “sad Macintosh” 83 Trash 13 Index button in Macintosh Guide window 19, 21–22 initializing an external SCSI hard disk 96–97 an internal hard disk 93–95 Install Disk 1 disk 94, 104, 107, 109 Installer program 104–105, 107–111 installing. See also reinstalling application programs (Mac OS) 36 communication cards 143–149, 154–156 internal drives 34 network management software 163–178 PC software utilities 125 Single Inline Memory Modules (SIMMs) 143–147, 149–156 system software 102–111 Windows for Workgroups 173 184 Indexinterference with radio and television reception vii, 136 internal drives, installing 34 Internal HD Format program 95, 98 IPX networking protocol, compatibility issues 53–54, 167, 169, 173, 177 J joystick, connecting 33 joystick port 30, 33, 81 K keyboard. See also keys connecting 6–7 correct posture for using 131–132 damaged or connection problems with 88 guidelines for handling 136 support for various Apple keyboards (in PC environment) 46–47 keyboard cable 6, 7 keyboard shortcuts 27–28 keyboard tray 132 keys. See also keyboard equivalent Macintosh and PC keys 46–47 special keys on Apple keyboards 157–158 key scan code table for DOSCLIP keystrokes 49–51 L LaserJet III printer driver (PC environment) 56 LC-compatible PDS slot on logic board 145 liquid spills on computer equipment 134, 135, 136 locking the mouse 141 logic board 144–145, 147, 154 Look For button in Macintosh Guide window 19, 23–24 LPT1.DOS/LPT1 port for printing in PC environment 55, 56 M Macintosh Easy Open program control panel 90, 117, 161 translators 52, 161 using 159–161 Macintosh environment (Mac OS) backing up files 38 Clipboard tips 52–53 initializing a hard disk 93–97 installing and working with application programs 36–38 installing system software 102–111, 119–123 Mac OS software installed in System Folder 120 network protocol compatibility with PC environment 53–54 PC Print Spooler settings 56, 57–58, 118 problems and solutions 77–92 repairing a damaged disk 97–101 switching to and from 40–42, 117, 118 Macintosh Guide. See also Guide menu closing 24, 25 “Huh?” button 25 moving or shrinking the window 25 opening the Macintosh Guide window 18 returning to the Macintosh Guide window 20, 22, 25 tips for using 25 using the Index button 19, 21–22 using the Look For button 19, 23–24 using the Topics button 19–20 Index 185